WO2022262451A1 - Video photographing method and electronic device - Google Patents

Video photographing method and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022262451A1
WO2022262451A1 PCT/CN2022/091026 CN2022091026W WO2022262451A1 WO 2022262451 A1 WO2022262451 A1 WO 2022262451A1 CN 2022091026 W CN2022091026 W CN 2022091026W WO 2022262451 A1 WO2022262451 A1 WO 2022262451A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
interface
electronic device
mode
camera
mobile phone
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/091026
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
韩健
Original Assignee
荣耀终端有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 荣耀终端有限公司 filed Critical 荣耀终端有限公司
Publication of WO2022262451A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022262451A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/222Studio circuitry; Studio devices; Studio equipment
    • H04N5/262Studio circuits, e.g. for mixing, switching-over, change of character of image, other special effects ; Cameras specially adapted for the electronic generation of special effects
    • H04N5/265Mixing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and in particular to a video shooting method and electronic equipment.
  • electronic devices such as mobile phones can provide not only a picture shooting function, but also a video shooting function.
  • the electronic device adopts the video shooting function, and can start a camera to record video.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a video shooting method and an electronic device, which can control the size of a video file by adjusting the capture parameters of a camera or controlling switching of shooting modes.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets that support video shooting.
  • the electronic device displays a first interface
  • the first interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device
  • the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first collection parameters.
  • the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the first interface; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution. That is to say, the first interface is a viewfinder interface for capturing images by a single camera.
  • the preview image can be collected by using a collection parameter higher than the preset parameter threshold, or the preview image can be collected by using a collection parameter lower than or equal to the preset parameter threshold.
  • the electronic device receives a first user operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the second camera and the third camera to capture images.
  • the first operation is a user's selection operation of the multi-mirror mode.
  • the electronic device responds to the first operation, and if the first collection parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a second interface; the second interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, and the second interface includes a second camera that collects data with the second collection parameter.
  • the second preview image and the third preview image acquired by the third camera with the second acquisition parameters.
  • the second acquisition parameter is smaller than the first acquisition parameter.
  • the electronic device switches from the mode of using a single camera to capture images to the mode of using two cameras to capture images, if it detects that the capture parameters used before switching are greater than the preset parameters threshold, you can reduce the acquisition parameters after switching.
  • the preset parameter threshold is 1080p
  • the resolution used before the switch is 4K
  • the resolution can be reduced to 1080p after the switch. Since the size of the generated video file is approximately twice that of a single camera when two cameras are used to collect images, the above method of adjusting the acquisition parameters is beneficial to control the size of the video file and avoid generating an excessively large video file. Thereby, subsequent storage and use are convenient. In this way, the intelligence of video shooting can be improved, and the size of video files can be reasonably controlled.
  • the electronic device responds to the first operation, and if the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device , the third interface includes a fourth preview image captured by the second camera with the first capture parameters and a fifth preview image captured by the third camera with the first capture parameters.
  • the acquisition parameters before the switch can continue to be used after the switch.
  • the preset parameter threshold is 1080p
  • the resolution adopted before switching is 1080p. If the preset parameter threshold is not exceeded, the resolution of 1080p can still be adopted after switching.
  • the first collection parameter includes a first frame rate
  • the second collection parameter includes a second frame rate
  • the second frame rate is lower than the first frame rate.
  • the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold.
  • the collection parameters include the frame rate.
  • the frame rate before the switching is greater than the preset frame rate threshold
  • the frame rate may be reduced after the switching.
  • the preset frame rate threshold is 30 frames
  • the frame rate before switching is 60 frames, which is greater than the preset frame rate, then the frame rate can be adjusted to 30 frames after switching.
  • the first collection parameter includes a first resolution
  • the second collection parameter includes a second resolution
  • the second resolution is smaller than the first resolution
  • the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold.
  • the acquisition parameters include resolution.
  • the resolution before the switching is greater than the preset resolution threshold, the resolution may be reduced after the switching.
  • the first acquisition parameters include a first frame rate and a first resolution
  • the second acquisition parameters include a second frame rate and a second resolution
  • the second frame rate is less than the first A frame rate
  • the second resolution is less than the first resolution
  • the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold.
  • the acquisition parameters include frame rate and resolution at the same time.
  • the frame rate or the resolution exceeding the preset parameter threshold needs to be lowered. For example, if the resolution is higher than the preset resolution threshold, the resolution is reduced. If the frame rate is higher than the preset frame rate threshold, the frame rate will be reduced. If the resolution is higher than the preset resolution threshold and the frame rate is higher than the preset frame rate threshold, the resolution and frame rate will be reduced at the same time.
  • the electronic device after the electronic device displays the second interface, the electronic device receives the user's second operation on the second interface, and the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the fourth camera to capture image.
  • the electronic device displays a fourth interface, the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, and the fourth interface includes a sixth preview image collected by the fourth camera with the first collection parameters. The sixth preview image is displayed in the fourth interface in full screen.
  • the preview image can be collected with the first collection parameter again.
  • the first acquisition parameter is 4K
  • the first acquisition parameter is 4K
  • the resolution to 1080p after switching to the front and rear dual mirror mode, reduce the resolution to 1080p.
  • the quality of the video file can be improved while controlling the size of the video file reasonably.
  • the captured image has higher definition than the image captured at 1080p.
  • the second interface further includes first prompt information, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the resolution and/or frame rate have been switched.
  • the first prompt message is "When using two cameras to capture images, it does not support capturing images at 4k and 60 frames"
  • the electronic device can explicitly prompt the user that the collection parameters have been adjusted.
  • the first interface is a viewfinder interface before the electronic device records
  • the second interface is the viewfinder interface before the electronic device records.
  • the first interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording
  • the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording.
  • the electronic device can complete the intelligent adjustment of the collection parameters before or during the video recording, so as to reasonably control the size of the video file.
  • the adjustment before recording can control the start of video recording with reasonable acquisition parameters. Adjust during the recording process, you can control each mode to acquire images with reasonable acquisition parameters.
  • the acquisition parameters of the camera can be set in the viewfinder interface before recording.
  • collection parameters greater than a preset parameter threshold can be set.
  • the electronic device may receive a third user operation on the first interface, where the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set the acquisition parameters.
  • a setting button is displayed on the first interface, and the third operation may be a click operation on the setting button.
  • the electronic device In response to the user's third operation on the first interface, the electronic device displays parameter options, the parameter options include a first option, the first option corresponds to a third acquisition parameter, and the third acquisition parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold. It can be seen that, in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, the electronic device can provide collection parameters greater than the preset parameter threshold for the user to select.
  • the electronic device receives a user's selection operation on the first option. In response to the selection operation, the electronic device sets the collection parameter as the third collection parameter.
  • the electronic device in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, can provide collection parameters greater than the preset parameter threshold for the user to choose and set, so that a higher resolution and/or frame can be set. rate to improve the quality of the video file.
  • the acquisition parameters of the camera can be set.
  • the collection parameters larger than the preset parameter threshold cannot be set.
  • the second interface is a viewfinder interface before video recording by the electronic device. After the electronic device displays the second interface, the electronic device receives a third operation performed by the user on the second interface, and the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set collection parameters. In response to the user's third operation on the second interface, the electronic device displays parameter options, where the first option is not included in the parameter options, or the first option is in an unselectable state.
  • the electronic device in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, does not provide optional collection parameters greater than the preset parameter threshold for the user to select and set. Therefore, it may be prohibited to set a higher resolution and/or frame rate in the mode of using two cameras to capture images, so as to reasonably control the size of the video file.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets that support video shooting.
  • electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets that support video shooting.
  • the electronic device in the horizontal screen state and in the process of recording, as the user switches the left and right hands to hold the electronic device, the electronic device can change the layout of the interface elements to avoid the user's fingers pointing to the mirror.
  • This method can be applied to various multi-mirror modes.
  • the solution of this application will be described below using only the second interface in the aforementioned first aspect and any of its possible implementations.
  • the second interface can be replaced by a horizontal In the screen state, the viewfinder interface that is recording in any multi-mirror mode.
  • the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording.
  • the second interface includes a first control and a second control.
  • the first control is used to indicate the recording mode currently adopted by the electronic device (i.e. the multi-mirror mode). , such as front and rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, etc.), and for triggering electronic equipment to switch recording modes.
  • the second control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the rear camera, for example, the second control is a zoom bar.
  • the electronic device In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, that is, the right hand holding state, for example, the bottom of the electronic device is close to the user's right hand state, the electronic device will be in the first holding state of the screen of the electronic device.
  • a first control is displayed in one area
  • a second control is displayed in a second area of the screen.
  • the first area is an area located at the top edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the landscape state
  • the second area is an area located at the bottom edge of the screen and close to the left edge of the screen in the landscape state.
  • the first control is displayed on the screen at a position convenient for the thumb of the right hand to operate, and the second control is displayed at a position convenient for operation without holding the top of the electronic device with the left hand.
  • the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, that is, the state of holding the electronic device with the left hand, for example, the bottom of the electronic device is close to the user's left hand state, the electronic device will display in the third area of the screen
  • the first control displays the second control in the fourth area of the screen.
  • the third area is an area located at the top edge of the screen and close to the left edge of the screen in the landscape state; the fourth area is an area located at the bottom edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the landscape state. That is to say, when the left hand holds the electronic device, the first control is displayed on the screen at a position convenient for thumb operation of the left hand, and the second control is displayed at a position convenient for operation without holding the top of the electronic device with the right hand.
  • the electronic device can change the layout of the interface elements when the electronic device is in the horizontal screen state and is in the process of recording, as the user switches the left and right hands to hold the electronic device. Under the premise, complete the operation. In this way, the quality of the captured video can be improved.
  • the second interface further includes a third control
  • the third control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the speed of playing the recorded video.
  • the electronic device In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the third control in the first area. That is to say, when the right hand is holding it, the third control is displayed on the screen at a position convenient for the thumb of the right hand to switch the speed of playing the video.
  • the electronic device displays a third control in the third area. That is to say, when the left hand is holding the device, the third control is displayed on the screen at a position convenient for the thumb of the left hand to switch the speed of playing the video.
  • the second interface further includes a fourth control, and the fourth control is used to trigger the electronic device to set a flash.
  • the fourth control is used to trigger the electronic device to set a flash.
  • the electronic device In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays a fourth control in the first area. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays a fourth control in the third area.
  • the second interface includes recording timing.
  • the electronic device In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the recording timing in the fifth area of the screen.
  • the fifth area is an area near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the left edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state.
  • the electronic device In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the recording timing in the sixth area of the screen.
  • the sixth area is an area located near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the right edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state.
  • the recording timing is displayed at the upper corner away from the hand currently holding the electronic device, which is convenient for the user to view.
  • the second preview image is displayed in the first window of the second interface
  • the third preview image is displayed in the second window of the second interface
  • the first window is a full-screen window
  • the second window is inside the first window. That is, the second interface is a viewfinder interface in the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the electronic device In the landscape state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the second window below the fifth area.
  • the electronic device In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the second window below the sixth area.
  • the electronic device may detect the state of the electronic device through a gravity sensor or an antenna.
  • the gravity sensor can detect the flip change of the electronic device, and the reflection coefficient of the antenna of the electronic device can reflect the holding state of the electronic device. In this way, the electronic device can accurately detect that the electronic device is currently in the first holding state or the second holding state.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets that support video shooting.
  • the electronic device displays a first interface
  • the first interface is a viewfinder interface before video recording by the electronic device
  • the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters
  • the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the first In the interface
  • the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution. That is to say, the first interface is a viewfinder interface for capturing images using a single camera.
  • the preview image can be collected by using a collection parameter higher than the preset parameter threshold, or the preview image can be collected by using a collection parameter lower than or equal to the preset parameter threshold.
  • the electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic device to start video recording.
  • the electronic device displays a second interface if the first collection parameter is less than a preset parameter threshold.
  • the second interface is the viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording.
  • the second interface includes the second preview image collected by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters and the first control in an operable state.
  • the first control is used to trigger the electronic device. Switch the recording mode (i.e.
  • the recording mode includes the mode of using two cameras to collect images. That is to say, after starting video recording in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, if the collection parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, an operable first control is provided in the video viewfinder interface, that is, in this case, it is allowed to switch to using The mode in which the two cameras capture images.
  • the electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the third interface includes a second preview image, and the third interface The interface does not include the first control in an operable state.
  • the electronic device in the process of video recording, only when the acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, the electronic device is allowed to switch to the mode of using two cameras to acquire images; and when the acquisition parameter is greater than When the parameter threshold is preset, it is not allowed to switch to the mode of acquiring images with two cameras. In this way, the size of the video file can be reasonably controlled.
  • the first collection parameter includes a first frame rate.
  • the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, includes: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold.
  • the collection parameters include the frame rate.
  • the frame rate when using a single camera to capture images is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, switching to the mode of using two cameras to capture images is not allowed.
  • the first collection parameter includes a first resolution.
  • the first acquisition parameter being greater than the preset parameter threshold includes: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold includes: the first resolution is less than the preset resolution threshold.
  • the acquisition parameters include resolution.
  • the resolution of images captured by a single camera is greater than the preset resolution threshold, switching to the mode of capturing images by using two cameras is not allowed.
  • the first acquisition parameters include a first frame rate and a first resolution.
  • the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, It includes: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold, and the first resolution is less than the preset resolution threshold.
  • the acquisition parameters include frame rate and resolution at the same time.
  • the switching is not allowed. And only when both are smaller than the corresponding preset parameter threshold, switching is allowed.
  • the electronic device after the electronic device displays the second interface, the electronic device receives the user's second operation on the first control in the operable state, and the second operation is used to trigger switching of the electronic device recording mode.
  • the electronic device displays mode options on the second interface, the mode options include the first option, and the first option corresponds to the mode of using two cameras to capture images.
  • the electronic device displays a fourth interface in response to the user's selection operation on the first option.
  • the fourth interface is a viewing interface where the electronic device is recording.
  • the fourth interface includes the third preview image collected by the second camera with the first collection parameters and the fourth preview image collected by the third camera with the first collection parameters.
  • the acquisition parameters before the switching can be continued to be used.
  • the consistency of the video parameters before and after switching can also be ensured, thereby improving the viewing experience of the user.
  • the preset parameter threshold is 1080p
  • the acquisition parameter before the switching is 720p
  • the switching may be allowed, and the resolution before and after the switching is both 720p. That is, the resolution does not change, and the clarity of the video is consistent.
  • the third interface does not include the first control in the operable state specifically: the third interface includes the first control in the inoperable state.
  • the first control in an inoperable state is a grayed out mode icon.
  • the electronic device receives a user's second operation on the first control that is in an inoperable state, and the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode.
  • the electronic device displays first prompt information on the third interface, where the first prompt information is used to prompt that the two cameras cannot be switched to collect images.
  • the electronic device can clearly prompt the user that it is currently impossible to switch to using two cameras to capture images after the user misoperates the first control in the inoperable state. Thereby improving the efficiency of human-computer interaction.
  • the third interface does not include the first control in an operable state specifically: the third interface does not include the first control.
  • the third interface does not include a panel display control.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, where the electronic device includes a display screen, a memory, and one or more processors.
  • the display screen, the memory and the processor are coupled.
  • the memory is used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is made to perform the following steps: the electronic device displays a first interface, The first interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the electronic device, and the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters; the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the first In the interface; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution.
  • the electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the second camera and the third camera to capture images.
  • the electronic device displays a second interface if the first acquisition parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold; the second interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, so The second interface includes the second preview image collected by the second camera with the second collection parameters and the third preview image collected by the third camera with the second collection parameters; the second collection parameter is smaller than the first Collect parameters.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following step: the electronic device responds to the first operation, if The first collection parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, and the electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, and the third interface includes the second camera with the The fourth preview image collected by the first collection parameters and the fifth preview image collected by the third camera with the first collection parameters.
  • the first acquisition parameter includes a first frame rate
  • the second acquisition parameter includes a second frame rate
  • the second frame rate is lower than the first frame rate rate
  • the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold.
  • the first acquisition parameter includes a first resolution
  • the second acquisition parameter includes a second resolution
  • the second resolution is smaller than the first resolution rate
  • the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold.
  • the first collection parameters include a first frame rate and a first resolution
  • the second collection parameters include a second frame rate and a second resolution
  • the The second frame rate is less than the first frame rate, and/or, the second resolution is less than the first resolution
  • the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the The first frame rate is greater than a preset frame rate threshold, and/or, the first resolution is greater than a preset resolution threshold.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: the electronic device receives the user's response to the second interface The second operation, the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the fourth camera to capture images; the electronic device displays a fourth interface in response to the second operation, and the fourth interface is the electronic In the viewfinder interface of device video recording, the fourth interface includes a sixth preview image captured by the fourth camera with the first acquisition parameters; the sixth preview image is displayed in full screen on the fourth interface.
  • the second interface further includes first prompt information, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the resolution and/or frame rate have been switched.
  • the first interface is the viewfinder interface before the electronic device records, and the second interface is the viewfinder interface before the electronic device records; or, the The first interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording.
  • the first interface is a viewfinder interface before recording by the electronic device; when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device also executes The following steps: the electronic device receives a third operation performed by the user on the first interface, and the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set the collection parameters; the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the first
  • the third operation on the interface is to display parameter options, the parameter options include a first option, the first option corresponds to a third acquisition parameter, and the third acquisition parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold; the electronic device receives The user selects the first option; the electronic device sets the collection parameter as a third collection parameter in response to the selection;
  • the second interface is a viewfinder interface before recording by the electronic device; when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device also executes The following steps: the electronic device receives a third operation performed by the user on the second interface, and the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set the collection parameters; the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second interface
  • the third operation on the interface is to display parameter options, and the parameter options do not include the first option, or the first option is in an unselectable state.
  • the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the second interface includes a first control and a second control, and the first control It is used to indicate the recording mode currently adopted by the electronic device, and is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode; the second control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the rear camera.
  • the electronic device When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device The device displays the first control in the first area of the screen of the electronic device, and the electronic device displays the second control in the second area of the screen; the first holding state is used to indicate that the user's right hand Holding the electronic device; the first area is an area located on the upper edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state; the second area is in the horizontal screen state , located at the bottom edge of the screen, near the left edge of the screen.
  • the electronic device In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the first control in the third area of the screen, and the electronic device displays the first control in the third area of the screen.
  • the fourth area of the screen displays the second control; the second holding state is used to indicate that the user holds the electronic device with his left hand; the third area is in the horizontal screen state and is located on the screen
  • the upper edge of the screen is an area close to the left edge of the screen; the fourth area is an area located at the lower edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state.
  • the second interface further includes a third control
  • the third control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the speed of playing the recorded video.
  • the electronic device further executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the The electronic device displays the third control in the first area; in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device in the second holding state Three areas display the third control.
  • the second interface further includes a fourth control
  • the fourth control is used to trigger the electronic device to set a flash.
  • the electronic device further executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the The electronic device displays the fourth control in the first area. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the fourth control in the third area.
  • the second interface includes recording timing.
  • the electronic device executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the The electronic device displays the recording timing in a fifth area of the screen; the fifth area is an area near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the left edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state .
  • the electronic device displays the recording timing in the sixth area of the screen; the sixth area is In the horizontal screen state, an area near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the right edge of the screen.
  • the second preview image is displayed in the first window of the second interface
  • the third preview image is displayed in the second window of the second interface
  • the first window is a full-screen window
  • the second window is located in the first window.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is further executed the following step: The coefficients determine the holding state in which the electronic device is held.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, where the electronic device includes a display screen, a memory, and one or more processors.
  • the display screen, the memory and the processor are coupled.
  • the memory is used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is made to perform the following steps: the electronic device displays a first interface, The first interface is a viewfinder interface before recording of the electronic device, and the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters, and the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the second In an interface; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution; the electronic device receives a first user operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic The device starts video recording; the electronic device responds to the first operation, and if the first acquisition parameter is less than a preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a second interface; the second interface is that the electronic device is recording The viewfinder interface, the
  • the first acquisition parameter includes a first frame rate; wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, and includes: the first frame rate Greater than a preset frame rate threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than a preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is caused to further perform the following steps: the first acquisition parameter includes a first resolution; wherein , the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, including: the The first resolution is smaller than the preset resolution threshold.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: the first collection parameter includes the first frame rate and the second A resolution; wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution Threshold: the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold, and the first resolution is less than the preset resolution threshold.
  • the electronic device when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following step: a second operation of the first control, the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode; the electronic device responds to the user's second operation on the first control in an operable state, Mode options are displayed on the second interface, the mode options include a first option, and the first option corresponds to the mode of using two cameras to capture images; the electronic device responds to the user's selection of the first option Operate and display a fourth interface; the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the fourth interface includes a third preview image and a third camera captured by the second camera with the first acquisition parameters A fourth preview image collected with the first collection parameters.
  • the third interface includes a first control in an inoperable state.
  • the electronic device further executes the following step: the electronic device receives a second operation by the user on the first control in an inoperable state, and the second operation It is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode; the electronic device displays the first prompt information in the third interface in response to the user’s second operation on the first control in the inoperable state, and the The first prompt information is used to prompt that the two cameras cannot be switched to collect images.
  • the third interface does not include the first control.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which is applied to an electronic device including a display screen and a memory; the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors; the interface The circuit and the processor are interconnected by a line; the interface circuit is configured to receive a signal from a memory of the electronic device and send the signal to the processor, the signal including computer instructions stored in the memory; When the processor executes the computer instruction, the electronic device executes the method described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect and any possible design manner thereof.
  • the present application provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect and The method described in any of its possible designs.
  • the present application provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product runs on a computer
  • the computer executes the first aspect, the second aspect, the second aspect and any possible design thereof. method described in the method.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2A is one of the schematic diagrams of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2B is the second schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2C is the third schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2D is the fourth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2E is the fifth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2F is the sixth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3A is one of the flowcharts of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3B is the seventh schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3C is the second flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is the eighth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is one of the schematic diagrams of the composition of the video file provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6A is the tenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6B is the eleventh schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6C is the third flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6D is the twelveth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6E is the thirteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6F is the fourteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6G is the fourth flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6H is the fifteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7A is the sixteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7B is the fifth flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7C is the seventeenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7D is the eighteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7E is the nineteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7F is the twenty-first schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8A is the twenty-first schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8B is the twenty-second schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8C is the twenty-third schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8D is the second schematic diagram of the composition of the video file provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8E is the twenty-fourth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8F is the twenty-fifth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9A is the sixth flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9B is the twenty-sixth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9C is the third schematic diagram of the composition of the video file provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10A is the seventh flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10B is the twenty-seventh schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10C is the eighth flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10D is the twenty-eighth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10E is the twenty-ninth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10F is the thirty-thirtieth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10G is the thirty-first schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10H is the fourth schematic diagram of the composition of the video file provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11A is the thirty-second schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11B is the thirty-third schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram of the position of the mobile phone provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12B is the thirty-fourth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12C is the thirty-fifth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12D is the thirty-sixth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12E is the thirty-seventh schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Thus, a feature defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, “plurality” means two or more.
  • the video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be applied to an electronic device supporting a camera function.
  • the electronic device can be a mobile phone, tablet computer, desktop, laptop, handheld computer, notebook computer, ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), netbook, and cellular phone, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) ⁇ virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment and other equipment, the embodiment of the present application does not make special restrictions on the specific form of the equipment.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mobile phone 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, and a charging management module 140 , power management module 141, battery 142, antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, an indicator 192, a camera 193, a display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the structure shown in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) Wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural network processor neural-network processing unit
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the handset 100 .
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
  • the charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 can receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 can receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the mobile phone 100 . While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also provide power for the mobile phone through the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be set in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the mobile phone 100 can be realized by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
  • the mobile phone 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194, and the application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like.
  • the display screen 194 is the above-mentioned folding screen (such as a flexible folding screen or a multi-screen folding screen).
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED active matrix organic light emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed,
  • the mobile phone 100 can realize the shooting function through ISP, camera 193, video codec, GPU, display screen 194 and APP processor.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the mobile phone 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other media files in the external memory card.
  • the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functions APP and data processing of the mobile phone 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data.
  • the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like.
  • the storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the mobile phone 100 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
  • the mobile phone 100 can implement audio functions through an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, an earphone interface 170D, and an application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like.
  • the key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the mobile phone 100 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile phone 100 .
  • the motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder.
  • the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications may correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 may also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be connected and separated from the mobile phone 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the mobile phone 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication.
  • the mobile phone 100 adopts eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the mobile phone 100 and cannot be separated from the mobile phone 100 .
  • the video shooting method in the following embodiments can be implemented in the mobile phone 100 having the above hardware structure.
  • the video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to various scenes requiring video shooting in the mobile phone 100, for example, wedding scene, friend gathering, travel and other scenes.
  • various new forms of video have emerged, one of which is a typical form of video log (video log, vlog), and vlog uses images instead of text or photos to carry logs form of content.
  • vlog uses images instead of text or photos to carry logs form of content.
  • the same subject needs to be photographed with different visions, for example, a close-up and a distant view of the same stage scene.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which is implemented based on a new video shooting function.
  • the video shooting function may also be called a multi-lens video recording mode, which constitutes multiple shooting modes of the camera function together with various common shooting modes such as aperture, night scene, portrait, photo taking, and video recording.
  • the mobile phone 100 can simultaneously turn on at least two cameras to capture preview images and simultaneously display the preview images captured by the at least two cameras in the viewfinder interface.
  • the viewfinder interface 201a of the camera application shown in (a) in FIG. 2A includes a submenu 202a, and the submenu 202a not only includes various common shooting modes such as aperture, night scene, portrait, photo taking, and video recording, but A multi-camera recording mode is also included.
  • the user selects the multi-camera video recording mode, which can trigger the mobile phone 100 to start the multi-camera video recording.
  • the mobile phone may display the viewfinder interface 203 shown in (b) of FIG. 2A in response to the user's selection operation of the multi-camera recording mode.
  • the viewing interface 203a includes a preview image 204a captured by camera a and a preview image 205a captured by camera b. That is, there are two cameras capturing preview images at the same time.
  • the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A only includes preview images captured by the two cameras.
  • the viewfinder interface of the multi-mirror video recording mode may also include preview images collected by three cameras, four cameras... the embodiment of the present application does not use the number of cameras shown in (b) in FIG. 2A limit.
  • two cameras will be used as an example to illustrate the solution of the present application.
  • camera a and camera b may be a combination of any two cameras among the multiple cameras of the mobile phone 100 .
  • camera a may be a rear main camera
  • camera b may be a front camera.
  • the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) of FIG. 2B includes a preview image 202b captured by the rear telephoto camera and a preview image 203b captured by the rear wide-angle camera. That is, camera a may be a rear telephoto camera, and camera b may be a rear wide-angle camera.
  • the preview image 204a and the preview image 205a in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A are displayed in a split-screen layout.
  • the preview images collected by the two cameras can also be displayed in a picture-in-picture layout.
  • the mobile phone may also display a viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) of FIG. 2B , where the viewfinder interface 204b includes a preview image 205b collected by camera a and a preview image 206b collected by camera b.
  • the preview image 205b is displayed in the large window (ie full-screen window) 205B
  • the preview image 206b is displayed in the small window 206B
  • the small window 206B is inside the large window 205B. That is, the preview image 205b and the preview image 206b are displayed in a picture-in-picture layout.
  • the mobile phone 100 in the multi-camera recording mode, can switch from two cameras to a single camera to take a view in response to the user's operation (for the specific implementation, please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below). That is to say, in the multi-camera recording mode, the function of collecting preview images by a single camera can also be provided.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 2C .
  • the viewfinder interface 201c includes a preview image 202c captured by a single camera (such as a front camera).
  • the mobile phone may display the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (b) of FIG. 2C.
  • the viewfinder interface 203c includes a preview image 204c captured by a single camera (such as a rear main camera).
  • the viewfinder interface of the multi-mirror video recording mode in addition to the preview image captured by the camera, one or more of the following elements (such as controls and icons) are usually included:
  • Gallery resource control the gallery resource control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the captured pictures or videos.
  • the gallery resource control is the control 210 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
  • Recording control the recording control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start recording video.
  • the recording control is the control 211 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
  • Front and rear camera switching controls are used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch between the front camera and the rear camera.
  • the control for switching the front and rear cameras is the control 212 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A .
  • the specific content of switching between the front and rear cameras please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, which will not be described in detail here.
  • Shooting mode switching control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch the shooting mode.
  • the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A includes a submenu 202a. ” is the switching control of multi-camera recording mode.
  • the beautification control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to adjust the beautification level.
  • the beauty control is the control 213 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A .
  • the specific content of the beauty adjustment please refer to the description of the second embodiment below, and will not be described in detail here.
  • Microfilm control the microfilm control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to shoot a microfilm.
  • the micro-movie control is the control 214 in the viewing interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
  • the specific content of the micro-movie shooting please refer to the description of Embodiment 6 below, and no detailed description will be given here.
  • Mode icon is used to indicate the multi-mirror mode currently adopted by the mobile phone 100 , that is, the camera currently capturing the preview image, and the layout of the preview image.
  • the mode icon is the icon 215 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
  • the icon 215 is composed of a blank rectangle and a rectangle with a smiling face, the blank rectangle represents a rear camera, and the rectangle with a smile represents a front camera. And, a blank rectangle and a rectangle with a smiley face are arranged one above the other, indicating that the preview image is displayed in a top-bottom layout.
  • the mobile phone 100 can capture preview images with a specific camera, and display the preview images in a specific layout.
  • the specific camera may be any camera in the mobile phone 100 , or a combination of any two cameras in the mobile phone 100 .
  • Specific layouts include split-screen layouts, picture-in-picture layouts, and/or full-screen layouts.
  • the multi-mirror mode mainly includes: a mode in which a front camera and a rear camera are used to capture preview images and display them in a split-screen layout (referred to as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, as shown in Figure 2A
  • the mode in which two rear cameras are used to collect preview images and display them in a split-screen layout referred to as the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, as shown in Figure 2B
  • adopt a front camera and a rear camera to collect preview images, and display the mode with the picture-in-picture layout abbreviated as picture-in-picture mode, as shown in Figure 2B
  • the mobile phone 100 enters the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode by default in response to the user's selection operation of the multi-mirror video recording mode. That is to say, in the multi-mirror recording mode, the default multi-mirror mode is the front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • Other multi-mirror modes are directly or indirectly obtained by switching from the front and rear dual-mirror modes.
  • Flash light icon the flash light icon is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to set the flash light parameters when shooting.
  • the flashlight icon is the icon 216 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A .
  • Filter icon the filter icon is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to add a filter when shooting.
  • the filter icon is the icon 217 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
  • the specific content of adding filters please refer to the description of Embodiment 3 below, and no detailed description will be given here.
  • the setting icon 218 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to set camera parameters.
  • the setting icon is the icon 218 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
  • Zoom control the zoom control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to adjust the zoom ratio, so as to switch between multiple rear cameras.
  • the zoom control is the zoom bar 219 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. .
  • the specific content of switching the rear camera through the zoom bar please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the previous article mainly uses the viewfinder interface before recording to illustrate. It should be understood that in the multi-camera recording mode, the number of cameras turned on during recording, the layout of preview images, etc. are basically similar to those before recording.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203a before recording shown in (b) in FIG. 2A, and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG. 2D.
  • the viewfinder interface 201d includes a preview image 202d collected by camera a (such as a rear main camera) and a preview image 203d collected by camera b (such as a front camera). Wherein, the preview image 202d and the preview image 203d are displayed in a split-screen layout.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) in FIG. 2B , and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) in FIG. 2D .
  • the viewing interface 204d includes a preview image 205d collected by camera a (such as a rear telephoto camera) and a preview image 206d collected by camera b (such as a rear wide-angle camera). Wherein, the preview image 205d and the preview image 206d are displayed in a split-screen layout.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 204b before recording shown in (b) in FIG. 2B , and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 207d shown in (c) in FIG. 2D .
  • the viewing interface 207d includes a preview image 208d collected by camera a (such as a rear main camera) and a preview image 209d collected by camera b (such as a front camera).
  • a preview image 208d is displayed in a large window (ie, a full screen window) 208D, and a preview image 209d is displayed in a small window 209D.
  • the large window 208D includes a small window 209D. That is, the preview image 208d and the preview image 209d are displayed in a picture-in-picture layout.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 2C , and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display a viewfinder interface 201e shown in (a) in FIG. 2E .
  • the viewing interface 201e includes a preview image 202e captured by a single camera (such as a front camera).
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (b) in FIG. 2C, and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203e shown in (b) in FIG. 2E.
  • the viewfinder interface 203e includes a preview image 204e captured by a single camera (such as a rear main camera).
  • the elements in the viewfinder interface during recording and the elements in the viewfinder interface before recording will be different.
  • one or more of the following elements can also be included in the viewfinder interface in recording:
  • Camera control the camera control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to capture video frames during video shooting.
  • the camera control is the control 220 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
  • End recording control the end recording control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to end video recording.
  • the control to end recording is the control 221 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
  • Pause recording control The pause recording control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to pause video recording.
  • the pause recording control is the control 222 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
  • Front and rear camera switching controls Similar to the viewfinder interface before recording, the viewfinder interface during recording also includes front and rear camera controls.
  • the control for switching the front and rear cameras is the control 223 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
  • the specific content of switching between the front and rear cameras please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, which will not be described in detail here.
  • Panel display control the panel display control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the selection panel of the multi-mirror mode.
  • the panel display control is the control 224 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
  • the mode panel selection control may be static, or the panel display control may also be dynamic. If the panel display control is dynamically displayed, the user's attention can be attracted to the panel display control. Thereby guiding the user to use the control.
  • the selection panel and the specific content of switching the multi-mirror mode through the selection panel please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, and no detailed description will be given here.
  • Mode icon Similar to before recording, the mode icon is also included in the viewfinder interface during recording. For example, the mode icon is the control 225 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D.
  • Double-speed logo is used to indicate the double speed at which the mobile phone 100 plays the current preview frame.
  • the double-speed logo is the logo 226 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D , and the logo 226 indicates that the mobile phone 100 will play the current preview frame at 1X speed.
  • the recording can be paused.
  • the double speed indicator is in an inoperable state, such as grayed out. That is, the multiplier speed of the video playback cannot be adjusted in the paused state.
  • Flash light icon Similar to before recording, the viewfinder interface during recording also includes a flash light icon. It should be noted that flash parameters are usually not allowed to be adjusted during video recording, therefore, the flash icon during recording is inoperable.
  • the flashlight icon is the icon 227 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D , and the icon 227 is grayed out, indicating that it is inoperable.
  • Zoom controls Similar to pre-recording, the viewfinder interface during recording also includes zoom controls.
  • the zoom control is the zoom bar 228 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. .
  • the specific content of switching the rear camera through the zoom bar please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the multi-camera recording mode is mainly explained in the form of vertical screen. It should be understood that the horizontal screen mode is also basically similar to the vertical screen mode. The subtle differences between the horizontal screen format and the vertical screen format will be described later in the relevant content of the embodiments below, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the description of the multi-mirror video recording mode will be combined with the foregoing, and the front and rear dual-mirror modes, the rear and rear dual-mirror modes, the picture-in-picture mode, and the single front (or rear) mode in the multi-mirror video mode will be mainly used.
  • the mode switching function such as Embodiment 1
  • beauty function such as Embodiment 2)
  • filter function such as Embodiment 3
  • High-resolution recording and/or High frame rate recording such as Embodiment 4
  • double speed function Embodiment 5
  • micro movie function Embodiment 6
  • Embodiment 1 mode switching function.
  • a video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display multiple mode options for the user to select in response to the user's operation 1 .
  • each mode option corresponds to a multi-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch to the corresponding multi-mirror mode in response to the user's selection operation on any mode option. In this way, it is possible to flexibly switch the multi-mirror mode before recording or during recording.
  • operation 1 mainly refers to the user's click operation on the mode icon.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can switch the multi-mirror mode before starting to record in the multi-mirror video recording mode.
  • the video shooting method includes:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface before recording in sub-mode 1.
  • the interface a includes the mode icon 1 of the sub-mode 1 .
  • sub-mode 1 includes front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode or single rear mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options in interface a in response to the user's click operation on the mode icon 1 .
  • multiple mode options correspond to multiple multi-mirror modes one by one.
  • sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode
  • interface a may be the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A
  • mode icon 1 may be the icon 215 in the viewfinder interface 203a.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 310 on the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (a) of FIG. 3B.
  • the selection panel 310 includes mode options of five modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode.
  • each mode option may include an identifier of a multi-mirror mode, which is used to indicate a different multi-mirror mode.
  • the abbreviation "Front/Rear” in the selection panel 310 of (a) in FIG. 3B indicates a front-rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the abbreviation "picture in picture” in the selection panel 310 of (a) in FIG. 3B indicates the picture in picture mode.
  • each mode selection may include a layout style of the multi-mirror mode, which is used to indicate the layout of the preview image captured by the camera in the multi-mirror mode in the viewfinder interface.
  • the mobile phone 100 may represent the layout style by means of pictures, picture sizes and arrangement of pictures.
  • the picture may be collected by the camera in real time, or may be preset.
  • the preview image collected by the rear camera is represented by a plant picture
  • the preview image collected by the front camera is represented by a portrait picture
  • the vertical arrangement of the plant picture and the face picture can indicate the front and back.
  • the preview image collected by the rear camera is represented by the plant picture
  • the preview image collected by the front camera is represented by the portrait picture
  • the plant picture can be indicated in the face picture.
  • the mode option of the currently employed multi-mirror mode (eg, sub-mode 1) may be highlighted. This facilitates indicating the currently employed multi-mirror mode.
  • the selection panel 310 of (a) in FIG. 3B in the selection panel 310 of (a) in FIG. 3B .
  • the layout style frame of the mode options of the front and rear dual-mirror mode is displayed in bold. So as to achieve outstanding effect.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays a mode icon (eg, mode icon 1 ) in state 1 when multiple mode options are not displayed.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a plurality of mode options in response to the user's click operation on the mode icon.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays a mode icon (eg, mode icon 1 ) in state 2 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may close the display of multiple mode options in response to the user's click operation on the mode icon.
  • state 1 is a normal display state
  • state 2 is a grayed state. Therefore, the display state of the mode option can be indicated by the display state of the mode icon, so as to realize the unification of the interface elements.
  • the mobile phone 100 closes the front and rear camera switching controls.
  • the front and rear camera switching controls are no longer displayed at the lower right corner of the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (a) of FIG. 3B .
  • the user's demand is usually to switch the multi-mirror mode through the mode option, rather than switching the camera through the front and rear camera switching controls.
  • turning off the display of the front and rear camera switching controls will not affect the user's needs on the one hand, and on the other hand, it can simplify the interface elements and facilitate the operation of switching the multi-mirror mode.
  • the sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode. It should be understood that the principle when the sub-mode 1 is a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, a picture-in-picture mode, a single front mode or a single rear mode is also similar. The following simply shows a schematic diagram of displaying multiple mode options when the sub-mode 1 is respectively the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the picture-in-picture mode and the single rear mode.
  • Example 1 if the sub-mode 1 is the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the interface a may be the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) of FIG. 2B , and the mode icon 1 may be the icon 230 in the viewfinder interface 201b.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 311 in the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (b) of FIG. 3B.
  • the selection panel 311 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of the rear dual-mirror mode is highlighted.
  • Example 2 if the sub-mode 1 is the picture-in-picture mode, the interface a may be the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) of FIG. 2B , and the mode icon 1 may be the icon 231 in the viewfinder interface 204b.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 312 on the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (c) of FIG. 3B.
  • the selection panel 312 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of the picture-in-picture mode is highlighted.
  • sub-mode 1 is a single rear mode (single front mode is the same), then interface a can be the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (b) in Figure 2C, and mode icon 1 can be an icon in the viewfinder interface 203c 232.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 313 on the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (d) of FIG. 3B.
  • the selection panel 313 includes 5 mode options including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of single rear mode is highlighted.
  • sub-mode 1 is a single front mode or a single rear mode
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options, only the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode and Mode options for picture-in-picture mode while retaining front and rear camera switching controls.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options, only the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode and Mode options for picture-in-picture mode while retaining front and rear camera switching controls.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options, only the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode and Mode options for picture-in-picture mode while retaining front and rear camera switching controls.
  • the display of multiple mode options may block the preview image in the viewfinder interface, thereby affecting the preview.
  • the mobile phone 100 can hide the multiple mode options in response to the user's operation (such as operation 2), thereby flexibly turning off the multiple mode options. display to avoid blocking the preview image.
  • operation 2 may be a preset gesture 1 input by the user on the viewfinder interface.
  • operation 2 may be a sliding gesture input by the user in the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (b) of FIG. 3B .
  • operation 2 may be a click operation or a long press operation by the user on an area other than multiple mode options and where elements such as icons and controls are not displayed.
  • the viewfinder interface includes a panel hiding control, and operation 2 may be a user's click operation on the panel hiding control.
  • the panel hidden control may be a mode icon.
  • the panel hiding control may be the grayed-out icon 314 in the viewing interface 201b shown in (b) of FIG. 3B .
  • the panel hide control can be a preset control in the selection panel.
  • the panel hiding control may be the control 3111 in the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (b) of FIG. 3B .
  • the mobile phone 100 when the current viewfinder interface displays multiple mode options, the mobile phone 100 starts from displaying the multiple mode options, and if no user operation on the multiple mode options is received within the preset time period, then Hides the multiple mode options. In this way, when the user does not operate for a long time, multiple mode options can be hidden to avoid affecting the preview.
  • Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2
  • interface b is the viewfinder interface before recording in sub-mode 2.
  • the interface b includes a mode icon 2 of sub-mode 2, which is different from sub-mode 1.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (a) of FIG. 3B , and the viewfinder interface 203a includes a selection panel 310 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) of FIG. 2B.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) of FIG. 2B.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (b) of FIG. 2C.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 2C.
  • the sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode. It should be understood that the principle when the sub-mode 1 is a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, a picture-in-picture mode, a single front mode or a single rear mode is also similar. That is, in response to the user's selection operation on any mode option, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface of the sub-mode corresponding to the mode option. No more details here.
  • S301a-S303a only illustrates a switching process before video recording.
  • two or more multi-mirror modes can be switched between, and each switching process can refer to the description of S301a-S303a.
  • the multi-mirror mode before switching is recorded as sub-mode 1
  • the multi-mirror mode after switching is recorded as sub-mode 2.
  • the mobile phone 100 can flexibly switch between multiple multi-mirror modes according to the user's selection of the multi-mirror mode . This makes it possible to switch to a satisfactory multi-mirror mode before starting video recording.
  • operation 1 may be the user's click operation on the mode icon, or the user's click operation or swipe up operation on the panel display control.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can switch the multi-mirror mode during recording in the multi-mirror video mode.
  • a video shooting method which can switch the multi-mirror mode during recording in the multi-mirror video mode.
  • it is mainly described by taking operation 1 as an example where the user slides up the panel display control.
  • the video shooting method includes:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays an interface c, where the interface c is a viewfinder interface being recorded in sub-mode 1.
  • the interface c includes panel display controls.
  • sub-mode 1 includes front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode or single rear mode.
  • the panel display control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display a selection panel, the selection panel includes multiple mode options, and the multiple mode options correspond to multiple multi-mirror modes one by one.
  • the panel presentation controls are only present in the recording. In this way, a new shortcut for switching between multi-mirror modes is provided during recording, which is convenient for switching between multi-mirror modes during recording.
  • sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode
  • interface c can be the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG. That is, control 224 is a panel presentation control.
  • the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's upward sliding operation on the panel display control, and displays multiple mode options on the interface c.
  • the interface c may be the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D
  • the panel display control may be the control 224 in the viewfinder interface 201d.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 320 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 4 in response to the user's upward sliding operation on the control 224 .
  • the selection panel 320 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 hides the panel display controls. For example, the panel presentation control is no longer displayed in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 4 . In this way, interface elements can be simplified.
  • the mobile phone 100 closes the front and rear camera switching controls. For example, the front and rear camera switching controls are no longer displayed at the lower right corner of the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 4 .
  • the sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode. It should be understood that the principle when the sub-mode 1 is a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, a picture-in-picture mode, a single front mode or a single rear mode is also similar. The following simply shows a schematic diagram of displaying multiple mode options when the sub-mode 1 is respectively the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the picture-in-picture mode and the single rear mode.
  • Example 1 if the sub-mode 1 is the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the interface c may be the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) of FIG. 2D , and the panel display control may be the control 240 in the viewfinder interface 204d.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 321 in the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) of FIG. 4 in response to the user's upward sliding operation on the control 240 .
  • the selection panel 321 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of the rear dual-mirror mode is highlighted.
  • the interface c may be the viewfinder interface 207b shown in (c) of FIG. 2D
  • the panel display control may be the control 241 in the viewfinder interface 207d.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 322 in the viewfinder interface 207d shown in (c) of FIG. 4 in response to the user's upward sliding operation on the control 241 .
  • the selection panel 322 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of the picture-in-picture mode is highlighted.
  • sub-mode 1 is a single front mode (the same is true for single rear mode)
  • interface a can be the viewfinder interface 201e shown in (a) in Figure 2E
  • the panel display controls can be the controls in the viewfinder interface 201e 242.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 323 in the viewfinder interface 201e shown in (d) of FIG. 4 in response to the user's upward sliding operation on the control 242 .
  • the selection panel 323 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of single front mode is highlighted.
  • sub-mode 1 is a single front mode or a single rear mode
  • the mobile phone 100 can also hide multiple mode options in a manner similar to that before video recording, which will not be repeated here.
  • Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2
  • interface d is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 2 recording.
  • Submode 2 is different from submode 1.
  • S301c-S303c only illustrate a switching process before recording.
  • multiple multi-mirror modes can be switched in twos and multiple times.
  • S301c-S303c For each switching process, please refer to the description of S301c-S303c.
  • the multi-mirror mode before switching is recorded as sub-mode 1
  • the multi-mirror mode after switching is recorded as sub-mode 2.
  • the mobile phone 100 can flexibly switch between multiple multi-mirror modes according to the user's selection of the multi-mirror mode .
  • operation 1 is that the user clicks on the mode icon, and the implementation principle is the same, but the conditions for triggering the display of multiple mode options are different, which will not be repeated here.
  • operation 1 in recording, the above two forms of operation 1 can be combined. Therefore, multiple modes can be triggered to display multiple mode options, thereby improving the flexibility of switching.
  • the switching process before recording will not be reflected in the final video file.
  • the final video file will not include the process of switching from the front-rear dual-mirror mode to the rear-rear dual-mirror mode before recording. Only videos recorded in the rear and rear dual-mirror modes will be presented.
  • the mobile phone After S303c, the mobile phone generates the video file 1 in response to the user's operation 3 on the interface d.
  • This operation 3 is used to trigger the mobile phone to end the video recording.
  • operation 3 may be the user's click operation on the end recording control.
  • This video file 1 includes video stream a and video stream b.
  • video stream a is a video stream formed by recording video in sub-mode 1
  • video stream b is a video stream formed by recording video in sub-mode 2.
  • video stream a may be composed of n sub-video streams, n is a positive integer, and the value of n is equal to the number of cameras used in sub-mode 1.
  • the n sub-video streams correspond to the n cameras used in sub-mode 1. That is, each sub-video stream in the n sub-video streams is composed of multiple frames of preview images collected by the corresponding camera adopted in sub-mode 1.
  • video stream b may be composed of m sub-video streams, m is a positive integer, and the value of m is equal to the number of cameras used in sub-mode 2.
  • the m sub-video streams correspond to the m cameras used in sub-mode 2. That is, each sub-video stream in the m sub-video streams is composed of multiple frames of preview images collected by the corresponding camera adopted in sub-mode 2.
  • sub-mode 1 as the front and rear dual-mirror mode
  • sub-mode 2 as the rear-rear dual-mirror mode
  • switch to the multi-mirror mode once during video recording as an example.
  • the rear main camera and the front camera are used as front and rear dual mirrors mode to record video.
  • the mobile phone 100 switches the multi-mirror mode to the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and adopts the rear telephoto camera and the rear wide-angle camera to collect preview images.
  • Video file 1 includes video stream a1, video stream a2, video stream b1, and video stream b2.
  • the video stream a1 includes a multi-frame preview image collected by the rear main camera in the front-rear dual-mirror mode
  • the video stream a2 includes a multi-frame preview image collected by the front camera in the front-rear dual-mirror mode.
  • video stream a includes two sub-video streams, namely, video stream a1 and video stream a2.
  • the video stream b1 includes the multi-frame preview images collected by the rear telephoto camera in the rear dual-lens mode
  • the video stream b2 includes the multi-frame preview images collected by the rear wide-angle camera in the rear dual-lens mode. That is, video stream b includes two sub video streams, namely, video stream b1 and video stream b2.
  • the zoom control and the panel display control need to be displayed at the same time, and the panel display control may be adjacent to the zoom control.
  • the panel display control 241 and the zoom control 243 are displayed adjacently.
  • the panel display control 244 and the zoom control 245 are displayed adjacently.
  • the response hot zone of the panel display control (referred to as the panel display hot zone, including the panel display control) includes a zoom control
  • the responsive hotspot (referred to simply as the zoom hotspot, which includes the zoom controls) of .
  • the user inputs the line between the start point and the end point of the sliding operation, and the minimum angle between the bottom of the screen and the bottom of the screen is greater than the preset angle (such as 60°), the display selection of the mobile phone 100 can be triggered panel for switching between multi-mirror modes.
  • the mobile phone 100 can be triggered to switch the rear Camera. It should be understood that since the panel display hot zone includes the zoom hot zone, being in the zoom hot zone means being in the panel display area.
  • the panel display hotspot is relatively large, which can facilitate the user to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the selection panel. Thereby, the difficulty of switching between multi-mirror modes can be reduced.
  • the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's operation based on the size of the smallest angle between the starting point and the end point of the user's input sliding operation and the bottom of the screen, which can accurately respond to the user's operation, and will not occur. confusion.
  • the panel display hotspot includes the zoom hotspot, for example, the height of the panel display hotspot is 60 pixels (dp), and the width is the screen The width of the zoom hotspot is 130dp, and the width is also the width of the screen.
  • Swipe operation 1 Swipe from the starting point A to the end point B along the arrow 1.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a selection panel for switching the multi-mirror mode. Swipe operation 2 from the starting point A, along the arrow 2, to the end point C, since point A and point C are both in the zoom hot zone, and the minimum angle between the line connecting point A and point C and the bottom of the screen is less than 60°, corresponding Yes, the mobile phone 100 can switch the rear camera for capturing images in response to the sliding operation 2 .
  • the panel display The zoom controls are not displayed adjacent to the controls. In these scenarios, it is enough to divide the corresponding hot zones for the panel display controls separately.
  • different panel display hotspots may be set. For example, set a larger panel display hotspot for a dynamic panel display control.
  • the panel display control and the zoom control are far apart, and the panel display hotspot can be set as a rectangular area as shown in the figure, as shown
  • the height is 60dp and the width is the width of the screen.
  • the multi-mirror mode is mainly switched through mode icons or panel display controls, but in actual implementation, it is not limited thereto.
  • the switching of the multi-mirror mode can also be triggered by a preset gesture.
  • the mobile phone 100 in the vertical screen mode, in the case of using a single camera to capture images, the mobile phone 100 can respond to the user's sliding gesture from the lower edge or upper edge of the screen to the middle of the screen, and can start from the mode of using a single camera to capture images. to switch to the mode that uses two cameras to capture images. For example, switch to front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's sliding gesture from a position near the intersection area of the two preview images to the upper or lower edge of the screen , to switch from a mode that captures images with two cameras to a mode that captures images with a single camera.
  • the mobile phone 100 can be directly triggered to switch the multi-mirror mode through the preset gesture without displaying mode options, thereby improving the convenience of switching.
  • the multi-mirror mode is mainly switched through mode options, that is, switching of cameras, layout, and the like.
  • the mobile phone 100 is triggered to switch between the front camera and the rear camera through the front and rear camera switching controls.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch to the single rear mode in response to the user's click operation on the front and rear camera switching control.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch to the single front mode in response to the user's click operation on the front and rear camera switching controls.
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch the front camera to the rear camera (such as the rear main camera) in response to the user's click operation on the front and rear camera switching controls. .
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch one of the rear cameras to the front camera in response to the user's click operation on the front and rear camera switching controls, thereby switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG.
  • Method 2 in the case that the currently adopted camera has a rear camera, the mobile phone 100 may be triggered to switch the rear camera through the zoom control.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch to the corresponding rear-facing camera in response to the user's selection operation of the zoom speed in the zoom control. For example, when a 2x magnification is selected, the mobile phone 100 may switch to a rear 2x telephoto lens.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch the current rear camera to another rear camera in response to the user's selection operation of the zoom speed in the zoom control. For example, in response to the user's sliding operation on the zoom bar 228 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG. Camera. If you slide from 1x to 2x, you can switch from the rear main camera to the rear 2x telephoto camera.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch one of the rear cameras to the other rear camera in response to the user's selection operation of the zoom ratio in the zoom control. For example, in response to the user's sliding operation on the zoom bar in the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) in FIG. for other rear cameras. If you slide from 2x to 4x, you can switch from the rear 2x telephoto camera to the rear 4x telephoto camera.
  • the third way is to trigger the switch of the rear camera by zooming with your fingers. For example, opening the finger triggers switching to the rear telephoto camera. The larger the opening degree, the switch to the rear telephoto camera with a larger magnification. Pinch your fingers together to switch to the wide-angle camera.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch the display areas of the preview image captured by the front camera and the preview image captured by the rear camera in response to the user's double-click operation on any preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch the display areas of the preview image 202d and the preview image 203d in response to the user's double-click operation on the preview image 202d or the preview image 203d in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
  • the preview image 202d is displayed below the preview image 203d.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch the display areas of the preview images captured by the two rear cameras in response to the user's double-click operation on any preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch the display areas of the preview image 205d and the preview image 206d in response to the user's double-click operation on the preview image 205d or the preview image 206d in the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) of FIG. 2D .
  • the preview image 205d is displayed below the preview image 206d.
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch the display areas of the preview image captured by the front camera and the preview image captured by the rear camera in response to the user's double-click operation on any preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch the display areas of the preview image 208d and the preview image 209d in response to the user's double-click operation on the preview image 208d or the preview image 209d in the viewfinder interface 207d shown in (c) of FIG. 2D .
  • the preview image 208d is displayed in the small window 209D
  • the preview image 209d is displayed in the large window 208D.
  • the mobile phone 100 in the picture-in-picture mode, can be triggered to zoom the window size of the small window by zooming the small window window with a finger or dragging the edge of the small window.
  • Embodiment 2 beauty function.
  • a video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display one or more A beauty effect control for users to choose a beauty effect. Then, the mobile phone 100 may set the beauty effect in the multi-camera recording mode in response to the user's operation on the beauty effect control. In this way, the beauty setting can be completed before recording in the multi-camera recording mode.
  • the beauty control is the control 213 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a beauty adjustment bar 601 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (a) in FIG. 6A , the beautification adjustment bar 601 is recorded as a beautification effect control.
  • the default beauty level in the beauty adjustment bar 601 is level 5.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's sliding operation on the beautification adjustment bar 601 , that is, a selection operation on the beautification level.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's selection operation on level 6 in the beauty adjustment bar 601 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may adjust the beautification effect to a level 6 beautification effect in response to the user's selection operation of level 6.
  • the implementation of setting the beautification effect on the mobile phone 100 is described only by taking the beautification effect control bar as an example.
  • the beauty effect control may also be in other forms.
  • the beautifying effect control may also be a plurality of effect options, and the plurality of effect options correspond to various beautifying effects one by one.
  • the solution of the application is mainly described by taking the beauty effect control as a beauty adjustment bar as an example.
  • the mobile phone 100 when the user operates the beauty adjustment bar to adjust the beauty level, the mobile phone 100 only displays the preview image and the beauty adjustment bar. And hide other elements in the viewfinder interface. In this way, it is convenient for the user to accurately adjust the beauty level. For example, as shown in (b) in FIG. 6A, during the user's operation of the beauty adjustment bar, the mobile phone 100 hides interface elements such as the mode icon, the flash icon, the start recording control, and the front and rear camera switching controls, and only displays the preview image. and beauty adjustment bar.
  • the multi-mirror recording mode in the multi-mirror mode that uses two or more cameras to collect images, such as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, usually only when the subject is a portrait , there is a need for beauty.
  • the front camera when two or more cameras are used to collect images, the front camera is usually used to collect portraits.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the beautification control near the image of the front camera in the viewfinder interface. In this way, it is convenient to clarify the target of beauty.
  • the viewing interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A includes a control 213, and the control 214 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to adjust the beauty level.
  • the control 213 is a beauty control.
  • the control 213 is displayed in the display area of the image (such as a face image) collected by the front camera in the front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) of FIG. 2B includes a beautification control, and the beautification control displays the display area ( Such as the bottom of the small window).
  • the images (usually portraits) captured by the front camera support beauty, and after setting the beauty effect through the beauty control, only the front camera captures
  • the beauty effect can be added to the image of . That is to say, in the front and rear dual-mirror mode and the picture-in-picture mode, the beautification control is only used to set the beautification effect of the image captured by the front camera.
  • the viewfinder interface shown in (b) in FIG. 2A before recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode as an example.
  • the viewfinder interface 602 shown in FIG. 6B can be displayed.
  • the viewfinder interface 602 only the preview image 604 captured by the front camera is added with 6-level beautification effects, while the preview image 603 captured by the rear camera is not added with beautification. Effect.
  • the mobile phone 100 may not display Beautification controls, or display the beautification controls at a position near the bottom of the mobile phone 100 by default.
  • the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) in FIG. 2B is the viewfinder interface of the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, and the cameras for collecting images in the rear and rear dual-mirror mode are two rear cameras, that is, the front camera and the mobile phone are not included.
  • the beautification control can be displayed near the bottom of the mobile phone 100.
  • both the front camera and the rear camera support beauty.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display a beauty control on the viewfinder interface. Moreover, after setting the beautification effect through the beautification control, the beautification effect can be added to the preview image displayed in full screen.
  • the single front mode and the single rear mode support beauty
  • the images captured by the front camera in the front and rear dual view mode and the picture-in-picture mode support beauty (also called partial support).
  • Beautification the rear dual mirror mode usually does not support beautification.
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch between multiple multi-mirror modes. On this premise, it is possible to switch from a mode that supports beauty (such as a single rear mode) to a mode that partially supports beauty or does not support beauty; or, it may also switch from a mode that partially supports beauty to one that does not support beauty. color pattern.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can intelligently set the beautification effect according to the multi-mirror mode before and after switching, so as to adapt to the support of the multi-mirror mode for beautification.
  • the following uses several typical scenarios to illustrate the specific implementation of the smart setting beauty effect:
  • Scenario 1 switching from the mode of capturing images with a single camera to capturing images with two cameras, and the switched two cameras include the rear camera.
  • FIG. 6C is a flowchart of a video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • scene 1 is mainly taken as an example to illustrate the specific implementation of intelligently setting the beautifying effect.
  • the video shooting method of this embodiment may include:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays an interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the first camera.
  • the interface a includes a first preview image displayed in full screen.
  • the first preview image is obtained by the mobile phone 100 after adding a first beauty effect to the first image captured by the first camera.
  • the first camera is a front camera or a rear camera.
  • the viewfinder interface for video recording may be the viewfinder interface before recording, or the viewfinder interface for video recording. That is, interface a (also referred to as the first interface) may be a viewfinder interface before recording, or may be a viewfinder during recording. That is to say, the method of this embodiment can be used to intelligently set the beautifying effect before recording and during recording.
  • the beautification effect in the interface a is set by the mobile phone 100 according to the user's operation on the beautification control and the beautification effect control.
  • the mobile phone 100 before S611, the mobile phone 100 needs to set the beautifying effect recorded by the first camera as the first beautifying effect according to the user's operation on the beautifying control and the beautifying effect control.
  • the specific process of setting the beautification effect has been described above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display an interface a, and the preview image in the interface a has the first beautifying effect. That is, the screen a is a viewfinder screen before recording.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display interface a in response to the user's operation of starting video recording (such as clicking the start recording control), and the preview image in interface a has the first beautification effect. That is, the screen a is a viewfinder screen currently being recorded.
  • the solution of the present application will be described mainly by taking interface a as an example of a viewfinder interface being recorded.
  • the beautifying effect in interface a may be the result of the mobile phone 100 intelligently setting the beautifying effect according to the switching of the multi-mirror mode after adopting the solution of the present application.
  • the first camera may be a front camera
  • interface a may be the viewfinder interface 621 shown in (a) in FIG. 6D
  • the first preview image may be the viewfinder interface 621 included
  • the preview image 622 is obtained after the mobile phone 100 adds the first beautification effect (such as 6-level beautification) to the image collected by the front camera.
  • the first camera may also be a rear camera
  • interface a may be the viewfinder interface 623 shown in (b) in FIG. 6D
  • the first preview image may be the viewfinder interface 623 includes a preview image 624
  • the preview image 624 is obtained after the mobile phone 100 adds the first beautification effect (such as 6-level beautification) to the image captured by the rear camera.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface a in response to the user's operation 1 on the interface a.
  • a plurality of mode options corresponds to a plurality of multi-mirror modes one by one.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's operation 1 on the interface a.
  • Mode option 1 corresponds to the mode in which the second camera and the third camera are used to capture images.
  • Interface b is a viewfinder interface for using the second camera and the third camera to capture images.
  • Interface b includes the second image acquired by processing the second camera.
  • the second preview image and the third preview image obtained by processing the third image captured by the third camera.
  • the preview images captured by the rear camera in the second preview image and the third preview image have no beautification effect added.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive a user's selection operation on mode option 1.
  • the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to switch from capturing images with a single camera to capturing images with two cameras may be referred to as the first operation.
  • the user's selection operation on mode option 1 is the first operation.
  • the interface b may be referred to as the second interface.
  • the mode option 1 may correspond to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, that is, the second camera may be a front camera, and the third camera may be a rear camera.
  • interface b is the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the first camera is a front camera.
  • the rear camera does not support beautification, and the third image captured by the third camera cannot use the beautification effect.
  • the second image captured by the second camera may continue to use the first beautifying effect. That is to say, the first camera is a front camera, the second camera is a front camera, and the third camera is a rear camera.
  • Interface b includes the second preview image and the third preview image, and the second preview image is added with the second preview image.
  • One beautification effect, the third preview image has no beautification effect added. That is, the image captured by the front camera follows the beautifying effect before switching, while the image captured by the rear camera does not use the beautifying effect.
  • the interface a is the viewfinder interface 621 of the single front mode shown in (a) in FIG.
  • the viewfinder interface 625 of the dual-lens mode that is, the viewfinder interface 625 is interface b.
  • the viewing interface 625 includes a preview image 627 and a preview image 626, the preview image 627 is a second preview image, and the preview image 626 is a third preview image.
  • the preview image 627 has the first beautification effect added, and the preview image 626 has no beautification effect added.
  • the first camera is a rear camera.
  • the rear camera does not support beautification, and the third image captured by the third camera cannot use the beautification effect.
  • the first camera is a rear camera
  • the second image captured by the second camera cannot inherit the beautification effect of switching the front and rear cameras. That is to say, the first camera is a rear camera, the second camera is a front camera, and the third camera is a rear camera
  • interface b includes the second preview image and the third preview image, then the second preview image and the third preview image None of the preview images have beautification effects added. That is, the image captured by the front camera does not use the beautification effect, and the image captured by the rear camera no longer uses the beautification effect before switching.
  • interface a is the viewfinder interface 623 shown in (b) of FIG. 6D in the single rear mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the front and rear viewfinder interface 623 shown in (b) in FIG. 6E
  • the viewfinder interface 628 of the dual-lens mode that is, the viewfinder interface 628 is interface b.
  • the viewing interface 628 includes a preview image 630 and a preview image 629, the preview image 630 is a second preview image, and the preview image 629 is a third preview image. Wherein, neither the preview image 630 nor the preview image 629 has a beautifying effect added.
  • mode option 1 may correspond to a picture-in-picture mode
  • the second camera may be a front camera
  • the third camera may be a rear camera.
  • interface b is the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 intelligently sets the beautification effect to be different, which is similar to the front and rear dual-lens mode.
  • the specific principle please refer to the previous description about the intelligent setting of the beauty effect in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, which will not be repeated here, but only the following two examples are used to illustrate.
  • Example 1 the first camera is a front camera, and interface a may be the viewfinder interface 621 of the single front mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6D .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display The viewfinder interface 631 of the picture-in-picture mode shown in (a), that is, the viewfinder interface 631 is interface b.
  • the viewfinder interface 631 includes a preview image 632 and a preview image 633 .
  • the preview image 632 is a second preview image, and the preview image 633 is a third preview image. Wherein, the preview image 632 has the first beautifying effect added, and the preview image 633 has no beautifying effect added.
  • Example 2 the first camera is a rear camera, interface a is the viewfinder interface 623 of the single rear mode shown in (b) in Figure 6D, after switching to the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 can display the The viewfinder interface 634 of the picture-in-picture mode shown in (b), that is, the viewfinder interface 634 is interface b.
  • the viewing interface 634 includes a preview image 635 and a preview image 636 , the preview image 635 is a second preview image, and the preview image 636 is a third preview image. Wherein, neither the preview image 635 nor the preview image 636 has a beautifying effect added.
  • the mode option 1 can correspond to the rear dual-mirror mode, that is, the second camera and the third camera are both rear cameras.
  • interface b is the viewfinder interface of the rear-rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the interface a is the viewfinder interface 623 of the single rear mode shown in (b) in FIG.
  • the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) in FIG. 2D is displayed, that is, the viewfinder interface 204d is interface b.
  • the viewing interface 204d includes a preview image 205d and a preview image 206d, the preview image 205d is a second preview image, and the preview image 206d is a third preview image. Since none of the rear cameras in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode supports beautification, the beautification effect of switching the front-facing camera cannot be applied to the rear-rear dual-mirror mode. That is, neither the preview image 205d nor the preview image 206d has a beautification effect added.
  • the mobile phone 100 can intelligently add a beauty effect to the images captured by different cameras. Then, the mobile phone 100 can switch back to the mode of using a single camera to collect images again.
  • the video shooting method also includes:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface b in response to the user's operation 1 on the interface b.
  • Mode option 2 corresponds to the mode of using the fourth camera to capture images
  • interface c is a viewfinder interface using the fourth camera to record video.
  • Interface c includes a fourth preview image displayed in full screen, and the fourth preview image is obtained by mobile phone 100 adding the first beauty effect to the fourth image captured by the fourth camera.
  • the fourth camera may be the same as or different from the first camera.
  • the first camera is a rear main camera
  • the fourth camera may be a rear main camera or a front camera.
  • the mobile phone 100 can return from the mode using two cameras to collect images to the mode using a single camera to collect images again, and interface c can be displayed after switching.
  • interface c the first beauty effect can be added to the images captured by a single camera.
  • interface c may be referred to as the third interface, and the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to switch from using two cameras to collect images to using a single camera to collect images (such as the user's selection operation for mode option 2) is called the third interface. Two operations.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 621 shown in (a) in FIG. 6D , that is, the viewfinder interface 621 is interface c.
  • the preview image 622 in the viewfinder interface 621 is added with the first beauty effect, that is, the preview image 622 is a fourth preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch from the mode of capturing images with a single camera to the mode of capturing images with two cameras in the viewfinder interface before recording or in the viewfinder interface that is recording. Finally, intelligently set the beautification effect of the images captured by the two cameras respectively. Thereby improving the rationality of beauty settings.
  • Scenario 2 switching from using one front camera and one rear camera to capture images (such as front and rear dual-mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode) to using two rear cameras to capture images (such as rear and rear dual-mirror mode).
  • FIG. 6G is a flow chart of a video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • scene 2 is mainly taken as an example to illustrate the specific implementation of intelligently setting the beautifying effect.
  • the video shooting method of this embodiment may include:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays an interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface for video recording in a front-rear dual-mirror mode or a picture-in-picture mode.
  • the interface a includes a first preview image and a fifth preview image.
  • the first preview image is obtained by the mobile phone 100 after adding a first beautifying effect to the first image captured by the first camera, and the second preview image does not add a beautifying effect.
  • the interface a may be the viewfinder interface 625 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG.
  • Preview image 626 is a fifth preview image.
  • the preview image 627 has the first beautification effect added, and the preview image 626 has no beautification effect added.
  • the first beauty effect is added to the image captured by the front camera.
  • the beautifying effect in the interface a may be set according to the user's operation on the beautifying control and the beautifying effect control, or may be intelligently set according to the switching of the multi-mirror mode after adopting the solution of this application.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface a in response to the user's operation 1 on the interface a.
  • a plurality of mode options corresponds to a plurality of multi-mirror modes one by one.
  • Mode option 1 corresponds to the rear dual mirror mode
  • interface b is the viewfinder interface for recording in the rear dual mirror mode.
  • Interface b includes a second preview image and a third preview image, the second preview image is obtained by the mobile phone 100 processing the second image collected by the second camera, and the third preview image is obtained by the mobile phone 100 processing the third image collected by the third camera . No beautification effect is added to the second preview image and the third preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 needs to turn off the beauty effect of the front camera before switching (as shown in Section - beautifying effect).
  • the interface a is the viewfinder interface 625 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. is a preview image 626, and the preview image 626 does not have the first beauty effect.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) of FIG. 2D , that is, the viewfinder interface 204d is interface b.
  • the viewing interface 204d includes a preview image 205d and a preview image 206d, the preview image 205d is a second preview image, and the preview image 206d is a third preview image. Since neither of the rear cameras in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode supports beautification, neither the preview image 205d nor the preview image 206d has a beautification effect added.
  • the mobile phone 100 can intelligently turn off the beautification effect. Then, the mobile phone 100 can switch back to using a front camera and a rear camera to collect images again.
  • the video shooting method also includes:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface b in response to the user's operation 1 on the interface b.
  • Interface d is the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode.
  • Interface d includes a sixth preview image and a seventh preview image, the sixth preview image is obtained by adding the first beauty effect to the sixth image captured by the sixth camera, and the seventh preview image is obtained by processing the seventh image captured by the seventh camera. image obtained.
  • the sixth camera is the front camera
  • the seventh camera is the rear camera
  • the seventh preview image has no beautification effect added.
  • mode option 3 corresponds to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the display layout of the sixth preview image and the seventh preview image on the interface d may be the same as the display layout of the first preview image and the fifth preview image on the interface a.
  • all are split-screen layouts or all are picture-in-picture layouts.
  • the display layout of the sixth preview image and the seventh preview image on interface d may be the same as the display layout of the first preview image and the fifth preview image on interface a.
  • the sixth preview image and the seventh preview image have a split-screen layout on interface d
  • the first preview image and fifth preview image have a picture-in-picture layout on interface a.
  • interface a is the viewfinder interface 625 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG.
  • interface d is the viewfinder interface 631 of the picture-in-picture mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6F .
  • the sixth preview image and the seventh preview image are in a picture-in-picture layout on the interface d
  • the first preview image and the fifth preview image are in a split-screen layout on the interface a.
  • interface a is the viewfinder interface 631 in the picture-in-picture mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6F
  • interface d is the viewfinder interface 625 in the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E .
  • the mobile phone 100 after switching from using one front-facing camera and one rear-facing camera to capture images using two rear-facing cameras, the mobile phone 100 can cancel the beauty effect; and then switch back to using one front-facing camera After collecting images with a rear camera, the mobile phone 100 may display interface d.
  • interface d you can resume adding beauty effects to images captured by the front camera.
  • interface d can also be referred to as the fourth interface, which triggers the operation of the mobile phone 100 to switch from using two rear cameras to collect images to adopt one front camera and one rear camera to collect images (such as the user's mode option 3) can be referred to as a third operation.
  • the interface b is the viewfinder interface 204d of the rear-rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 631 shown in (a) of FIG. 6F.
  • the viewfinder interface 631 includes a preview image 632 and a preview image 633, the preview image 632 is the sixth preview image, and the preview image 633 is the seventh preview image.
  • the first beauty effect is added to the preview image 632 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch from using one front camera and one rear camera to collect images, and switch to using two After the rear camera captures the image, it intelligently turns off the beautification effect. Thereby improving the rationality of beauty settings.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display prompt 1 on the interface b.
  • the prompt 1 is used to indicate that beauty is turned off.
  • the interface a is the viewfinder interface 623 in the single rear mode shown in (b) of FIG. 6D .
  • the first beauty effect is added to the preview image 624 in the viewfinder interface 623, that is, the first beauty effect is added to the image captured by the rear camera.
  • the mobile phone 100 is switched to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, and the interface b may be the viewfinder interface 651 shown in FIG. 6H .
  • the viewfinder interface 651 includes a preview image 652 , a preview image 653 and a prompt 654 .
  • No beautification effect is added to the preview image 651 and the preview image 652, that is, the first beautification effect is turned off.
  • Prompt 654 is specifically: when two cameras are used to record video, the rear camera does not support beautification, which is used to prompt that beautification has been turned off. That is, prompt 654 is prompt 1 .
  • the mobile phone 100 will only display a prompt 1 when the beauty effect is turned off for the first time during the process of intelligently setting the beauty effect. It will no longer be displayed after that. This avoids affecting the preview.
  • Scenario 3 switching from capturing images with one front camera and one rear camera to capturing images with a single camera.
  • the mode of adopting a front camera and a rear camera to collect images can be a front and rear dual-mirror mode or a picture-in-picture mode.
  • the front and rear dual-mirror mode is mainly used as an example to illustrate the principle.
  • the principle of the picture-in-picture mode is similar, and will not be repeated in this article.
  • the first beauty effect is added to the images collected by the front camera. If it is the single front mode after switching, you can continue to use the first beauty effect. That is, in the viewfinder interface after switching, the first beauty effect is added to the preview image. If it is a single rear mode after switching, the first beautifying effect will be cancelled. That is, in the viewfinder interface after switching, the first beauty effect is not added to the preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E 625.
  • the first beauty effect is added to the preview image 627 in the viewfinder interface 625, that is, the first beauty effect is added to the image captured by the front camera.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a viewfinder interface 621 showing a single rear mode in (a) of FIG. 6D .
  • the first beauty effect is added to the preview image 622 displayed in full screen in the viewfinder interface 621 , that is, the image captured by a single front camera continues to use the first beauty effect.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203e shown in (b) of FIG. 2E.
  • the preview image 204e displayed in full screen in the viewfinder interface 203e does not have the first beauty effect added. That is, the beauty effect is turned off.
  • Scenario 4 switching from using two rear cameras to capture images (such as rear and rear dual-mirror mode) to other multi-mirror modes.
  • the rear camera does not support beautification
  • the rear dual-lens mode does not support beautification. Therefore, no beautification effect will be added to the preview image in the viewfinder interface of the rear and rear dual-mirror mode. On this basis, after switching to other multi-mirror modes, the beautification effect will still not be added.
  • Scene 3 may appear after S613 of Scene 1, that is, after switching from using a single camera to collect images to using a front camera and a rear camera to collect images, then switch to using a single camera to collect images again.
  • scene 3 appears after S613 of scene 1, it can be processed according to S615; otherwise, it can be processed according to the method in scene 3. In this way, the consistency of the beauty effect of the smart settings can be guaranteed to avoid conflicts.
  • Scene 4 may appear after S613 of Scene 1, that is, after switching from using a single camera to collect images to using two rear cameras, switch to using a single camera to collect images again.
  • Scenario 4 may occur after S643 of Scenario 2, that is, after switching from capturing images with one front camera and one rear camera to capturing images with two rear cameras, switching again to using one front camera and one The rear camera captures images.
  • S643 of scene 2 it can be processed according to S645. Otherwise, proceed as in Scenario 4. In this way, the consistency of the beauty effect of the smart settings can be guaranteed to avoid conflicts.
  • the above-mentioned method of intelligently setting the beautifying effect can realize automatic setting of the beautifying effect during the recording process.
  • the beautification function for various scenarios, only one or two switching processes are used to illustrate the specific realization of the mobile phone's automatic setting of beautification.
  • the beautification can also be automatically set during more than two switching processes.
  • the following uses a complete example to illustrate the specific implementation of the mobile phone's automatic setting of beautification during the process of switching the multi-mirror mode multiple times.
  • the mobile phone collects images through the first camera and displays them in full screen.
  • the first camera is the rear camera. That is, before the first switch, the recording mode adopted by the mobile phone is the single rear mode. In the single rear mode, after adding the first beautifying effect to the mobile phone, the first interface can be displayed.
  • the first interface is the viewfinder interface of the video recording of the mobile phone.
  • the first interface includes the first preview image displayed in full screen.
  • the first preview image is It is obtained by adding the first beauty effect to the first image captured by the first camera.
  • the first interface is the viewfinder interface 623 shown in (b) of FIG. 6D .
  • the first interface also includes a first control (such as a mode icon or a panel display control), and the first control is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch the recording mode (ie, the multi-mirror mode).
  • a first control such as a mode icon or a panel display control
  • the phone can switch the recording mode to front and rear dual mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode through the first control.
  • the mobile phone may receive a user's click operation on the first control in the first interface.
  • the mobile phone can display multiple options (that is, multiple mode options) on the first interface, and the multiple options correspond to multiple recording modes one by one.
  • the mobile phone may receive a user's selection operation on a first option, the first option is one of multiple options, and the first option corresponds to a front-rear dual-mirror mode or a picture-in-picture mode.
  • the mobile phone can display the second interface in response to the selection operation, the second interface is the viewfinder interface of the mobile phone video, the second interface includes the second preview image and the third preview image, and the second preview image is the first preview image collected by the second camera.
  • the second image is processed without adding a beautifying effect
  • the third preview image is obtained after processing the third image captured by the third camera without adding a beautifying effect. That is, in response to the user's selection operation on the first option, the mobile phone can switch to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, and in the viewfinder interface after switching, no beauty effect is added to the two preview images.
  • the first interface is the viewfinder interface 623 in single rear mode shown in (b) in FIG. 6D
  • the second interface is the viewfinder interface 628 in front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. 6E .
  • the mobile phone can also display the first prompt message on the second interface.
  • the first prompt message is used to prompt that when two cameras are used to collect images, all rear cameras None of the collected images support beauty. This allows the user to be prompted for the reason for canceling the filter.
  • the phone can continue to switch to single front mode or single rear mode.
  • the second interface may also include the first control, and after the second interface is displayed, the mobile phone may receive a user's click operation on the first control in the second interface.
  • the mobile phone displays multiple options on the second interface in response to the click operation.
  • the mobile phone receives a user's selection operation on the second option, the second option is one of multiple options, and the second option corresponds to a single front mode or a single rear mode.
  • the mobile phone displays a third interface in response to the selection operation.
  • the third interface is a viewfinder interface for video recordings of the mobile phone.
  • the third interface includes a fourth preview image displayed in full screen, and the fourth preview image is the fourth image collected by the fourth camera. It is obtained after a beauty effect.
  • the fourth camera is a rear camera or a front camera. That is, the mobile phone can switch to the single front mode or the single rear mode in response to the user's selection operation on the second option, and can restore to the beautifying effect before the first switching, that is, the first beautifying effect.
  • the second interface is the viewfinder interface 628 in front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. 6E
  • the third interface is the viewfinder interface 621 in single front mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6D .
  • the third interface may also include the first control, and after the third interface is displayed, the mobile phone may receive a user's click operation on the first control in the third interface.
  • the mobile phone displays multiple options on the third interface in response to the click operation.
  • the mobile phone receives the user's selection operation of the third option, and the third option corresponds to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the recording mode corresponding to the fourth option may be the same as the recording mode corresponding to the first option, for example, both are front and rear dual-mirror modes.
  • the recording mode corresponding to the fourth option may be the same as the recording mode corresponding to the first option.
  • the recording mode corresponding to the fourth option is the picture-in-picture mode
  • the recording mode corresponding to the first option is the front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone displays a fourth interface, the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the mobile phone, and the fourth interface includes a fifth preview image and a sixth preview image.
  • the fifth preview image is obtained by adding the first beauty effect to the fifth image captured by the fifth camera, where the fifth camera is a front camera.
  • the sixth preview image is obtained after processing the fifth image captured by the sixth camera without adding a beautification effect, and the sixth camera is a rear camera. That is to say, after switching from single front mode to front and rear dual mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode, the image captured by the front camera can continue to use the first beautification effect before the switch, while the image captured by the rear camera will not add beautification. color effect.
  • the third interface is the viewfinder interface 621 in the single front mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6D
  • the fourth interface is the viewfinder interface 625 in the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E .
  • the mobile phone After switching from the single front mode to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone can continue to switch to the rear and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the recording mode also includes a rear-rear dual-mirror mode
  • the fourth interface may also include the first control.
  • the mobile phone may receive a user's click operation on the first control in the fourth interface.
  • the mobile phone displays multiple options on the fourth interface in response to the click operation.
  • the mobile phone can receive the user's selection operation on the fourth option, the fourth option is one of multiple options, and the fourth option corresponds to the rear and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone displays a fifth interface
  • the fifth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the mobile phone
  • the fifth interface includes the seventh preview image and the eighth preview image.
  • the seventh preview image is obtained after processing the seventh image captured by the seventh camera without adding a beautifying effect
  • the eighth preview image is obtained after processing the eighth image captured by the eighth camera without adding a beautifying effect of.
  • both the seventh camera and the eighth camera are rear cameras. That is to say, after switching from the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode to the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, the images captured by the two rear cameras will not have a beautification effect.
  • the fourth interface is the viewfinder interface 625 in the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E
  • the fifth interface is the viewfinder interface 204d in the rear and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. 2D .
  • the phone can continue to switch to the rear dual-lens mode.
  • the recording mode also includes a rear-rear dual-mirror mode
  • the third interface also includes a first control. After the third interface is displayed, the mobile phone receives the user's click operation on the first control in the third interface. The mobile phone displays multiple options on the third interface in response to the click operation.
  • the mobile phone receives a user's selection operation on the fourth option, where the fourth option is one of multiple options, and the fourth option corresponds to a rear-rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone displays a sixth interface, the sixth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the mobile phone, and the sixth interface includes a ninth preview image and a tenth preview image.
  • the ninth preview image is obtained after processing the ninth image captured by the ninth camera without adding a beautifying effect.
  • the tenth preview image is obtained after processing the tenth image collected by the tenth camera without adding a beautifying effect. Both the ninth camera and the tenth camera are rear cameras.
  • the third interface is the viewfinder interface 621 in the single front mode shown in (a) of FIG. 6D , and the viewfinder interface 204d in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. 2D .
  • Embodiment 3 filter function.
  • a video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display multiple filter options for the user to select a filter in response to the user's operation (such as clicking) on the filter icon in the viewfinder interface. Multiple filter options correspond to various filters one by one. Then, the mobile phone 100 may set a corresponding filter in response to the user's selection operation on the filter option. In this way, the filter setting can be completed before recording in the multi-mirror recording mode.
  • the filter icon is the icon 233 in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 2C .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 7A in response to the user's click operation on the icon 233 in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 2C .
  • the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 7A includes four kinds of filter options (as shown in the dotted box 701 ), and each filter option displays a filter effect. Then, the mobile phone 100 can receive the user's selection operation on the filter.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (b) in FIG. 7A in response to the user's selection operation on the filter option 702 in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 7A .
  • the plurality of filter options includes a no-filter option.
  • the filter option 703 in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 7A is an option of no filter.
  • the mobile phone 100 may turn off the filter in response to the user's selection operation on the option without filter.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display available filter icons in the viewfinder interface before recording in the single front mode and the single rear mode.
  • the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 2C is the viewfinder interface before recording in the single front mode, and the filter icon is blacked out, that is, available.
  • the mobile phone 100 may not display the filter icon, or display the filter icon in an unavailable state (such as greyed out) in the viewfinder interface before recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A is the viewfinder interface before recording in the front-rear dual-mirror mode, and the filter icon 217 is grayed out, that is, unavailable.
  • the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode and the picture-in-picture mode can also support filters.
  • the mobile phone 100 includes some filters suitable for the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode and the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 may also display a filter icon in the viewfinder interface during recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the filters applicable to the front-to-back dual-mirror mode, the rear-to-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode are generally all applicable to the single front mode and single rear mode. However, in some specific implementations, the filters applicable to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode may also be partially applicable to the single front mode and single rear mode, or not applicable at all.
  • the single pre-mode and the single post-mode are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the single front mode, single rear mode, front and rear dual mirror mode, rear rear dual mirror mode, and picture-in-picture mode support filters including several possibilities as shown in Table 1 below.
  • this embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can automatically set the filter of the multi-mirror mode after the switch according to the filter used before the switch.
  • the video shooting method of the embodiment of the present application may include:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays an interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface during sub-mode 1 recording.
  • the interface a includes a preview image of the added filter a.
  • interface a may be the viewfinder interface 721 shown in FIG. 722.
  • a filter a is added to the preview image 722 , that is, the straight line from the upper right to the lower left indicates the effect of the filter a.
  • the filter a may be added by the mobile phone 100 in response to the user selecting a filter option corresponding to the filter a in the sub-mode 1 before video recording.
  • the process of adding a filter has been explained in the previous article, so I won’t go into details here.
  • the mobile phone 100 can enter the viewfinder interface in sub-mode 1 recording, ie, interface a, in response to the user's operation of starting video recording (such as clicking the start recording control).
  • the filter a is added during at least one execution of the scheme shown in FIG. 7B , such as added in S714 or S715 , for details, please refer to the description below, and no detailed description will be given here.
  • the mobile phone 100 responds to operation 1 on the user interface a, and displays multiple mode options on the interface a.
  • a plurality of mode options corresponds to a plurality of multi-mirror modes one by one.
  • Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2
  • interface b is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 2 recording.
  • interface b includes preview images without added filters.
  • submode 1 supports filters and submode 2 does not.
  • filter a is automatically canceled.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 731 shown in (a) of FIG. 7D , that is, the viewfinder interface 731 is interface b. No filter is added to the preview image 732 and the preview image 733 in the viewfinder interface 731 . In short, the filter a used in the single front mode will no longer be used after switching to the front and rear dual mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 may also display a prompt 1 on the interface b, where the prompt 1 is used to prompt that the filter has been cancelled.
  • interface b may be the viewfinder interface 731 shown in (b) in FIG. 7D, and the viewfinder interface 731 shown in (b) in FIG. Switch to No Filter Effect for you" to indicate that the filter has been cancelled. That is, prompt 734 is prompt 1 .
  • Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2
  • interface b is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 2 recording.
  • the interface b includes a preview image without a filter; or, the interface b includes a preview image with a filter b added.
  • Filter b is the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2.
  • sub-mode 1 As an example, take sub-mode 1 as a single rear mode and sub-mode 2 as an example with front and rear dual mirrors. If the single rear mode supports filters and the front and rear dual-lens mode supports filters as shown in the second to fourth possibilities in Table 1 above, it is possible that sub-mode 1 supports filter a, but sub-mode 2 The case of filter a is not supported.
  • the filter can be set in the following two ways.
  • the first method is the same as the processing in S713, for details, please refer to the description in S713, which will not be repeated here.
  • Filter b is a filter supported by sub-mode 2, and it is also a filter preferred by users in sub-mode 2.
  • filter b specifically refers to a filter that was manually added by the user in sub-mode 2 last time and then used for recording in sub-mode 2, and has not been manually closed by the user in sub-mode 2 since then.
  • the user manually adding a filter refers to a manner in which the mobile phone 100 adds a filter in response to a user's selection operation on a filter option. For example, the manner shown in (a) in FIG. 7A.
  • the mobile phone 100 can record the added filter as the user's sub-mode
  • the preferred filter in mode 2 (such as front and rear dual mirror mode).
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A . Then, in response to the user's selection operation of the filter option of filter b, the mobile phone 100 may display a viewfinder interface 741 shown in (a) in FIG. Afterwards, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 742 shown in (b) of FIG. 7E in response to the operation of starting recording.
  • a filter b is also added to the preview image of the viewfinder interface 742 , that is, the filter b is used for the video in the front and rear dual-lens mode. At this time, the filter b can be recorded as the filter preferred by the user in the front and rear dual-lens mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 After the mobile phone 100 records the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2, if the user turns off the recorded filter in sub-mode 2, the mobile phone 100 will update the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2 to none.
  • sub-mode 2 as the front and rear dual-mirror mode
  • the mobile phone 100 records the user's preferred filter in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, if in the viewfinder interface before recording in sub-mode 2, the mobile phone 100 In response to the user's selection operation on the option without filter, the filter is turned off. The mobile phone 100 updates the filter preferred by the user in sub-mode 2 to none.
  • the mobile phone 100 may update the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2 (eg, front and rear dual-mirror mode) to the latest added filter (eg, filter c).
  • a filter such as filter c
  • the mobile phone 100 may update the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2 (eg, front and rear dual-mirror mode) to the latest added filter (eg, filter c).
  • the mobile phone 100 can maintain the corresponding relationship between each multi-mirror mode and the filter preferred by the user in the multi-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 maintains a correspondence table as shown in Table 2 below:
  • multi-mirror mode user-preferred filters single front mode filter a single rear mode none Front and rear dual mirror mode filter b rear dual mirror mode none picture-in-picture mode filter d
  • the mobile phone 100 can automatically add the filter preferred by the user in the sub-mode 2 as the filter of the sub-mode 2. In this way, filters can be automatically added according to user preferences, improving the rationality of adding filters during recording. It should be noted that if the user prefers no filter in sub-mode 2, after switching to sub-mode 2, the mobile phone 100 only needs to cancel the filter.
  • Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2
  • interface b is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 2 recording.
  • interface b includes a preview image of filter a.
  • both sub-mode 1 and sub-mode 2 support filters
  • both sub-mode 1 and sub-mode 2 support filters a situation.
  • sub-mode 1 as a single rear mode and sub-mode 2 as an example with front and rear dual mirrors. If the single rear mode supports filters and the front and rear dual mirror mode supports filters as shown in the second, third and fifth possibilities in Table 1 above, both sub-mode 1 and sub-mode 2 may appear. The case of filter a is supported.
  • the filter a can be used.
  • sub-mode 1 is a single rear mode
  • sub-mode 2 is a front-rear dual-mirror mode as an example. If the effect of filter a is as shown in the viewfinder interface 721 in FIG. 7C , which is a straight line from upper right to lower left, the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface 751 shown in FIG. 7F after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode. A filter a is also added to the preview image in the viewfinder interface 751 .
  • FIG. 7B only one switching process during recording is used to illustrate the specific implementation of automatically setting filters in the process of switching the multi-mirror mode of the mobile phone 100 . It should be understood that, in actual implementation, the mobile phone 100 may use the embodiment shown in FIG. 7B to set a filter for each switching in the multiple switching processes.
  • the filter a after canceling the filter in S713 or S714, after switching back to sub-mode 1 again, the filter a can be resumed.
  • the method may also include:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface b in response to operation 1 on the user interface b.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays an interface c in response to the user's selection operation on mode option 2.
  • Mode option 2 corresponds to sub-mode 1
  • interface c is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 1 recording.
  • the interface c includes a preview image with the filter a added.
  • the mobile phone 100 can automatically set the filter after switching the multi-mirror mode, so as to make up for the deficiency that the user cannot select the filter during the recording.
  • the mobile phone 100 can automatically set the filter according to whether the multi-mirror mode supports filters before and after switching, or further combine the user's preferred filter in the multi-mirror mode after switching, which can improve the rationality of setting the filter. sex.
  • FIG. 7B can be used to automatically set the filter during the recording process.
  • filters can also be automatically set during the switching process before recording, and its implementation principle is similar to that during recording. It will not be repeated here.
  • Embodiment 4 high frame rate recording and/or high resolution recording.
  • a video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display multiple setting items for the user to set camera parameters in response to the user's operation (such as clicking) on the setting icon.
  • the plurality of setting items include setting items of video resolution (referred to as resolution) and/or video frame rate (referred to as frame rate).
  • the frame rate and/or resolution may be collectively referred to as the acquisition parameters of the camera.
  • the mobile phone 100 can set the resolution in response to the user's selection of the resolution in the resolution setting item; the mobile phone 100 can set the frame rate in response to the user's selection of the frame rate in the frame rate setting item. Therefore, the setting of resolution and frame rate can be completed before recording in multi-lens recording mode.
  • the setting icon is the icon 218 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the setting interface 801 shown in (a) of FIG. 8A in response to the user's click operation on the icon 218 .
  • the setting interface 801 includes a resolution setting item 802 and a frame rate setting item 803 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a resolution setting panel on the setting interface 801, and the resolution setting panel may be the panel 804 in (b) in FIG. 8A .
  • the panel 804 includes multiple resolution options, and the mobile phone 100 can set the resolution in response to the user's selection operation on any resolution option.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a frame rate setting panel on the setting interface 801 in response to the user's click operation on the frame rate setting item 803, and the frame rate setting panel may be the panel 805 in (c) in FIG. 8A.
  • the panel 805 includes multiple frame rate options, and the mobile phone 100 can set the frame rate in response to the user's selection operation on any frame rate option.
  • recording video at a high resolution such as a horizontal resolution of 4000 pixels (ie 4K)
  • a high frame rate such as 60 frames per second (ie 60fps)
  • a file size For example, if a single camera is used to record video at 4K and 60fps for 5 minutes, a file of about 1G will be generated.
  • two or more cameras are used to shoot videos of the same duration with the same resolution and frame rate, larger files will be generated.
  • the mobile phone 100 in the multi-mirror recording mode, only supports recording exceeding the preset resolution threshold (ie, high-resolution recording) and/or supports Recordings that exceed a preset frame rate threshold (i.e. high frame rate recording).
  • the mobile phone 100 in the multi-mirror mode using two or more cameras, such as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 only supports recordings that do not exceed the preset resolution threshold and supports video recordings that do not exceed the preset resolution threshold. Recording with frame rate threshold.
  • the preset resolution threshold can be 1080p. And, if it exceeds 30fps, it can be called a high frame rate. Therefore, the preset frame rate threshold can be 30 frames.
  • the actual implementation is limited to this.
  • the multi-mirror mode of the mobile phone 100 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode, in response to the user's click operation on the setting item of the resolution, it will not display selectable, more than Resolution options for preset resolution thresholds.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the panel 804 shown in (b) in FIG. Settings panel.
  • the resolution option 4K in the panel 804 is grayed out, or the panel 804 may not include the resolution option 4K, that is, the resolution 4K cannot be selected.
  • the multi-mirror mode of the mobile phone 100 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode, in response to the user's click operation on the setting item of the frame rate, it will not display selectable, exceeding the preset Frame rate option to set the frame rate threshold.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the panel 805 shown in (c) in FIG. Settings panel.
  • the frame rate option 60fps in the panel 805 is grayed out, or the panel 805 may not include the frame rate option 60fps, that is, the frame rate 60fps cannot be selected.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display selectable images that exceed the preset resolution threshold in response to the user's click operation on the resolution setting item.
  • resolution options For example, when the multi-mirror mode is the single rear mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the panel 811 shown in (a) in FIG. Settings panel. The resolution option 4K in this panel 811 is optional.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display selectable frame rate exceeding the preset frame rate threshold in response to the user's click operation on the setting item of the frame rate. option.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the panel 812 shown in (b) in FIG. Settings panel.
  • the frame rate option 60fps in this panel 812 is also selectable.
  • the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to display the resolution option and/or the frame rate option may be collectively referred to as a third operation.
  • the third operation may be used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to set collection parameters.
  • the preset resolution threshold and/or the preset frame rate threshold may be collectively referred to as the preset parameter threshold
  • the resolution options exceeding the preset resolution threshold and/or the frame rate options exceeding the preset frame rate threshold may be collectively referred to as as the first option.
  • the first option corresponds to a collection parameter (may be referred to as a third collection parameter) greater than a preset parameter threshold.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive a user's selection operation on the first option; in response to the selection operation, the mobile phone 100 may set the collection parameter as the third collection parameter.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can automatically adjust the resolution and frame rate as the multi-mirror mode is switched before or during the video recording.
  • the specific realization of automatically adjusting the resolution and frame rate is mainly described by taking the scene before recording as an example.
  • the first interface is displayed before switching, the first interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording in single front mode or single rear mode, and the first interface includes a single camera with a resolution of 1 (also referred to as the first resolution) captured preview image.
  • the single camera used before switching may be called the first camera
  • the preview image collected by the first camera with a resolution of 1 may also be called the first preview image.
  • the first preview image should be displayed in the first interface in full screen.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive an operation that triggers the mobile phone 100 to switch to a mode that uses two cameras to collect images (also may be called the first operation).
  • the mobile phone 100 may switch to a mode that uses two cameras to collect images, such as a front and rear dual-mirror mode, a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or a picture-in-picture mode. Meanwhile, if the resolution 1 is greater than the preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 may adjust the resolution to resolution 2 (also called the second resolution). Wherein, the resolution 2 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold, and the resolution 2 is a default resolution in the multi-lens recording mode, such as 1080p.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the second interface after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the second interface is The viewfinder interface for video recording in front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or picture-in-picture mode, and the second interface includes preview images captured by the two cameras at a resolution of 2, respectively.
  • the two cameras adopted after switching may be referred to as the second camera and the third camera
  • the preview image collected by the second camera with a resolution of 2 may be referred to as the second preview image
  • the mobile phone 100 can keep the resolution unchanged. That is to say, when the resolution 1 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 can display the third interface after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording in front and rear dual mirror mode, rear and rear dual mirror mode, or picture-in-picture mode.
  • the third interface includes preview images collected by the two cameras at a resolution of 1 respectively. Wherein, the preview image captured by the second camera with resolution 1 may be called the fourth preview image, and the preview image captured by the third camera with resolution 1 may also be called the fifth preview image.
  • the first interface is displayed before switching, and the first interface includes preview images captured by a single camera at a frame rate of 1 (also referred to as the first frame rate). Then, after switching to a mode that uses two cameras to collect images, such as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode, if the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, the mobile phone 100 can adjust the frame rate to Frame rate 2 (also called second resolution). Wherein, the frame rate 2 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold, and the frame rate 2 is a default frame rate in the multi-lens recording mode, such as 30fps.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the second interface after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the preview image captured by the second camera at a frame rate of 2 may be called a second preview image
  • the preview image captured by the third camera at a frame rate of 2 may also be called a third preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 can keep the frame rate unchanged. That is to say, when the frame rate 1 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold, the mobile phone 100 can display the third interface after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the interface includes preview images captured by the two cameras at frame rate 1 respectively.
  • the preview image captured by the second camera at a frame rate of 1 may be called a fourth preview image
  • the preview image captured by the third camera at a frame rate of 1 may also be called a fifth preview image.
  • resolution 1 and/or frame rate 1 may be collectively referred to as a first acquisition parameter
  • resolution 2 and/or frame rate 2 may be collectively referred to as a second acquisition parameter
  • the specific implementation of automatically adjusting acquisition parameters is mainly described by using only the resolution and the frame rate alone.
  • the resolution 1 and the frame rate 1 can be used to capture images simultaneously.
  • the resolution 1 is greater than the preset resolution threshold, the resolution can be adjusted to resolution 2.
  • the second interface includes preview images captured by both cameras at a resolution of 2 and a frame rate of 1, wherein the preview image captured by the second camera at a resolution of 2 and a frame rate of 1 may be referred to as a second preview image,
  • the preview image captured by the third camera with resolution 2 and frame rate 1 may be referred to as a third preview image. If the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, the frame rate may be adjusted to frame rate 2.
  • the second interface includes preview images captured by both cameras at a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 2, wherein the preview image captured by the second camera at a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 2 may be referred to as a second preview image,
  • the preview image captured by the third camera with resolution 1 and frame rate 2 may be referred to as a third preview image. If the resolution 1 is greater than the preset resolution threshold and the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, the frame rate can be adjusted to frame rate 2, and the resolution can be adjusted to resolution 2.
  • the second interface includes preview images captured by both cameras at a resolution of 2 and a frame rate of 2, wherein the preview image captured by the second camera at a resolution of 2 and a frame rate of 2 may be referred to as a second preview image,
  • the preview image captured by the third camera with resolution 2 and frame rate 2 may be referred to as a third preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 can keep the frame rate and resolution unchanged.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display a third interface, the third interface includes preview images captured by both cameras at a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 1, wherein the second camera uses a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 1
  • the preview image collected by the third camera may be called a fourth preview image
  • the preview image collected by the third camera with a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 1 may be called a fifth preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface 821 shown in (a) in FIG. Capture the preview image, that is, the resolution 1 is 4K, and the frame rate 1 is 60fps. It should be understood that the text "acquire preview images at 4K, 60 fps" in the viewfinder interface 821 is only illustrative, and whether to display it can be determined according to requirements in actual implementation. Then, after switching from the single rear mode to the front and rear dual mirror mode, the mobile phone 10 can display the viewfinder interface 822 shown in (b) in FIG. Automatically reduce to 30 frames, that is, the resolution 2 is 1080p, and the frame rate 2 is 30 frames.
  • the text in the viewfinder interface 822 "The front and rear dual-lens mode does not support 4K, 60fps, it has been automatically switched to 1080p, 30fps for you" is also schematic, and the actual implementation can also be determined according to actual needs.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display prompt 1 on the second interface (also may be referred to as the first prompt message).
  • This prompt 1 is used to indicate that the resolution and/or frame rate have been switched.
  • the prompt 1 is the text in the viewfinder interface 822 shown in (b) of FIG. 8C "The front and rear dual-lens mode does not support 4K, 60fps, it has been automatically switched to 1080p, 30fps for you".
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch to a multi-mirror mode that does not support high frame rate and high resolution after switching to a high frame rate and/or high resolution before switching , automatically downgrade high resolutions to default resolutions and high framerates to default framerates. Therefore, the resolution and frame rate can be adaptively adjusted, so that video recording can finally start at a reasonable resolution and/or frame rate. In this way, the mobile phone 100 can reasonably control the size of the video file.
  • the resolution of the mobile phone 100 is reduced to resolution 2, and if the single front mode or the single rear mode is used again afterwards, the resolution can be restored to resolution 1. And/or, after the mobile phone 100 reduces the frame rate to frame rate 2, if the single front mode or the single rear mode is used again thereafter, the frame rate can be restored to frame rate 1. That is to say, the mobile phone 100 will record the resolution set by the user in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and when the single front mode or the single rear mode is used again, the resolution set last time can be used. Similarly, the mobile phone 100 will record the frame rate set by the user in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and when the single front mode or the single rear mode is used again, the frame rate set last time can be used.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive an operation (also referred to as a second operation) that triggers the mobile phone 100 to switch to the single front mode or the single rear mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the fourth interface.
  • the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording in a single front mode or a single rear mode, and the fourth interface includes a preview image ( may also be referred to as a sixth preview image).
  • the resolution and frame rate supported by the single front mode are the same as those supported by the single rear mode. Therefore, in the resolution and frame rate adjustment scheme, the single Front mode and single rear mode. For example, resolution 1 is initially set in single front mode, and then automatically reduced to resolution 2 due to switching, and can be restored to resolution 1 by switching to single front mode or single rear mode again.
  • the mobile phone 100 uses a single rear mode and uses a frame rate of 60 frames (fps) to record video.
  • the mobile phone 100 switches to the front and rear dual-lens mode, and automatically reduces the frame rate to 30 frames (fps), and then records a video at 30 fps within 10 seconds from 00:05:00 to 00:14:59.
  • the video file is finally formed, if the video file is played on a device with a higher configuration, since the frame rate in the first 5 seconds is twice the frame rate in the last 10 seconds, external factors such as network quality will not be considered. Under the premise, the fluency of the first 5 seconds of video will be higher than that of the last 10 seconds of video. This leads to inconsistencies in the perception of the video.
  • a video shooting method is also provided, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can control the switching of the multi-mirror mode according to acquisition parameters (such as frame rate and/or resolution).
  • acquisition parameters such as frame rate and/or resolution.
  • the acquisition parameter at this time is less than or equal to the preset parameter threshold, the mobile phone 100 allows switching to use two cameras to capture images. If the acquisition parameter at this time is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the mobile phone 100 is prohibited from switching to use the two cameras to acquire images. In this way, while controlling the size of the video file, the video effect can be improved, and the inconsistency between the two videos before and after can be avoided.
  • the mobile phone 100 when the mobile phone 100 is in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and adopts a resolution of 3 and/or a frame rate of 3 to start recording video, the mobile phone 100 can be in the viewfinder interface of the single front mode or The viewfinder interface of the single rear mode displays operable mode icons and display controls on the display panel.
  • the resolution 3 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold
  • the frame rate 3 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold.
  • the mobile phone 100 uses a single rear mode, and adopts 720p (less than the preset resolution threshold) and 30 frames (equal to the preset
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 831 shown in (a) of FIG. 8E .
  • the viewfinder interface 831 includes a mode icon 832, which is normally displayed, that is, the mode icon 832 is operable.
  • the viewfinder interface 831 includes a panel display control 833 . It should be understood that the text "720p, 30 frames of video recording" in the viewfinder interface 831 is only illustrative, and it is usually not displayed during the actual video recording process.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display a selection panel in response to the user's click operation on the operable mode icon or panel display control, which includes multiple mode options for the user to choose from and trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch to the multi-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 can still use resolution 3 and/or frame rate 3 to record video. That is to say, when the mobile phone 100 is in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and adopts the resolution 3 and/or frame rate 3 to start recording video, the mobile phone 100 can allow the user to switch the multi-mirror mode, and before and after the switch can be Record video at the same resolution and frame rate. In this way, the resolution and frame rate of the recorded video can be guaranteed to be consistent.
  • the mobile phone 100 can still use 720p, 30 frame to record video.
  • the words "use 720p, 30-frame video recording" in the viewfinder interface 834 are only illustrative.
  • the mobile phone 100 when the mobile phone 100 starts to record video in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and adopts resolution 1 and/or frame rate 1, the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface in the single front mode Or an inoperable (eg, grayed out) mode icon is displayed on the viewfinder interface of the single rear mode, and the viewfinder interface of the single front mode or the viewfinder interface of the single rear mode does not include a panel display control. That is to say, when the mobile phone 100 starts to record video in single front mode or single rear mode, and adopts high resolution and/or high frame rate, the mobile phone 100 prohibits the user from switching to the front and rear dual mirror mode, rear dual mirror mode, and rear dual mirror mode. mirror mode and picture-in-picture mode. In this way, it can be guaranteed that the recorded video will not have inconsistent resolution or frame rate.
  • an inoperable (eg, grayed out) mode icon is displayed on the viewfinder interface of the single rear mode
  • the mobile phone 100 uses a single rear mode, and adopts 4K (greater than the preset resolution threshold) and 60 frames (greater than the preset
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 841 shown in (a) in FIG. 8F .
  • the viewfinder interface 841 includes a mode icon 842, which is grayed out, that is, the mode icon 842 is inoperable.
  • the viewfinder interface 841 does not include a panel display control. If the mode icon 842 is inoperable and does not include panel display controls, the user cannot trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch to the multi-mirror mode.
  • the text "use 4K, 60 frames of video recording" in the viewfinder interface 841 is only illustrative, and it is usually not displayed during the actual video recording process.
  • the front and rear camera switching controls can still be displayed on the viewfinder interface.
  • the front and rear camera switching control is the control 843 in the viewfinder interface 831 shown in (a) of Figure 8F. That is to say, the mobile phone 100 can still switch between the single front mode and the single rear mode in response to the user's operation on the front and rear camera switching controls. In this case, there is no need to adjust the resolution and frame rate, so that it can be ensured that the recorded video will not have inconsistent resolution or frame rate.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the first interface.
  • the first interface is a viewfinder interface before recording in a single front mode or a single rear mode. rate 1, frame rate 3 and/or resolution 3) the preview image (also referred to as the first preview image) collected. And, the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the first interface.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive an operation (also referred to as a first operation) that triggers the mobile phone 100 to start video recording.
  • the mobile phone 100 responds to the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to start recording, if the first collection parameter is less than or equal to the preset parameter threshold, such as the frame rate 3 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold, and the resolution 3 is less than or equal to In the case of a preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 may display the second interface.
  • the second interface is the viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording.
  • the second interface includes a preview image (also called a second preview image) collected by a single camera (such as the first camera) with the first acquisition parameters and an operable image.
  • a first control such as a modal icon and/or a panel presentation control).
  • the first control can be used to switch between the two cameras to capture images. That is, the first collection parameter is less than or equal to the preset parameter threshold, and the mobile phone 100 allows switching to use two cameras to collect images.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive a user's operation (also referred to as a second operation) on the first control in an operable state, so as to trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch the shooting mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display multiple mode options on the second interface for the user to select a shooting mode.
  • the multiple mode options include a first option, and the first option corresponds to a mode in which two cameras are used to capture images (such as front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or picture-in-picture mode).
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's selection operation of the first option.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the fourth interface in response to the selection operation.
  • the fourth interface is the viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording video
  • the fourth interface includes two cameras (also referred to as the second camera and the second camera) respectively with the first acquisition parameters (such as resolution 3, frame rate 3) Captured preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 responds to the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to start recording, if the first collection parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, such as the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or the resolution 1 is greater than the preset
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a third interface.
  • the third interface is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording.
  • the third interface also includes a preview image (such as a second preview image) collected by a single camera (such as the first camera) with the first acquisition parameters.
  • the third interface does not include the first controls (such as mode icons and/or panel display controls) in an operable state.
  • first including the inoperable first control, for example, including the inoperable mode icon.
  • second type does not include the first control, for example, does not include a panel display control.
  • the third interface may include inoperable mode icons and does not include panel display controls.
  • the third interface does not include the first control in an operable state, then the first control cannot be used to switch and use the two cameras to capture images. That is, if the first collection parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the mobile phone 100 is prohibited from switching to use two cameras to collect images.
  • the mobile phone 100 After the mobile phone 100 displays the third interface, if the user's second operation on the first control is received, the mobile phone 100 will not display multiple mode options, but will display prompt 2 (also called the first prompt message) , the prompt 2 is used to prompt that two cameras cannot be switched to collect images.
  • prompt 2 also called the first prompt message
  • the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's click operation on the mode icon 842 in the viewfinder interface 841 shown in (a) in FIG.
  • a prompt 844 as shown in (b) in FIG. 8F is displayed, and the prompt 844 is specifically "Multi-camera video can be used in 720p or 1080p, 30 frames". In this way, it can be prompted that the multi-mirror mode cannot be switched under the conditions of 4K and 60 frames. That is, prompt 844 is prompt 2.
  • Embodiment five double speed function.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can implement a double speed function, which refers to the function of the mobile phone 100 playing recorded video frames at double speed.
  • the video shooting method of this embodiment may include:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays a first interface; wherein, the first interface is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording video, and the first interface includes a first logo and a first preview image collected by the camera, and the first logo is used to indicate that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at the first speed which is greater than 0.
  • the recording is being recorded, and the identification (such as the first identification and the second identification) is the double speed identification.
  • the first interface is the viewing interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
  • the viewfinder interface 201d is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording in front and rear dual-lens mode.
  • the first preview image includes a preview image 202d collected by a rear camera (such as a rear main camera) and a preview image 203d collected by a front camera.
  • the first logo is the logo 226 (i.e. double speed logo) in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG. It is 1x speed.
  • the first interface is the viewfinder interface 203e shown in (b) of FIG. 2E.
  • the viewfinder interface 203e is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording in single rear mode.
  • the first preview image is a preview image 204e captured by a rear camera (such as a rear main camera).
  • the first logo is the logo 250 (i.e. the double speed logo) in the viewfinder interface 203e shown in (b) of FIG. It is 1x speed.
  • the number of cameras collecting preview images may be different, so the number of preview images collected at the same time is also different.
  • the first preview image may be a preview image collected by one camera, or may be a preview image collected by two or more cameras.
  • the case of two cameras (such as the front and rear dual-lens mode) will be used for illustration.
  • the first preview image is the preview image captured by the two cameras.
  • the playback speed is 1x speed.
  • the first mark indicates that the recorded video is played at 1x speed. It should be noted that after adjusting the playback speed once, the playback speed may change. That is, the first speed may also be other playback speeds, such as 2x speed, 4x speed and so on.
  • the mobile phone 100 receives the user's first operation on the first interface.
  • the first operation is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to adjust the mobile phone 100 to play the recorded video at a second speed, the second speed is greater than 0, and the second speed is different from the first speed.
  • the adjacent playback speeds before and after the adjustment are different.
  • the second speed is different from the first speed.
  • the second speed is greater than 1x speed, it is an accelerated playback speed; when the second speed is greater than 0 and less than 1x speed, it is a slowed down playback speed; when the second speed is equal to 1x speed, it is a normal playback speed .
  • the first operation may be a first preset gesture, or a long press operation on an area of the first interface where no controls or icons are displayed.
  • the first interface includes a speed adjustment control
  • the first operation may be an operation (such as a click operation, a slide operation) that triggers the speed adjustment control.
  • the first interface may include a first preset control (such as a logo), and the first preset control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display multiple speed options, and each speed option corresponds to a playback speed of a video .
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive a user's click operation on the first preset control.
  • the mobile phone 100 can only display multiple speed options in response to the user's click operation on the first preset control. In this way, only when there is a need to adjust the speed, the display of multiple speed options may be triggered for the user to select the adjusted speed. Therefore, the content of the elements displayed on the first interface can be reduced without the need to adjust the speed, and at the same time, the user can be guided to select the speed in a targeted manner.
  • the first operation is a selection operation for the user to select a speed option corresponding to the second speed from a plurality of speed options.
  • the method further includes: the mobile phone 100 receiving a user's click operation on the first preset control in the first interface.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple speed options on the first interface in response to the user's click operation on the first preset control.
  • the first interface is the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D
  • the first preset control is the double-speed sign in the viewfinder interface 201d, that is, the sign 226 . That is to say, the double-speed logo is not only the first logo, but also the first preset control.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's click operation on the logo 226 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
  • the mobile phone 100 displays the first interface 911 shown in (a) in FIG. 9B in response to the user's click operation on the logo 226 .
  • the first interface 911 includes a plurality of speed options as follows: a speed option 912 , a speed option 913 and a speed option 914 .
  • the playback speed corresponding to the speed option 912 is 1x speed
  • the playback speed corresponding to the speed option 913 is 2x speed
  • the playback speed corresponding to the speed option 914 is 4x speed.
  • the function icons around the multiple speed options are hidden. For example, hide the flash light icon. In this way, the interface elements can be simplified to facilitate the user to select the playback speed.
  • the mobile phone 100 receives the user's first operation on the first interface, including: the mobile phone 100 receives the user's selection operation on the first speed option among the multiple speed options, and the corresponding playback speed of the first speed option is the second speed.
  • the second speed is different from the first speed.
  • the selection operation may be a click operation, a long press operation, and the like.
  • the first speed option is the speed option 914 shown in (a) of FIG. 9B .
  • the mobile phone 100 can receive the user's click operation on the speed option 914 among the multiple speed options (such as the speed option 912, the speed option 913 and the speed option 914) shown in (a) in Figure 9B, and the playback speed option 913 corresponds to
  • the speed is 4x speed, that is, the second speed is equal to 4x speed.
  • the method in the embodiments of the present application will be introduced mainly by taking as an example that the first operation is a selection operation in which the user selects a speed option corresponding to the second speed from multiple speed options.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays a second interface in response to the first operation.
  • the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording video.
  • the second interface includes a second logo and a second preview image collected by the camera.
  • the second interface The identifier is used to indicate that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at the second speed.
  • the first speed option is the speed option 914 shown in (a) of FIG. 9B .
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface 915 shown in (b) of FIG. Second interface.
  • the viewfinder interface 915 is the viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording, and the viewfinder interface 915 includes a second mark 916, which is used to indicate that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at 4 speeds, that is, the second speed is equal to 4 times speed.
  • the second preview image includes a preview image 917 collected by a rear camera (such as a rear main camera) and a preview image 918 collected by a front camera.
  • the second interface is a viewfinder interface corresponding to when the playback speed is the first speed.
  • the second interface is a viewfinder interface corresponding to when the playback speed is the second speed.
  • both the second preview image and the first preview image above are preview images collected by the camera in real time.
  • the second preview image is a preview image collected by the camera in real time when the playback speed is the second speed
  • the first preview image is a preview image collected by the camera in real time when the playback speed is the first speed.
  • the mobile phone 100 in order to restore to the default playback speed (such as 1x speed) conveniently, when the playback speed indicated by the speed identifier (such as the first identifier and the second identifier) is not equal to the default playback speed, the mobile phone 100 is
  • the video viewfinder interface (such as the first interface and the second interface) also includes a second preset control.
  • the second preset control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to play the recorded video at the default playback speed. That is to say, the user's operation of the second preset control can trigger the mobile phone 100 to restore the playback speed to the default playback speed. In this way, the convenience of returning to the default playback speed can be improved.
  • the viewfinder interface 915 shown in (b) of FIG. 9B includes a second logo 916, which indicates that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at 4X speed. , it is obvious that the playback speed is 4x speed, not 1x speed.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a second preset control 919 in the viewfinder interface 915 . In response to the user's click operation on the second preset control 919, the mobile phone 100 can be adjusted to play the recorded video at 1x speed.
  • the playback speed refers to the speed at which the recorded video is played after the video recording is completed and the user triggers the video playback, not the preview speed in the viewfinder interface. That is to say, in the viewfinder interface, the first preview image or the second preview image is previewed at a normal 1x speed.
  • the playback speed When the playback speed is adjusted to a non-default playback speed, the user mainly needs to record a video played at double speed. In this case, there is usually no need to switch the multi-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 in order to avoid user misoperation, when the playback speed indicated by the double-speed logo (such as the first logo and the second logo) is not equal to the default playback speed, the mobile phone 100 will hide the video being recorded. Mode icons, panel display controls, and front and rear camera switching controls in the viewfinder interface (such as the first interface and the second interface), so that switching of the multi-mirror mode can be prohibited at non-default playback speeds.
  • the viewfinder interface 915 shown in (b) of FIG. 9B includes a second logo 916, which indicates that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at 4X speed. , it is obvious that the playback speed is 4x speed, not 1x speed. At this time, the viewfinder interface 915 does not include mode icons, panel display controls, and front and rear camera switching controls.
  • the mobile phone 100 receives a second operation of the user on the second interface, where the second operation is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to end video recording.
  • the second interface includes an end recording control
  • the second operation may be a trigger operation (such as a click operation, a long press operation) on the end recording control.
  • the second interface when the playback speed indicated by the second logo is not equal to the second preset speed (that is, the second speed is not equal to the second preset speed), the second interface further includes a third preset control .
  • the third control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to end the recording.
  • the mobile phone 100 may end the video recording in response to the user's click operation on the third preset control. That is to say, through the third control, the recording can be ended directly at a speed other than the second preset speed.
  • the second operation may also be a second preset gesture.
  • the second operation is an upward swipe gesture for the user to swipe upward from the bottom of the second interface.
  • the mobile phone 100 generates a first video file in response to the second operation, the first video file includes a first video stream and a second video stream, the first video stream includes multiple frames of the first preview image, and the second The video stream includes multiple frames of the second preview image.
  • the mobile phone 100 After the recording is finished, the mobile phone 100 generates the first video file.
  • the first video file is a video file to be played. For example, after the user clicks to end the recording, the mobile phone 100 generates a first video file and stores it in the photo album application. Then, the user can enter the photo album application to trigger playing the first video file.
  • the cameras that capture preview images at the same time include a rear camera and a front camera.
  • the playback speed is the first speed.
  • the mobile phone 100 adjusts the playback speed to the second speed in response to the user's first operation.
  • the playback speed is the second speed.
  • the mobile phone 100 generates a first video file in response to the user's second operation, the first video file 1001 includes a video stream a1 and a video stream a2, and the video stream a1 includes the rear camera at 00:00:
  • the first video file also includes a video stream b1 and a video stream b2,
  • the video stream b1 includes a multi-frame preview image 923 collected by the rear camera between 00:10:00-00:14:59 and displayed on the first interface
  • the video stream b2 includes a multi-frame preview image 924 collected by the front camera between 00:10:00-00:14:59 and displayed on the first interface. That is, the second video stream is composed of video stream b1 and video stream b2.
  • the video stream in order to realize double-speed playback, may be obtained through frame extraction or frame insertion, and then a video file may be generated. In this way, there is no need for any processing during playback, and double-speed playback can be achieved by direct playback.
  • the first speed is not equal to the default playback speed (such as 1x speed)
  • the first video stream includes multiple frames of the first preview image, and the multiple frames of the first preview image are all the first preview images collected by the camera.
  • the image is obtained after frame extraction processing or frame interpolation processing.
  • the second speed is not equal to the first preset speed (such as 1x speed)
  • the second video stream includes multiple frames of second preview images, and the multiple frames of second preview images are all second preview images collected by the camera.
  • a number of preview images are selected for each first preset frame, wherein the number of first preset frames may be the same as the value of the playback speed, and the number of frames may be equal to the value of the playback speed minus 1.
  • the slowed down playback speed (such as 0.5 times speed)
  • a repeated preview image, a solid color image, or a blank frame image, etc. are inserted after each frame with the number of frames minus 1 from the reciprocal of the playback double speed.
  • the mobile phone 100 does not perform frame extraction or frame insertion processing on the preview image during the process of obtaining the video stream (such as the first video stream or the second video stream).
  • the first video stream includes all first preview images
  • the second video stream includes all second preview images.
  • the first speed attribute is marked as the first speed for the first video stream
  • the first speed attribute is marked as the second speed for the second video stream, so that during subsequent playback, double-speed playback can be realized according to the speed attribute.
  • the mobile phone 100 receives a third operation of the user, and the third operation is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to play the first video file.
  • the third operation is the user's click operation on the play button of the first video file in the photo album (or gallery) application.
  • the third operation is the user's selection operation of the opening mode of the first video file in the file management application.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display multiple options for opening the file (such as video application a, video application b, video application c) in response to the user triggering the operation of displaying the opening mode of the first video file. ).
  • the third operation may be a user's click operation on any one of the opening methods.
  • the mobile phone 100 plays the first video stream at a first speed, and plays the second video stream at a second speed.
  • the mobile phone 100 plays the videos recorded before and after adjustment at different playback speeds. In this way, different segments of the video can be played at different speeds based on the user's first operation during the video recording process.
  • the playing time for playing the first video stream is longer than the collection time for the camera to collect all the first preview images.
  • the playback duration is m times the acquisition duration.
  • the playback duration of playing the first video stream is equal to the acquisition duration of all first preview images collected by the camera.
  • the playback duration of playing the first video stream is shorter than the acquisition duration of capturing all the first preview images by the camera.
  • the acquisition time is m times the playback time.
  • the playback speed is switched in the 10th second, and the camera is collecting the first preview image in the first 10 seconds.
  • the first speed is equal to 1
  • the result of playing the first video stream at the first speed should be: the playing duration of the first video stream is equal to 10 seconds.
  • the first speed is equal to 2
  • the result of playing the first video stream at the first speed should be: the playing duration of the first video stream is equal to 5 seconds.
  • the first speed is equal to 0.5
  • the result of playing the first video stream at the first speed should be: the playing duration of the first video stream is equal to 20 seconds.
  • the first video stream can be played at the first speed by playing the first video stream normally.
  • Playing the second video stream normally can realize playing the second video stream at the second speed.
  • the first video stream and the second video stream are obtained by performing frame insertion processing or frame extraction processing in advance, so that double-speed playback can be realized without video processing during video playback. Thereby, the fluency of double-speed playback can be improved.
  • constructing all the first preview images to obtain the first video stream corresponding to constructing all the first preview images to obtain the first video stream, constructing all the second preview images to obtain the second video stream, and adding a speed attribute, during the playback process according to the speed attribute Achieve double-speed playback.
  • frame skipping playback or frame insertion playback may be performed according to the speed attribute, thereby realizing double-speed playback.
  • the double-speed playback can be realized according to the speed attribute: before every frame of the first preview image or Afterwards, 1/m-1 frames of blank images (such as pure black images) or 1/m-1 frames of repeated first preview images are inserted (ie, interrupted playback).
  • m is the first speed.
  • time-lapse or delayed playback may be performed according to the speed attribute, thereby realizing double-speed playback.
  • realizing double-speed playback according to the speed attribute may be to reduce the playback duration of each frame of the first preview image, so that the reduced playback duration is normal 1/m times of the playback duration (i.e. time-lapse playback); if the first speed indicated by the first speed attribute satisfies that the first speed is greater than 0 and less than 1, then realizing double-speed playback according to the speed attribute can be to prolong the first preview image of each frame
  • the playback duration of the extended playback is m times the normal playback duration (i.e. delayed playback). Wherein, m is the first speed.
  • double-speed playback can be realized in real time during the playback process, and all originally collected image frames can be retained.
  • the mobile phone 100 can adjust the playback speed from the first speed to the second speed in response to the user's first operation on the first interface. speed. That is to say, in the recording, the playback speed can be adjusted, providing a new way to adjust the playback speed. Thereby, the flexibility of playing speed adjustment is improved.
  • the mobile phone 100 forms the first video stream with the first preview image collected before the playback speed is adjusted, and forms the second video stream with the second preview image collected after the playback speed is adjusted. Then, when playing the video, the first video stream is played at the first speed, and the second video stream is played at the second speed.
  • different video streams can be played at different speeds without the user performing any operation, so that the playback speed is consistent with the timing when the user performs the first operation during the recording process. Thereby, the intelligence of double-speed playback can be improved.
  • the playback speed may be adjusted twice or more, and each adjustment process can refer to S901-S903. Moreover, every time an adjustment is added, there will be an additional segment of video stream in the generated first video file. For the specific implementation process, refer to the embodiment in FIG. 9A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the specific implementation of double-speed playback is mainly described in the multi-mirror mode using two cameras.
  • the realization principle of double-speed playback is the same, except that both the first video stream and the second video stream only include video streams composed of preview images captured by one camera.
  • Embodiment 6 micro-movie function.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can implement a micro-movie function
  • the micro-movie function refers to the function that the mobile phone 100 can record a micro-movie composed of various motion effects.
  • the video shooting method of this embodiment may include:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface before the mobile phone 100 starts video recording, and the interface a includes real-time images collected by cameras a and b.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple template options on the interface a in response to the user's operation a on the interface a.
  • the operation a is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to record a micro movie, and each template option corresponds to a motion template for image processing.
  • the dynamic effect template is used to process preview images collected by at least two cameras among the plurality of cameras and obtain corresponding animation effects.
  • the operation a may be a preset gesture a (such as a sliding gesture, a long press gesture) performed by the user in the interface a.
  • the interface a includes a microfilm control, and the microfilm control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display multiple template options.
  • Operation a is an operation such as clicking or long-pressing the micro-movie control by the user.
  • the solution of this application will be described mainly by taking operation a as a user's click operation on the microfilm control.
  • the microfilm control is the control 214 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. Click Actions.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display the Template option 1011 , template option 1012 , template option 1013 and template option 1014 .
  • template option 1011 corresponds to the dynamic effect template of "Friends Gathering”
  • template option 1012 corresponds to the dynamic effect template of "Warm Moment”
  • template option 1013 corresponds to the dynamic effect template of "Intimate Time”
  • template option 1014 corresponds to the dynamic effect template of "Pleasant Moment”. Motion template.
  • the dynamic effect template is a template for simulating the dynamic effect of the video captured by the camera in various motion states.
  • the motion state includes states such as pushing, pulling, shaking, moving, heeling and/or throwing.
  • Each dynamic effect template includes at least one dynamic effect in a motion state.
  • multi-mirror modes that use two cameras, such as front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and picture-in-picture mode
  • multiple template options are usually applicable to the animation templates of the multi-mirror mode of two cameras.
  • Template options In a single-camera multi-mirror mode such as a single-front mode or a single-rear mode, multiple mode options are usually template options for motion templates in the multi-mirror mode of a single camera. That is to say, the multiple template options displayed by the mobile phone in response to the user's click operation on the microfilm control are the template options of the available dynamic templates in the current multi-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays multiple template options in the interface a in response to the operation a.
  • multiple function icons and controls in interface a will be hidden to simplify the elements in the interface and facilitate the selection of template options. For example, compared to (b) in FIG. 2A : in (a) in FIG. 10B , the beautification control, front and rear camera switch control, and camera submenu are hidden.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays an interface b in response to the user's operation b on the template option c among the multiple template options.
  • the operation b is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to play animation effects.
  • Interface b is used to play the animation effect of animation template a corresponding to template option c.
  • operation b may be a user's selection operation on template option c (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.).
  • template option c is the template option 1011 shown in (a) in FIG. 10B
  • operation b may be a user's click operation on the template option 1011 shown in (a) in FIG. 10B .
  • the user's selection operation on the template option c can only trigger the mobile phone 100 to select the dynamic effect template a. Then, the mobile phone 100 can only display the interface b in response to the user's preset operation a on the interface a.
  • the preset operation a may be a preset gesture b (such as a sliding gesture) on the interface a.
  • the preset operation a is a long press operation on an area in the interface a where no controls or icons are displayed.
  • the interface a includes a control d, which is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to play an animation effect, and the preset operation a is a user's trigger operation on the control d (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.).
  • operation b includes the user selecting the template option 1011 and clicking the control 1015 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the interface 1015 shown in (b) in FIG. 10B in response to the user's operation b on the template option c.
  • the interface 1015 includes a window 1017 .
  • the window 1017 is used to play the dynamic template a. That is, interface 1015 is interface b.
  • the interface b shown in (b) in FIG. 10B is only exemplary.
  • the interface b is to add a mask layer (such as a gray mask layer) on top of the real-time preview image in the interface a, display multiple template options, control d and other interface elements on the mask layer, and display window a on the mask layer And get.
  • a mask layer such as a gray mask layer
  • actual implementation is not limited to this.
  • the interface b also includes a plurality of template options, so that the user can reselect the dynamic effect template a in the interface b. In this way, there is no need to return to interface a, and the dynamic effect template can be continuously switched in interface b.
  • the mobile phone 100 uses the dynamic effect template a to process the real-time image a collected by the camera c and the real-time image b collected by the camera d to record a micro movie.
  • the camera c is a camera among the plurality of cameras
  • the camera d is a camera except the camera c among the plurality of cameras.
  • the operation c may be a preset gesture c of the user in the interface b.
  • the preset gesture c is a sliding gesture from right to left in the interface b.
  • the interface b includes a control e, and the control e is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start micro-movie recording.
  • Operation c may be a trigger operation (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.) on the control e.
  • the control e is the control 1018 shown in (b) in FIG. 10B
  • the operation c is the user's click operation on the control 1018 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can use the motion effect template a to perform motion effect processing to complete the recording of the micro movie. For example, dynamic effect processing is performed on the real-time image a collected by the camera c and the real-time image b collected by the camera d, so as to achieve the animation effect of the dynamic template a.
  • different motion effect templates are suitable for performing motion effect processing on preview images captured by different cameras.
  • different animation templates are suitable for different cameras.
  • Camera c and camera d are two cameras applicable to animation template a.
  • the real-time images collected by the two cameras can be dynamically processed to obtain a dynamic effect.
  • Animated microfilm In this way, micro-movie recording in a dual-lens recording scene can be realized, so that rich dual-lens video content can be recorded.
  • complex operations such as framing, which can reduce the difficulty of recording micro movies.
  • a micro movie includes multiple movie clips.
  • the dynamic effect template a includes a plurality of dynamic effect sub-templates, and a plurality of movie clips corresponds to a plurality of dynamic effect sub-templates one by one.
  • Each animation sub-template is used for animation processing of the real-time images collected in the corresponding movie segment.
  • each animation sub-template further includes sub-template a and sub-template b.
  • the sub-template a is used for the mobile phone 100 to perform dynamic effect processing on the real-time image a
  • the sub-template b is used for the mobile phone 100 to perform dynamic effect processing on the real-time image b.
  • corresponding sub-templates can be used for processing for different cameras. Therefore, different animation effects can be obtained by processing the preview image at the same time, which can further improve the processing effect.
  • S1004 of the foregoing embodiment further includes S1021-S1022, and after S1004, S1023 is also included:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays an interface c in response to the event a.
  • the interface c is the viewfinder interface before starting the dual-camera video recording.
  • the interface c includes the real-time image c collected by the camera c and the real-time image d collected by the camera d.
  • the interface c also includes fragment options for multiple movie fragments.
  • the real-time image c is a real-time image collected during the recording process of the movie segment
  • the real-time image c is a real-time image collected during the recording preparation process of the movie segment (that is, when the interface c is displayed).
  • the real-time image d is a real-time image collected during the recording preparation process of the movie segment (that is, when the interface c is displayed).
  • the interface c is the viewfinder interface before starting the dual-camera video recording. That is to say, when the interface c is displayed, the recording does not actually start. Therefore, in the process of displaying the interface c, the mobile phone 100 can adjust the viewing angle according to the user's movement of the mobile phone 100 . And the framing changes during the adjustment process will not be recorded in the video. In this embodiment, the process of adjusting the framing is called recording preparation.
  • the mobile phone 100 jumps from interface b to interface c in response to user operation c on interface b. That is, in the first case, event a is user's operation c on interface b.
  • control e is the control 1018 shown in (b) in FIG. 10B
  • operation c is the user's click operation on the control 1018
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the interface 1031 shown in FIG. 10D in response to the user's click operation on the control 1018 shown in (b) in FIG. 10B
  • the interface 1031 is a viewfinder interface before starting the dual-camera video recording.
  • the interface 1031 includes preview images captured by two cameras, and the interface 1031 also includes five fragment options of 2.5 second (s) movie fragments (the five options in the dotted line box 1032). That is, interface 1031 is interface c.
  • the mobile phone 100 jumps back to interface c in response to the event that the recording of the kth movie segment is completed.
  • n is the number of dynamic sub-templates included in the dynamic template a. Both k and n are positive integers. That is to say, in the second case, event a is the event that the recording of the k-th movie segment is completed. For example, when the recording countdown (such as 2.5s) of the kth movie segment ends, event a is triggered.
  • the kth movie segment recorded each time may also be referred to as the first movie segment.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display interface c.
  • the interface c may be the interface 1041 shown in (a) of FIG. 10E .
  • the segment option 1042 pointing to the first movie segment in the interface 1041 displays a cover, indicating that the first movie segment has been recorded.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display interface c.
  • the interface c may be the interface 1043 shown in (b) of FIG. 10E .
  • the fragment option 1042 pointing to the first movie fragment and the fragment option 1044 pointing to the second movie fragment in the interface 1043 display cover art, indicating that both the first movie fragment and the second movie fragment have been recorded.
  • the first case corresponds to the situation of entering the interface c for the first time during the micro-movie recording process
  • the second case corresponds to the micro-movie recording process.
  • the interface c further includes a window b, and the window b is used to play the animation effects of each animation sub-template in the animation template a.
  • the animation effect of the motion effect sub-template (such as the first motion effect sub-template) corresponding to the movie segment to be recorded. In this way, it is beneficial to adjust the framing of the movie segment to be recorded with reference to the animation effect played in the window b during the recording preparation stage.
  • the interface c is the interface 1031 shown in FIG. 10D
  • the window b is the window 1034 in the interface 1031
  • the template option 1033 that is, the first movie segment to be recorded is to be recorded, and the animation sub-template corresponding to the first movie segment is played in the window 1034 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may hide the window b in response to the user's closing operation on the window b. This simplifies interface elements and is more conducive to previewing.
  • recording preparations can be performed in the interface c. After the preparation is completed, it can be triggered to enter the recording. Record multiple movie clips in sequence, and at the same time need to use each animation sub-template to sequentially perform animation processing on the real-time images collected in each movie clip. Specifically, for the kth movie segment, the recording process is as shown in S1022 below:
  • the mobile phone 100 displays the interface d in response to the user's operation e on the interface c.
  • the operation e is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start recording the kth movie segment.
  • the k-th movie segment is any one of the plurality of movie segments.
  • the kth movie segment corresponds to the first motion effect sub-template.
  • the interface d is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording video, and the interface d includes a preview image a and a preview image b.
  • the preview image a is obtained by the mobile phone 100 using the first dynamic effect sub-template to perform dynamic effect processing on the real-time image a collected by the camera c
  • the preview image b is obtained by the mobile phone 100 using the first dynamic effect sub-template to process the real-time image b collected by the camera d.
  • Motion effect processing obtained.
  • segment option of the kth movie segment may be automatically selected by the mobile phone 100 in sequence, or may be manually selected by the user.
  • the operation e may be the user's preset gesture d on the interface c. For example, a swipe gesture from bottom to top.
  • the interface c includes a control f (control 1035 shown in FIG. 10D ), and the control f is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start dual-camera recording.
  • the operation e is a trigger operation (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.) on the control f.
  • the operation e may include the user's selection operation on the segment option of the k-th movie segment, and the user's preset gesture d on the interface c.
  • the preset gesture c is a sliding gesture from bottom to top.
  • the interface c includes a control f, and the control f is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start recording.
  • the operation e may include the user's selection operation of the segment option of the kth movie segment, and the user's operation of clicking or long pressing the control f.
  • take operation e as an example where the user clicks on the segment option 1033 in the interface 1031 in FIG. 10D .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the interface 1051 shown in FIG. 10F in response to the user's click operation on the segment option 1033 in the interface 1031 in FIG. 10D .
  • the interface 1051 is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording, and the interface 1051 includes a preview image 1053 obtained by performing dynamic processing on the real-time image a collected by the camera c (such as a rear camera) by the mobile phone 100 using the first dynamic sub-template, and The mobile phone 100 uses the first dynamic effect sub-template to perform dynamic effect processing on the real-time image b captured by the camera d (such as the front camera) to obtain a preview image 1054 . That is, interface 1051 is interface d.
  • the preview image a and the preview image b displayed on the interface d are both preview images after dynamic effect processing. In this way, the effect after the motion effect processing can be viewed in real time from the interface d during the recording process.
  • the interface d further includes prompt information a, and the prompt information a is used to prompt the skill of recording dynamic video.
  • the interface d is the interface 1051 shown in FIG. 10F , and the interface 1051 includes a prompt 1052 , and the specific content is: automatically shoot a dynamic video without the user moving the mobile phone 100 . This can prompt the skill of recording dynamic video. That is, the presentation 1052 is presentation information a.
  • the interface d also includes a recording countdown of the kth movie segment. In this way, the remaining recording duration of the kth movie segment can be clearly prompted.
  • the mobile phone 100 can switch the viewfinder frames of the two cameras in the viewfinder interface in response to the user's operation f, so as to realize the flexible adjustment of real-time images.
  • operation f may also be referred to as a sixth operation.
  • the mobile phone 100 shields the user from operating f on the interface d.
  • the operation f is used to trigger the viewfinder frame of the camera c and the viewfinder frame of the camera d in the interchange interface d of the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 does not respond to the user's operation f on the interface d. In this way, inconsistency between the obtained preview and the animation effect of the animation sub-template corresponding to the k-th movie segment due to swapping during the animation processing process can be avoided. This improves the consistency of before and after previews.
  • the operation f may be a double-click operation on the preview image a or the preview image b, or a drag operation on the preview image a or the preview image b.
  • event a When the recording countdown of the kth movie segment ends, event a will be triggered, and then return to S1021, and interface c will be displayed. Then the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's operation e on the interface c, displays the interface d, and enters the recording of the next movie segment. This cycle goes on and on until all n movie clips are finally recorded, and the cycle ends.
  • the mobile phone 100 generates a video file a in response to the event c.
  • the event c is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to save a video with a dynamic effect.
  • the video file a includes n sections of the first video stream and n sections of the second video stream, wherein the kth section of the first video stream includes the multi-frame preview image a processed in the kth movie segment, and the kth section of the second video stream
  • the stream includes the multi-frame preview image b processed in the kth movie segment.
  • the event c may be an event automatically triggered by the mobile phone 100 .
  • event a is triggered.
  • the event c may also be an event triggered by a user.
  • the interface c displayed by the mobile phone 100 includes a control g, and the control g is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to save a video with a dynamic effect.
  • the event c may be a user's trigger operation on the control g (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.).
  • the interface c displayed by the mobile phone 100 includes a control h, and the control h is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the control i and the control j in the interface c.
  • the control i is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to save the video with the dynamic effect
  • the control j is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to delete the video with the dynamic effect.
  • Event c is a trigger operation (such as click operation, long press operation, etc.) on control i.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the interface 1061 shown in (a) in FIG. 10G .
  • the interface 1061 includes a control 1062 .
  • the control 1062 can be used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the control i and the control j, that is, the control 1062 is the control h.
  • the mobile phone 100 may further display a control 1063 and a control 1064 on the interface 1061 as shown in (b) of FIG. 10G .
  • the control 1063 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to delete the video with a dynamic effect, that is, the control 1063 is the control j.
  • the control 1064 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to save a video with a dynamic effect, that is, the control 1064 is control i.
  • the mobile phone 100 generates video file a in response to event c.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display prompt information b on the interface c, where the prompt information b is used to prompt the progress of generating the video file. In this way, the saving progress can be intuitively displayed.
  • the event c is the user's click operation on the control 1064 in the interface 1061 shown in (b) in FIG. 10G
  • the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's click operation on the control 1064 shown in (b) in FIG.
  • a prompt 1065 as shown in (c) in FIG. 10G may be further displayed on the interface 1061, and the prompt 1065 prompts that the progress of generating the video file is 25%. level, prompt 1065 is prompt information b.
  • the video file a includes n segments of the first video stream, namely: the first segment of the first video stream, the second segment of the first video stream...the nth segment of the first video stream.
  • splicing all the preview images a in the first movie segment (such as the first 2.5s) in time sequence can obtain the first segment of the first video stream
  • the second movie segment (such as the second 2.5s ) splicing all preview images a in time sequence to obtain the second segment of the first video stream
  • splicing all preview images a in the nth movie segment (such as the nth 2.5s) in time sequence to obtain the nth segment First video stream.
  • the video file a further includes n sections of second video streams, namely: the first section of the first video stream, the second section of the first video stream...the nth section of the first video stream.
  • splicing all the preview images b in the first movie segment (such as the first 2.5s) in time sequence can obtain the first segment of the second video stream
  • the second movie segment (such as the second 2.5s ) all the preview images b of ) can be spliced in time sequence to get the second segment of the second video stream.
  • All the preview images b in the nth movie segment (such as the nth 2.5s) can be spliced in time sequence to get the nth segment Second video stream.
  • the mobile phone 100 generates n segments of the first video stream and n segments of the second video stream. In this way, a video file with a dynamic effect is obtained.
  • the mobile phone 100 can perform dynamic processing on the real-time images collected by the two cameras in real time according to the dynamic template selected by the user, and obtain A preview image of is displayed in the viewfinder interface during recording. In this way, the difficulty of recording a video with a dynamic effect can be reduced. Moreover, the result after the dynamic effect processing can be presented to the user in real time, which is conducive to previewing the recorded result in real time.
  • the mobile phone 100 After the recording is finished, the mobile phone 100 generates a video file a with a dynamic effect. In this way, videos with dynamic effects can be obtained intelligently.
  • the mobile phone 100 can guide the user to use them.
  • the efficiency of human-computer interaction can be improved.
  • the mobile phone can use pop-up windows, bubbles, etc. to prompt guidance information to prompt switching to the multi-mirror mode.
  • the key switching operation is mainly prompted. In this way, the experience of human-computer interaction can be improved.
  • the mobile phone displays the viewfinder interface 1101 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) of FIG. 11A .
  • the viewing interface 1101 includes prompt information 1102, and the prompt information 1101 is used to prompt to switch the multi-mirror mode (also called the recording mode).
  • the prompt information 1102 includes effect video, text prompt and operation options. Wherein, the effect video is used to indicate the effect of the video recorded by switching the multi-mirror mode.
  • the text prompt is used to prompt the entrance to switch the multi-mirror mode.
  • the text prompt information may be "click (the mode icon) to switch the recording mode" shown in (a) in FIG. 11A .
  • the operation options further include a first option and a second option, the first option is used to trigger the exit of the boot, and the second option is used to trigger the continuation of the boot.
  • the first option can be the "try again later” button shown in (a) in Figure 11A
  • the second option can be the "record a section” button shown in (a) in Figure 11A, that is, the second option .
  • the mobile phone can cancel the mask effect in response to the user's click operation on the first option shown in (a) in FIG. 11A .
  • the mobile phone may display the viewfinder interface 1103 shown in (b) in FIG. 11A .
  • the viewfinder interface 1103 includes prompt information 1104, and the prompt information 1104 is used to prompt the operation of selecting the multi-mirror mode.
  • the specific content of the prompt information 1104 may be "click here to switch to rear and rear mirrors".
  • only the mode option pointed to by the prompt information 1104, that is, the mode option 1105 is in an operable state and can respond to the user's selection operation.
  • the mobile phone may display a viewfinder interface 1106 in the rear and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (c) in FIG. 11A .
  • the viewfinder interface 1106 includes prompt information 1107 .
  • the prompt information 1107 is used to prompt to start recording video. For example, the specific content of the prompt information 1107 may be "click here to switch to start recording".
  • the viewfinder interface 1106 only the recording start control 1108 pointed to by the prompt information 1107 is in an operable state, and can respond to the user's click operation.
  • the mobile phone can start recording video in response to the user's click operation on the start recording control 1108 .
  • the key switching operation can also be prompted.
  • the panel display control is an arrow with a dynamic effect, and the dynamic effect can guide the user to slide up to select the panel, thereby switching the multi-mirror mode.
  • the prompts during the recording process are similar to the prompts before the recording, so there will be no more examples here.
  • the following is a complete example to illustrate the guidance process of using the multi-camera recording mode for the first time: when using the multi-camera recording mode for the first time, the mobile phone adds a mask in the viewfinder interface, and introduces the effect of the multi-camera recording through a pop-up window.
  • the pop-up window does not disappear under any operation. It should be noted that under the mask effect, the user can only operate the interface elements pointed to by the guidance information (such as icons or controls, etc.), while other interface elements are inoperable, so that accurate guidance can be realized.
  • the mobile phone cancels the mask effect in response to the user's click operation on the first option in the pop-up window.
  • the mobile phone can guide the user to use the multi-camera video recording mode through tutorial guidance.
  • the tutorial-style guidance process is as follows: under the mask effect, the user is guided to click the mode icon to switch the multi-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone can pop up a selection panel, which also guides the user to switch to a single-lens mode (such as a single front mode or a single rear mode) under the mask effect.
  • a single-lens mode such as a single front mode or a single rear mode
  • the mobile phone may guide the user to click the start recording button under the mask effect.
  • the mobile phone can start recording in response to the user's operation of clicking the start recording button, and continue to guide the user to switch the multi-mirror mode by sliding up the selection panel through the mask effect.
  • the mobile phone can display a selection panel, which includes a variety of multi-mirror mode options, and guides the user to switch to the front and rear dual-mirror mode through a mask.
  • the mobile phone displays the viewfinder interface where the front and rear dual-mirror are recording, and guides the user to slide down to close the selection panel through the mask.
  • the mobile phone retracts the selection panel, and guides the user to click the stop recording button through the mask.
  • the mobile phone may end the recording in response to the user's operation of clicking the stop recording button.
  • the mobile phone displays the viewfinder interface before recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, and the video is automatically saved to the album, and a bubble prompts the user that it has been saved to the album.
  • an exit control is always provided on the mask, and the exit control is used to trigger the mobile phone to exit the booting process.
  • the mobile phone no longer displays the guidance information. That is, exit boot.
  • the mobile phone may also prompt the user to switch the multi-mirror mode. But different from the first hint, the weak hint is only given by bubbles in the non-first-time process. Therefore, strong interference to the user can be avoided.
  • the mobile phone responds to the user's selection operation of the multi-mirror recording mode, and may display the The viewfinder interface 1111 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode, and the viewfinder interface 1111 includes prompt information 1112 in the form of bubbles.
  • the specific content of the prompt message 1112 is "click to switch recording mode". This prompts to switch the multi-mirror mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 is placed with the top up and the bottom down.
  • (b) shows the landscape state.
  • the top of the mobile phone 100 can be called the left edge of the screen, and the bottom of the mobile phone 100 can be called the right edge of the screen.
  • the edge above the vertical line is the upper edge of the screen of the mobile phone 100
  • the edge below the vertical line at the top or bottom of the mobile phone 100 is the lower edge of the screen of the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can be rotated to a landscape orientation as shown in (c) in FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 when the mobile phone 100 is rotated clockwise by a preset angle, such as 90°.
  • a preset angle such as 90°.
  • the top of the mobile phone 100 can be called the right edge of the screen, and the bottom of the mobile phone 100 can be called the left edge of the screen.
  • the edge above the vertical line is the upper edge of the screen of the mobile phone 100
  • the edge below the vertical line at the top or bottom of the mobile phone 100 is the lower edge of the screen of the mobile phone 100 .
  • the postures of the mobile phone 100 in the landscape state shown in (b) in FIG. 12A and (c) in FIG. 12A are exemplary, and in actual implementation, the landscape state may not be the ( b) and (c) in Figure 12A show the ideal state.
  • the clockwise rotation angle of the mobile phone 100 is greater than 45° and less than 135°, the mobile phone 100 will be in the landscape state.
  • the user holds the bottom of the mobile phone 100 with his right hand.
  • the mode icon is located near the top of the mobile phone 100, if the mode icon is to be operated, as shown in (b) in FIG. 100 mode icons near the top to operate.
  • the fingers of the left hand may be in the mirror.
  • the finger 1201 is the part entering the mirror.
  • the finger 1201 in the mirror will block the viewfinder of the building, resulting in loss of viewfinder.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can adaptively adjust the display layout of the interface elements according to whether the mobile phone 100 is held by the left hand or the right hand in the horizontal screen scene. In this way, the situation of finger pointing to the mirror during recording can be avoided.
  • the first one is the case where the right hand is held.
  • the mobile phone 100 detects whether the mobile phone 100 is in the first posture.
  • the first posture refers to a posture in which the mobile phone 100 is held by the user's right hand in a horizontal screen state.
  • the first gesture what is shown in (a) in FIG. 12C is a form of the first posture.
  • the distance between the bottom of the screen and the user's right hand is smaller than the distance between the top of the screen and the user's right hand. That is to say, in the first posture, the bottom of the screen is closer to the right hand.
  • the mobile phone 100 can determine the attitude of the mobile phone 100 through data such as the detection result of the gravity sensor and the reflection coefficient of the antenna.
  • the deflection angle of the mobile phone 100 may be detected by a gravity sensor, so as to determine the attitude of the mobile phone 100 .
  • the attitude of the mobile phone 100 may be determined according to the reflection coefficient of the antenna.
  • the first gesture may also be referred to as a first holding state, which is used to indicate that the right hand is holding the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone 100 can mainly display the interface elements near the bottom of the mobile phone 100 to facilitate right-hand operation. In this way, the fingers will not be pointed out by the mirror due to the left-hand grip.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display front and rear camera switching controls, pause recording controls, end recording controls, camera controls and/or panel display controls near the right edge of the screen for right-hand operation.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 1211 shown in (a) of FIG. 12C during recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the viewfinder interface 1211 the front and rear camera switch control 1212, the pause recording control 1213, the end recording control 1214, the camera control 1215 and the panel display control 1216 are all displayed near the bottom of the mobile phone 100.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a mode icon (also referred to as the first control), a double speed logo (also referred to as the third control) and/or a flashlight icon (also referred to as the fourth control) on the
  • a mode icon also referred to as the first control
  • a double speed logo also referred to as the third control
  • a flashlight icon also referred to as the fourth control
  • the mode icon 1217, the double speed logo 1218 and the flashlight icon 1219 are all displayed on the upper edge of the screen, near the right edge of the screen, Convenient for right-handed operation.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the zoom control (also referred to as the second control) on the lower edge of the screen, near the left edge of the screen, so that the left hand can easily zoom in without holding the top of the mobile phone 100. , convenient for zoom adjustment.
  • the lower edge of the screen and the area close to the left edge of the screen may be referred to as the second area.
  • the zoom control 1210 is displayed at the lower edge of the screen, near the top of the screen.
  • the user can complete the zoom adjustment by operating the zoom control with the index finger of the left hand. In a high probability, the user will not complete the zoom adjustment by holding the top of the mobile phone 100 with the left hand.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the recording timing near the junction of the left edge of the screen and the upper edge of the screen. This makes it easy to check the timing.
  • the area near the junction of the left edge of the screen and the upper edge of the screen may be referred to as the fifth area.
  • the recording timing such as "00:00" is displayed near the junction of the left edge and the upper edge of the screen.
  • a small window (also referred to as a second window) is displayed below the recording timing.
  • the recording timing can be displayed near the junction of the left edge and the upper edge of the screen, the blocking of the timing by the small window can be avoided.
  • the large window may be referred to as the first window, and the first window is a full-screen window.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 1221 shown in (c) of FIG. 12C during recording in the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the recording timing such as "00:00"
  • the small window 1222 is displayed below the recording timing.
  • the second is the case of holding in the left hand.
  • the mobile phone 100 detects whether the mobile phone 100 is in the second posture.
  • the second posture refers to a posture in which the mobile phone 100 is held by the left hand in a horizontal screen state.
  • the second gesture what is shown in (a) in FIG. 12D is a form of the second gesture.
  • the distance between the bottom of the screen and the user's left hand is smaller than the distance between the top of the screen and the user's left hand. That is to say, in the first posture, the bottom of the screen is closer to the left hand.
  • the mobile phone 100 can determine the attitude of the mobile phone 100 through data such as the detection result of the gravity sensor and the reflection coefficient of the antenna.
  • the deflection angle of the mobile phone 100 may be detected by a gravity sensor, so as to determine the attitude of the mobile phone 100 .
  • the attitude of the mobile phone 100 may be determined according to the reflection coefficient of the antenna.
  • the second posture if the mobile phone 100 is held with one hand, the mobile phone 100 is usually held with the left hand to avoid pointing fingers at the mirror. Based on this, the second posture may also be referred to as a second holding state, which is used to indicate that the left hand holds the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone 100 can mainly display the interface elements near the bottom of the mobile phone 100 to facilitate operation by the left hand. In this way, the fingers will not be pointed out by the right hand.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display front and rear camera switching controls, pause recording controls, end recording controls, camera controls and/or panel display controls near the left edge of the screen for easy operation by the left hand.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 1231 shown in (a) of FIG. 12D during recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode.
  • the viewfinder interface 1231 front and rear camera switch control 1232 , pause recording control 1234 , end recording control 1233 , camera control 1235 and panel display control 1236 are all displayed near the left edge of the screen.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a mode icon (also referred to as the first control), a double speed logo (also referred to as the third control) and/or a flashlight icon (also referred to as the fourth control) on the
  • a mode icon also referred to as the first control
  • a double speed logo also referred to as the third control
  • a flashlight icon also referred to as the fourth control
  • the mode icon 1237, the double speed logo 1238 and the flashlight icon 1239 are all displayed on the upper edge of the screen, near the left edge of the screen, Convenient for left-handed operation.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the zoom control (also referred to as the second control) on the lower edge of the screen, near the right edge of the screen, so that the right hand can easily zoom in without holding the top of the mobile phone 100. , convenient for zoom adjustment.
  • the zoom control also referred to as the second control
  • the lower edge of the screen and the area close to the right edge of the screen may be referred to as the fourth area.
  • the zoom control 1230 is displayed on the lower edge of the screen, near the right edge of the screen, and when the user holds the mobile phone 100 in the left hand, the right index finger operates
  • the zoom control can be used to complete the zoom adjustment, and the user will not complete the zoom adjustment by holding the top of the mobile phone 100 with the right hand in a high probability.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the recording timing near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen. This makes it easy to check the timing.
  • the area near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen may be referred to as the sixth area.
  • the recording timing such as "00:00" is displayed near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen.
  • a small window (also referred to as a second window) is displayed below the recording timing. In this way, while the recording timing can be displayed near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen, the blocking of the timing by the small window can be avoided.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 1241 shown in (b) of FIG. 12D which is being recorded in the picture-in-picture mode.
  • the recording timing such as "00:00"
  • the small window 1242 is displayed below the recording timing.
  • the implementation scheme that the layout of the interface elements will change accordingly when the left and right hands are held can be applied to various multi-mirror modes of multi-mirror video recording. That is to say, this solution can be applied to each viewing interface involved in the embodiments herein.
  • the viewfinder interface of front and rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, single front mode, and single rear mode can be applied to each viewing interface involved in the embodiments herein.
  • the viewfinder interface of front and rear dual-mirror mode picture-in-picture mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, single front mode, and single rear mode.
  • the difference from the vertical screen state is: in the horizontal screen state, after the mobile phone 100 is triggered to display the selection panel, the display area of the selection panel may exist with the display area of the panel display controls, mode icons, double-speed icons and/or flashlight icons. overlapping.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the mode icon 1217 in the viewfinder interface 1211 shown in (a) of FIG. (a) shows the finder interface 1251.
  • the viewfinder interface 1251 includes a selection panel 1252 , and the display area of the selection panel 1252 covers the display area of the panel display control, the display area of the double speed icon 1253 and the display area of the flash icon 1254 .
  • the background of the selection panel may be set to have a transparent background, so as to avoid interference with the preview.
  • the transparent background may make the mode icon 1253 and the flash icon 1254 partially visible which are obscured.
  • the background of the selection panel 1252 is transparent. Thus making the mode icon 1253 and the flash icon 1254 covered by the selection panel 1252 partially visible.
  • the mobile phone 100 can determine that there is overlap with the display area of the selection panel according to the display area of the selection panel in the viewfinder interface and the display area of each interface element in the viewfinder interface.
  • target element For example, panels display controls, mode icons, double speed icons, and/or flash light icons. Then, hide the display of the target element.
  • the target element can be hidden by setting the transparency value of the target element to the maximum value, that is, setting it to be completely transparent. Disturbance to the user can thus be avoided.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the screen shown in FIG. (b) shows the viewfinder interface 1255 .
  • the viewfinder interface 1255 includes a selection panel 1256, and the icons and controls in the display area covered by the selection panel 1256 have been hidden.
  • the mode icon and the flash light icon covered by the selection panel 1256 are not partially or fully visible.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the target element again by retracting the selection panel in response to the user's operation.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface shown in (c) in FIG. 12E in response to the user's click operation on the mode icon in the viewfinder interface 1255 .
  • Viewfinder interface 1257 The difference from the viewfinder interface 1255 is that: firstly, the selection panel is no longer displayed in the viewfinder interface 1257; secondly, the double-speed icon, the flashlight icon and panel display controls are displayed in the viewfinder interface 1257, and are no longer hidden.
  • an electronic device which may include: the above-mentioned display screen (such as a touch screen), a memory, and one or more processors.
  • the display screen, memory and processor are coupled.
  • the memory is used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions.
  • the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device can execute various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the structure of the electronic device reference may be made to the structure of the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, as shown in FIG. 13 , the chip system 1300 includes at least one processor 1301 and at least one interface circuit 1302 .
  • the processor 1301 and the interface circuit 1302 may be interconnected through wires.
  • interface circuit 1302 may be used to receive signals from other devices, such as memory of an electronic device.
  • the interface circuit 1302 may be used to send signals to other devices (such as the processor 1301).
  • the interface circuit 1302 can read instructions stored in the memory, and send the instructions to the processor 1301 .
  • the electronic device may be made to execute various steps in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on the above-mentioned electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform the various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above-mentioned method embodiment .
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the method embodiment above.
  • the disclosed devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be Incorporation or may be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the unit described as a separate component may or may not be physically separated, and the component displayed as a unit may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, it may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places . Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the software product is stored in a storage medium Among them, several instructions are included to make a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes such as U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk.

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and provides a video photographing method and an electronic device, capable of controlling the size of a video file by adjusting acquisition parameters of cameras or controlling switching of photographing modes. The electronic device displays a first interface, the first interface comprising a first preview image acquired by a first camera according to a first acquisition parameter, and the first preview image being displayed in the first interface in a full-screen manner. The electronic device receives a first operation of a user on the first interface, the first operation being used for triggering the electronic device to switch a second camera and a third camera to acquire images. In response to the first operation, if the first acquisition parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a second interface, the second interface comprising a second preview image acquired by the second camera according to a second acquisition parameter and a third preview image acquired by the third camera according to the second acquisition parameter, and the second acquisition parameter being less than the first acquisition parameter.

Description

一种视频拍摄方法及电子设备Video shooting method and electronic device
本申请要求于2021年6月16日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202110669410.5、发明名称为“一种基于故事线模式的用户视频创作方法及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,以及于2021年10月9日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202111178136.8、发明名称为“一种视频拍摄方法及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on June 16, 2021, with the application number 202110669410.5, and the title of the invention is "A User Video Creation Method and Electronic Device Based on Storyline Mode", and the The priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202111178136.8 and the title of the invention "A Video Shooting Method and Electronic Device" filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on October 9, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated in this application by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及终端技术领域,尤其涉及一种视频拍摄方法及电子设备。The present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and in particular to a video shooting method and electronic equipment.
背景技术Background technique
目前,手机等电子设备中,不仅可以提供图片拍摄功能,还能提供视频拍摄功能。电子设备采用该视频拍摄功能,可以启动一个摄像头来录制视频。Currently, electronic devices such as mobile phones can provide not only a picture shooting function, but also a video shooting function. The electronic device adopts the video shooting function, and can start a camera to record video.
然而,在多人聚会、亲子互动等具有多个拍摄对象的场景中,若采用上述视频拍摄功能,极有可能出现多个拍摄对象无法同时同框的情况。或者,在演唱会等活动现场中,具有同时拍摄远景和近景的需求,若采用上述视频拍摄功能,也可能无法同时满足用户的多种拍摄需求。However, in scenes with multiple subjects such as gatherings, parent-child interaction, etc., if the above-mentioned video shooting function is used, it is very likely that multiple subjects cannot be framed together at the same time. Or, in concerts and other event sites, there is a need to shoot distant and close shots at the same time. If the above video shooting function is used, it may not be able to meet the various shooting needs of users at the same time.
由此可见,亟需一种视频拍摄方案,以灵活适配于各种需要拍摄视频的场景。在此基础上,更缺少一种在各种拍摄场景中,可以合理控制视频文件大小的方案。It can be seen that there is an urgent need for a video shooting solution to flexibly adapt to various scenes requiring video shooting. On this basis, there is still a lack of a solution that can reasonably control the size of video files in various shooting scenarios.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法及电子设备,可以通过调整摄像头的采集参数,或者控制拍摄模式的切换,来控制视频文件的大小。Embodiments of the present application provide a video shooting method and an electronic device, which can control the size of a video file by adjusting the capture parameters of a camera or controlling switching of shooting modes.
为达到上述目的,本申请的实施例采用如下技术方案:In order to achieve the above object, the embodiments of the present application adopt the following technical solutions:
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,该方法可以应用于手机、平板等支持拍摄视频的电子设备。其中,电子设备显示第一界面,第一界面是电子设备录像的取景界面,第一界面中包括第一摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第一预览图像。第一预览图像全屏显示在第一界面中;电子设备的摄像头的采集参数包括帧率和/或分辨率。也就是说,第一界面是以单个摄像头采集图像的取景界面。在使用单个摄像头录像时,可以采用高于预设参数阈值的采集参数来采集预览图像,也可以采用低于或等于预设参数阈值的采集参数来采集预览图像。电子设备接收用户对第一界面的第一操作,第一操作用于触发电子设备切换使用第二摄像头和第三摄像头采集图像。例如,第一操作是用户对多镜子模式的选择操作。电子设备响应于第一操作,若第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,电子设备显示第二界面;第二界面是电子设备录像的取景界面,第二界面包括第二摄像头以第二采集参数采集的第二预览图像和第三摄像头以第二采集参数采集的第三预览图像。第二采集参数小于第一采集参数。In a first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets that support video shooting. Wherein, the electronic device displays a first interface, the first interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, and the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first collection parameters. The first preview image is displayed in full screen on the first interface; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution. That is to say, the first interface is a viewfinder interface for capturing images by a single camera. When using a single camera to record video, the preview image can be collected by using a collection parameter higher than the preset parameter threshold, or the preview image can be collected by using a collection parameter lower than or equal to the preset parameter threshold. The electronic device receives a first user operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the second camera and the third camera to capture images. For example, the first operation is a user's selection operation of the multi-mirror mode. The electronic device responds to the first operation, and if the first collection parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a second interface; the second interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, and the second interface includes a second camera that collects data with the second collection parameter. The second preview image and the third preview image acquired by the third camera with the second acquisition parameters. The second acquisition parameter is smaller than the first acquisition parameter.
综上所述,采用本申请实施例的方法,电子设备在从使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式,切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式后,若检测到切换前使用的采集参数大于预设参数阈值,则可以在切换后将采集参数降低。例如,预设参数阈值是1080p,切换前采用的分 辨率为4K,大于预设参数阈值,则在切换后可将分辨率降为1080p。由于采用两个摄像头采集图像时,产生的视频文件的大小近似为单个摄像头的两倍,通过上述调节采集参数的方式,则有利于控制视频文件的大小,避免生成过大的视频文件。从而方便后续存储和使用。如此,可以提升视频拍摄的智能性,合理控制视频文件的大小。In summary, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, after the electronic device switches from the mode of using a single camera to capture images to the mode of using two cameras to capture images, if it detects that the capture parameters used before switching are greater than the preset parameters threshold, you can reduce the acquisition parameters after switching. For example, the preset parameter threshold is 1080p, and the resolution used before the switch is 4K, and if it is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the resolution can be reduced to 1080p after the switch. Since the size of the generated video file is approximately twice that of a single camera when two cameras are used to collect images, the above method of adjusting the acquisition parameters is beneficial to control the size of the video file and avoid generating an excessively large video file. Thereby, subsequent storage and use are convenient. In this way, the intelligence of video shooting can be improved, and the size of video files can be reasonably controlled.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,电子设备响应于第一操作,若第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,电子设备显示第三界面;第三界面是电子设备录像的取景界面,第三界面包括第二摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第四预览图像和第三摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第五预览图像。In another possible design of the first aspect, the electronic device responds to the first operation, and if the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device , the third interface includes a fourth preview image captured by the second camera with the first capture parameters and a fifth preview image captured by the third camera with the first capture parameters.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,电子设备在从使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式,切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式后,若检测到切换前使用的采集参数并未超过预设参数阈值,则可以在切换后继续采用切换前的采集参数。例如,预设参数阈值是1080p,切换前采用的分辨率为1080p,未超过预设参数阈值,则在切换后依然可采用分辨率为1080p。That is to say, using the method of this embodiment, after the electronic device switches from the mode of using a single camera to capture images to the mode of using two cameras to capture images, if it is detected that the capture parameters used before the switch do not exceed the preset parameters threshold, the acquisition parameters before the switch can continue to be used after the switch. For example, the preset parameter threshold is 1080p, and the resolution adopted before switching is 1080p. If the preset parameter threshold is not exceeded, the resolution of 1080p can still be adopted after switching.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第一采集参数包括第一帧率,第二采集参数包括第二帧率,第二帧率小于第一帧率。其中,第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,包括:第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, the first collection parameter includes a first frame rate, the second collection parameter includes a second frame rate, and the second frame rate is lower than the first frame rate. Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,采集参数包括帧率。相应的,在切换前的帧率大于预设帧率阈值的情况下,在切换后,可降低帧率。例如,预设帧率阈值是30帧,切换前的帧率为60帧,大于预设帧率,则在切换后可将帧率调整为30帧。That is to say, with the method of this embodiment, the collection parameters include the frame rate. Correspondingly, in the case that the frame rate before the switching is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, the frame rate may be reduced after the switching. For example, the preset frame rate threshold is 30 frames, and the frame rate before switching is 60 frames, which is greater than the preset frame rate, then the frame rate can be adjusted to 30 frames after switching.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第一采集参数包括第一分辨率,第二采集参数包括第二分辨率,第二分辨率小于第一分辨率。其中,第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,包括:第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, the first collection parameter includes a first resolution, the second collection parameter includes a second resolution, and the second resolution is smaller than the first resolution. Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,采集参数包括分辨率。相应的,在切换前的分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值的情况下,在切换后,可降低分辨率。That is to say, with the method of this embodiment, the acquisition parameters include resolution. Correspondingly, if the resolution before the switching is greater than the preset resolution threshold, the resolution may be reduced after the switching.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第一采集参数包括第一帧率和第一分辨率,第二采集参数包括第二帧率和第二分辨率;第二帧率小于第一帧率,和/或,第二分辨率小于第一分辨率。其中,第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,包括:第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值,和/或,第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值。In another possible design of the first aspect, the first acquisition parameters include a first frame rate and a first resolution, and the second acquisition parameters include a second frame rate and a second resolution; the second frame rate is less than the first A frame rate, and/or, the second resolution is less than the first resolution. Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,采集参数同时包括帧率和分辨率。相应的,在切换前的帧率和分辨率中的至少一者大于相应的预设参数阈值的情况下,在切换后,则需将超过预设参数阈值的调低。例如,分辨率高于预设分辨率阈值,则调低分辨率。帧率高于预设帧率阈值,则调低帧率。分辨率高于预设分辨率阈值,且帧率高于预设帧率阈值,则同时调低分辨率和帧率。That is to say, with the method of this embodiment, the acquisition parameters include frame rate and resolution at the same time. Correspondingly, if at least one of the frame rate and the resolution before the switching is greater than the corresponding preset parameter threshold, after the switching, the frame rate or the resolution exceeding the preset parameter threshold needs to be lowered. For example, if the resolution is higher than the preset resolution threshold, the resolution is reduced. If the frame rate is higher than the preset frame rate threshold, the frame rate will be reduced. If the resolution is higher than the preset resolution threshold and the frame rate is higher than the preset frame rate threshold, the resolution and frame rate will be reduced at the same time.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在电子设备显示第二界面之后,电子设备接收用户对第二界面的第二操作,第二操作用于触发电子设备切换使用第四摄像头采集图像。电子设备响应于第二操作,显示第四界面,第四界面是电子设备录像的取景界面,第四界面中包括第四摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第六预览图像。第六预览图像全屏显示在第四界面中。In another possible design of the first aspect, after the electronic device displays the second interface, the electronic device receives the user's second operation on the second interface, and the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the fourth camera to capture image. In response to the second operation, the electronic device displays a fourth interface, the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, and the fourth interface includes a sixth preview image collected by the fourth camera with the first collection parameters. The sixth preview image is displayed in the fourth interface in full screen.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,在调低采集参数后,当再次切回使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式,则可以恢复以第一采集参数采集预览图像。例如,在单前置模式下,第一 采集参数是4K,若在切换为前后双镜模式后,将分辨率降低为1080p。此后,再次切换至单前置模式或者单后置模式,则可将分辨率恢复为4K。如此,可以在合理控制视频文件的大小的同时,提升视频文件的品质。例如,恢复到4K后,采集的图像,比以1080p采集的图像的清晰度更高。That is to say, by adopting the method of this embodiment, after the collection parameter is lowered, when switching back to the mode of using a single camera to collect images again, the preview image can be collected with the first collection parameter again. For example, in the single front mode, the first acquisition parameter is 4K, if after switching to the front and rear dual mirror mode, reduce the resolution to 1080p. After that, switch to single front mode or single rear mode again to restore the resolution to 4K. In this way, the quality of the video file can be improved while controlling the size of the video file reasonably. For example, after reverting to 4K, the captured image has higher definition than the image captured at 1080p.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第二界面中还包括第一提示信息,第一提示信息用于提示已切换分辨率和/或帧率。例如,第一提示信息为“使用两个摄像头采集图像时,不支持以4k、60帧采集图像”In another possible design manner of the first aspect, the second interface further includes first prompt information, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the resolution and/or frame rate have been switched. For example, the first prompt message is "When using two cameras to capture images, it does not support capturing images at 4k and 60 frames"
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,电子设备可以明确提示用户已调整采集参数。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can explicitly prompt the user that the collection parameters have been adjusted.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第一界面是电子设备录像前的取景界面,第二界面是电子设备录像前的取景界面。或者,第一界面是电子设备正在录像的取景界面,第二界面是电子设备正在录像的取景界面。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, the first interface is a viewfinder interface before the electronic device records, and the second interface is the viewfinder interface before the electronic device records. Alternatively, the first interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,电子设备可以在录像前或者正在录像的过程中,完成采集参数的智能调节,以合理控制视频文件的大小。其中,在录像前调节,可以控制以合理的采集参数开始视频录制。在正在录像的过程中调节,则可以控制每种模式下都以合理的采集参数来采集图像。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can complete the intelligent adjustment of the collection parameters before or during the video recording, so as to reasonably control the size of the video file. Among them, the adjustment before recording can control the start of video recording with reasonable acquisition parameters. Adjust during the recording process, you can control each mode to acquire images with reasonable acquisition parameters.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在录像前的取景界面中,可以设置摄像头的采集参数。其中,在使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式下,可以设置大于预设参数阈值的采集参数。以第一界面为例,若第一界面是电子设备录像前的取景界面。在电子设备显示第一界面之后,电子设备可接收用户对第一界面的第三操作,第三操作用于触发电子设备设置采集参数。例如,第一界面中显示有设置按钮,第三操作可以是对设置按钮的点击操作。电子设备响应于用户对第一界面的第三操作,显示参数选项,参数选项中包括第一选项,第一选项对应第三采集参数,第三采集参数大于预设参数阈值。可见,在使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式下,电子设备可提供大于预设参数阈值的采集参数供用户选择。电子设备接收用户对第一选项的选择操作。电子设备响应于选择操作,设置采集参数为第三采集参数。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, in the viewfinder interface before recording, the acquisition parameters of the camera can be set. Wherein, in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, collection parameters greater than a preset parameter threshold can be set. Taking the first interface as an example, if the first interface is a viewfinder interface before video recording by the electronic device. After the electronic device displays the first interface, the electronic device may receive a third user operation on the first interface, where the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set the acquisition parameters. For example, a setting button is displayed on the first interface, and the third operation may be a click operation on the setting button. In response to the user's third operation on the first interface, the electronic device displays parameter options, the parameter options include a first option, the first option corresponds to a third acquisition parameter, and the third acquisition parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold. It can be seen that, in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, the electronic device can provide collection parameters greater than the preset parameter threshold for the user to select. The electronic device receives a user's selection operation on the first option. In response to the selection operation, the electronic device sets the collection parameter as the third collection parameter.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,在使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式下,电子设备可提供大于预设参数阈值的采集参数供用户选择设置,从而可以设置较高的分辨率和/或帧率,以提升视频文件的质量。That is to say, using the method of this embodiment, in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, the electronic device can provide collection parameters greater than the preset parameter threshold for the user to choose and set, so that a higher resolution and/or frame can be set. rate to improve the quality of the video file.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在录像前的取景界面中,可以设置摄像头的采集参数。其中,在使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式下,不能设置大于预设参数阈值的采集参数。以第二界面为例,第二界面是电子设备录像前的取景界面。在电子设备显示第二界面之后,电子设备接收用户对第二界面的第三操作,第三操作用于触发电子设备设置采集参数。电子设备响应于用户对第二界面的第三操作,显示参数选项,参数选项中不包括第一选项,或者,第一选项处于不可选择的状态。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, in the viewfinder interface before recording, the acquisition parameters of the camera can be set. Wherein, in the mode of using two cameras to collect images, the collection parameters larger than the preset parameter threshold cannot be set. Taking the second interface as an example, the second interface is a viewfinder interface before video recording by the electronic device. After the electronic device displays the second interface, the electronic device receives a third operation performed by the user on the second interface, and the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set collection parameters. In response to the user's third operation on the second interface, the electronic device displays parameter options, where the first option is not included in the parameter options, or the first option is in an unselectable state.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,在使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式下,电子设备不提供可选择的、大于预设参数阈值的采集参数供用户选择设置。从而可以禁止在使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式下,设置较高的分辨率和/或帧率,以合理控制视频文件的大小。That is to say, with the method of this embodiment, in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, the electronic device does not provide optional collection parameters greater than the preset parameter threshold for the user to select and set. Therefore, it may be prohibited to set a higher resolution and/or frame rate in the mode of using two cameras to capture images, so as to reasonably control the size of the video file.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,该方法可以应用于手机、平板等支持拍摄视频的电子设备。其中,在横屏状态、正在录像的过程中,随着用户切换左右手持 握电子设备,电子设备可以改变界面元素的布局,以避免用户手指出镜。该方法可以应用于各种多镜子模式中,下面仅以前述第一方面及其任一可能的实现方式中的第二界面来说明本申请方案,实际实施时,可以将第二界面替换为横屏状态下,以任意多镜子模式正在录像中的取景界面。In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets that support video shooting. Among them, in the horizontal screen state and in the process of recording, as the user switches the left and right hands to hold the electronic device, the electronic device can change the layout of the interface elements to avoid the user's fingers pointing to the mirror. This method can be applied to various multi-mirror modes. The solution of this application will be described below using only the second interface in the aforementioned first aspect and any of its possible implementations. In actual implementation, the second interface can be replaced by a horizontal In the screen state, the viewfinder interface that is recording in any multi-mirror mode.
以第二界面为例,第二界面是电子设备正在录像的取景界面,第二界面中包括第一控件和第二控件,第一控件用于指示电子设备当前采用的录制模式(即多镜子模式,如前后双镜模式、画中画模式等),以及用于触发电子设备切换录制模式。第二控件用于触发电子设备切换后置摄像头,例如,第二控件是变焦条。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第一握持状态,即右手持握的状态,例如,电子设备的底部靠近用户的右手的状态,电子设备则在电子设备的屏幕的第一区域显示第一控件,在屏幕的第二区域显示第二控件。第一区域是横屏状态下,位于屏幕的上边缘、靠近屏幕的右边缘的区域,第二区域是横屏状态下,位于屏幕的下边缘、靠近屏幕的左边缘的区域。也就是说,在右手持握的状态下,则将第一控件显示在屏幕中方便右手大拇指操作的位置,将第二控件显示无需左手持握电子设备的顶部,即可方便操作的位置。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第二持握状态,即左手持握的状态,例如,电子设备的底部靠近用户的左手的状态,电子设备则在屏幕的第三区域显示第一控件,在屏幕的第四区域显示第二控件。第三区域是横屏状态下,位于屏幕的上边缘、靠近屏幕的左边缘的区域;第四区域是横屏状态下,位于屏幕的下边缘、靠近屏幕的右边缘的区域。也就是说,在左手持握的状态下,则将第一控件显示在屏幕中方便左手大拇指操作的位置,将第二控件显示无需右手持握电子设备的顶部,即可方便操作的位置。Taking the second interface as an example, the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording. The second interface includes a first control and a second control. The first control is used to indicate the recording mode currently adopted by the electronic device (i.e. the multi-mirror mode). , such as front and rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, etc.), and for triggering electronic equipment to switch recording modes. The second control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the rear camera, for example, the second control is a zoom bar. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, that is, the right hand holding state, for example, the bottom of the electronic device is close to the user's right hand state, the electronic device will be in the first holding state of the screen of the electronic device. A first control is displayed in one area, and a second control is displayed in a second area of the screen. The first area is an area located at the top edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the landscape state, and the second area is an area located at the bottom edge of the screen and close to the left edge of the screen in the landscape state. That is to say, when the right hand is holding it, the first control is displayed on the screen at a position convenient for the thumb of the right hand to operate, and the second control is displayed at a position convenient for operation without holding the top of the electronic device with the left hand. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, that is, the state of holding the electronic device with the left hand, for example, the bottom of the electronic device is close to the user's left hand state, the electronic device will display in the third area of the screen The first control displays the second control in the fourth area of the screen. The third area is an area located at the top edge of the screen and close to the left edge of the screen in the landscape state; the fourth area is an area located at the bottom edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the landscape state. That is to say, when the left hand holds the electronic device, the first control is displayed on the screen at a position convenient for thumb operation of the left hand, and the second control is displayed at a position convenient for operation without holding the top of the electronic device with the right hand.
综上所述,采用本申请实施例的方法,电子设备可以在横屏状态、正在录像的过程中,随着用户切换左右手持握电子设备,改变界面元素的布局,从而方便在手指不出境的前提下,完成操作。如此,可以提升拍摄视频的质量。To sum up, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can change the layout of the interface elements when the electronic device is in the horizontal screen state and is in the process of recording, as the user switches the left and right hands to hold the electronic device. Under the premise, complete the operation. In this way, the quality of the captured video can be improved.
在第二方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第二界面中还包括第三控件,第三控件用于触发电子设备切换播放录制的视频的速度。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第一握持状态,电子设备在第一区域显示第三控件。也就是说,在右手持握的状态下,则将第三控件显示在屏幕中方便右手大拇指操作的位置,方便切换播放视频的速度。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第二持握状态,电子设备在第三区域显示第三控件。也就是说,在左手持握的状态下,则将第三控件显示在屏幕中方便左手大拇指操作的位置,方便切换播放视频的速度。In another possible design manner of the second aspect, the second interface further includes a third control, and the third control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the speed of playing the recorded video. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the third control in the first area. That is to say, when the right hand is holding it, the third control is displayed on the screen at a position convenient for the thumb of the right hand to switch the speed of playing the video. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays a third control in the third area. That is to say, when the left hand is holding the device, the third control is displayed on the screen at a position convenient for the thumb of the left hand to switch the speed of playing the video.
在第二方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第二界面中还包括第四控件,第四控件用于触发电子设备设置闪光灯。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第一握持状态,电子设备在第一区域显示第四控件。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第二持握状态,电子设备在第三区域显示第四控件。In another possible design manner of the second aspect, the second interface further includes a fourth control, and the fourth control is used to trigger the electronic device to set a flash. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays a fourth control in the first area. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays a fourth control in the third area.
在第二方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第二界面中包括录制计时。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第一握持状态,电子设备在屏幕的第五区域显示录制计时。第五区域是横屏状态下,位于屏幕的上边缘和屏幕的左边缘的相交位置附近的区域。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第二持握状态,电子设备在屏幕的第六区域显示录制计时。第六区域是横屏状态下,位于屏幕的上边缘和屏幕的右边缘的相交位置附 近的区域。In another possible design manner of the second aspect, the second interface includes recording timing. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the recording timing in the fifth area of the screen. The fifth area is an area near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the left edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the recording timing in the sixth area of the screen. The sixth area is an area located near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the right edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,将录制计时显示在远离当前持握电子设备的手,并且显示在上方的角落位置,可以方便用户查看。That is to say, by adopting the method of this embodiment, the recording timing is displayed at the upper corner away from the hand currently holding the electronic device, which is convenient for the user to view.
在第二方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第二预览图像显示在第二界面的第一窗口中,第三预览图像显示在第二界面的第二窗口中,第一窗口为全屏窗口,第二窗口位于第一窗口内。即,第二界面是画中画模式的取景界面。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第一握持状态,电子设备在第五区域的下方显示第二窗口。在横屏状态下,若电子设备检测到电子设备处于第二握持状态,电子设备在第六区域的下方显示第二窗口。In another possible design of the second aspect, the second preview image is displayed in the first window of the second interface, the third preview image is displayed in the second window of the second interface, and the first window is a full-screen window , the second window is inside the first window. That is, the second interface is a viewfinder interface in the picture-in-picture mode. In the landscape state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the second window below the fifth area. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the second window below the sixth area.
也就是说,相较于竖屏状态下,直接将小窗显示在屏幕的顶部角落位置,采用本实施例的方法,将小窗显示在录制计时下,可以避免对计时的遮挡。That is to say, compared with directly displaying the small window at the top corner of the screen in the vertical screen state, using the method of this embodiment to display the small window under the recording timing can avoid blocking the timing.
在第二方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,电子设备可以通过重力传感器或者天线来检测电子设备的状态。例如,重力传感器可以检测到电子设备的翻转变化,电子设备的天线的反射系数可以反映电子设备所处的持握状态。如此,电子设备可以准确的检测到电子设备当前处于第一持握状态或者第二持握状态。In another possible design manner of the second aspect, the electronic device may detect the state of the electronic device through a gravity sensor or an antenna. For example, the gravity sensor can detect the flip change of the electronic device, and the reflection coefficient of the antenna of the electronic device can reflect the holding state of the electronic device. In this way, the electronic device can accurately detect that the electronic device is currently in the first holding state or the second holding state.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,该方法可以应用于手机、平板等支持拍摄视频的电子设备。其中,电子设备显示第一界面,第一界面是电子设备录像前的取景界面,第一界面中包括第一摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第一预览图像,第一预览图像全屏显示在第一界面中;电子设备的摄像头的采集参数包括帧率和/或分辨率。也就是说,第一界面是使用单个摄像头采集图像的取景界面。在使用单个摄像头录像时,可以采用高于预设参数阈值的采集参数来采集预览图像,也可以采用低于或等于预设参数阈值的采集参数来采集预览图像。电子设备接收用户对第一界面的第一操作,第一操作用于触发电子设备开始录像。电子设备响应于第一操作,若第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,电子设备显示第二界面。第二界面是电子设备正在录像的取景界面,第二界面中包括第一摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第二预览图像和处于可操作状态的第一控件,该第一控件用于触发电子设备切换录制模式(即多镜子模式),录制模式包括使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。也就是说,在以使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式开始录像后,若采集参数小于预设参数阈值,则在正在录像的取景界面中提供可操作的第一控件,即该情况下允许切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。电子设备响应于第一操作,若第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,电子设备显示第三界面;第三界面是电子设备正在录像的取景界面,第三界面中包括第二预览图像,第三界面中不包括处于可操作状态的第一控件。也就是说,在以使用单个摄像头采集图像的模式开始录像后,若采集参数大于预设参数阈值,则在正在录像的取景界面中不提供可操作的第一控件,该情况下不允许切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets that support video shooting. Wherein, the electronic device displays a first interface, the first interface is a viewfinder interface before video recording by the electronic device, the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters, and the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the first In the interface; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution. That is to say, the first interface is a viewfinder interface for capturing images using a single camera. When using a single camera to record video, the preview image can be collected by using a collection parameter higher than the preset parameter threshold, or the preview image can be collected by using a collection parameter lower than or equal to the preset parameter threshold. The electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic device to start video recording. In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays a second interface if the first collection parameter is less than a preset parameter threshold. The second interface is the viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording. The second interface includes the second preview image collected by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters and the first control in an operable state. The first control is used to trigger the electronic device. Switch the recording mode (i.e. multi-mirror mode), the recording mode includes the mode of using two cameras to collect images. That is to say, after starting video recording in the mode of using a single camera to collect images, if the collection parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, an operable first control is provided in the video viewfinder interface, that is, in this case, it is allowed to switch to using The mode in which the two cameras capture images. In response to the first operation, if the first collection parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the third interface includes a second preview image, and the third interface The interface does not include the first control in an operable state. That is to say, after starting to record in the mode of using a single camera to capture images, if the capture parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, no operable first control will be provided in the viewfinder interface that is recording, and in this case it is not allowed to switch to Mode for capturing images using two cameras.
综上所述,采用本申请实施例的方法,在正在录像的过程中,只有采集参数小于预设参数阈值时,电子设备才允许切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式;而在采集参数大于预设参数阈值时,则不允许切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。如此,可以合理控制视频文件的大小。In summary, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, in the process of video recording, only when the acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, the electronic device is allowed to switch to the mode of using two cameras to acquire images; and when the acquisition parameter is greater than When the parameter threshold is preset, it is not allowed to switch to the mode of acquiring images with two cameras. In this way, the size of the video file can be reasonably controlled.
在第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第一采集参数包括第一帧率。其中,第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,包括:第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值;第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,包括:第一帧率小于预设帧率阈值。In another possible design manner of the third aspect, the first collection parameter includes a first frame rate. Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, includes: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,采集参数包括帧率。相应的,在使用单个摄像头采集图像时的帧率大于预设帧率阈值的情况下,则不允许切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。That is to say, with the method of this embodiment, the collection parameters include the frame rate. Correspondingly, in a case where the frame rate when using a single camera to capture images is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, switching to the mode of using two cameras to capture images is not allowed.
在第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第一采集参数包括第一分辨率。其中,第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,包括:第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值;第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,包括:第一分辨率小于预设分辨率阈值。In another possible design manner of the third aspect, the first collection parameter includes a first resolution. Wherein, the first acquisition parameter being greater than the preset parameter threshold includes: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold includes: the first resolution is less than the preset resolution threshold.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,采集参数包括分辨率。相应的,在使用单个摄像头采集图像时的分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值的情况下,则不允许切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。That is to say, with the method of this embodiment, the acquisition parameters include resolution. Correspondingly, in a case where the resolution of images captured by a single camera is greater than the preset resolution threshold, switching to the mode of capturing images by using two cameras is not allowed.
在第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第一采集参数包括第一帧率和第一分辨率。其中,第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,包括:第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值,和/或,第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值;第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,包括:第一帧率小于预设帧率阈值,和,第一分辨率小于预设分辨率阈值。In another possible design manner of the third aspect, the first acquisition parameters include a first frame rate and a first resolution. Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, It includes: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold, and the first resolution is less than the preset resolution threshold.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,采集参数同时包括帧率和分辨率。相应的,在切换前的帧率和分辨率中的至少一者大于相应的预设参数阈值的情况下,则不允许切换。而仅在两者都小于相应的预设参数阈值的情况下,才允许切换。That is to say, with the method of this embodiment, the acquisition parameters include frame rate and resolution at the same time. Correspondingly, if at least one of the frame rate and the resolution before the switching is greater than the corresponding preset parameter threshold, the switching is not allowed. And only when both are smaller than the corresponding preset parameter threshold, switching is allowed.
在第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在电子设备显示第二界面之后,电子设备接收用户对处于可操作状态的第一控件的第二操作,第二操作用于触发电子设备切换录制模式。电子设备响应于用户对处于可操作状态的第一控件的第二操作,在第二界面显示模式选项,模式选项中包括第一选项,第一选项对应使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。电子设备响应于用户对第一选项的选择操作,显示第四界面。第四界面是电子设备正在录像的取景界面,第四界面中包括第二摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第三预览图像和第三摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第四预览图像。In another possible design of the third aspect, after the electronic device displays the second interface, the electronic device receives the user's second operation on the first control in the operable state, and the second operation is used to trigger switching of the electronic device recording mode. In response to the user's second operation on the first control in the operable state, the electronic device displays mode options on the second interface, the mode options include the first option, and the first option corresponds to the mode of using two cameras to capture images. The electronic device displays a fourth interface in response to the user's selection operation on the first option. The fourth interface is a viewing interface where the electronic device is recording. The fourth interface includes the third preview image collected by the second camera with the first collection parameters and the fourth preview image collected by the third camera with the first collection parameters.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,在允许切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式的情况下,若完成切换,则可以继续沿用切换前的采集参数。如此,还可以保证切换前后的视频参数的一致性,从而提升用户的观看体验。例如,预设参数阈值是1080p,若切换前的采集参数是720p,则可以允许切换,并且切换前后的分辨率都是720p。即,分辨率不会发生变化,视频的清晰度是一致的。That is to say, with the method of this embodiment, in the case of allowing switching to the mode of capturing images using two cameras, if the switching is completed, the acquisition parameters before the switching can be continued to be used. In this way, the consistency of the video parameters before and after switching can also be ensured, thereby improving the viewing experience of the user. For example, the preset parameter threshold is 1080p, if the acquisition parameter before the switching is 720p, then the switching may be allowed, and the resolution before and after the switching is both 720p. That is, the resolution does not change, and the clarity of the video is consistent.
在第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第三界面中不包括处于可操作状态的第一控件具体为:第三界面中包括处于不可操作状态的第一控件。例如,不可操作状态的第一控件是置灰的模式图标。在电子设备显示第三界面之后,电子设备接收用户对处于不可操作状态的第一控件的第二操作,第二操作用于触发电子设备切换录制模式。电子设备响应于用户对处于不可操作状态的第一控件的第二操作,在第三界面中显示第一提示信息,第一提示信息用于提示不可切换使用两个摄像头采集图像。In another possible design manner of the third aspect, the third interface does not include the first control in the operable state specifically: the third interface includes the first control in the inoperable state. For example, the first control in an inoperable state is a grayed out mode icon. After the electronic device displays the third interface, the electronic device receives a user's second operation on the first control that is in an inoperable state, and the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode. In response to the user's second operation on the first control in the inoperable state, the electronic device displays first prompt information on the third interface, where the first prompt information is used to prompt that the two cameras cannot be switched to collect images.
也就是说,采用本实施例的方法,电子设备可以在用户误操作上述不可操作状态的第一控件后,明确提示用户当前无法切换到使用两个摄像头采集图像。从而提升人机交互的效率。That is to say, by using the method of this embodiment, the electronic device can clearly prompt the user that it is currently impossible to switch to using two cameras to capture images after the user misoperates the first control in the inoperable state. Thereby improving the efficiency of human-computer interaction.
在第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,第三界面中不包括处于可操作状态的第一控件具体为:第三界面中不包括第一控件。例如,第三界面中不包括面板展示控件。In another possible design manner of the third aspect, the third interface does not include the first control in an operable state specifically: the third interface does not include the first control. For example, the third interface does not include a panel display control.
第四方面,本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备,所述电子设备包括显示屏、存储器和一个或多个处理器。所述显示屏、所述存储器和所述处理器耦合。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备执行如下步骤:所述电子设备显示第一界面,所述第一界面是所述电子设备录像的取景界面,所述第一界面中包括第一摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第一预览图像;所述第一预览图像全屏显示在所述第一界面中;所述电子设备的摄像头的采集参数包括帧率和/或分辨率。所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一界面的第一操作,所述第一操作用于触发所述电子设备切换使用第二摄像头和第三摄像头采集图像。所述电子设备响应于所述第一操作,若所述第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,所述电子设备显示第二界面;所述第二界面是所述电子设备录像的取景界面,所述第二界面包括所述第二摄像头以第二采集参数采集的第二预览图像和所述第三摄像头以第二采集参数采集的第三预览图像;所述第二采集参数小于所述第一采集参数。In a fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, where the electronic device includes a display screen, a memory, and one or more processors. The display screen, the memory and the processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is made to perform the following steps: the electronic device displays a first interface, The first interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the electronic device, and the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters; the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the first In the interface; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution. The electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the second camera and the third camera to capture images. In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays a second interface if the first acquisition parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold; the second interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, so The second interface includes the second preview image collected by the second camera with the second collection parameters and the third preview image collected by the third camera with the second collection parameters; the second collection parameter is smaller than the first Collect parameters.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述电子设备响应于所述第一操作,若所述第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,所述电子设备显示第三界面;所述第三界面是所述电子设备录像的取景界面,所述第三界面包括所述第二摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第四预览图像和所述第三摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第五预览图像。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following step: the electronic device responds to the first operation, if The first collection parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, and the electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, and the third interface includes the second camera with the The fourth preview image collected by the first collection parameters and the fifth preview image collected by the third camera with the first collection parameters.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第一采集参数包括第一帧率,所述第二采集参数包括第二帧率,所述第二帧率小于所述第一帧率;其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the first acquisition parameter includes a first frame rate, the second acquisition parameter includes a second frame rate, and the second frame rate is lower than the first frame rate rate; wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第一采集参数包括第一分辨率,所述第二采集参数包括第二分辨率,所述第二分辨率小于所述第一分辨率;其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the first acquisition parameter includes a first resolution, the second acquisition parameter includes a second resolution, and the second resolution is smaller than the first resolution rate; wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第一采集参数包括第一帧率和第一分辨率,所述第二采集参数包括第二帧率和第二分辨率;所述第二帧率小于所述第一帧率,和/或,所述第二分辨率小于所述第一分辨率;其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值,和/或,所述第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the first collection parameters include a first frame rate and a first resolution, and the second collection parameters include a second frame rate and a second resolution; the The second frame rate is less than the first frame rate, and/or, the second resolution is less than the first resolution; wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the The first frame rate is greater than a preset frame rate threshold, and/or, the first resolution is greater than a preset resolution threshold.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述电子设备接收用户对所述第二界面的第二操作,所述第二操作用于触发所述电子设备切换使用第四摄像头采集图像;所述电子设备响应于所述第二操作,显示第四界面,所述第四界面是所述电子设备录像的取景界面,所述第四界面中包括第四摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第六预览图像;所述第六预览图像全屏显示在所述第四界面中。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: the electronic device receives the user's response to the second interface The second operation, the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the fourth camera to capture images; the electronic device displays a fourth interface in response to the second operation, and the fourth interface is the electronic In the viewfinder interface of device video recording, the fourth interface includes a sixth preview image captured by the fourth camera with the first acquisition parameters; the sixth preview image is displayed in full screen on the fourth interface.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第二界面中还包括第一提示信息,所述第一提示信息用于提示已切换分辨率和/或帧率。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the second interface further includes first prompt information, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the resolution and/or frame rate have been switched.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第一界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面,所述第二界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面;或者,所述第一界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第二界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the first interface is the viewfinder interface before the electronic device records, and the second interface is the viewfinder interface before the electronic device records; or, the The first interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第一界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面;当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一界面的第三操作,所述第三操作用于触发所述电子设备设置所述采集参数;所述电子设备响应于用户对所述第一界面的所述第三操作,显示参数选项,所述参数选项中包括第一选项,所述第一选项对应第三采集参数,所述第三采集参数大于预设参数阈值;所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一选项的选择操作;所述电子设备响应于所述选择操作,设置所述采集参数为第三采集参数;In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the first interface is a viewfinder interface before recording by the electronic device; when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device also executes The following steps: the electronic device receives a third operation performed by the user on the first interface, and the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set the collection parameters; the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the first The third operation on the interface is to display parameter options, the parameter options include a first option, the first option corresponds to a third acquisition parameter, and the third acquisition parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold; the electronic device receives The user selects the first option; the electronic device sets the collection parameter as a third collection parameter in response to the selection;
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第二界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面;当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述电子设备接收用户对所述第二界面的第三操作,所述第三操作用于触发所述电子设备设置所述采集参数;所述电子设备响应于用户对所述第二界面的所述第三操作,显示参数选项,所述参数选项中不包括所述第一选项,或者,所述第一选项处于不可选择的状态。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the second interface is a viewfinder interface before recording by the electronic device; when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device also executes The following steps: the electronic device receives a third operation performed by the user on the second interface, and the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set the collection parameters; the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second interface The third operation on the interface is to display parameter options, and the parameter options do not include the first option, or the first option is in an unselectable state.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第二界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第二界面中包括第一控件和第二控件,所述第一控件用于指示所述电子设备当前采用的录制模式,以及用于触发所述电子设备切换录制模式;所述第二控件用于触发所述电子设备切换后置摄像头。当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:在横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述电子设备的屏幕的第一区域显示所述第一控件,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第二区域显示所述第二控件;所述第一持握状态用于指示用户右手持握所述电子设备;所述第一区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的上边缘、靠近所述屏幕的右边缘的区域;所述第二区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的下边缘、靠近所述屏幕的左边缘的区域。在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二持握状态,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第三区域显示所述第一控件,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第四区域显示所述第二控件;所述第二持握状态用于指示用户左手持握所述电子设备;所述第三区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的上边缘、靠近所述屏幕的左边缘的区域;所述第四区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的下边缘、靠近所述屏幕的右边缘的区域。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the second interface includes a first control and a second control, and the first control It is used to indicate the recording mode currently adopted by the electronic device, and is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode; the second control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the rear camera. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device The device displays the first control in the first area of the screen of the electronic device, and the electronic device displays the second control in the second area of the screen; the first holding state is used to indicate that the user's right hand Holding the electronic device; the first area is an area located on the upper edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state; the second area is in the horizontal screen state , located at the bottom edge of the screen, near the left edge of the screen. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the first control in the third area of the screen, and the electronic device displays the first control in the third area of the screen. The fourth area of the screen displays the second control; the second holding state is used to indicate that the user holds the electronic device with his left hand; the third area is in the horizontal screen state and is located on the screen The upper edge of the screen is an area close to the left edge of the screen; the fourth area is an area located at the lower edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第二界面中还包括第三控件,所述第三控件用于触发所述电子设备切换播放录制的视频的速度。当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述第一区域显示所述第三控件;在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二持握状态,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示所述第三控件。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the second interface further includes a third control, and the third control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the speed of playing the recorded video. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the The electronic device displays the third control in the first area; in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device in the second holding state Three areas display the third control.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第二界面中还包括第四控件,所述第四控件用于触发所述电子设备设置闪光灯。当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述第一区域显示所述第四控件。在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二持握状态,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示所述第四控件。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the second interface further includes a fourth control, and the fourth control is used to trigger the electronic device to set a flash. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the The electronic device displays the fourth control in the first area. In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the fourth control in the third area.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第二界面中包括录制计时。当所述计 算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第五区域显示所述录制计时;所述第五区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的上边缘和所述屏幕的左边缘的相交位置附近的区域。在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二持握状态,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第六区域显示所述录制计时;所述第六区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的上边缘和所述屏幕的右边缘的相交位置附近的区域。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the second interface includes recording timing. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the The electronic device displays the recording timing in a fifth area of the screen; the fifth area is an area near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the left edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state . In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the recording timing in the sixth area of the screen; the sixth area is In the horizontal screen state, an area near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the right edge of the screen.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第二预览图像显示在所述第二界面的第一窗口中,所述第三预览图像显示在所述第二界面的第二窗口中,所述第一窗口为全屏窗口,所述第二窗口位于所述第一窗口内。当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述第五区域的下方显示所述第二窗口;在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二握持状态,所述电子设备在所述第六区域的下方显示所述第二窗口。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the second preview image is displayed in the first window of the second interface, and the third preview image is displayed in the second window of the second interface In the above, the first window is a full-screen window, and the second window is located in the first window. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following steps: in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the The electronic device displays the second window below the fifth area; in the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device The second window is displayed below the sixth area.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述电子设备根据所述电子设备的天线的反射系数确定所述电子设备所处的持握状态。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is further executed the following step: The coefficients determine the holding state in which the electronic device is held.
第五方面,本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备,所述电子设备包括显示屏、存储器和一个或多个处理器。所述显示屏、所述存储器和所述处理器耦合。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备执行如下步骤:所述电子设备显示第一界面,所述第一界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面,所述第一界面中包括第一摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第一预览图像,所述第一预览图像全屏显示在所述第一界面中;所述电子设备的摄像头的采集参数包括帧率和/或分辨率;所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一界面的第一操作,所述第一操作用于触发所述电子设备开始录像;所述电子设备响应于所述第一操作,若所述第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,所述电子设备显示第二界面;所述第二界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第二界面中包括所述第一摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第二预览图像和处于可操作状态的第一控件;所述电子设备响应于所述第一操作,若所述第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,所述电子设备显示第三界面;所述第三界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第三界面中包括所述第二预览图像,所述第三界面中不包括所述处于可操作状态的第一控件;其中,所述第一控件用于触发所述电子设备切换录制模式,所述录制模式包括使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。In a fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, where the electronic device includes a display screen, a memory, and one or more processors. The display screen, the memory and the processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is made to perform the following steps: the electronic device displays a first interface, The first interface is a viewfinder interface before recording of the electronic device, and the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters, and the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the second In an interface; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution; the electronic device receives a first user operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic The device starts video recording; the electronic device responds to the first operation, and if the first acquisition parameter is less than a preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a second interface; the second interface is that the electronic device is recording The viewfinder interface, the second interface includes a second preview image captured by the first camera with the first acquisition parameters and a first control in an operable state; the electronic device responds to the first operation , if the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the third interface includes the second preview image, the third interface does not include the first control in an operable state; wherein, the first control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode, and the recording mode includes using two cameras to capture The mode of the image.
在第五方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第一采集参数包括第一帧率;其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值;所述第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率小于所述预设帧率阈值。In another possible design of the fifth aspect, the first acquisition parameter includes a first frame rate; wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, and includes: the first frame rate Greater than a preset frame rate threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than a preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold.
在第五方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述第一采集参数包括第一分辨率;其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值;所述所述第一采集参数小于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一分辨率小于所述预设分辨率阈值。In another possible design manner of the fifth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device is caused to further perform the following steps: the first acquisition parameter includes a first resolution; wherein , the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, including: the The first resolution is smaller than the preset resolution threshold.
在第五方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述第一采集参数包括第一帧率和第一分辨率;其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值,和/或,所述第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值;所述第一采集参数小于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率小于所述预设帧率阈值,和,所述第一分辨率小于所述预设分辨率阈值。In another possible design of the fifth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: the first collection parameter includes the first frame rate and the second A resolution; wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution Threshold: the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold, and the first resolution is less than the preset resolution threshold.
在第五方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述电子设备接收用户对所述处于可操作状态的第一控件的第二操作,所述第二操作用于触发所述电子设备切换录制模式;所述电子设备响应于用户对所述处于可操作状态的第一控件的所述第二操作,在所述第二界面显示模式选项,所述模式选项中包括第一选项,所述第一选项对应使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式;所述电子设备响应于用户对所述第一选项的选择操作,显示第四界面;所述第四界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第四界面中包括第二摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第三预览图像和第三摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第四预览图像。In another possible design of the fifth aspect, when the computer instruction is executed by the processor, the electronic device further performs the following step: a second operation of the first control, the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode; the electronic device responds to the user's second operation on the first control in an operable state, Mode options are displayed on the second interface, the mode options include a first option, and the first option corresponds to the mode of using two cameras to capture images; the electronic device responds to the user's selection of the first option Operate and display a fourth interface; the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the fourth interface includes a third preview image and a third camera captured by the second camera with the first acquisition parameters A fourth preview image collected with the first collection parameters.
在第五方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第三界面中包括处于不可操作状态的第一控件。当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备还执行如下步骤:所述电子设备接收用户对所述处于不可操作状态的第一控件的第二操作,所述第二操作用于触发所述电子设备切换录制模式;所述电子设备响应于用户对所述处于不可操作状态的第一控件的所述第二操作,在所述第三界面中显示第一提示信息,所述第一提示信息用于提示不可切换使用两个摄像头采集图像。In another possible design manner of the fifth aspect, the third interface includes a first control in an inoperable state. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device further executes the following step: the electronic device receives a second operation by the user on the first control in an inoperable state, and the second operation It is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode; the electronic device displays the first prompt information in the third interface in response to the user’s second operation on the first control in the inoperable state, and the The first prompt information is used to prompt that the two cameras cannot be switched to collect images.
在第五方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,所述第三界面中不包括所述第一控件。In another possible design manner of the fifth aspect, the third interface does not include the first control.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种芯片系统,该芯片系统应用于包括显示屏和存储器的电子设备;所述芯片系统包括一个或多个接口电路和一个或多个处理器;所述接口电路和所述处理器通过线路互联;所述接口电路用于从所述电子设备的存储器接收信号,并向所述处理器发送所述信号,所述信号包括所述存储器中存储的计算机指令;当所述处理器执行所述计算机指令时,所述电子设备执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which is applied to an electronic device including a display screen and a memory; the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors; the interface The circuit and the processor are interconnected by a line; the interface circuit is configured to receive a signal from a memory of the electronic device and send the signal to the processor, the signal including computer instructions stored in the memory; When the processor executes the computer instruction, the electronic device executes the method described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect and any possible design manner thereof.
第七方面,本申请提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect and The method described in any of its possible designs.
第八方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如第一方面、第二方面、第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product. When the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect, the second aspect, the second aspect and any possible design thereof. method described in the method.
可以理解地,上述提供的第四方面和第五方面所述的电子设备,第六方面所述的芯片系统,第七方面所述的计算机存储介质,第八方面所述的计算机程序产品所能达到的有益效果,可参考第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that the electronic device described in the fourth aspect and the fifth aspect provided above, the chip system described in the sixth aspect, the computer storage medium described in the seventh aspect, and the computer program product described in the eighth aspect can For the beneficial effects achieved, reference may be made to the beneficial effects in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect and any possible design manner thereof, and details are not repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的硬件结构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2A为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之一;FIG. 2A is one of the schematic diagrams of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图2B为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二;FIG. 2B is the second schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图2C为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三;FIG. 2C is the third schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图2D为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之四;FIG. 2D is the fourth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图2E为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之五;FIG. 2E is the fifth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图2F为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之六;FIG. 2F is the sixth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图3A为本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法的流程图之一;FIG. 3A is one of the flowcharts of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图3B为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之七;Fig. 3B is the seventh schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图3C为本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法的流程图之二;FIG. 3C is the second flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之八;Fig. 4 is the eighth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的视频文件的构成示意图之一;Fig. 5 is one of the schematic diagrams of the composition of the video file provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6A为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十;FIG. 6A is the tenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6B为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十一;FIG. 6B is the eleventh schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6C为本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法的流程图之三;FIG. 6C is the third flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6D为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十二;FIG. 6D is the twelveth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6E为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十三;FIG. 6E is the thirteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6F为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十四;FIG. 6F is the fourteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6G为本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法的流程图之四;FIG. 6G is the fourth flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6H为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十五;FIG. 6H is the fifteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7A为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十六;FIG. 7A is the sixteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7B为本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法的流程图之五;FIG. 7B is the fifth flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7C为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十七;FIG. 7C is the seventeenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7D为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十八;FIG. 7D is the eighteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7E为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之十九;FIG. 7E is the nineteenth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7F为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十;FIG. 7F is the twenty-first schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8A为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十一;FIG. 8A is the twenty-first schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8B为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十二;FIG. 8B is the twenty-second schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8C为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十三;FIG. 8C is the twenty-third schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8D为本申请实施例提供的视频文件的构成示意图之二;FIG. 8D is the second schematic diagram of the composition of the video file provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8E为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十四;FIG. 8E is the twenty-fourth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8F为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十五;FIG. 8F is the twenty-fifth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9A为本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法的流程图之六;FIG. 9A is the sixth flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9B为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十六;FIG. 9B is the twenty-sixth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9C为本申请实施例提供的视频文件的构成示意图之三;FIG. 9C is the third schematic diagram of the composition of the video file provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10A为本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法的流程图之七;FIG. 10A is the seventh flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10B为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十七;FIG. 10B is the twenty-seventh schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10C为本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法的流程图之八;FIG. 10C is the eighth flowchart of the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10D为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十八;FIG. 10D is the twenty-eighth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10E为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之二十九;FIG. 10E is the twenty-ninth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10F为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三十;FIG. 10F is the thirty-thirtieth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10G为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三十一;FIG. 10G is the thirty-first schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10H为本申请实施例提供的视频文件的构成示意图之四;FIG. 10H is the fourth schematic diagram of the composition of the video file provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11A为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三十二;Fig. 11A is the thirty-second schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11B为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三十三;Fig. 11B is the thirty-third schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12A为本申请实施例提供的手机的位置示意图;FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram of the position of the mobile phone provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12B为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三十四;Fig. 12B is the thirty-fourth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12C为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三十五;Fig. 12C is the thirty-fifth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12D为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三十六;Fig. 12D is the thirty-sixth schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12E为本申请实施例提供的手机界面的示意图之三十七;Fig. 12E is the thirty-seventh schematic diagram of the mobile phone interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种芯片系统的结构示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Thus, a feature defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more.
下面将结合附图对本实施例的实施方式进行详细描述。The implementation of this embodiment will be described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法,可以应用于支持相机功能的电子设备。示例性的,该电子设备可以是手机、平板电脑、桌面型、膝上型、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本,以及蜂窝电话、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)\虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备等设备,本申请实施例对该设备的具体形态不作特殊限制。The video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be applied to an electronic device supporting a camera function. Exemplary, the electronic device can be a mobile phone, tablet computer, desktop, laptop, handheld computer, notebook computer, ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), netbook, and cellular phone, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)\virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment and other equipment, the embodiment of the present application does not make special restrictions on the specific form of the equipment.
请参考图1,图1为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的结构示意图。如图1所示,以电子设备是手机100为例,手机100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。Please refer to FIG. 1 , which is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, taking the electronic device as a mobile phone 100 as an example, the mobile phone 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, and a charging management module 140 , power management module 141, battery 142, antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, an indicator 192, a camera 193, a display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的结构并不构成对手机100的具体限定。在另一些实施例中,手机100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure shown in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the mobile phone 100 . In other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) Wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
控制器可以是手机100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the handset 100 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过手机100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为手机供电。The charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger. Wherein, the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 can receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 can receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the mobile phone 100 . While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also provide power for the mobile phone through the power management module 141 .
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 . The power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 . The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 . In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be set in the same device.
手机100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the mobile phone 100 can be realized by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
手机100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The mobile phone 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194, and the application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。该显示屏194是上述折叠屏(如柔性折叠屏或多屏折叠屏)。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 194 is the above-mentioned folding screen (such as a flexible folding screen or a multi-screen folding screen). The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
手机100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及APP处理器等实现拍摄功能。The mobile phone 100 can realize the shooting function through ISP, camera 193, video codec, GPU, display screen 194 and APP processor.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展手机100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等媒体文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the mobile phone 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other media files in the external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行手机100的各种功能APP以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储手机100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions. The processor 110 executes various functions APP and data processing of the mobile phone 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 . The internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data. Wherein, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like. The storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the mobile phone 100 . In addition, the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
手机100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接 口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The mobile phone 100 can implement audio functions through an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, an earphone interface 170D, and an application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。手机100可以接收按键输入,产生与手机100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like. The key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The mobile phone 100 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile phone 100 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder. The motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations applied to different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) may correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 may also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the display screen 194 . Different application scenarios (for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和手机100的接触和分离。手机100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。手机100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,手机100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在手机100中,不能和手机100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card. The SIM card can be connected and separated from the mobile phone 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 . The mobile phone 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The mobile phone 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication. In some embodiments, the mobile phone 100 adopts eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the mobile phone 100 and cannot be separated from the mobile phone 100 .
下文实施例中的视频拍摄方法,可以在具有上述硬件结构的手机100中实现。The video shooting method in the following embodiments can be implemented in the mobile phone 100 having the above hardware structure.
本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法,可以应用于手机100中各种需要拍摄视频的场景中,例如,婚礼现场、朋友聚会、旅游等场景。并且,近些年来,随着视频平台的发展,出现了各种新型的视频形式,其中一种典型的形式是视频日志(video log,vlog),vlog是以影像代替文字或相片,来承载日志的内容的形式。在拍摄vlog的过程中,通常需要拍摄多个对象,例如,拍摄用户自身和用户所在环境。或者,需要以不同的视觉来拍摄同一对象,例如,以近景和远景拍摄同一舞台现场。The video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to various scenes requiring video shooting in the mobile phone 100, for example, wedding scene, friend gathering, travel and other scenes. Moreover, in recent years, with the development of video platforms, various new forms of video have emerged, one of which is a typical form of video log (video log, vlog), and vlog uses images instead of text or photos to carry logs form of content. In the process of shooting a vlog, it is usually necessary to shoot multiple objects, for example, to shoot the user himself and the environment where the user is located. Or, the same subject needs to be photographed with different visions, for example, a close-up and a distant view of the same stage scene.
然而,受限于常规技术中视频拍摄功能的限制,通常难以满足上述新型的视频形式中的需求。However, limited by the limitation of the video shooting function in the conventional technology, it is usually difficult to meet the above-mentioned requirements in the new video format.
基于此,本申请实施例提供了一种视频拍摄方法,该视频拍摄方法基于一种新的视频拍摄功能来实现。其中,该视频拍摄功能也可以称为多镜录像模式,与光圈、夜景、人像、拍照、录像等多种常见的拍摄模式构成相机功能的多种拍摄模式。并且,采用多镜录像模式,手机100可同时开启至少两个摄像头来采集预览图像并在取景界面中同时显示该至少两个摄像头采集的预览图像。Based on this, an embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which is implemented based on a new video shooting function. Wherein, the video shooting function may also be called a multi-lens video recording mode, which constitutes multiple shooting modes of the camera function together with various common shooting modes such as aperture, night scene, portrait, photo taking, and video recording. Moreover, in the multi-camera recording mode, the mobile phone 100 can simultaneously turn on at least two cameras to capture preview images and simultaneously display the preview images captured by the at least two cameras in the viewfinder interface.
示例性的,图2A中的(a)示出的相机应用的取景界面201a中包括子菜单202a,该子菜单202a中不仅包括光圈、夜景、人像、拍照、录像等多种常见的拍摄模式,还包括多镜录像模式。而后,用户选择该多镜录像模式,则可触发手机100开启多镜录像。例如,手机响应于用户对该多镜录像模式的选择操作,可显示图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203。该取景界面203a中包括摄像头a采集的预览图像204a和摄像头b采集的预览图像205a。即,有两个摄像头在同时采集预览图像。Exemplarily, the viewfinder interface 201a of the camera application shown in (a) in FIG. 2A includes a submenu 202a, and the submenu 202a not only includes various common shooting modes such as aperture, night scene, portrait, photo taking, and video recording, but A multi-camera recording mode is also included. Then, the user selects the multi-camera video recording mode, which can trigger the mobile phone 100 to start the multi-camera video recording. For example, the mobile phone may display the viewfinder interface 203 shown in (b) of FIG. 2A in response to the user's selection operation of the multi-camera recording mode. The viewing interface 203a includes a preview image 204a captured by camera a and a preview image 205a captured by camera b. That is, there are two cameras capturing preview images at the same time.
应注意,图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中仅包括两个摄像头采集的预览图像。 但是实际实施时,多镜录像模式的取景界面中还可以包括三个摄像头、四个摄像头……采集的预览图像,本申请实施例并不以图2A中的(b)示出的摄像头的数量为限。在下文实施例中,将主要以两个摄像头为例来说明本申请方案。It should be noted that the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A only includes preview images captured by the two cameras. However, during actual implementation, the viewfinder interface of the multi-mirror video recording mode may also include preview images collected by three cameras, four cameras... the embodiment of the present application does not use the number of cameras shown in (b) in FIG. 2A limit. In the following embodiments, two cameras will be used as an example to illustrate the solution of the present application.
应理解,在采用摄像头a和摄像头b,即两个摄像头,同时采集预览图像的场景中,该摄像头a和摄像头b可以是手机100的多个摄像头中任两个摄像头的组合。例如,图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中,摄像头a可以是后置主摄像头,摄像头b可以是前置摄像头。又如,图2B中的(a)示出的取景界面201b中,包括后置长焦摄像头采集的预览图像202b和后置广角摄像头采集的预览图像203b。即,摄像头a可以是后置长焦摄像头,摄像头b可以是后置广角摄像头。It should be understood that, in the scenario where camera a and camera b, that is, two cameras are used to capture preview images at the same time, camera a and camera b may be a combination of any two cameras among the multiple cameras of the mobile phone 100 . For example, in the viewing interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A , camera a may be a rear main camera, and camera b may be a front camera. As another example, the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) of FIG. 2B includes a preview image 202b captured by the rear telephoto camera and a preview image 203b captured by the rear wide-angle camera. That is, camera a may be a rear telephoto camera, and camera b may be a rear wide-angle camera.
应注意,图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中预览图像204a和预览图像205a以分屏布局来显示。实际实施时,在多镜录像模式的取景界面中,两个摄像头采集的预览图像还可以以画中画布局来显示。示例性的,手机还可以显示图2B中的(b)示出的取景界面204b,该取景界面204b中包括摄像头a采集的预览图像205b和摄像头b采集的预览图像206b。其中,预览图像205b显示在大窗(即全屏窗口)205B中,预览图像206b显示在小窗206B中,并且,小窗206B在大窗205B内。即,预览图像205b和预览图像206b以画中画布局显示。It should be noted that the preview image 204a and the preview image 205a in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A are displayed in a split-screen layout. In actual implementation, in the viewfinder interface of the multi-camera recording mode, the preview images collected by the two cameras can also be displayed in a picture-in-picture layout. Exemplarily, the mobile phone may also display a viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) of FIG. 2B , where the viewfinder interface 204b includes a preview image 205b collected by camera a and a preview image 206b collected by camera b. Wherein, the preview image 205b is displayed in the large window (ie full-screen window) 205B, the preview image 206b is displayed in the small window 206B, and the small window 206B is inside the large window 205B. That is, the preview image 205b and the preview image 206b are displayed in a picture-in-picture layout.
另外,在一些实施例中,在多镜录像模式中,手机100可以响应于用户的操作从两个摄像头切换到单个摄像头来取景(具体的实现方式可参见下文中实施例一的说明)。也就是说,多镜录像模式中也可以提供单个摄像头采集预览图像的功能。In addition, in some embodiments, in the multi-camera recording mode, the mobile phone 100 can switch from two cameras to a single camera to take a view in response to the user's operation (for the specific implementation, please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below). That is to say, in the multi-camera recording mode, the function of collecting preview images by a single camera can also be provided.
示例性的,在多镜录像模式中,手机100可以显示图2C中的(a)示出的取景界面201c。该取景界面201c中包括单个摄像头(如前置摄像头)采集的预览图像202c。或者,手机可以显示图2C中的(b)示出的取景界面203c。该取景界面203c中包括单个摄像头(如后置主摄像头)采集的预览图像204c。Exemplarily, in the multi-camera video recording mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 2C . The viewfinder interface 201c includes a preview image 202c captured by a single camera (such as a front camera). Alternatively, the mobile phone may display the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (b) of FIG. 2C. The viewfinder interface 203c includes a preview image 204c captured by a single camera (such as a rear main camera).
在多镜录像模式的取景界面中,除包括摄像头采集的预览图像外,通常还包括以下元素(如控件、图标)中的一个或多个:In the viewfinder interface of the multi-mirror video recording mode, in addition to the preview image captured by the camera, one or more of the following elements (such as controls and icons) are usually included:
图库资源控件:图库资源控件用于触发手机100展示已拍摄的图片或者视频。例如,图库资源控件是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件210。Gallery resource control: the gallery resource control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the captured pictures or videos. For example, the gallery resource control is the control 210 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
录制控件:录制控件用于触发手机100开始录制视频。例如,录制控件是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件211。Recording control: the recording control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start recording video. For example, the recording control is the control 211 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
前后摄像头切换控件:前后置摄像头控件用于触发手机100切换前置摄像头和后置摄像头。例如,前后摄像头切换控件是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件212。关于前后置摄像头切换的具体内容可参见下文中实施例一的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Front and rear camera switching controls: the front and rear camera controls are used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch between the front camera and the rear camera. For example, the control for switching the front and rear cameras is the control 212 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A . For the specific content of switching between the front and rear cameras, please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, which will not be described in detail here.
拍摄模式切换控件:拍摄模式切换控件用于触发手机100切换拍摄模式。例如,图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中包括子菜单202a,子菜单202a中的“拍照”是拍照模式的切换控件,“录像”是录像模式的切换控件,“多镜录像”是多镜录像模式的切换控件。Shooting mode switching control: the shooting mode switching control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch the shooting mode. For example, the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A includes a submenu 202a. ” is the switching control of multi-camera recording mode.
美颜控件:美颜控件用于触发手机100调节美颜级别。例如,美颜控件是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件213。关于美颜调节的具体内容可参见下文中实施例二的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Beautification control: the beautification control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to adjust the beautification level. For example, the beauty control is the control 213 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A . For the specific content of the beauty adjustment, please refer to the description of the second embodiment below, and will not be described in detail here.
微电影控件:微电影控件用于触发手机100拍摄微电影。例如,微电影控件是图2A 中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件214。关于微电影拍摄的具体内容化可参见下文中关于实施例六的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Microfilm control: the microfilm control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to shoot a microfilm. For example, the micro-movie control is the control 214 in the viewing interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A. For the specific content of the micro-movie shooting, please refer to the description of Embodiment 6 below, and no detailed description will be given here.
模式图标:模式图标用于指示手机100当前采用的多镜子模式,即,当前采集预览图像的摄像头,以及预览图像的布局。例如,模式图标是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的图标215。该图标215由空白矩形和带有笑脸的矩形构成,空白矩形表示后置摄像头,带有笑脸的矩形表示前置摄像头。并且,空白矩形和带有笑脸的矩形上下排列,表示预览图像以上下布局显示。Mode icon: the mode icon is used to indicate the multi-mirror mode currently adopted by the mobile phone 100 , that is, the camera currently capturing the preview image, and the layout of the preview image. For example, the mode icon is the icon 215 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A. The icon 215 is composed of a blank rectangle and a rectangle with a smiling face, the blank rectangle represents a rear camera, and the rectangle with a smile represents a front camera. And, a blank rectangle and a rectangle with a smiley face are arranged one above the other, indicating that the preview image is displayed in a top-bottom layout.
应注意,在每种多镜子模式下,手机100可以特定摄像头采集预览图像,并将预览图像以特定布局显示。其中,特定摄像头可以是手机100中的任一个摄像头,或者是手机100中的任意两个摄像头的组合。特定布局包括分屏布局、画中画布局和/或全屏布局。It should be noted that, in each multi-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 can capture preview images with a specific camera, and display the preview images in a specific layout. Wherein, the specific camera may be any camera in the mobile phone 100 , or a combination of any two cameras in the mobile phone 100 . Specific layouts include split-screen layouts, picture-in-picture layouts, and/or full-screen layouts.
在下文实施例中,为方便说明,主要以多镜子模式包括:采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集预览图像,并以分屏布局显示的模式(简称为前后双镜模式,如图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a对应的多镜子模式);采用两个后置摄像头采集预览图像,并以分屏布局显示的模式(简称为后后双镜模式,如图2B中的(a)示出的取景界面201b对应的多镜子模式);采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集预览图像,并以画中画布局显示的模式(简称为画中画模式,如图2B中的(b)示出的取景界面204b对应的多镜子模式);以及,采用一个前置摄像头或者一个后置摄像头采集预览图像,并以全屏布局显示的模式(若采用前置摄像头,则简称为单前置模式,如图2C中的(a)示出的取景界面201c对应的多镜子模式;若采用后置摄像头,则简称为单后置模式,如图2C中的(b)示出的取景界面203c对应的多镜子模式)。In the following embodiments, for convenience of description, the multi-mirror mode mainly includes: a mode in which a front camera and a rear camera are used to capture preview images and display them in a split-screen layout (referred to as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, as shown in Figure 2A The multi-mirror mode corresponding to the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b)); the mode in which two rear cameras are used to collect preview images and display them in a split-screen layout (referred to as the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, as shown in Figure 2B (a) the multi-mirror mode corresponding to the viewfinder interface 201b shown); adopt a front camera and a rear camera to collect preview images, and display the mode with the picture-in-picture layout (abbreviated as picture-in-picture mode, as shown in Figure 2B The multi-mirror mode corresponding to the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) in (b); It is a single front mode, such as the multi-mirror mode corresponding to the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in Figure 2C; if a rear camera is used, it is simply called a single rear mode, as shown in (b) in Figure 2C The multi-mirror mode corresponding to the viewfinder interface 203c).
通常情况下,手机100响应于用户对多镜录像模式的选择操作,则默认进入前后双镜模式的取景界面。也就是说,多镜录像模式中,默认的多镜子模式是前后双镜模式。而其它多镜子模式则是直接或者间接从前后双镜模式切换而得到的。Usually, the mobile phone 100 enters the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode by default in response to the user's selection operation of the multi-mirror video recording mode. That is to say, in the multi-mirror recording mode, the default multi-mirror mode is the front and rear dual-mirror mode. Other multi-mirror modes are directly or indirectly obtained by switching from the front and rear dual-mirror modes.
闪光灯图标:闪光灯图标用于触发手机100设置拍摄时的闪光灯参数。例如,闪光灯图标是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的图标216。Flash light icon: the flash light icon is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to set the flash light parameters when shooting. For example, the flashlight icon is the icon 216 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A .
滤镜图标:滤镜图标用于触发手机100添加拍摄时的滤镜。例如,滤镜图标是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的图标217。关于添加滤镜的具体内容化可参见下文中关于实施例三的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Filter icon: the filter icon is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to add a filter when shooting. For example, the filter icon is the icon 217 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A. For the specific content of adding filters, please refer to the description of Embodiment 3 below, and no detailed description will be given here.
设置图标:设置图标218用于触发手机100设置相机参数。例如,设置图标是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的图标218。Setting icon: the setting icon 218 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to set camera parameters. For example, the setting icon is the icon 218 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A.
变焦控件:变焦控件用于触发手机100调节变焦倍率,从而在多个后置摄像头之间切换。例如,变焦控件是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的变焦条219,手机100响应于用户对该变焦条219的滑动操作,可切换到相应的后置摄像头来采集预览图像。关于通过变焦条切换后置摄像头的具体内容可参加下文中关于实施例一的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Zoom control: the zoom control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to adjust the zoom ratio, so as to switch between multiple rear cameras. For example, the zoom control is the zoom bar 219 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. . For the specific content of switching the rear camera through the zoom bar, please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, and will not be described in detail here.
关于多镜录像模式,前文主要以录像前的取景取景界面来示意说明。应理解,在多镜录像模式中,录制中开启的摄像头及其数量、预览图像的布局等,基本与录像前类似。Regarding the multi-camera recording mode, the previous article mainly uses the viewfinder interface before recording to illustrate. It should be understood that in the multi-camera recording mode, the number of cameras turned on during recording, the layout of preview images, etc. are basically similar to those before recording.
示例性的,在采用两个摄像头取景的场景中。在录像前,手机100可以显示图2A中的(b)示出的录像前的取景界面203a,在录制中,手机100则可以显示图2D中的(a) 示出的取景界面201d。该取景界面201d中包括摄像头a(如后置主摄像头)采集的预览图像202d和摄像头b(如前置摄像头)采集的预览图像203d。其中,预览图像202d和预览图像203d以分屏布局显示。Exemplarily, in a scene where two cameras are used for framing. Before recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203a before recording shown in (b) in FIG. 2A, and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG. 2D. The viewfinder interface 201d includes a preview image 202d collected by camera a (such as a rear main camera) and a preview image 203d collected by camera b (such as a front camera). Wherein, the preview image 202d and the preview image 203d are displayed in a split-screen layout.
或者,在录像前,手机100可以显示图2B中的(a)示出的取景界面201b,在录制中,手机100则可以显示图2D中的(b)示出的取景界面204d。该取景界面204d中包括摄像头a(如后置长焦摄像头)采集的预览图像205d和摄像头b(如后置广角摄像头)采集的预览图像206d。其中,预览图像205d和预览图像206d以分屏布局显示。Or, before recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) in FIG. 2B , and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) in FIG. 2D . The viewing interface 204d includes a preview image 205d collected by camera a (such as a rear telephoto camera) and a preview image 206d collected by camera b (such as a rear wide-angle camera). Wherein, the preview image 205d and the preview image 206d are displayed in a split-screen layout.
或者,在录像前,手机100可以显示图2B中的(b)示出的录像前的取景界面204b,在录制中,手机100则可以显示图2D中的(c)示出的取景界面207d。该取景界面207d中包括摄像头a(如后置主摄像头)采集的预览图像208d和摄像头b(如前置摄像头)采集的预览图像209d。预览图像208d显示在大窗(即全屏窗口)208D中,预览图像209d显示在小窗209D中。其中,大窗208D中包括小窗209D。即,预览图像208d和预览图像209d以画中画布局显示。Or, before recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 204b before recording shown in (b) in FIG. 2B , and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 207d shown in (c) in FIG. 2D . The viewing interface 207d includes a preview image 208d collected by camera a (such as a rear main camera) and a preview image 209d collected by camera b (such as a front camera). A preview image 208d is displayed in a large window (ie, a full screen window) 208D, and a preview image 209d is displayed in a small window 209D. Wherein, the large window 208D includes a small window 209D. That is, the preview image 208d and the preview image 209d are displayed in a picture-in-picture layout.
又示例性的,在采用单个摄像头取景的场景中。在录像前,手机100可以显示图2C中的(a)示出的取景界面201c,在录制中,手机100则可以显示图2E中的(a)示出的取景界面201e。该取景界面201e中包括单个摄像头(如前置摄像头)采集的预览图像202e。Also exemplary, in a scene where a single camera is used to view the scene. Before recording, the mobile phone 100 may display a viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 2C , and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display a viewfinder interface 201e shown in (a) in FIG. 2E . The viewing interface 201e includes a preview image 202e captured by a single camera (such as a front camera).
或者,在录像前,手机100可以显示图2C中的(b)示出的取景界面203c,在录制中,手机100则可以显示图2E中的(b)示出的取景界面203e。该取景界面203e中包括单个摄像头(如后置主摄像头)采集的预览图像204e。Or, before recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (b) in FIG. 2C, and during recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203e shown in (b) in FIG. 2E. The viewfinder interface 203e includes a preview image 204e captured by a single camera (such as a rear main camera).
应注意,在多镜录像模式中,录制中的取景界面中的元素和录像前的取景界面中的元素会有所不用。通常情况下,在录制中的取景界面中,还可以包括以下元素中的一个或多个:It should be noted that in the multi-camera recording mode, the elements in the viewfinder interface during recording and the elements in the viewfinder interface before recording will be different. Usually, one or more of the following elements can also be included in the viewfinder interface in recording:
拍照控件:拍照控件用于触发手机100在拍摄视频过程中截取视频帧。例如,拍照控件是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的控件220。Camera control: the camera control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to capture video frames during video shooting. For example, the camera control is the control 220 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
结束录制控件:结束录制控件用于触发手机100结束视频录制。例如,结束录制控件是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的控件221。End recording control: the end recording control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to end video recording. For example, the control to end recording is the control 221 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
暂停录制控件:暂停录制控件用于触发手机100暂停视频录制。例如,暂停录制控件是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的控件222。Pause recording control: The pause recording control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to pause video recording. For example, the pause recording control is the control 222 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D .
前后摄像头切换控件:与录像前的取景界面类似的,录制中的取景界面中也包括前后置摄像头控件。例如,前后摄像头切换控件是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的控件223。同样的,关于前后置摄像头切换的具体内容可参见下文中实施例一的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Front and rear camera switching controls: Similar to the viewfinder interface before recording, the viewfinder interface during recording also includes front and rear camera controls. For example, the control for switching the front and rear cameras is the control 223 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D . Similarly, for the specific content of switching between the front and rear cameras, please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, which will not be described in detail here.
面板展示控件:面板展示控件用于触发手机100展示多镜子模式的选择面板。例如,面板展示控件是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的控件224。其中,该模式面板选择控件可以是静态的,或者,该面板展示控件也可以是动态的。若动态显示面板展示控件,可以吸引用户对该面板展示控件的关注。从而引导用户使用该控件。关于该选择面板,以及通过该选择面板切换多镜子模式的具体内容,可参见下文中实施例一的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Panel display control: the panel display control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the selection panel of the multi-mirror mode. For example, the panel display control is the control 224 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D . Wherein, the mode panel selection control may be static, or the panel display control may also be dynamic. If the panel display control is dynamically displayed, the user's attention can be attracted to the panel display control. Thereby guiding the user to use the control. For the selection panel and the specific content of switching the multi-mirror mode through the selection panel, please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, and no detailed description will be given here.
模式图标:与录像前类似,录制中的取景界面中也包括模式图标。例如,模式图标是 图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的控件225。Mode icon: Similar to before recording, the mode icon is also included in the viewfinder interface during recording. For example, the mode icon is the control 225 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D.
倍速标识:倍速标识用于指示手机100播放当前预览帧的倍速。例如,倍速标识是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的标识226,该标识226指示手机100将以1倍速播放当前预览帧。应注意,在录像过程中,可以暂停录制,暂停状态下倍速标识处于不可操作的状态,如置灰状态。即,暂停状态下无法调整播放视频的倍速。关于切换倍速值,并倍速播放的具体内容,可参见下文实施例五的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Double-speed logo: the double-speed logo is used to indicate the double speed at which the mobile phone 100 plays the current preview frame. For example, the double-speed logo is the logo 226 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D , and the logo 226 indicates that the mobile phone 100 will play the current preview frame at 1X speed. It should be noted that during the recording process, the recording can be paused. In the paused state, the double speed indicator is in an inoperable state, such as grayed out. That is, the multiplier speed of the video playback cannot be adjusted in the paused state. For the specific content of switching the double speed value and playing at double speed, please refer to the description of the fifth embodiment below, and no detailed description will be given here.
闪光灯图标:与录像前类似,录制中的取景界面中也包括闪光灯图标。应注意,视频录制过程中通常不允许调整闪光灯参数,因此,录制中的闪光灯图标是不可操作的。例如,闪光灯图标是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的图标227,该图标227置灰,表示不可操作。Flash light icon: Similar to before recording, the viewfinder interface during recording also includes a flash light icon. It should be noted that flash parameters are usually not allowed to be adjusted during video recording, therefore, the flash icon during recording is inoperable. For example, the flashlight icon is the icon 227 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D , and the icon 227 is grayed out, indicating that it is inoperable.
变焦控件:与录像前类似,录制中的取景界面中也包括变焦控件。例如,变焦控件是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的变焦条228,手机100响应于用户对该变焦条228的滑动操作,可切换到相应的后置摄像头来采集预览图像。关于通过变焦条切换后置摄像头的具体内容可参加下文中关于实施例一的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Zoom controls: Similar to pre-recording, the viewfinder interface during recording also includes zoom controls. For example, the zoom control is the zoom bar 228 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. . For the specific content of switching the rear camera through the zoom bar, please refer to the description of Embodiment 1 below, and will not be described in detail here.
前文中,主要以竖屏形式来说明多镜录像模式。应理解,横屏形式下也基本与竖屏形式类似。关于横屏形式与竖屏形式的细微不同之处,在下文实施例的相关内容中再做说明,此处暂不做详细说明。In the above, the multi-camera recording mode is mainly explained in the form of vertical screen. It should be understood that the horizontal screen mode is also basically similar to the vertical screen mode. The subtle differences between the horizontal screen format and the vertical screen format will be described later in the relevant content of the embodiments below, and will not be described in detail here.
下文实施例中,将结合前文对多镜录像模式的说明,并主要以多镜录像模式中的前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置(或后置)模式为例,来依次进一步说明多镜录像模式中的模式切换功能(如实施例一)、美颜功能(如实施例二)、滤镜功能(如实施例三)、高分辨率录制和/或高帧率录制(如实施例四)、倍速功能(实施例五)以及微电影功能(实施例六)。In the following embodiments, the description of the multi-mirror video recording mode will be combined with the foregoing, and the front and rear dual-mirror modes, the rear and rear dual-mirror modes, the picture-in-picture mode, and the single front (or rear) mode in the multi-mirror video mode will be mainly used. As an example, let’s further illustrate the mode switching function (such as Embodiment 1), beauty function (such as Embodiment 2), filter function (such as Embodiment 3), high-resolution recording and/or High frame rate recording (such as Embodiment 4), double speed function (Embodiment 5) and micro movie function (Embodiment 6).
实施例一,模式切换功能。 Embodiment 1, mode switching function.
本申请实施例提供的一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。其中,在多镜录像模式的取景界面(包括录像前的取景界面和录制中的取景界面)中,手机100可以响应于用户的操作1而显示多个模式选项供用户选择。其中,每个模式选项对应一种多镜子模式。而后,手机100响应于用户对任一模式选项的选择操作,则可以切换到相应的多镜子模式。从而可以实现在录像前或者录制中灵活的切换多镜子模式。A video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . Among them, in the viewfinder interface of the multi-camera recording mode (including the viewfinder interface before recording and the viewfinder interface during recording), the mobile phone 100 may display multiple mode options for the user to select in response to the user's operation 1 . Wherein, each mode option corresponds to a multi-mirror mode. Then, the mobile phone 100 may switch to the corresponding multi-mirror mode in response to the user's selection operation on any mode option. In this way, it is possible to flexibly switch the multi-mirror mode before recording or during recording.
下面分别以录像前和录制中的切换来说明本申请方案。The solution of this application will be described below by switching before recording and during recording respectively.
第一,录像前切换多镜子模式。在录像前,操作1主要是指用户对模式图标的点击操作。First, switch to multi-mirror mode before recording. Before recording, operation 1 mainly refers to the user's click operation on the mode icon.
本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,可以在多镜录像模式中、开始录像前切换多镜子模式。如图3A所示,该视频拍摄方法包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can switch the multi-mirror mode before starting to record in the multi-mirror video recording mode. As shown in Figure 3A, the video shooting method includes:
S301a、手机100显示界面a,该界面a是以子模式1录像前的取景界面。该界面a中包括子模式1的模式图标1。其中,子模式1包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式或者单后置模式。S301a, the mobile phone 100 displays interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface before recording in sub-mode 1. The interface a includes the mode icon 1 of the sub-mode 1 . Wherein, sub-mode 1 includes front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode or single rear mode.
S302a、手机100响应于用户对模式图标1的点击操作,在界面a中显示多个模式选项。其中,多个模式选项和多个多镜子模式一一对应。S302a. The mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options in interface a in response to the user's click operation on the mode icon 1 . Wherein, multiple mode options correspond to multiple multi-mirror modes one by one.
示例性的,子模式1是前后双镜模式,则界面a可以是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界 面203a,模式图标1可以是取景界面203a中的图标215。手机100响应于用户对图标215的点击操作,可在图3B中的(a)示出的取景界面203a中进一步显示选择面板310。该选择面板310中包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式和单后置模式共5个模式的模式选项。Exemplarily, sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, then interface a may be the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A , and mode icon 1 may be the icon 215 in the viewfinder interface 203a. In response to the user's click operation on the icon 215, the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 310 on the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (a) of FIG. 3B. The selection panel 310 includes mode options of five modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode.
在一些实施例中,每个模式选项中可以包括多镜子模式的标识,用于指示不同的多镜子模式。例如,图3B中的(a)的选择面板310中的简称“前/后”表示前后双镜模式。又如,图3B中的(a)的选择面板310中的简称“画中画”表示画中画模式。In some embodiments, each mode option may include an identifier of a multi-mirror mode, which is used to indicate a different multi-mirror mode. For example, the abbreviation "Front/Rear" in the selection panel 310 of (a) in FIG. 3B indicates a front-rear dual-mirror mode. As another example, the abbreviation "picture in picture" in the selection panel 310 of (a) in FIG. 3B indicates the picture in picture mode.
在另一些实施例中,每个模式选中可以包括多镜子模式的布局样式,用于指示多镜子模式下摄像头采集的预览图像在取景界面中的布局。其中,手机100可以通过图片、图片大小以及图片的排列来表示布局样式。其中,图片可以是摄像头实时采集的,也可以是预先设置的。采用本实施例,可以在切换多镜子模式前,向用户提供各种多镜子模式的布局样式,可以方便快速、准确的切换。从而提高切换的效率和准确性。In some other embodiments, each mode selection may include a layout style of the multi-mirror mode, which is used to indicate the layout of the preview image captured by the camera in the multi-mirror mode in the viewfinder interface. Wherein, the mobile phone 100 may represent the layout style by means of pictures, picture sizes and arrangement of pictures. Wherein, the picture may be collected by the camera in real time, or may be preset. By adopting this embodiment, before switching the multi-mirror mode, the layout styles of various multi-mirror modes can be provided to the user, and the switching can be convenient, fast and accurate. Thus, the switching efficiency and accuracy are improved.
例如,图3B中的(a)的选择面板310中以植物图片表示后置摄像头采集的预览图像,以人像图片表示前置摄像头采集的预览图像,则植物图片和人脸图片上下排列可以指示前后双镜模式的布局效果。For example, in the selection panel 310 of (a) in FIG. 3B, the preview image collected by the rear camera is represented by a plant picture, and the preview image collected by the front camera is represented by a portrait picture, and the vertical arrangement of the plant picture and the face picture can indicate the front and back. The layout effect of the dual mirror mode.
又如,图3B中的(a)的选择面板310中以植物图片表示后置摄像头采集的预览图像,以人像图片表示前置摄像头采集的预览图像,则植物图片显示在人脸图片内可以指示画中画双镜模式的布局效果。As another example, in the selection panel 310 of (a) in Fig. 3B, the preview image collected by the rear camera is represented by the plant picture, and the preview image collected by the front camera is represented by the portrait picture, then the plant picture can be indicated in the face picture. The layout effect of the picture-in-picture dual-mirror mode.
在一些实施例中,在多个模式选项中,当前采用的多镜子模式(如子模式1)的模式选项可突出显示。从而便于指示当前采用的多镜子模式。In some embodiments, among the plurality of mode options, the mode option of the currently employed multi-mirror mode (eg, sub-mode 1) may be highlighted. This facilitates indicating the currently employed multi-mirror mode.
仍以子模式1是前后双镜模式为例,图3B中的(a)的选择面板310中。前后双镜模式的模式选项的布局样式边框加粗显示。从而达到突出的效果。Still taking the sub-mode 1 as the front and rear dual-mirror mode as an example, in the selection panel 310 of (a) in FIG. 3B . The layout style frame of the mode options of the front and rear dual-mirror mode is displayed in bold. So as to achieve outstanding effect.
在一些实施例中,在未显示多个模式选项时,手机100以状态1显示模式图标(如模式图标1)。该情况下,手机100响应于用户对模式图标的点击操作,可显示多个模式选项。在显示多个模式选项时,手机100以状态2显示模式图标(如模式图标1)。该情况下,手机100响应于用户对模式图标的点击操作,可关闭多个模式选项的显示。例如,状态1是正常显示的状态,状态2是置灰状态。从而可以通过模式图标的显示状态来指示模式选项的显示与关闭状态,实现界面元素之间的统一。In some embodiments, the mobile phone 100 displays a mode icon (eg, mode icon 1 ) in state 1 when multiple mode options are not displayed. In this case, the mobile phone 100 may display a plurality of mode options in response to the user's click operation on the mode icon. When displaying multiple mode options, the mobile phone 100 displays a mode icon (eg, mode icon 1 ) in state 2 . In this case, the mobile phone 100 may close the display of multiple mode options in response to the user's click operation on the mode icon. For example, state 1 is a normal display state, and state 2 is a grayed state. Therefore, the display state of the mode option can be indicated by the display state of the mode icon, so as to realize the unification of the interface elements.
在一些实施例中,在显示多个模式选项时,手机100关闭前后摄像头切换控件。例如,图3B中的(a)示出的取景界面203a的右下角处不再显示前后摄像头切换控件。在显示多个模式选项的情况下,用户的需求通常是通过模式选项来切换多镜子模式,而不是通过前后摄像头切换控件来切换摄像头。此时,关闭前后摄像头切换控件的显示,一方面不会影响用户的需求,另一方面可以简化界面元素,便于切换多镜子模式的操作。In some embodiments, when multiple mode options are displayed, the mobile phone 100 closes the front and rear camera switching controls. For example, the front and rear camera switching controls are no longer displayed at the lower right corner of the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (a) of FIG. 3B . In the case of displaying multiple mode options, the user's demand is usually to switch the multi-mirror mode through the mode option, rather than switching the camera through the front and rear camera switching controls. At this time, turning off the display of the front and rear camera switching controls will not affect the user's needs on the one hand, and on the other hand, it can simplify the interface elements and facilitate the operation of switching the multi-mirror mode.
上述关于S302a的说明中,主要以子模式1是前后双镜模式来说明。应理解,子模式1是后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式或者单后置模式时的原理也是类似的。下面仅简单的示出子模式1分别是后后双镜模式、画中画模式和单后置模式时,显示多个模式选项的示意图。In the above description about S302a, it is mainly explained that the sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode. It should be understood that the principle when the sub-mode 1 is a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, a picture-in-picture mode, a single front mode or a single rear mode is also similar. The following simply shows a schematic diagram of displaying multiple mode options when the sub-mode 1 is respectively the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the picture-in-picture mode and the single rear mode.
示例一,子模式1是后后双镜模式,则界面a可以是图2B中的(a)示出的取景界面201b,模式图标1可以是取景界面201b中的图标230。手机100响应于用户对图标230的 点击操作,可在图3B中的(b)示出的取景界面201b中进一步显示选择面板311。该选择面板311中包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式和单后置模式共5个模式的模式选项。其中,后后双镜模式的模式选项突出显示。Example 1, if the sub-mode 1 is the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the interface a may be the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) of FIG. 2B , and the mode icon 1 may be the icon 230 in the viewfinder interface 201b. In response to the user's click operation on the icon 230, the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 311 in the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (b) of FIG. 3B. The selection panel 311 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of the rear dual-mirror mode is highlighted.
示例二,子模式1是画中画模式,则界面a可以是图2B中的(b)示出的取景界面204b,模式图标1可以是取景界面204b中的图标231。手机100响应于用户对图标231的点击操作,可在图3B中的(c)示出的取景界面204b中进一步显示选择面板312。该选择面板312中包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式和单后置模式共5个模式的模式选项。其中,画中画模式的模式选项突出显示。Example 2, if the sub-mode 1 is the picture-in-picture mode, the interface a may be the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) of FIG. 2B , and the mode icon 1 may be the icon 231 in the viewfinder interface 204b. In response to the user's click operation on the icon 231, the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 312 on the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (c) of FIG. 3B. The selection panel 312 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of the picture-in-picture mode is highlighted.
示例三,子模式1是单后置模式(单前置时同理),则界面a可以是图2C中的(b)示出的取景界面203c,模式图标1可以是取景界面203c中的图标232。手机100响应于用户对图标232的点击操作,可在图3B中的(d)示出的取景界面203c中进一步显示选择面板313。该选择面板313中包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式和单后置模式共5个模式的模式选项。其中,单后置模式的模式选项突出显示。Example 3, sub-mode 1 is a single rear mode (single front mode is the same), then interface a can be the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (b) in Figure 2C, and mode icon 1 can be an icon in the viewfinder interface 203c 232. In response to the user's click operation on the icon 232, the mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 313 on the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (d) of FIG. 3B. The selection panel 313 includes 5 mode options including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of single rear mode is highlighted.
应注意,在一些实施例中,在子模式1是单前置模式或者单后置模式的情况下,手机100显示多个模式选项时,可以仅显示前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式的模式选项,同时保留前后摄像头切换控件。如此,在减少对取景界面的改动的前提下,通过多个模式选项,可以切换到前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式;通过前后摄像头切换控件可以在单前置模式和单后置模式之间切换。It should be noted that, in some embodiments, when sub-mode 1 is a single front mode or a single rear mode, when the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options, only the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode and Mode options for picture-in-picture mode while retaining front and rear camera switching controls. In this way, on the premise of reducing the changes to the viewfinder interface, through multiple mode options, you can switch to front and rear dual mirror mode, rear and rear dual mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode; through the front and rear camera switching controls, you can switch between single front mode and Switch between single rear mode.
实际中,多个模式选项的显示可能遮挡取景界面中的预览图像,从而影响预览。In practice, the display of multiple mode options may block the preview image in the viewfinder interface, thereby affecting the preview.
基于此,在一些实施例中,在取景界面中显示多个模式选项的情况下,手机100可响应于用户的操作(如操作2)而隐藏多个模式选项,从而灵活关闭多个模式选项的显示,避免对预览图像造成遮挡。Based on this, in some embodiments, when multiple mode options are displayed on the viewfinder interface, the mobile phone 100 can hide the multiple mode options in response to the user's operation (such as operation 2), thereby flexibly turning off the multiple mode options. display to avoid blocking the preview image.
其中,操作2可以是用户在取景界面输入的预设手势1。例如,操作2可以是用户在图3B中的(b)示出的取景界面201b中输入的下滑手势。或者,操作2可以是用户对多个模式选项之外的,且未显示图标、控件等元素的区域的点击操作或者长按操作。或者,取景界面中包括面板隐藏控件,操作2可以是用户对面板隐藏控件的点击操作。其中,该面板隐藏控件可以是模式图标。例如,面板隐藏控件可以是图3B中的(b)示出的取景界面201b中置灰的图标314。或者,该面板隐藏控件可以是选择面板中的预设控件。例如,是面板隐藏控件可以是图3B中的(b)示出的取景界面201b中的控件3111。Wherein, operation 2 may be a preset gesture 1 input by the user on the viewfinder interface. For example, operation 2 may be a sliding gesture input by the user in the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (b) of FIG. 3B . Alternatively, operation 2 may be a click operation or a long press operation by the user on an area other than multiple mode options and where elements such as icons and controls are not displayed. Alternatively, the viewfinder interface includes a panel hiding control, and operation 2 may be a user's click operation on the panel hiding control. Wherein, the panel hidden control may be a mode icon. For example, the panel hiding control may be the grayed-out icon 314 in the viewing interface 201b shown in (b) of FIG. 3B . Alternatively, the panel hide control can be a preset control in the selection panel. For example, the panel hiding control may be the control 3111 in the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (b) of FIG. 3B .
在另一些实施例中,在当前的取景界面显示多个模式选项的情况下,手机100从显示该多个模式选项开始,若预设时长内未接收到用户对多个模式选项的操作,则隐藏该多个模式选项。如此,则可以在用户长时间无操作的情况下,隐藏多个模式选项,避免影响预览。In some other embodiments, when the current viewfinder interface displays multiple mode options, the mobile phone 100 starts from displaying the multiple mode options, and if no user operation on the multiple mode options is received within the preset time period, then Hides the multiple mode options. In this way, when the user does not operate for a long time, multiple mode options can be hidden to avoid affecting the preview.
S303a、手机100响应于用户对模式选项1的选择操作,显示界面b。模式选项1对应子模式2,界面b是以子模式2录像前的取景界面。该界面b中包括子模式2的模式图标2,子模2与子模式1不同。S303a. The mobile phone 100 responds to the user's selection operation on mode option 1, and displays interface b. Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2, interface b is the viewfinder interface before recording in sub-mode 2. The interface b includes a mode icon 2 of sub-mode 2, which is different from sub-mode 1.
示例性的,以子模式1是前后双镜模式为例,手机100可以显示图3B中的(a)示出的取景界面203a,该取景界面203a中包括选择面板310。Exemplarily, taking the sub-mode 1 as an example of the front and rear dual-lens mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (a) of FIG. 3B , and the viewfinder interface 203a includes a selection panel 310 .
若模式选项1是选择面板310中的选项3101,即子模式2是后后双镜模式。手机100 响应于用户对该选项3101的选择操作,可显示图2B中的(a)示出的取景界面201b。If the mode option 1 is the option 3101 in the selection panel 310, that is, the sub-mode 2 is the rear-rear dual-mirror mode. In response to the user's selection operation of the option 3101, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) of FIG. 2B.
若模式选项1是选择面板310中的选项3102,即子模式2是画中画模式。手机100响应于用户对该选项3102的选择操作,可显示图2B中的(b)示出的取景界面204b。If the mode option 1 is the option 3102 in the selection panel 310, that is, the sub-mode 2 is the picture-in-picture mode. In response to the user's selection operation of the option 3102, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) of FIG. 2B.
若模式选项1是选择面板310中的选项3103,即子模式2是单后置模式。手机100响应于用户对该选项3103的选择操作,可显示图2C中的(b)示出的取景界面203c。If the mode option 1 is the option 3103 in the selection panel 310, that is, the sub-mode 2 is a single rear mode. In response to the user's selection operation of the option 3103, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203c shown in (b) of FIG. 2C.
若模式选项1是选择面板310中的选项3104,即子模式2是单前置模式。手机100响应于用户对该选项3104的选择操作,可显示图2C中的(a)示出的取景界面201c。If the mode option 1 is the option 3104 in the selection panel 310, that is, the sub-mode 2 is a single front mode. In response to the user's selection operation of the option 3104, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 2C.
上述关于S303a的说明中,主要以子模式1是前后双镜模式来说明。应理解,子模式1是后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式或者单后置模式时的原理也是类似的。即,手机100响应于用户对任一模式选项的选择操作,则可显示该模式选项对应的子模式的取景界面。此处不再一一赘述。In the above description about S303a, it is mainly explained that the sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode. It should be understood that the principle when the sub-mode 1 is a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, a picture-in-picture mode, a single front mode or a single rear mode is also similar. That is, in response to the user's selection operation on any mode option, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface of the sub-mode corresponding to the mode option. No more details here.
应注意,前述S301a-S303a仅说明了录像前的一次切换过程,实际实施时,多个多镜子模式之间可以两两多次切换,每次的切换过程均可参见S301a-S303a的说明。在每次切换过程中,切换前的多镜子模式记为子模式1,切换后的多镜子模式记为子模式2。It should be noted that the aforementioned S301a-S303a only illustrates a switching process before video recording. In actual implementation, two or more multi-mirror modes can be switched between, and each switching process can refer to the description of S301a-S303a. In each switching process, the multi-mirror mode before switching is recorded as sub-mode 1, and the multi-mirror mode after switching is recorded as sub-mode 2.
综上所述,采用本实施例的方法,在进入多镜录像模式的取景界面后,开始录像前,手机100可以依据用户对多镜子模式的选择,灵活的在多个多镜子模式之间切换。从而可以在开始录像前切换到满意的多镜子模式。In summary, using the method of this embodiment, after entering the viewfinder interface of the multi-mirror video recording mode and before starting to record, the mobile phone 100 can flexibly switch between multiple multi-mirror modes according to the user's selection of the multi-mirror mode . This makes it possible to switch to a satisfactory multi-mirror mode before starting video recording.
第二,录制中切换多镜子模式。在录制中,操作1可以是用户对模式图标的点击操作,也可以是用户对面板展示控件的点击操作或者上滑操作。Second, switch the multi-mirror mode during recording. During the recording, operation 1 may be the user's click operation on the mode icon, or the user's click operation or swipe up operation on the panel display control.
本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,可以在多镜录像模式的录制中切换多镜子模式。在本实施例中,主要以操作1是用户对面板展示控件的上滑操作为例来说明。如图3C所示,该视频拍摄方法包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can switch the multi-mirror mode during recording in the multi-mirror video mode. In this embodiment, it is mainly described by taking operation 1 as an example where the user slides up the panel display control. As shown in Figure 3C, the video shooting method includes:
S301c、手机100显示界面c,该界面c是以子模式1录制中的取景界面。该界面c中包括面板展示控件。其中,子模式1包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式或者单后置模式。面板展示控件用于触发手机100展示选择面板,该选择面板中包括多个模式选项,多个模式选项与多个多镜子模式一一对应。S301c, the mobile phone 100 displays an interface c, where the interface c is a viewfinder interface being recorded in sub-mode 1. The interface c includes panel display controls. Wherein, sub-mode 1 includes front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode or single rear mode. The panel display control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display a selection panel, the selection panel includes multiple mode options, and the multiple mode options correspond to multiple multi-mirror modes one by one.
在一些实施例中,只有录制中才有面板展示控件。从而在录制中提供一种新的切换多镜子模式的快捷入口,方便录制中切换多镜子模式。例如,子模式1是前后双镜模式,则界面c可以是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d,取景界面201d中包括控件224,该控件224可用于触发手机100展示选择面板。即,控件224是面板展示控件。In some embodiments, the panel presentation controls are only present in the recording. In this way, a new shortcut for switching between multi-mirror modes is provided during recording, which is convenient for switching between multi-mirror modes during recording. For example, sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, then interface c can be the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG. That is, control 224 is a panel presentation control.
S302c、手机100响应于用户对面板展示控件的上滑操作,在界面c中显示多个模式选项。S302c, the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's upward sliding operation on the panel display control, and displays multiple mode options on the interface c.
示例性的,子模式1是前后双镜模式,则界面c可以是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d,面板展示控件可以是取景界面201d中的控件224。手机100响应于用户对控件224的上滑操作,可在图4中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中进一步显示选择面板320。该选择面板320中包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式和单后置模式共5个模式的模式选项。Exemplarily, if the sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the interface c may be the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D , and the panel display control may be the control 224 in the viewfinder interface 201d. The mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 320 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 4 in response to the user's upward sliding operation on the control 224 . The selection panel 320 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode.
其中,关于选择面板、模式选项及其显示,可参见图3A所示的实施例中的相关说明,此处不再赘述。在本实施例中,主要针对录制中与录像前的不同之处进行说明。Wherein, regarding the selection panel, mode options and display thereof, reference may be made to relevant descriptions in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A , which will not be repeated here. In this embodiment, the description is mainly focused on the differences between recording and pre-recording.
在一些实施例中,在显示多个模式选项时,手机100则隐藏面板展示控件。例如,图4中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中不再显示面板展示控件。如此,可以简化界面元素。In some embodiments, when multiple mode options are displayed, the mobile phone 100 hides the panel display controls. For example, the panel presentation control is no longer displayed in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 4 . In this way, interface elements can be simplified.
在一些实施例中,与录像前类似的,在显示多个模式选项时,手机100关闭前后摄像头切换控件。例如,图4中的(a)示出的取景界面201d的右下角处不再显示前后摄像头切换控件。In some embodiments, similar to before recording, when multiple mode options are displayed, the mobile phone 100 closes the front and rear camera switching controls. For example, the front and rear camera switching controls are no longer displayed at the lower right corner of the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 4 .
上述关于S302c的说明中,主要以子模式1是前后双镜模式来说明。应理解,子模式1是后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式或者单后置模式时的原理也是类似的。下面仅简单的示出子模式1分别是后后双镜模式、画中画模式和单后置模式时,显示多个模式选项的示意图。In the above description about S302c, it is mainly explained that the sub-mode 1 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode. It should be understood that the principle when the sub-mode 1 is a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, a picture-in-picture mode, a single front mode or a single rear mode is also similar. The following simply shows a schematic diagram of displaying multiple mode options when the sub-mode 1 is respectively the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the picture-in-picture mode and the single rear mode.
示例一,子模式1是后后双镜模式,则界面c可以是图2D中的(b)示出的取景界面204d,面板展示控件可以是取景界面204d中的控件240。手机100响应于用户对控件240的上滑操作,可在图4中的(b)示出的取景界面204d中进一步显示选择面板321。该选择面板321中包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式和单后置模式共5个模式的模式选项。其中,后后双镜模式的模式选项突出显示。Example 1, if the sub-mode 1 is the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the interface c may be the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) of FIG. 2D , and the panel display control may be the control 240 in the viewfinder interface 204d. The mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 321 in the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) of FIG. 4 in response to the user's upward sliding operation on the control 240 . The selection panel 321 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of the rear dual-mirror mode is highlighted.
示例二,子模式1是画中画模式,则界面c可以是图2D中的(c)示出的取景界面207b,面板展示控件可以是取景界面207d中的控件241。手机100响应于用户对控件241的上滑操作,可在图4中的(c)示出的取景界面207d中进一步显示选择面板322。该选择面板322中包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式和单后置模式共5个模式的模式选项。其中,画中画模式的模式选项突出显示。Example 2, if the sub-mode 1 is the picture-in-picture mode, the interface c may be the viewfinder interface 207b shown in (c) of FIG. 2D , and the panel display control may be the control 241 in the viewfinder interface 207d. The mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 322 in the viewfinder interface 207d shown in (c) of FIG. 4 in response to the user's upward sliding operation on the control 241 . The selection panel 322 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of the picture-in-picture mode is highlighted.
示例三,子模式1是单前置模式(单后置时同理),则界面a可以是图2E中的(a)示出的取景界面201e,面板展示控件可以是取景界面201e中的控件242。手机100响应于用户对控件242的上滑操作,可在图4中的(d)示出的取景界面201e中进一步显示选择面板323。该选择面板323中包括前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式、单前置模式和单后置模式共5个模式的模式选项。其中,单前置模式的模式选项突出显示。Example 3, sub-mode 1 is a single front mode (the same is true for single rear mode), then interface a can be the viewfinder interface 201e shown in (a) in Figure 2E, and the panel display controls can be the controls in the viewfinder interface 201e 242. The mobile phone 100 may further display a selection panel 323 in the viewfinder interface 201e shown in (d) of FIG. 4 in response to the user's upward sliding operation on the control 242 . The selection panel 323 includes mode options of 5 modes including front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, single front mode and single rear mode. Among them, the mode option of single front mode is highlighted.
应注意,在一些实施例中,与录像前类似的,在子模式1是单前置模式或者单后置模式的情况下,手机100显示多个模式选项时,可以仅显示前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式的模式选项,同时保留前后摄像头切换控件。It should be noted that in some embodiments, similar to before recording, in the case that sub-mode 1 is a single front mode or a single rear mode, when the mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options, only the front and rear dual-mirror modes, Mode options for rear dual-mirror mode and picture-in-picture mode, while retaining front and rear camera switching controls.
在录制中显示多个模式选项时,多个模式选项也会遮挡取景界面中的预览图像,从而影响预览。因此,手机100也可以采用与录像前类似的方式来隐藏多个模式选项,此处不再赘述。Multiple mode options also obscured the preview image in the viewfinder when displayed in a recording, affecting the preview. Therefore, the mobile phone 100 can also hide multiple mode options in a manner similar to that before video recording, which will not be repeated here.
S303c、手机100响应于用户对模式选项1的选择操作,显示界面d。模式选项1对应子模式2,界面d是以子模式2录制中的取景界面。子模2与子模式1不同。S303c, the mobile phone 100 displays an interface d in response to the user's selection operation on mode option 1. Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2, and interface d is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 2 recording. Submode 2 is different from submode 1.
该S303c的实现原理和过程,与前文S303a类似,具体可参见前文S303a的说明。此处不再赘述。唯一需要注意的是,该界面d是录制中的取景界面,而S303a中的界面b是录像前的取景界面。The implementation principle and process of this S303c are similar to those of the previous S303a, for details, please refer to the description of the previous S303a. I won't repeat them here. The only thing to note is that the interface d is the viewfinder interface during recording, while the interface b in S303a is the viewfinder interface before recording.
应注意,前述S301c-S303c仅说明了录像前的一次切换过程,实际实施时,多个多镜子模式之间可以两两多次切换,每次的切换过程均可参见S301c-S303c的说明。在每次切换过程中,切换前的多镜子模式记为子模式1,切换后的多镜子模式记为子模式2。It should be noted that the aforementioned S301c-S303c only illustrate a switching process before recording. In actual implementation, multiple multi-mirror modes can be switched in twos and multiple times. For each switching process, please refer to the description of S301c-S303c. In each switching process, the multi-mirror mode before switching is recorded as sub-mode 1, and the multi-mirror mode after switching is recorded as sub-mode 2.
综上所述,采用本实施例的方法,在进入多镜录像模式的取景界面,并开始录制后, 手机100可以依据用户对多镜子模式的选择,灵活的在多个多镜子模式之间切换。In summary, using the method of this embodiment, after entering the viewfinder interface of the multi-mirror video recording mode and starting recording, the mobile phone 100 can flexibly switch between multiple multi-mirror modes according to the user's selection of the multi-mirror mode .
前述图3C所示的实施例主要以操作1是用户对面板展示控件的点击操作来说明录制中的切换过程。在另一些实施例中,操作1是用户对模式图标的点击操作的实现原理也相同,而只是触发显示多个模式选项的条件不同,此处将不再赘述。另外,在录制中,可以将上述两种操作1的形式结合。从而可以通过多种方式触发显示多个模式选项,提高切换的灵活性。In the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 3C , the switching process during recording is mainly described by using operation 1 as the user's click operation on the panel display control. In some other embodiments, operation 1 is that the user clicks on the mode icon, and the implementation principle is the same, but the conditions for triggering the display of multiple mode options are different, which will not be repeated here. In addition, in recording, the above two forms of operation 1 can be combined. Therefore, multiple modes can be triggered to display multiple mode options, thereby improving the flexibility of switching.
应注意,录像前的切换过程不会体现在最终形成的视频文件中。例如,录像前从前后双镜模式切换后后后双镜模式,而后开始录制,则在最终形成的视频文件中不会包括录像前从前后双镜模式切换到后后双镜模式的过程,而只会呈现以后后双镜模式录制的视频。It should be noted that the switching process before recording will not be reflected in the final video file. For example, if you switch from the front-rear dual-mirror mode to the rear-rear dual-mirror mode before recording, and then start recording, the final video file will not include the process of switching from the front-rear dual-mirror mode to the rear-rear dual-mirror mode before recording. Only videos recorded in the rear and rear dual-mirror modes will be presented.
与上述录像前的切换不同的是,录制中的切换过程会体现在最终形成的视频文件中。示例性的,在S303c之后,手机响应于用户对界面d的操作3,生成视频文件1。该操作3用于触发手机结束视频录制。例如,操作3可以是用户对结束录制控件的点击操作。该视频文件1包括视频流a和视频流b。其中,视频流a是以子模式1录制视频形成的视频流,视频流b是以子模式2录制视频形成的视频流。Different from the above-mentioned switching before recording, the switching process during recording will be reflected in the final video file. Exemplarily, after S303c, the mobile phone generates the video file 1 in response to the user's operation 3 on the interface d. This operation 3 is used to trigger the mobile phone to end the video recording. For example, operation 3 may be the user's click operation on the end recording control. This video file 1 includes video stream a and video stream b. Wherein, video stream a is a video stream formed by recording video in sub-mode 1, and video stream b is a video stream formed by recording video in sub-mode 2.
进一步的,视频流a可以由n个子视频流组成,n是正整数,n的值等于子模式1采用的摄像头的数量。n个子视频流与子模式1采用的n个摄像头对应。即,n个子视频流中每个子视频流由子模式1采用的相应摄像头采集的多帧预览图像构成。同样的,视频流b可以由m个子视频流组成,m是正整数,m的值等于子模式2采用的摄像头的数量。m个子视频流与子模式2采用的m个摄像头对应。即,m个子视频流中每个子视频流由子模式2采用的相应摄像头采集的多帧预览图像构成。Further, video stream a may be composed of n sub-video streams, n is a positive integer, and the value of n is equal to the number of cameras used in sub-mode 1. The n sub-video streams correspond to the n cameras used in sub-mode 1. That is, each sub-video stream in the n sub-video streams is composed of multiple frames of preview images collected by the corresponding camera adopted in sub-mode 1. Similarly, video stream b may be composed of m sub-video streams, m is a positive integer, and the value of m is equal to the number of cameras used in sub-mode 2. The m sub-video streams correspond to the m cameras used in sub-mode 2. That is, each sub-video stream in the m sub-video streams is composed of multiple frames of preview images collected by the corresponding camera adopted in sub-mode 2.
示例性的,以子模式1是前后双镜模式,子模式2是后后双镜模式,并且录制视频过程中切换一次多镜子模式为例。如图5所示,从00:00:00(第0秒开始)到00:09:59(第9秒结束)的前10秒钟内,采用后置主摄像头和前置摄像头以前后双镜模式录制视频。在00:09:59(或00:10:00),手机100将多镜子模式切换为后后双镜模式,采用后置长焦摄像头和后置广角摄像头采集预览图像。而后,从00:10:00(第10秒开始)到00:14:59(第14秒结束)的5秒钟内,以后后双镜模式录制视频。在00:14:59,手机100结束视频录制,生成视频文件1。视频文件1包括视频流a1、视频流a2、视频流b1和视频流b2。其中,视频流a1包括前后双镜模式下后置主摄像头采集的多帧预览图像,视频流a2包括前后双镜模式下前置摄像头采集的多帧预览图像。也就是说,视频流a包括两个子视频流,即,视频流a1和视频流a2。视频流b1包括后后双镜模式下后置长焦摄像头采集的多帧预览图像,视频流b2包括后后双镜模式下后置广角摄像头采集的多帧预览图像。也就是说,视频流b包括两个子视频流,即,视频流b1和视频流b2。As an example, take sub-mode 1 as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, sub-mode 2 as the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and switch to the multi-mirror mode once during video recording as an example. As shown in Figure 5, within the first 10 seconds from 00:00:00 (starting at the 0th second) to 00:09:59 (ending at the 9th second), the rear main camera and the front camera are used as front and rear dual mirrors mode to record video. At 00:09:59 (or 00:10:00), the mobile phone 100 switches the multi-mirror mode to the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and adopts the rear telephoto camera and the rear wide-angle camera to collect preview images. Then, within 5 seconds from 00:10:00 (the start of the 10th second) to 00:14:59 (the end of the 14th second), the video will be recorded in the rear dual-mirror mode. At 00:14:59, the mobile phone 100 ends the video recording and generates a video file 1 . Video file 1 includes video stream a1, video stream a2, video stream b1, and video stream b2. Among them, the video stream a1 includes a multi-frame preview image collected by the rear main camera in the front-rear dual-mirror mode, and the video stream a2 includes a multi-frame preview image collected by the front camera in the front-rear dual-mirror mode. That is, video stream a includes two sub-video streams, namely, video stream a1 and video stream a2. The video stream b1 includes the multi-frame preview images collected by the rear telephoto camera in the rear dual-lens mode, and the video stream b2 includes the multi-frame preview images collected by the rear wide-angle camera in the rear dual-lens mode. That is, video stream b includes two sub video streams, namely, video stream b1 and video stream b2.
综上所述,在录制过程中切换多镜子模式,可以录制得到由多种多镜子模式下录制得到的视频流构成的视频文件。从而可以提高视频录制的灵活性和多样性。To sum up, by switching the multi-mirror mode during the recording process, a video file composed of video streams recorded in multiple multi-mirror modes can be recorded. This increases the flexibility and variety of video recording.
进一步的,在录制中的一些场景中,需要同时显示变焦控件和面板展示控件,并且面板展示控件可能与变焦控件邻近。例如,在图2D中的(c)示出的画中画模式的录制中的取景界面207d中,面板展示控件241和变焦控件243相邻显示。又如,在图2E中的(b)示出的单后置模式的录制中的取景界面203e中,面板展示控件244和变焦控件245相邻显示。Further, in some scenes during the recording, the zoom control and the panel display control need to be displayed at the same time, and the panel display control may be adjacent to the zoom control. For example, in the viewfinder interface 207d during recording in the picture-in-picture mode shown in (c) of FIG. 2D , the panel display control 241 and the zoom control 243 are displayed adjacently. As another example, in the viewfinder interface 203e during recording in the single rear mode shown in (b) of FIG. 2E , the panel display control 244 and the zoom control 245 are displayed adjacently.
针对上述场景,在一些实施例中,通过为不同的控件划分互不干扰的响应机制,以准确响应用户的操作。在一种具体的实现方式中,在单后置模式或者画中画模式录制中的取景界面中,面板展示控件的响应热区(简称为面板展示热区,其中包括面板展示控件)包括变焦控件的响应热区(简称为变焦热区,其中包括变焦控件)。其中,在面板展示热区内,用户输入滑动操作的起点和终点之间的连线,与屏幕的底部之间的最小夹角大于预设角度(如60°)时,才能触发手机100展示选择面板,以供切换多镜子模式。在变焦热区内,用户输入滑动操作的起点和终点之间的连线,与屏幕的底部之间的最小夹角小于或等于预设角度(如60°)时,才能触发手机100切换后置摄像头。应理解,由于面板展示热区包括变焦热区,则在变焦热区内,就意味着在面板展示区域内。For the above scenario, in some embodiments, different controls are divided into non-interfering response mechanisms to accurately respond to user operations. In a specific implementation, in the viewfinder interface in single rear mode or picture-in-picture mode recording, the response hot zone of the panel display control (referred to as the panel display hot zone, including the panel display control) includes a zoom control The responsive hotspot (referred to simply as the zoom hotspot, which includes the zoom controls) of . Wherein, in the panel display hot area, the user inputs the line between the start point and the end point of the sliding operation, and the minimum angle between the bottom of the screen and the bottom of the screen is greater than the preset angle (such as 60°), the display selection of the mobile phone 100 can be triggered panel for switching between multi-mirror modes. In the zoom hot zone, the user inputs the line between the start point and the end point of the sliding operation, and the minimum angle between the bottom of the screen and the bottom of the screen is less than or equal to the preset angle (such as 60°), the mobile phone 100 can be triggered to switch the rear Camera. It should be understood that since the panel display hot zone includes the zoom hot zone, being in the zoom hot zone means being in the panel display area.
在该实现方式中,面板展示热区较大,可以方便用户触发手机100展示选择面板。从而可以降低多镜子模式的切换难度。同时,手机100以用户输入滑动操作的起点和终点之间的连线,与屏幕的底部之间的最小夹角的大小,来响应用户的操作,可以准确的响应用户的操作,且不会发生混乱。In this implementation manner, the panel display hotspot is relatively large, which can facilitate the user to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the selection panel. Thereby, the difficulty of switching between multi-mirror modes can be reduced. At the same time, the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's operation based on the size of the smallest angle between the starting point and the end point of the user's input sliding operation and the bottom of the screen, which can accurately respond to the user's operation, and will not occur. confusion.
示例性的,以单后置模式、预设角度是60°为例。如图2F中的(a)所示,在单后置模式录制中的取景界面中,面板展示热区包括变焦热区,例如,面板展示热区的高度为60像素(dp),宽度为屏幕的宽度,变焦热区的高度为130dp,宽度也是屏幕的宽度。滑动操作1由起点A,沿着箭头1,滑动到终点B,由于A点和B点都在面板展示热区,且A点和B点的连线与屏幕底部的最小夹角大于60°,相应的,手机100响应于该滑动操作1,可以展示选择面板,以供切换多镜子模式。滑动操作2由起点A,沿着箭头2,滑动到终点C,由于A点和C点都在变焦热区,且A点和C点的连线与屏幕底部的最小夹角小于60°,相应的,手机100响应于该滑动操作2,可以切换采集图像的后置摄像头。Exemplarily, take a single rear mode and a preset angle of 60° as an example. As shown in (a) in Figure 2F, in the viewfinder interface in single rear mode recording, the panel display hotspot includes the zoom hotspot, for example, the height of the panel display hotspot is 60 pixels (dp), and the width is the screen The width of the zoom hotspot is 130dp, and the width is also the width of the screen. Swipe operation 1: Swipe from the starting point A to the end point B along the arrow 1. Since point A and point B are both displayed in the hot zone on the panel, and the minimum angle between the line connecting point A and point B and the bottom of the screen is greater than 60°, Correspondingly, in response to the sliding operation 1 , the mobile phone 100 may display a selection panel for switching the multi-mirror mode. Swipe operation 2 from the starting point A, along the arrow 2, to the end point C, since point A and point C are both in the zoom hot zone, and the minimum angle between the line connecting point A and point C and the bottom of the screen is less than 60°, corresponding Yes, the mobile phone 100 can switch the rear camera for capturing images in response to the sliding operation 2 .
另外,在录制前或者录制中的另一些场景中,如在前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式录制中的取景界面中,又如在各种多镜子模式录制前的取景界面中,面板展示控件的邻近位置并未显示变焦控件。在这些场景中,单独为面板展示控件划分相应的热区即可。其中,针对动态的面板展示控件和静态的面板展示控件,可设置不同的面板展示热区。例如,为动态的面板展示控件设置更大的面板展示热区。In addition, in other scenes before recording or during recording, such as in the viewfinder interface during recording in front-rear dual-mirror mode and rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or in the viewfinder interface before recording in various multi-mirror modes, the panel display The zoom controls are not displayed adjacent to the controls. In these scenarios, it is enough to divide the corresponding hot zones for the panel display controls separately. Wherein, for dynamic panel display controls and static panel display controls, different panel display hotspots may be set. For example, set a larger panel display hotspot for a dynamic panel display control.
示例性的,以前后双镜模式为例。如图2F中的(b)所示,在前后双镜模式录制中的取景界面中,面板展示控件和变焦控件相隔较远,则可以设置面板展示热区为如图所示的矩形区域,如高度为60dp,宽度为屏幕的宽度。Exemplarily, take the front and rear dual-mirror mode as an example. As shown in (b) in Figure 2F, in the viewfinder interface in the front and rear dual-mirror mode recording, the panel display control and the zoom control are far apart, and the panel display hotspot can be set as a rectangular area as shown in the figure, as shown The height is 60dp and the width is the width of the screen.
前文关于实施例一的说明中,主要通过模式图标或者面板展示控件来切换多镜子模式,但是实际实施时,并不以此为限。在一些实施例中,还可以通过预设手势来触发切换多镜子模式。示例性的,竖屏形式下,在采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式的情况下,手机100响应于用户从屏幕的下边缘或者上边缘往屏幕中间的滑动手势,可以从采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式,切换为采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。如,切换为前后双镜模式。又示例性的,竖屏形式下,在采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式的情况下,手机100响应于用户从两个预览图像的相交区域附近的位置向屏幕的上边缘或者下边缘的滑动手势,可以从采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式,切换为采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式。在本实施例中,通过预设手势可以直接触发手机100切换多镜子模式,无需展示模式选项,从而可以提高切换的便捷性。In the foregoing description of Embodiment 1, the multi-mirror mode is mainly switched through mode icons or panel display controls, but in actual implementation, it is not limited thereto. In some embodiments, the switching of the multi-mirror mode can also be triggered by a preset gesture. Exemplarily, in the vertical screen mode, in the case of using a single camera to capture images, the mobile phone 100 can respond to the user's sliding gesture from the lower edge or upper edge of the screen to the middle of the screen, and can start from the mode of using a single camera to capture images. to switch to the mode that uses two cameras to capture images. For example, switch to front and rear dual-mirror mode. Also exemplary, in the vertical screen mode, in the case of using two cameras to capture images, the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's sliding gesture from a position near the intersection area of the two preview images to the upper or lower edge of the screen , to switch from a mode that captures images with two cameras to a mode that captures images with a single camera. In this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can be directly triggered to switch the multi-mirror mode through the preset gesture without displaying mode options, thereby improving the convenience of switching.
在下文实施例中,将主要以通过模式图标和面板展示控件来切换多镜子模式的方式来说明本申请方案。In the following embodiments, the scheme of the present application will be described mainly in the manner of switching the multi-mirror mode through the mode icon and panel display controls.
前述实施例一中,主要通过模式选项来切换多镜子模式,即切换摄像头、布局等。In the foregoing first embodiment, the multi-mirror mode is mainly switched through mode options, that is, switching of cameras, layout, and the like.
在一些实施例中,为了进一步提高切换的便捷性,还提供有如下切换方式:In some embodiments, in order to further improve the convenience of switching, the following switching methods are also provided:
方式一,通过前后摄像头切换控件来触发手机100切换前置摄像头和后置摄像头。 Way 1, the mobile phone 100 is triggered to switch between the front camera and the rear camera through the front and rear camera switching controls.
示例性的,在单前置模式下,手机100响应于用户对前后摄像头切换控件的点击操作,可以切换到单后置模式。或者,在单后置模式下,手机100响应于用户对前后摄像头切换控件的点击操作,可以切换到单前置模式。Exemplarily, in the single front mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch to the single rear mode in response to the user's click operation on the front and rear camera switching control. Alternatively, in the single rear mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch to the single front mode in response to the user's click operation on the front and rear camera switching controls.
又示例性的,在前后双镜模式或者画中画模式中,手机100响应于用户对前后摄像头切换控件的点击操作,可以将其中的前置摄像头切换为后置摄像头(如后置主摄像头)。Also exemplary, in the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 can switch the front camera to the rear camera (such as the rear main camera) in response to the user's click operation on the front and rear camera switching controls. .
再示例性的,在后后双镜模式中,手机100响应于用户对前后摄像头切换控件的点击操作,可以将其中一个后置摄像头切换为前置摄像头,从而切换为前后双镜模式。例如,手机100响应于用户对图2D中的(b)示出的取景界面204d中前后摄像头切换控件的点击操作,可以显示图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d。As another example, in the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch one of the rear cameras to the front camera in response to the user's click operation on the front and rear camera switching controls, thereby switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode. For example, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG.
方式二,在当前采用的摄像头有后置摄像头的情况下,可以通过变焦控件来触发手机100切换后置摄像头。 Method 2, in the case that the currently adopted camera has a rear camera, the mobile phone 100 may be triggered to switch the rear camera through the zoom control.
示例性的,在单后置模式下,手机100响应于用户对变焦控件中变焦倍速的选择操作,可以切换到相应的后置摄像头。例如,当选择2倍倍率时,手机100可以切换到后置2倍长焦镜头。Exemplarily, in the single rear-facing mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch to the corresponding rear-facing camera in response to the user's selection operation of the zoom speed in the zoom control. For example, when a 2x magnification is selected, the mobile phone 100 may switch to a rear 2x telephoto lens.
又示例性的,在前后双镜模式或者画中画模式中,手机100响应于用户对变焦控件中变焦倍速的选择操作,可以将当前的后置摄像头切换为其他的后置摄像头。例如,手机100响应于用户对图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中变焦条228的滑动操作,可将当前采用的后置摄像头(如后置主摄像头)切换为其他的后置摄像头。如从1x滑动到2x,则可以从后置主摄像头切换到后置2倍长焦摄像头。As another example, in the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch the current rear camera to another rear camera in response to the user's selection operation of the zoom speed in the zoom control. For example, in response to the user's sliding operation on the zoom bar 228 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG. Camera. If you slide from 1x to 2x, you can switch from the rear main camera to the rear 2x telephoto camera.
再示例性的,在后后双镜模式中,手机100响应于用户对变焦控件中变焦倍率的选择操作,可以将其中一个后置摄像头切换为其他的后置摄像头。例如,手机100响应于用户对图2D中的(b)示出的取景界面204d中变焦条的滑动操作,可以将预览图像显示在上方的后置摄像头(如后置2倍长焦摄像头)切换为其他的后置摄像头。如从2x滑动到4x,则可以从后置2倍长焦摄像头切换到后置4倍长焦摄像头。As another example, in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch one of the rear cameras to the other rear camera in response to the user's selection operation of the zoom ratio in the zoom control. For example, in response to the user's sliding operation on the zoom bar in the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) in FIG. for other rear cameras. If you slide from 2x to 4x, you can switch from the rear 2x telephoto camera to the rear 4x telephoto camera.
方式三,通过手指缩放来触发后置摄像头的切换。例如,手指打开,则触发切换至后置长焦摄像头。打开程度越大,则切换至倍率更大的后置长焦摄像头。手指捏合,则触发切换至广角摄像头。The third way is to trigger the switch of the rear camera by zooming with your fingers. For example, opening the finger triggers switching to the rear telephoto camera. The larger the opening degree, the switch to the rear telephoto camera with a larger magnification. Pinch your fingers together to switch to the wide-angle camera.
应注意,若前置摄像头有多个,也可以通过方式二或者方式三来切换。It should be noted that if there are multiple front cameras, they can also be switched through method two or three.
方式四,通过对双景取景界面中的预览图像的双击操作来对调两个摄像头采集的预览图像的显示区域。 Mode 4, by double-clicking the preview image in the dual-view viewfinder interface, the display areas of the preview images collected by the two cameras are swapped.
示例性的,在前后双镜模式下,手机100响应于用户对任一预览图像的双击操作,可以对调前置摄像头采集的预览图像和后置摄像头采集的预览图像的显示区域。例如,手机100响应于用户对图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中预览图像202d或者预览图像203d的双击操作,可以对调预览图像202d和预览图像203d的显示区域。对调后,预览图像202d 显示在预览图像203d的下方。Exemplarily, in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch the display areas of the preview image captured by the front camera and the preview image captured by the rear camera in response to the user's double-click operation on any preview image. For example, the mobile phone 100 can switch the display areas of the preview image 202d and the preview image 203d in response to the user's double-click operation on the preview image 202d or the preview image 203d in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D . After the adjustment, the preview image 202d is displayed below the preview image 203d.
又示例性的,在后后双镜模式下,手机100响应于用户对任一预览图像的双击操作,可以对调两个后置摄像头采集的预览图像的显示区域。例如,手机100响应于用户对图2D中的(b)示出的取景界面204d中预览图像205d或者预览图像206d的双击操作,可以对调预览图像205d和预览图像206d的显示区域。对调后,预览图像205d显示在预览图像206d的下方。As another example, in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch the display areas of the preview images captured by the two rear cameras in response to the user's double-click operation on any preview image. For example, the mobile phone 100 can switch the display areas of the preview image 205d and the preview image 206d in response to the user's double-click operation on the preview image 205d or the preview image 206d in the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) of FIG. 2D . After the adjustment, the preview image 205d is displayed below the preview image 206d.
再示例性的,在画中画模式下,手机100响应于用户对任一预览图像的双击操作,可以对调前置摄像头采集的预览图像和后置摄像头采集的预览图像的显示区域。例如,手机100响应于用户对图2D中的(c)示出的取景界面207d中预览图像208d或者预览图像209d的双击操作,可以对调预览图像208d和预览图像209d的显示区域。对调后,预览图像208d显示在小窗209D中,预览图像209d显示在大窗208D中。As another example, in the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 may switch the display areas of the preview image captured by the front camera and the preview image captured by the rear camera in response to the user's double-click operation on any preview image. For example, the mobile phone 100 can switch the display areas of the preview image 208d and the preview image 209d in response to the user's double-click operation on the preview image 208d or the preview image 209d in the viewfinder interface 207d shown in (c) of FIG. 2D . After the adjustment, the preview image 208d is displayed in the small window 209D, and the preview image 209d is displayed in the large window 208D.
方式五,在画中画模式下,通过手指缩放小窗窗口或者拖拽小窗边缘可以触发手机100缩放小窗的窗口尺寸。Mode 5, in the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 can be triggered to zoom the window size of the small window by zooming the small window window with a finger or dragging the edge of the small window.
实施例二、美颜功能。 Embodiment 2, beauty function.
本申请实施例提供的一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。其中,在多镜录像模式中,录像前的取景界面中,手机100可以响应于用户对取景界面中美颜控件(也可以称为第一控件)的操作(如点击操作)而显示一个或多个美颜效果控件,供用户选择美颜效果。而后,手机100响应于用户对美颜效果控件的操作,则可以设置多镜录像模式的美颜效果。从而可以在多镜录像模式的录像前,完成美颜设置。A video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . Wherein, in the multi-mirror recording mode, in the viewfinder interface before recording, the mobile phone 100 may display one or more A beauty effect control for users to choose a beauty effect. Then, the mobile phone 100 may set the beauty effect in the multi-camera recording mode in response to the user's operation on the beauty effect control. In this way, the beauty setting can be completed before recording in the multi-camera recording mode.
示例性的,美颜控件是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件213。手机100响应于用户对图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件213的点击操作,可以在图6A中的(a)示出的取景界面203a中进一步显示美颜调节条601,该美颜调节条601记为美颜效果控件。如图6A中的(a)所示,美颜调节条601中默认的美颜级别是5级。而后,手机100可接收用户对美颜调节条601的滑动操作,即,对美颜级别的选择操作。如图6A中的(b)所示,手机100可接收用户对美颜调节条601中级别6的选择操作。手机100响应于用户对级别6的选择操作,可以调整美颜效果为6级美颜的效果。Exemplarily, the beauty control is the control 213 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A. In response to the user's click operation on the control 213 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A , the mobile phone 100 may further display a beauty adjustment bar 601 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (a) in FIG. 6A , the beautification adjustment bar 601 is recorded as a beautification effect control. As shown in (a) in FIG. 6A , the default beauty level in the beauty adjustment bar 601 is level 5. Then, the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's sliding operation on the beautification adjustment bar 601 , that is, a selection operation on the beautification level. As shown in (b) of FIG. 6A , the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's selection operation on level 6 in the beauty adjustment bar 601 . The mobile phone 100 may adjust the beautification effect to a level 6 beautification effect in response to the user's selection operation of level 6.
应注意,上述图6A中的(a)和图6A中的(b)的举例中,仅以美颜效果控件是美颜调节条为例,来说明了手机100设置美颜效果的实现。实际中,美颜效果控件还可以是其他形式的。例如,美颜效果控件也可以是多个效果选项,多个效果选项与多种美颜效果一一对应。在本文实施例中,主要以美颜效果控件是美颜调节条为例来说明本申请方案。It should be noted that in the above examples of (a) in FIG. 6A and (b) in FIG. 6A , the implementation of setting the beautification effect on the mobile phone 100 is described only by taking the beautification effect control bar as an example. In practice, the beauty effect control may also be in other forms. For example, the beautifying effect control may also be a plurality of effect options, and the plurality of effect options correspond to various beautifying effects one by one. In the embodiment herein, the solution of the application is mainly described by taking the beauty effect control as a beauty adjustment bar as an example.
在一些实施例中,在用户操作美颜调节条而调整美颜级别的过程中,手机100仅显示预览图像和美颜调节条。而隐藏取景界面中的其它元素。从而可以方便用户准确的调节美颜级别。例如,如图6A中的(b)所示,在用户操作美颜调节条的过程中,手机100隐藏模式图标、闪光灯图标、开始录制控件、前后摄像头切换控件等界面元素,而仅显示预览图像和美颜调节条。In some embodiments, when the user operates the beauty adjustment bar to adjust the beauty level, the mobile phone 100 only displays the preview image and the beauty adjustment bar. And hide other elements in the viewfinder interface. In this way, it is convenient for the user to accurately adjust the beauty level. For example, as shown in (b) in FIG. 6A, during the user's operation of the beauty adjustment bar, the mobile phone 100 hides interface elements such as the mode icon, the flash icon, the start recording control, and the front and rear camera switching controls, and only displays the preview image. and beauty adjustment bar.
应注意,多镜录像模式中,在采用两个及以上摄像头采集图像的多镜子模式中,例如前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式中,通常仅在拍摄对象为人像时,才存在美颜需求。与此同时,在采用两个及以上摄像头采集图像时,通常使用前置摄像头来采集人像。基于此,在一些实施例中,在采用两个及以上摄像头采集图像的多镜子模式中,仅有 前置摄像头采集的图像支持美颜。进一步,在本实施例中,手机100可以将美颜控件显示在取景界面中前置摄像头的图像附近。如此,便于明确美颜针对的对象。It should be noted that in the multi-mirror recording mode, in the multi-mirror mode that uses two or more cameras to collect images, such as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, usually only when the subject is a portrait , there is a need for beauty. At the same time, when two or more cameras are used to collect images, the front camera is usually used to collect portraits. Based on this, in some embodiments, in the multi-mirror mode in which two or more cameras are used to collect images, only the images collected by the front camera support beautification. Further, in this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 may display the beautification control near the image of the front camera in the viewfinder interface. In this way, it is convenient to clarify the target of beauty.
例如,图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中包括控件213,该控件214用于触发手机100调节美颜级别。即,控件213是美颜控件。该控件213显示在前后双镜模式下前置摄像头采集的图像(如人脸图像)的显示区域内。又如,图2B中的(b)示出的取景界面204b中包括美颜控件,且该美颜控件显示在画中画模式下前置摄像头采集的图像(如人脸图像)的显示区域(如小窗)的下方。For example, the viewing interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A includes a control 213, and the control 214 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to adjust the beauty level. That is, the control 213 is a beauty control. The control 213 is displayed in the display area of the image (such as a face image) collected by the front camera in the front and rear dual-mirror mode. As another example, the viewfinder interface 204b shown in (b) of FIG. 2B includes a beautification control, and the beautification control displays the display area ( Such as the bottom of the small window).
在本实施例中,前后双镜模式和画中画模式中,前置摄像头采集的图像(通常为人像)支持美颜,则在通过美颜控件设置美颜效果后,仅有前置摄像头采集的图像可以添加该美颜效果。也就是说,在前后双镜模式和画中画模式中,美颜控件仅用于设置前置摄像头采集的图像的美颜效果。In this embodiment, in the front-rear dual-mirror mode and the picture-in-picture mode, the images (usually portraits) captured by the front camera support beauty, and after setting the beauty effect through the beauty control, only the front camera captures The beauty effect can be added to the image of . That is to say, in the front and rear dual-mirror mode and the picture-in-picture mode, the beautification control is only used to set the beautification effect of the image captured by the front camera.
示例性的,以图2A中的(b)示出的前后双镜模式录像前的取景界面为例,在通过控件213(即美颜控件)设置美颜效果为6级美颜后,手机100可显示图6B示出的取景界面602,该取景界面602中仅有前置摄像头采集的预览图像604添加有6级美颜的美颜效果,而后置摄像头采集的预览图像603并未添加美颜效果。Exemplarily, take the viewfinder interface shown in (b) in FIG. 2A before recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode as an example. The viewfinder interface 602 shown in FIG. 6B can be displayed. In the viewfinder interface 602, only the preview image 604 captured by the front camera is added with 6-level beautification effects, while the preview image 603 captured by the rear camera is not added with beautification. Effect.
另外,在采用两个及以上摄像头采集图像的多镜子模式中,若当前采用的多镜子模式下,采集图像的摄像头不包括前置摄像头(例如后后双镜模式),手机100则可以不显示美颜控件,或者将美颜控件默认显示在手机100的底部附近的位置。例如,图2B中的(a)示出的取景界面201b为后后双镜模式的取景界面,后后双镜模式中采集图像的摄像头是两个后置摄像头,即不包括前置摄像头,手机100则可将美颜控件显示手机100的底部附近的位置。In addition, in the multi-mirror mode in which two or more cameras are used to collect images, if the currently used multi-mirror mode does not include a front-facing camera (such as a rear and rear dual-mirror mode), the mobile phone 100 may not display Beautification controls, or display the beautification controls at a position near the bottom of the mobile phone 100 by default. For example, the viewfinder interface 201b shown in (a) in FIG. 2B is the viewfinder interface of the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, and the cameras for collecting images in the rear and rear dual-mirror mode are two rear cameras, that is, the front camera and the mobile phone are not included. 100, the beautification control can be displayed near the bottom of the mobile phone 100.
或者,在单前置模式或者单后置模式中,都有可能使用当前的单个摄像头来采集人像,因此都可能存在美颜的需求。基于此,在一些实施例中,前置摄像头和后置摄像头均支持美颜。进一步的,在单前置模式或者单后置模式中,手机100均可以在取景界面中显示美颜控件。并且,在通过美颜控件设置美颜效果后,美颜效果可以添加在全屏显示的预览图像上。Or, in single front mode or single rear mode, it is possible to use the current single camera to capture portraits, so there may be a need for beautification. Based on this, in some embodiments, both the front camera and the rear camera support beauty. Further, in either the single front mode or the single rear mode, the mobile phone 100 can display a beauty control on the viewfinder interface. Moreover, after setting the beautification effect through the beautification control, the beautification effect can be added to the preview image displayed in full screen.
也就是说,常见的多镜子模式中,单前置模式和单后置模式支持美颜,前后双景模式和画中画模式中前置摄像头采集的图像支持美颜(也可以称为部分支持美颜),后后双镜模式通常不支持美颜。而基于前述实施例一的说明可知,在多镜录像模式中,手机100可以在多个多镜子模式中两两之间切换。以此为前提,则可能从支持美颜的模式(如单后置模式)切换到部分支持美颜或者不支持美颜的模式;或者,也可能从部分支持美颜的模式切换为不支持美颜的模式。That is to say, in the common multi-mirror mode, the single front mode and the single rear mode support beauty, and the images captured by the front camera in the front and rear dual view mode and the picture-in-picture mode support beauty (also called partial support). Beautification), the rear dual mirror mode usually does not support beautification. Based on the description of the foregoing first embodiment, it can be seen that in the multi-mirror video recording mode, the mobile phone 100 can switch between multiple multi-mirror modes. On this premise, it is possible to switch from a mode that supports beauty (such as a single rear mode) to a mode that partially supports beauty or does not support beauty; or, it may also switch from a mode that partially supports beauty to one that does not support beauty. color pattern.
基于此,本申请实施例提供了一种视频拍摄方法,可以应用于手机100。在本实施例中,手机100可以根据切换前后的多镜子模式,来智能的设置美颜效果,以适配多镜子模式对美颜的支持情况。下面以几种典型的场景来说明智能设置美颜效果的具体实现:Based on this, the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . In this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can intelligently set the beautification effect according to the multi-mirror mode before and after switching, so as to adapt to the support of the multi-mirror mode for beautification. The following uses several typical scenarios to illustrate the specific implementation of the smart setting beauty effect:
场景1,从采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式切换到采用两个摄像头采集图像,且切换后的两个摄像头中包括后置摄像头。 Scenario 1, switching from the mode of capturing images with a single camera to capturing images with two cameras, and the switched two cameras include the rear camera.
请参见图6C,为本申请实施例提供的一种视频拍摄方法的流程图,可以应用于手机100。在本实施例中,主要以场景1为例,来说明智能设置美颜效果的具体实现。Please refer to FIG. 6C , which is a flowchart of a video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . In this embodiment, scene 1 is mainly taken as an example to illustrate the specific implementation of intelligently setting the beautifying effect.
如图6C所示,本实施例的视频拍摄方法可以包括:As shown in Figure 6C, the video shooting method of this embodiment may include:
S611、手机100显示界面a,界面a是采用第一摄像头录像的取景界面。该界面a中包括全屏显示的第一预览图像。其中,第一预览图像是手机100对第一摄像头采集的第一图像添加第一美颜效果后得到的。第一摄像头是前置摄像头或者后置摄像头。S611. The mobile phone 100 displays an interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the first camera. The interface a includes a first preview image displayed in full screen. Wherein, the first preview image is obtained by the mobile phone 100 after adding a first beauty effect to the first image captured by the first camera. The first camera is a front camera or a rear camera.
其中,录像的取景界面可以是录像前的取景界面,也可以是正在录像的取景界面。即,界面a(也可以称为第一界面)可以是录像前的取景界面,也可以是正在录像的取景。也就是说,在录像前和正在录像的过程中,都可以采用本实施例的方法来智能设置美颜效果。Wherein, the viewfinder interface for video recording may be the viewfinder interface before recording, or the viewfinder interface for video recording. That is, interface a (also referred to as the first interface) may be a viewfinder interface before recording, or may be a viewfinder during recording. That is to say, the method of this embodiment can be used to intelligently set the beautifying effect before recording and during recording.
在一些实施例中,界面a中的美颜效果是手机100根据用户对美颜控件和美颜效果控件的操作,而设置的。In some embodiments, the beautification effect in the interface a is set by the mobile phone 100 according to the user's operation on the beautification control and the beautification effect control.
在本实施例中,在S611之前,手机100需要根据用户对美颜控件和美颜效果控件的操作,设置采用第一摄像头录像的美颜效果为第一美颜效果。具体设置美颜效果的过程前文已说明,此处不再赘述。在完成美颜效果设置后,手机100则可显示界面a,界面a中的预览图像具有第一美颜效果。即,界面a是录像前的取景界面的情况。或者,在完成美颜设置后,手机100响应于用户开始录制视频的操作(如点击开始录制控件的操作),可显示界面a,界面a中的预览图像具有第一美颜效果。即,界面a是正在录像的取景界面的情况。下文实施例中,将主要以界面a是正在录像的取景界面为例来说明本申请方案。In this embodiment, before S611, the mobile phone 100 needs to set the beautifying effect recorded by the first camera as the first beautifying effect according to the user's operation on the beautifying control and the beautifying effect control. The specific process of setting the beautification effect has been described above, and will not be repeated here. After finishing setting the beautifying effect, the mobile phone 100 may display an interface a, and the preview image in the interface a has the first beautifying effect. That is, the screen a is a viewfinder screen before recording. Or, after completing the beautification settings, the mobile phone 100 may display interface a in response to the user's operation of starting video recording (such as clicking the start recording control), and the preview image in interface a has the first beautification effect. That is, the screen a is a viewfinder screen currently being recorded. In the following embodiments, the solution of the present application will be described mainly by taking interface a as an example of a viewfinder interface being recorded.
在另一些实施例中,界面a中的美颜效果,可以是手机100在采用本申请方案之后,根据多镜子模式的切换,而智能的设置美颜效果的结果。In some other embodiments, the beautifying effect in interface a may be the result of the mobile phone 100 intelligently setting the beautifying effect according to the switching of the multi-mirror mode after adopting the solution of the present application.
示例性的,在一种场景中,第一摄像头可以是前置摄像头,则界面a可以是图6D中的(a)示出的取景界面621,第一预览图像可以是该取景界面621中包括预览图像622,该预览图像622是手机100对前置摄像头采集的图像添加第一美颜效果(如6级美颜)后得到的。Exemplarily, in a scenario, the first camera may be a front camera, then interface a may be the viewfinder interface 621 shown in (a) in FIG. 6D , and the first preview image may be the viewfinder interface 621 included A preview image 622, the preview image 622 is obtained after the mobile phone 100 adds the first beautification effect (such as 6-level beautification) to the image collected by the front camera.
示例性的,在另一种场景中,第一摄像头也可以是后置摄像头,则界面a可以是图6D中的(b)示出的取景界面623,第一预览图像可以是该取景界面623中包括预览图像624,该预览图像624是手机100对后置摄像头采集的图像添加第一美颜效果(如6级美颜)后得到的。Exemplarily, in another scenario, the first camera may also be a rear camera, then interface a may be the viewfinder interface 623 shown in (b) in FIG. 6D , and the first preview image may be the viewfinder interface 623 includes a preview image 624, and the preview image 624 is obtained after the mobile phone 100 adds the first beautification effect (such as 6-level beautification) to the image captured by the rear camera.
S612、手机100响应于用户对界面a的操作1,在界面a中显示多个模式选项。其中,多个模式选项与多个多镜子模式一一对应。S612. The mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface a in response to the user's operation 1 on the interface a. Wherein, a plurality of mode options corresponds to a plurality of multi-mirror modes one by one.
在S612之前,手机100可接收用户对界面a的操作1。Before S612, the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's operation 1 on the interface a.
S613、手机100响应于用户对模式选项1的选择操作,显示界面b。模式选项1对应采用第二摄像头和第三摄像头采集图像的模式,界面b是采用第二摄像头和第三摄像头采集图像的取景界面,界面b中包括处理第二摄像头采集的第二图像得到的第二预览图像和处理第三摄像头采集的第三图像得到的第三预览图像。第二预览图像和第三预览图像中后置摄像头采集的预览图像未添加美颜效果。S613. The mobile phone 100 displays interface b in response to the user's selection operation on mode option 1. Mode option 1 corresponds to the mode in which the second camera and the third camera are used to capture images. Interface b is a viewfinder interface for using the second camera and the third camera to capture images. Interface b includes the second image acquired by processing the second camera. The second preview image and the third preview image obtained by processing the third image captured by the third camera. The preview images captured by the rear camera in the second preview image and the third preview image have no beautification effect added.
在S613之前,手机100可接收用户对模式选项1的选择操作。Before S613, the mobile phone 100 may receive a user's selection operation on mode option 1.
关于切换多镜子模式(如S612-613中从采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式切换到采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式)的具体实现,可参见前文实施例一中的相关说明,此处不再赘述。另外,为了方便说明,可以将触发手机100从采用单个摄像头采集图像切换到采用两个摄像头(第二摄像头和第三摄像头)采集图像的操作,称为第一操作。例如,用户对模 式选项1的选择操作为第一操作。同样为了方便说明,界面b可以称为第二界面。For the specific implementation of switching the multi-mirror mode (such as switching from the mode of using a single camera to capture images in S612-613 to the mode of using two cameras to capture images), please refer to the relevant description in the first embodiment above, and will not repeat them here . In addition, for the convenience of description, the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to switch from capturing images with a single camera to capturing images with two cameras (the second camera and the third camera) may be referred to as the first operation. For example, the user's selection operation on mode option 1 is the first operation. Also for the convenience of description, the interface b may be referred to as the second interface.
其中,模式选项1可以对应前后双镜模式,即第二摄像头可以是前置摄像头,第三摄像头可以是后置摄像头。相应的,界面b是前后双镜模式的取景界面。进一步的,针对不同的第一摄像头,手机100智能设置美颜效果的结果具体如下:Wherein, the mode option 1 may correspond to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, that is, the second camera may be a front camera, and the third camera may be a rear camera. Correspondingly, interface b is the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode. Further, for different first cameras, the result of smartly setting the beautification effect on the mobile phone 100 is as follows:
第一种,第一摄像头为前置摄像头。In the first type, the first camera is a front camera.
前后双镜模式中的后置摄像头不支持美颜,则第三摄像头采集的第三图像不能使用美颜效果。同时,第一摄像头是前置摄像头,则第二摄像头采集的第二图像可以继续沿用第一美颜效果。也就是说,第一摄像头是前置摄像头,第二摄像头是前置摄像头,第三摄像头是后置摄像头,界面b中包括第二预览图像和第三预览图像,则第二预览图像添加有第一美颜效果,第三预览图像未添加美颜效果。即,前置摄像头采集的图像沿用切换前的美颜效果,而后置摄像头采集的图像不使用美颜效果。In the front and rear dual-lens mode, the rear camera does not support beautification, and the third image captured by the third camera cannot use the beautification effect. At the same time, if the first camera is a front camera, the second image captured by the second camera may continue to use the first beautifying effect. That is to say, the first camera is a front camera, the second camera is a front camera, and the third camera is a rear camera. Interface b includes the second preview image and the third preview image, and the second preview image is added with the second preview image. One beautification effect, the third preview image has no beautification effect added. That is, the image captured by the front camera follows the beautifying effect before switching, while the image captured by the rear camera does not use the beautifying effect.
示例性的,界面a是图6D中的(a)示出的单前置模式的取景界面621,在切换为前后双镜模式后,手机100可以显示图6E中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面625,即取景界面625是界面b。该取景界面625中包括预览图像627和预览图像626,预览图像627是第二预览图像,预览图像626是第三预览图像。预览图像627添加有第一美颜效果,预览图像626未添加美颜效果。Exemplarily, the interface a is the viewfinder interface 621 of the single front mode shown in (a) in FIG. The viewfinder interface 625 of the dual-lens mode, that is, the viewfinder interface 625 is interface b. The viewing interface 625 includes a preview image 627 and a preview image 626, the preview image 627 is a second preview image, and the preview image 626 is a third preview image. The preview image 627 has the first beautification effect added, and the preview image 626 has no beautification effect added.
第二种,第一摄像头为后置摄像头。In the second type, the first camera is a rear camera.
前后双镜模式中的后置摄像头不支持美颜,则第三摄像头采集的第三图像不能使用美颜效果。同时,第一摄像头是后置摄像头,则第二摄像头采集的第二图像不能沿用切换前后置摄像头的美颜效果。也就是说,第一摄像头是后置摄像头,第二摄像头是前置摄像头,第三摄像头是后置摄像头,界面b中包括第二预览图像和第三预览图像,则第二预览图像和第三预览图像均未添加美颜效果。即,前置摄像头采集的图像不使用美颜效果,后置摄像头采集的图像也不再沿用切换前的美颜效果。In the front and rear dual-lens mode, the rear camera does not support beautification, and the third image captured by the third camera cannot use the beautification effect. At the same time, if the first camera is a rear camera, the second image captured by the second camera cannot inherit the beautification effect of switching the front and rear cameras. That is to say, the first camera is a rear camera, the second camera is a front camera, and the third camera is a rear camera, interface b includes the second preview image and the third preview image, then the second preview image and the third preview image None of the preview images have beautification effects added. That is, the image captured by the front camera does not use the beautification effect, and the image captured by the rear camera no longer uses the beautification effect before switching.
示例性的,界面a是图6D中的(b)示出的单后置模式的取景界面623,在切换为前后双镜模式后,手机100可以显示图6E中的(b)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面628,即取景界面628是界面b。该取景界面628中包括预览图像630和预览图像629,预览图像630是第二预览图像,预览图像629是第三预览图像。其中,预览图像630和预览图像629中均未添加美颜效果。Exemplarily, interface a is the viewfinder interface 623 shown in (b) of FIG. 6D in the single rear mode. After switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 can display the front and rear viewfinder interface 623 shown in (b) in FIG. 6E The viewfinder interface 628 of the dual-lens mode, that is, the viewfinder interface 628 is interface b. The viewing interface 628 includes a preview image 630 and a preview image 629, the preview image 630 is a second preview image, and the preview image 629 is a third preview image. Wherein, neither the preview image 630 nor the preview image 629 has a beautifying effect added.
其中,模式选项1可以对应画中画模式,第二摄像头可以是前置摄像头,第三摄像头可以是后置摄像头。相应的,界面b是前后双镜模式的取景界面。进一步的,针对不同的第一摄像头,手机100智能设置美颜效果的结果也不同,其具体与前后双镜模式类似。具体原理可参见前文关于前后双镜模式中智能设置美颜效果的说明,此处将不再赘述,而仅以如下两个示例来说明。Wherein, mode option 1 may correspond to a picture-in-picture mode, the second camera may be a front camera, and the third camera may be a rear camera. Correspondingly, interface b is the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode. Furthermore, for different first cameras, the mobile phone 100 intelligently sets the beautification effect to be different, which is similar to the front and rear dual-lens mode. For the specific principle, please refer to the previous description about the intelligent setting of the beauty effect in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, which will not be repeated here, but only the following two examples are used to illustrate.
示例一,第一摄像头为前置摄像头,界面a可以是图6D中的(a)示出的单前置模式的取景界面621,在切换为画中画模式后,手机100可以显示图6F中的(a)示出的画中画模式的取景界面631,即取景界面631是界面b。该取景界面631中包括预览图像632和预览图像633。预览图像632是第二预览图像,预览图像633是第三预览图像。其中,预览图像632添加有第一美颜效果,预览图像633未添加美颜效果。Example 1, the first camera is a front camera, and interface a may be the viewfinder interface 621 of the single front mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6D . After switching to the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 may display The viewfinder interface 631 of the picture-in-picture mode shown in (a), that is, the viewfinder interface 631 is interface b. The viewfinder interface 631 includes a preview image 632 and a preview image 633 . The preview image 632 is a second preview image, and the preview image 633 is a third preview image. Wherein, the preview image 632 has the first beautifying effect added, and the preview image 633 has no beautifying effect added.
示例二,第一摄像头为后置摄像头,界面a是图6D中的(b)示出的单后置模式的取 景界面623,在切换为画中画模式后,手机100可以显示图6F中的(b)示出的画中画模式的取景界面634,即取景界面634是界面b。该取景界面634中包括预览图像635和预览图像636,预览图像635是第二预览图像,预览图像636是第三预览图像。其中,预览图像635和预览图像636中均未添加美颜效果。Example 2, the first camera is a rear camera, interface a is the viewfinder interface 623 of the single rear mode shown in (b) in Figure 6D, after switching to the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 can display the The viewfinder interface 634 of the picture-in-picture mode shown in (b), that is, the viewfinder interface 634 is interface b. The viewing interface 634 includes a preview image 635 and a preview image 636 , the preview image 635 is a second preview image, and the preview image 636 is a third preview image. Wherein, neither the preview image 635 nor the preview image 636 has a beautifying effect added.
其中,模式选项1可以对应后后双镜模式,即第二摄像头和第三摄像头都是后置摄像头。相应的,界面b是后后双镜模式的取景界面。进一步的,后后双镜模式中两个后置摄像头采集的图像都不支持美颜,则无论第一摄像头是前置摄像头还是后置摄像头,第二预览图像和第三预览图像中均未添加美颜。Among them, the mode option 1 can correspond to the rear dual-mirror mode, that is, the second camera and the third camera are both rear cameras. Correspondingly, interface b is the viewfinder interface of the rear-rear dual-mirror mode. Furthermore, if the images collected by the two rear cameras in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode do not support beauty, no matter whether the first camera is a front camera or a rear camera, neither the second preview image nor the third preview image is added beauty.
示例性的,以第一摄像头是后置摄像头为例,界面a是图6D中的(b)示出的单后置模式的取景界面623,在切换为后后双镜模式后,手机100可以显示图2D中的(b)示出的取景界面204d,即取景界面204d是界面b。该取景界面204d中包括预览图像205d和预览图像206d,预览图像205d是第二预览图像,预览图像206d是第三预览图像。由于后后双镜模式中的后置摄像头均不支持美颜,则切换前后置摄像头的美颜效果无法沿用到后后双镜模式中。即,预览图像205d和预览图像206d均未添加美颜效果。Exemplarily, taking the first camera as a rear camera as an example, the interface a is the viewfinder interface 623 of the single rear mode shown in (b) in FIG. The viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) in FIG. 2D is displayed, that is, the viewfinder interface 204d is interface b. The viewing interface 204d includes a preview image 205d and a preview image 206d, the preview image 205d is a second preview image, and the preview image 206d is a third preview image. Since none of the rear cameras in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode supports beautification, the beautification effect of switching the front-facing camera cannot be applied to the rear-rear dual-mirror mode. That is, neither the preview image 205d nor the preview image 206d has a beautification effect added.
进一步的,在一些实施例中,在从采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式,切换为采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式后,手机100可以智能的针对不同的摄像头采集的图像添加美颜效果。而后,手机100可以再次切换回采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式。针对这种情况,在本实施例中,视频拍摄方法还包括:Further, in some embodiments, after switching from the mode of capturing images with a single camera to the mode of capturing images with two cameras, the mobile phone 100 can intelligently add a beauty effect to the images captured by different cameras. Then, the mobile phone 100 can switch back to the mode of using a single camera to collect images again. For this situation, in this embodiment, the video shooting method also includes:
S614、手机100响应于用户对界面b的操作1,在界面b中显示多个模式选项。S614. The mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface b in response to the user's operation 1 on the interface b.
S615、手机100响应于用户对模式选项2的选择操作,显示界面c。模式选项2对应采用第四摄像头采集图像的模式,界面c是采用第四摄像头录像的取景界面。界面c中包括全屏显示的第四预览图像,第四预览图像是手机100对第四摄像头采集的第四图像添加第一美颜效果后得到的。S615. The mobile phone 100 displays an interface c in response to the user's selection operation on mode option 2. Mode option 2 corresponds to the mode of using the fourth camera to capture images, and interface c is a viewfinder interface using the fourth camera to record video. Interface c includes a fourth preview image displayed in full screen, and the fourth preview image is obtained by mobile phone 100 adding the first beauty effect to the fourth image captured by the fourth camera.
其中,第四摄像头可以与第一摄像头相同,也可以与第一摄像头不同。例如,第一摄像头是后置主摄像头,第四摄像头可以是后置主摄像头,也可以是前置摄像头。Wherein, the fourth camera may be the same as or different from the first camera. For example, the first camera is a rear main camera, and the fourth camera may be a rear main camera or a front camera.
通过上述S614-S615,手机100可以从采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式,再次恢复为采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式,在切换后,可以显示界面c。在界面c中,可以为单个摄像头采集的图像添加第一美颜效果。另外,为了方便说明,可以将界面c称为第三界面,将触发手机100从采用两个摄像头采集图像切换为采用单个摄像头采集图像的操作(如用户对模式选项2的选择操作)称为第二操作。Through the above steps S614-S615, the mobile phone 100 can return from the mode using two cameras to collect images to the mode using a single camera to collect images again, and interface c can be displayed after switching. In interface c, the first beauty effect can be added to the images captured by a single camera. In addition, for the convenience of description, interface c may be referred to as the third interface, and the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to switch from using two cameras to collect images to using a single camera to collect images (such as the user's selection operation for mode option 2) is called the third interface. Two operations.
示例性的,以界面b是图6E中的(a)示出的取景界面625为例,在切换为单前置模式后,手机100可以显示图6D中的(a)示出的取景界面621,即取景界面621是界面c。该取景界面621中的预览图像622添加有第一美颜效果,即预览图像622是第四预览图像。Exemplarily, taking interface b as the viewfinder interface 625 shown in (a) in FIG. 6E as an example, after switching to the single front mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 621 shown in (a) in FIG. 6D , that is, the viewfinder interface 621 is interface c. The preview image 622 in the viewfinder interface 621 is added with the first beauty effect, that is, the preview image 622 is a fourth preview image.
综上所述,采用本实施例的方法,在录像前的取景界面或者在正在录像的取景界面中,手机100可以在从采用单个摄像头采集图像的模式,切换为采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式后,智能的设置两个摄像头分别采集的图像的美颜效果。从而提高美颜设置的合理性。In summary, using the method of this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can switch from the mode of capturing images with a single camera to the mode of capturing images with two cameras in the viewfinder interface before recording or in the viewfinder interface that is recording. Finally, intelligently set the beautification effect of the images captured by the two cameras respectively. Thereby improving the rationality of beauty settings.
场景2,从采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像(如前后双镜模式或者画中画模式)切换到采用两个后置摄像头采集图像(如后后双镜模式)。 Scenario 2, switching from using one front camera and one rear camera to capture images (such as front and rear dual-mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode) to using two rear cameras to capture images (such as rear and rear dual-mirror mode).
请参见图6G,为本申请实施例提供的一种视频拍摄方法的流程图,可以应用于手机 100。在本实施例中,主要以场景2为例,来说明智能设置美颜效果的具体实现。Please refer to FIG. 6G , which is a flow chart of a video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . In this embodiment, scene 2 is mainly taken as an example to illustrate the specific implementation of intelligently setting the beautifying effect.
如图6G所示,本实施例的视频拍摄方法可以包括:As shown in Figure 6G, the video shooting method of this embodiment may include:
S641、手机100显示界面a,界面a是以前后双镜模式或者画中画模式录像的取景界面。该界面a中包括第一预览图像和第五预览图像。第一预览图像是手机100对第一摄像头采集的第一图像添加第一美颜效果后得到的,第二预览图像未添加美颜效果。S641. The mobile phone 100 displays an interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface for video recording in a front-rear dual-mirror mode or a picture-in-picture mode. The interface a includes a first preview image and a fifth preview image. The first preview image is obtained by the mobile phone 100 after adding a first beautifying effect to the first image captured by the first camera, and the second preview image does not add a beautifying effect.
示例性的,界面a可以是图6E中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面625,该取景界面625中包括预览图像626和预览图像627,预览图像627是第一预览图像,预览图像626是第五预览图像。预览图像627添加有第一美颜效果,预览图像626未添加美颜效果。Exemplarily, the interface a may be the viewfinder interface 625 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. Preview image 626 is a fifth preview image. The preview image 627 has the first beautification effect added, and the preview image 626 has no beautification effect added.
也就是说,在本实施例中,切换前的前后双镜模式中,为前置摄像头采集的图像添加了第一美颜效果。同样的,该界面a中的美颜效果可以是根据用户对美颜控件和美颜效果控件的操作而设置的,也可以是在采用本申请方案之后,根据多镜子模式的切换而智能设置的。That is to say, in this embodiment, in the front and rear dual-lens mode before switching, the first beauty effect is added to the image captured by the front camera. Similarly, the beautifying effect in the interface a may be set according to the user's operation on the beautifying control and the beautifying effect control, or may be intelligently set according to the switching of the multi-mirror mode after adopting the solution of this application.
S642、手机100响应于用户对界面a的操作1,在界面a中显示多个模式选项。其中,多个模式选项与多个多镜子模式一一对应。S642. The mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface a in response to the user's operation 1 on the interface a. Wherein, a plurality of mode options corresponds to a plurality of multi-mirror modes one by one.
S643、手机100响应于用户对模式选项1的选择操作,显示界面b。模式选项1对应后后双镜模式,界面b是以后后双镜模式录像的取景界面。界面b中包括第二预览图像和第三预览图像,第二预览图像是手机100处理第二摄像头采集的第二图像得到,第三预览图像是手机100处理第三摄像头采集的第三图像得到的。第二预览图像和第三预览图像均未添加美颜效果。S643. The mobile phone 100 responds to the user's selection operation on mode option 1, and displays interface b. Mode option 1 corresponds to the rear dual mirror mode, and interface b is the viewfinder interface for recording in the rear dual mirror mode. Interface b includes a second preview image and a third preview image, the second preview image is obtained by the mobile phone 100 processing the second image collected by the second camera, and the third preview image is obtained by the mobile phone 100 processing the third image collected by the third camera . No beautification effect is added to the second preview image and the third preview image.
由于后后双镜模式完全不支持美颜,则在从前后双镜模式或者画中画模式切换到后后双镜模式后,手机100则需关闭切换前前置摄像头的美颜效果(如第一美颜效果)。Since the rear and rear dual-mirror mode does not support beauty at all, after switching from the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode to the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 needs to turn off the beauty effect of the front camera before switching (as shown in Section - beautifying effect).
示例性的,界面a是图6E中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面625,第一预览图像是预览图像627,该预览图像627具有第一美颜效果;第五预览图像是预览图像626,预览图像626不具有第一美颜效果。在切换为后后双镜模式后,手机100可以显示图2D中的(b)示出的取景界面204d,即取景界面204d是界面b。该取景界面204d中包括预览图像205d和预览图像206d,预览图像205d是第二预览图像,预览图像206d是第三预览图像。由于后后双镜模式中的后置摄像头均不支持美颜,则预览图像205d和预览图像206d均未添加美颜效果。Exemplarily, the interface a is the viewfinder interface 625 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. is a preview image 626, and the preview image 626 does not have the first beauty effect. After switching to the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 204d shown in (b) of FIG. 2D , that is, the viewfinder interface 204d is interface b. The viewing interface 204d includes a preview image 205d and a preview image 206d, the preview image 205d is a second preview image, and the preview image 206d is a third preview image. Since neither of the rear cameras in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode supports beautification, neither the preview image 205d nor the preview image 206d has a beautification effect added.
进一步的,在一些实施例中,在从采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像切换到采用两个后置摄像头采集图像后,手机100可以智能的关闭美颜效果。而后,手机100可以再次切换回采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像。针对这种情况,在本实施例中,视频拍摄方法还包括:Further, in some embodiments, after switching from using one front camera and one rear camera to collect images to using two rear cameras to collect images, the mobile phone 100 can intelligently turn off the beautification effect. Then, the mobile phone 100 can switch back to using a front camera and a rear camera to collect images again. For this situation, in this embodiment, the video shooting method also includes:
S644、手机100响应于用户对界面b的操作1,在界面b中显示多个模式选项。S644. The mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface b in response to the user's operation 1 on the interface b.
S645、手机100响应于用户对模式选项3的选择操作,显示界面d。界面d是前后双镜模式或者画中画模式的取景界面。界面d中包括第六预览图像和第七预览图像,第六预览图像是对第六摄像头采集的第六图像添加第一美颜效果得到的,第七预览图像是处理第七摄像头采集的第七图像得到的。第六摄像头是前置摄像头,第七摄像头是后置摄像头,第七预览图像未添加美颜效果。S645. The mobile phone 100 displays an interface d in response to the user's selection operation on mode option 3. Interface d is the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode. Interface d includes a sixth preview image and a seventh preview image, the sixth preview image is obtained by adding the first beauty effect to the sixth image captured by the sixth camera, and the seventh preview image is obtained by processing the seventh image captured by the seventh camera. image obtained. The sixth camera is the front camera, the seventh camera is the rear camera, and the seventh preview image has no beautification effect added.
也就是说,模式选项3对应采用前后双镜模式或者画中画模式。In other words, mode option 3 corresponds to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode.
其中,第六预览图像和第七预览图像在界面d中的显示布局,可以与第一预览图像和第五预览图像在界面a中的显示布局相同。示例性的,均为分屏布局或者均为画中画布局。或者,第六预览图像和第七预览图像在界面d中的显示布局,可以与第一预览图像和第五预览图像在界面a中的显示布局相同。示例性的,第六预览图像和第七预览图像在界面d中为分屏布局,第一预览图像和第五预览图像在界面a为画中画布局。如,界面a为图6E中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面625,界面d为图6F中的(a)示出的画中画模式的取景界面631。又示例性的,第六预览图像和第七预览图像在界面d中为画中画布局,第一预览图像和第五预览图像在界面a为分屏布局。如,界面a为图6F中的(a)示出的画中画模式的取景界面631,界面d为图6E中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面625。Wherein, the display layout of the sixth preview image and the seventh preview image on the interface d may be the same as the display layout of the first preview image and the fifth preview image on the interface a. Exemplarily, all are split-screen layouts or all are picture-in-picture layouts. Alternatively, the display layout of the sixth preview image and the seventh preview image on interface d may be the same as the display layout of the first preview image and the fifth preview image on interface a. Exemplarily, the sixth preview image and the seventh preview image have a split-screen layout on interface d, and the first preview image and fifth preview image have a picture-in-picture layout on interface a. For example, interface a is the viewfinder interface 625 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E , and interface d is the viewfinder interface 631 of the picture-in-picture mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6F . For another example, the sixth preview image and the seventh preview image are in a picture-in-picture layout on the interface d, and the first preview image and the fifth preview image are in a split-screen layout on the interface a. For example, interface a is the viewfinder interface 631 in the picture-in-picture mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6F , and interface d is the viewfinder interface 625 in the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E .
在本实施例中,在从采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像切换到采用两个后置摄像头采集图像后,手机100可以取消美颜效果;而后,再次切回采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像后,手机100可以显示界面d。在界面d中,可以恢复为前置摄像头采集的图像添加美颜效果。另外,为了方便说明,界面d也可以称为第四界面,触发手机100从采用两个后置摄像头采集图像切换为采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像的操作(如用户对模式选项3的选择操作)可以称为第三操作。In this embodiment, after switching from using one front-facing camera and one rear-facing camera to capture images using two rear-facing cameras, the mobile phone 100 can cancel the beauty effect; and then switch back to using one front-facing camera After collecting images with a rear camera, the mobile phone 100 may display interface d. In interface d, you can resume adding beauty effects to images captured by the front camera. In addition, for the convenience of description, interface d can also be referred to as the fourth interface, which triggers the operation of the mobile phone 100 to switch from using two rear cameras to collect images to adopt one front camera and one rear camera to collect images (such as the user's mode option 3) can be referred to as a third operation.
示例性的,界面b是图2D中的(b)示出的后后双镜模式的取景界面204d,在切换为采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像后,例如,切回画中画模式后,手机100可显示图6F中的(a)示出的取景界面631。取景界面631中包括预览图像632和预览图像633,预览图像632为第六预览图像,预览图像633为第七预览图像。预览图像632添加有第一美颜效果。Exemplarily, the interface b is the viewfinder interface 204d of the rear-rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. After the drawing mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 631 shown in (a) of FIG. 6F. The viewfinder interface 631 includes a preview image 632 and a preview image 633, the preview image 632 is the sixth preview image, and the preview image 633 is the seventh preview image. The first beauty effect is added to the preview image 632 .
综上所述,采用本实施例的方法,在录像前的取景界面或者在正在录像的取景界面中,手机100可以在从采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像,切换为采用两个后置摄像头采集图像后,智能的关闭美颜效果。从而提高美颜设置的合理性。To sum up, with the method of this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can switch from using one front camera and one rear camera to collect images, and switch to using two After the rear camera captures the image, it intelligently turns off the beautification effect. Thereby improving the rationality of beauty settings.
在上述场景1和场景2的一些实施例中,在手机100智能的关闭掉全部或者部分摄像头采集的图像的美颜效果后,手机100还可以进一步在界面b中显示提示1。该提示1用于提示已关闭美颜。In some embodiments of the above scenarios 1 and 2, after the mobile phone 100 intelligently turns off all or part of the beautifying effects of the images captured by the camera, the mobile phone 100 may further display prompt 1 on the interface b. The prompt 1 is used to indicate that beauty is turned off.
示例性的,界面a是图6D中的(b)示出的单后置模式的取景界面623。该取景界面623中的预览图像624添加有第一美颜效果,即为后置摄像头采集的图像添加了第一美颜效果。而后,手机100切换为前后双镜模式,则界面b可以是图6H示出的取景界面651。该取景界面651中包括预览图像652、预览图像653和提示654。预览图像651和预览图像652均未添加美颜效果,即关闭了第一美颜效果。提示654具体为:采用两个摄像头录像时,后置摄像头不支持美颜,用于提示已关闭美颜。即,提示654是提示1。Exemplarily, the interface a is the viewfinder interface 623 in the single rear mode shown in (b) of FIG. 6D . The first beauty effect is added to the preview image 624 in the viewfinder interface 623, that is, the first beauty effect is added to the image captured by the rear camera. Then, the mobile phone 100 is switched to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, and the interface b may be the viewfinder interface 651 shown in FIG. 6H . The viewfinder interface 651 includes a preview image 652 , a preview image 653 and a prompt 654 . No beautification effect is added to the preview image 651 and the preview image 652, that is, the first beautification effect is turned off. Prompt 654 is specifically: when two cameras are used to record video, the rear camera does not support beautification, which is used to prompt that beautification has been turned off. That is, prompt 654 is prompt 1 .
应注意,在进入多镜录像模式至退出多镜录像模式的一次录像过程中,手机100仅在智能设置美颜效果的过程中,第一次关闭美颜效果时,显示提示1。此后则不再显示。从而避免影响预览。It should be noted that during a video recording process from entering the multi-camera recording mode to exiting the multi-camera recording mode, the mobile phone 100 will only display a prompt 1 when the beauty effect is turned off for the first time during the process of intelligently setting the beauty effect. It will no longer be displayed after that. This avoids affecting the preview.
场景3,从采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像切换到采用单个摄像头采集图像。 Scenario 3, switching from capturing images with one front camera and one rear camera to capturing images with a single camera.
其中,采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像的模式可以为前后双镜模式或 者画中画模式。下文关于场景3的说明中,主要以前后双镜模式为例来说明,画中画模式的原理与之类似,本文中将不再赘述。Wherein, the mode of adopting a front camera and a rear camera to collect images can be a front and rear dual-mirror mode or a picture-in-picture mode. In the description of Scene 3 below, the front and rear dual-mirror mode is mainly used as an example to illustrate the principle. The principle of the picture-in-picture mode is similar, and will not be repeated in this article.
切换前是前后双镜模式,并且为前置摄像头采集的图像添加了第一美颜效果。若切换后是单前置模式,则可以继续沿用第一美颜效果。即,切换后的取景界面中,预览图像添加有第一美颜效果。若切换后是单后置模式,则取消第一美颜效果。即,切换后的取景界面中,预览图像未添加第一美颜效果。Before switching, it is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, and the first beauty effect is added to the images collected by the front camera. If it is the single front mode after switching, you can continue to use the first beauty effect. That is, in the viewfinder interface after switching, the first beauty effect is added to the preview image. If it is a single rear mode after switching, the first beautifying effect will be cancelled. That is, in the viewfinder interface after switching, the first beauty effect is not added to the preview image.
示例性的,切换前是前后双镜模式,并且为前置摄像头采集的图像添加了第一美颜效果,则手机100可以显示图6E中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面625。该取景界面625中的预览图像627添加有第一美颜效果,即为前置摄像头采集的图像添加了第一美颜效果。若切换后的是单前置模式,则手机100可以显示图6D中的(a)示出单后置模式的取景界面621。该取景界面621中全屏显示的预览图像622添加有第一美颜效果,即单个前置摄像头采集的图像继续沿用第一美颜效果。若切换后的是前后置模式,则手机100可以显示图2E中的(b)示出的取景界面203e。该取景界面203e中全屏显示的预览图像204e未添加第一美颜效果。即,关闭了美颜效果。Exemplarily, before the switch is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, and the first beauty effect is added to the image captured by the front camera, then the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E 625. The first beauty effect is added to the preview image 627 in the viewfinder interface 625, that is, the first beauty effect is added to the image captured by the front camera. If the single front mode is switched, the mobile phone 100 may display a viewfinder interface 621 showing a single rear mode in (a) of FIG. 6D . The first beauty effect is added to the preview image 622 displayed in full screen in the viewfinder interface 621 , that is, the image captured by a single front camera continues to use the first beauty effect. If the switched mode is the front and rear mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203e shown in (b) of FIG. 2E. The preview image 204e displayed in full screen in the viewfinder interface 203e does not have the first beauty effect added. That is, the beauty effect is turned off.
场景4,从采用两个后置摄像头采集图像(如后后双镜模式)切换到其它多镜子模式。 Scenario 4, switching from using two rear cameras to capture images (such as rear and rear dual-mirror mode) to other multi-mirror modes.
采用两个摄像头采集图像的情况下,后置摄像头不支持美颜,则后后双镜模式是不支持美颜的。因此,后后双镜模式的取景界面中的预览图像不会添加有美颜效果,在此基础上,切换到其它多镜子模式后,依然不会添加有美颜效果。In the case of using two cameras to collect images, the rear camera does not support beautification, and the rear dual-lens mode does not support beautification. Therefore, no beautification effect will be added to the preview image in the viewfinder interface of the rear and rear dual-mirror mode. On this basis, after switching to other multi-mirror modes, the beautification effect will still not be added.
关于上述场景3和场景4,需要说明如下:Regarding the above scenario 3 and scenario 4, it needs to be explained as follows:
场景3可能出现在场景1的S613之后,即在从采用单个摄像头采集图像切换为采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像之后,再次切换为采用单个摄像头采集图像。针对场景3出现在场景1的S613之后的情况,则可以按照S615来处理,否则,则按照场景3中的方式来处理。从而可以保证智能设置美颜效果的一致性,避免发生冲突。 Scene 3 may appear after S613 of Scene 1, that is, after switching from using a single camera to collect images to using a front camera and a rear camera to collect images, then switch to using a single camera to collect images again. For the case that scene 3 appears after S613 of scene 1, it can be processed according to S615; otherwise, it can be processed according to the method in scene 3. In this way, the consistency of the beauty effect of the smart settings can be guaranteed to avoid conflicts.
类似的,场景4可能出现在场景1的S613之后,即在从采用单个摄像头采集图像切换为采用两个后置摄像头采集图像之后,再次切换为采用单个摄像头采集图像。针对场景4出现在场景1的S613之后的情况,则可以按照S615来处理。或者,场景4可能出现在场景2的S643之后,即在从采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像切换为采用两个后置摄像头采集图像之后,再次切换为采用一个前置摄像头和一个后置摄像头采集图像。针对场景4出现在场景2的S643之后的情况,则可以按照S645来处理。否则,则按照场景4中的方式来处理。从而可以保证智能设置美颜效果的一致性,避免发生冲突。Similarly, Scene 4 may appear after S613 of Scene 1, that is, after switching from using a single camera to collect images to using two rear cameras, switch to using a single camera to collect images again. For the situation that scene 4 appears after S613 of scene 1, it can be processed according to S615. Alternatively, Scenario 4 may occur after S643 of Scenario 2, that is, after switching from capturing images with one front camera and one rear camera to capturing images with two rear cameras, switching again to using one front camera and one The rear camera captures images. For the situation that scene 4 occurs after S643 of scene 2, it can be processed according to S645. Otherwise, proceed as in Scenario 4. In this way, the consistency of the beauty effect of the smart settings can be guaranteed to avoid conflicts.
另外,由于正在录像的过程中无法通过用户手动来设置美颜级别,采用上述智能设置美颜效果的方式,可以实现录像过程中美颜效果的自动设置。In addition, since the beautification level cannot be manually set by the user during the recording process, the above-mentioned method of intelligently setting the beautifying effect can realize automatic setting of the beautifying effect during the recording process.
在前述关于美颜功能的说明中,针对各种场景,仅以一次或者两次切换过程来说明了手机自动设置美颜的具体实现。实际中,两次以上的切换过程中,也可以自动设置美颜。下面以一个完整的示例来说明多次切换多镜子模式的过程中,手机自动设置美颜的具体实现。In the foregoing description about the beautification function, for various scenarios, only one or two switching processes are used to illustrate the specific realization of the mobile phone's automatic setting of beautification. In practice, the beautification can also be automatically set during more than two switching processes. The following uses a complete example to illustrate the specific implementation of the mobile phone's automatic setting of beautification during the process of switching the multi-mirror mode multiple times.
在首次切换前,手机通过第一摄像头采集图像,并以全屏显示。其中,第一摄像头是后置摄像头。即,首次切换前,手机采用的录制模式是单后置模式。在单后置模式下,手机添加第一美颜效果后,可显示第一界面,第一界面是手机录像的取景界面,第一界面中 包括全屏显示的第一预览图像,第一预览图像是对第一摄像头采集的第一图像添加第一美颜效果后得到的。例如,第一界面是图6D中的(b)示出的取景界面623。Before switching for the first time, the mobile phone collects images through the first camera and displays them in full screen. Among them, the first camera is the rear camera. That is, before the first switch, the recording mode adopted by the mobile phone is the single rear mode. In the single rear mode, after adding the first beautifying effect to the mobile phone, the first interface can be displayed. The first interface is the viewfinder interface of the video recording of the mobile phone. The first interface includes the first preview image displayed in full screen. The first preview image is It is obtained by adding the first beauty effect to the first image captured by the first camera. For example, the first interface is the viewfinder interface 623 shown in (b) of FIG. 6D .
该第一界面中还包括第一控件(如模式图标或者面板展示控件),第一控件用于触发手机切换录制模式(即多镜子模式)。The first interface also includes a first control (such as a mode icon or a panel display control), and the first control is used to trigger the mobile phone to switch the recording mode (ie, the multi-mirror mode).
在单后置模式下,手机可通过第一控件将录制模式切换为前后双镜模式或者画中画模式。具体的,手机可接收用户对第一界面中第一控件的点击操作。手机响应于点击操作,可在第一界面中显示多个选项(即多个模式选项),多个选项与多种录制模式一一对应。手机可接收用户对第一选项的选择操作,第一选项是多个选项中的一个,第一选项对应前后双镜模式或者画中画模式。手机响应于该选择操作,可显示第二界面,第二界面是手机录像的取景界面,第二界面中包括第二预览图像和第三预览图像,第二预览图像是对第二摄像头采集的第二图像处理、且未添加美颜效果后得到的,第三预览图像是对第三摄像头采集的第三图像处理、且未添加美颜效果后得到的。即,手机响应于用户对第一选项的选择操作,则可切换到前后双镜模式或者画中画模式,并且切换后的取景界面中,两个预览图像均未添加美颜效果。例如,第一界面是图6D中的(b)示出的单后置模式的取景界面623,第二界面是图6E中的(b)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面628。In single rear mode, the phone can switch the recording mode to front and rear dual mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode through the first control. Specifically, the mobile phone may receive a user's click operation on the first control in the first interface. In response to the click operation, the mobile phone can display multiple options (that is, multiple mode options) on the first interface, and the multiple options correspond to multiple recording modes one by one. The mobile phone may receive a user's selection operation on a first option, the first option is one of multiple options, and the first option corresponds to a front-rear dual-mirror mode or a picture-in-picture mode. The mobile phone can display the second interface in response to the selection operation, the second interface is the viewfinder interface of the mobile phone video, the second interface includes the second preview image and the third preview image, and the second preview image is the first preview image collected by the second camera. The second image is processed without adding a beautifying effect, and the third preview image is obtained after processing the third image captured by the third camera without adding a beautifying effect. That is, in response to the user's selection operation on the first option, the mobile phone can switch to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, and in the viewfinder interface after switching, no beauty effect is added to the two preview images. For example, the first interface is the viewfinder interface 623 in single rear mode shown in (b) in FIG. 6D , and the second interface is the viewfinder interface 628 in front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. 6E .
在切换为前后双镜模式或者画中画模式后,手机还可以在第二界面中显示第一提示信息,第一提示信息用于提示在使用两个摄像头采集图像的情况下,所有后置摄像头采集的图像均不支持美颜。从而可以提示用户取消滤镜的原因。After switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone can also display the first prompt message on the second interface. The first prompt message is used to prompt that when two cameras are used to collect images, all rear cameras None of the collected images support beauty. This allows the user to be prompted for the reason for canceling the filter.
在切换为前后双镜模式或者画中画模式,并取消美颜后,手机可继续切换为单前置模式或者单后置模式。具体的,第二界面中也可以包括第一控件,在显示第二界面之后,手机可接收用户对第二界面中第一控件的点击操作。手机响应于点击操作,在第二界面中显示多个选项。手机接收用户对第二选项的选择操作,第二选项是多个选项中的一个,第二选项对应单前置模式或者单后置模式。手机响应于选择操作,显示第三界面,第三界面是手机录像的取景界面,第三界面中包括全屏显示的第四预览图像,第四预览图像是对第四摄像头采集的第四图像添加第一美颜效果后得到的。第四摄像头是后置摄像头或者前置摄像头。即,手机响应于用户对第二选项的选择操作,则可切换到单前置模式或者单后置模式,并且可恢复至首次切换前的美颜效果,即第一美颜效果。例如,第二界面是图6E中的(b)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面628,第三界面是图6D中的(a)示出的单前置模式的取景界面621。After switching to front and rear dual-mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode, and canceling the beautification, the phone can continue to switch to single front mode or single rear mode. Specifically, the second interface may also include the first control, and after the second interface is displayed, the mobile phone may receive a user's click operation on the first control in the second interface. The mobile phone displays multiple options on the second interface in response to the click operation. The mobile phone receives a user's selection operation on the second option, the second option is one of multiple options, and the second option corresponds to a single front mode or a single rear mode. The mobile phone displays a third interface in response to the selection operation. The third interface is a viewfinder interface for video recordings of the mobile phone. The third interface includes a fourth preview image displayed in full screen, and the fourth preview image is the fourth image collected by the fourth camera. It is obtained after a beauty effect. The fourth camera is a rear camera or a front camera. That is, the mobile phone can switch to the single front mode or the single rear mode in response to the user's selection operation on the second option, and can restore to the beautifying effect before the first switching, that is, the first beautifying effect. For example, the second interface is the viewfinder interface 628 in front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. 6E , and the third interface is the viewfinder interface 621 in single front mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6D .
若第四摄像头是前置摄像头,即切换到单前置模式,并美颜效果后,手机还可以继续切换为前后双镜模式或者画中画模式。具体的,第三界面中也可以包括第一控件,在显示第三界面之后,手机可接收用户对第三界面中第一控件的点击操作。手机响应于点击操作,在第三界面中显示多个选项。手机接收用户对第三选项的选择操作,第三选项对应前后双镜模式或者画中画模式。应注意,第四选项对应的录制模式和第一选项对应的录制模式可以相同,例如,均为前后双镜模式。或者,第四选项对应的录制模式和第一选项对应的录制模式也可以相同,例如,第四选项对应的录制模式为画中画模式,第一选项对应的录制模式为前后双镜模式。手机响应于选择操作,显示第四界面,第四界面是手机录像的取景界面,第四界面中包括第五预览图像和第六预览图像。第五预览图像是对第五摄像头采集的第五图像添加第一美颜效果后得到的,第五摄像头是前置摄像头。第六预览图像是对第 六摄像头采集的第五图像处理、且未添加美颜效果后得到的,第六摄像头是后置摄像头。也就是说,在从单前置模式切换为前后双镜模式或者画中画模式后,前置摄像头采集的图像可以沿用切换前的第一美颜效果,而后置摄像头采集的图像则不添加美颜效果。例如,第三界面是图6D中的(a)示出的单前置模式的取景界面621,第四界面是图6E中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面625。If the fourth camera is a front camera, switch to the single front mode, and after the beautification effect, the mobile phone can continue to switch to the front and rear dual mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode. Specifically, the third interface may also include the first control, and after the third interface is displayed, the mobile phone may receive a user's click operation on the first control in the third interface. The mobile phone displays multiple options on the third interface in response to the click operation. The mobile phone receives the user's selection operation of the third option, and the third option corresponds to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode. It should be noted that the recording mode corresponding to the fourth option may be the same as the recording mode corresponding to the first option, for example, both are front and rear dual-mirror modes. Alternatively, the recording mode corresponding to the fourth option may be the same as the recording mode corresponding to the first option. For example, the recording mode corresponding to the fourth option is the picture-in-picture mode, and the recording mode corresponding to the first option is the front and rear dual-mirror mode. In response to the selection operation, the mobile phone displays a fourth interface, the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the mobile phone, and the fourth interface includes a fifth preview image and a sixth preview image. The fifth preview image is obtained by adding the first beauty effect to the fifth image captured by the fifth camera, where the fifth camera is a front camera. The sixth preview image is obtained after processing the fifth image captured by the sixth camera without adding a beautification effect, and the sixth camera is a rear camera. That is to say, after switching from single front mode to front and rear dual mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode, the image captured by the front camera can continue to use the first beautification effect before the switch, while the image captured by the rear camera will not add beautification. color effect. For example, the third interface is the viewfinder interface 621 in the single front mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6D , and the fourth interface is the viewfinder interface 625 in the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E .
在从单前置模式切换为前后双镜模式或者画中画模式后,手机可以继续切换到后后双镜模式。具体的,录制模式还包括后后双镜模式,第四界面中也可以包括第一控件。在显示第四界面之后,手机可接收用户对第四界面中第一控件的点击操作。手机响应于点击操作,在第四界面中显示多个选项。手机可接收用户对第四选项的选择操作,第四选项是多个选项中的一个,第四选项对应后后双镜模式。手机响应于选择操作,显示第五界面,第五界面是手机录像的取景界面,第五界面中包括第七预览图像和第八预览图像。第七预览图像是对第七摄像头采集的第七图像处理、且未添加美颜效果后得到的,第八预览图像是对第八摄像头采集的第八图像处理、且未添加美颜效果后得到的。其中,第七摄像头和第八摄像头均是后置摄像头。也就是说,在从前后双镜模式或者画中画模式切换为后后双镜模式后,两个后置摄像头采集的图像均不添加美颜效果。例如,第四界面是图6E中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面625,第五界面是图2D中的(b)示出的后后双镜模式的取景界面204d。After switching from the single front mode to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone can continue to switch to the rear and rear dual-mirror mode. Specifically, the recording mode also includes a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the fourth interface may also include the first control. After the fourth interface is displayed, the mobile phone may receive a user's click operation on the first control in the fourth interface. The mobile phone displays multiple options on the fourth interface in response to the click operation. The mobile phone can receive the user's selection operation on the fourth option, the fourth option is one of multiple options, and the fourth option corresponds to the rear and rear dual-mirror mode. In response to the selection operation, the mobile phone displays a fifth interface, the fifth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the mobile phone, and the fifth interface includes the seventh preview image and the eighth preview image. The seventh preview image is obtained after processing the seventh image captured by the seventh camera without adding a beautifying effect, and the eighth preview image is obtained after processing the eighth image captured by the eighth camera without adding a beautifying effect of. Among them, both the seventh camera and the eighth camera are rear cameras. That is to say, after switching from the front and rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode to the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, the images captured by the two rear cameras will not have a beautification effect. For example, the fourth interface is the viewfinder interface 625 in the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) in FIG. 6E , and the fifth interface is the viewfinder interface 204d in the rear and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. 2D .
或者,在切换为前后双镜模式或者画中画模式,并取消美颜,而后继续切换为单前置模式或者单后置模式,并恢复美颜效果后,手机还可继续切换到后后双镜模式。具体的,录制模式还包括后后双镜模式,第三界面中还包括第一控件。在显示第三界面之后,手机接收用户对第三界面中第一控件的点击操作。手机响应于点击操作,在第三界面中显示多个选项。手机接收用户对第四选项的选择操作,第四选项是多个选项中的一个,第四选项对应后后双镜模式。手机响应于选择操作,显示第六界面,第六界面是手机录像的取景界面,第六界面中包括第九预览图像和第十预览图像。第九预览图像是对第九摄像头采集的第九图像处理、且未添加美颜效果后得到的。第十预览图像是对第十摄像头采集的第十图像处理、且未添加美颜效果后得到的。第九摄像头和第十摄像头均是后置摄像头。也就是说,在从单前置模式或者单后置模式切换为后后双镜式后,两个后置摄像头采集的图像均不添加美颜效果。例如,第三界面是图6D中的(a)示出的单前置模式的取景界面621,图2D中的(b)示出的后后双镜模式的取景界面204d。Or, after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode, and canceling the beautification, and then continuing to switch to the single front mode or single rear mode, and restoring the beautification effect, the phone can continue to switch to the rear dual-lens mode. mirror mode. Specifically, the recording mode also includes a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the third interface also includes a first control. After the third interface is displayed, the mobile phone receives the user's click operation on the first control in the third interface. The mobile phone displays multiple options on the third interface in response to the click operation. The mobile phone receives a user's selection operation on the fourth option, where the fourth option is one of multiple options, and the fourth option corresponds to a rear-rear dual-mirror mode. In response to the selection operation, the mobile phone displays a sixth interface, the sixth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the mobile phone, and the sixth interface includes a ninth preview image and a tenth preview image. The ninth preview image is obtained after processing the ninth image captured by the ninth camera without adding a beautifying effect. The tenth preview image is obtained after processing the tenth image collected by the tenth camera without adding a beautifying effect. Both the ninth camera and the tenth camera are rear cameras. That is to say, after switching from single front mode or single rear mode to rear and rear dual-mirror mode, the images captured by the two rear cameras will not add beauty effects. For example, the third interface is the viewfinder interface 621 in the single front mode shown in (a) of FIG. 6D , and the viewfinder interface 204d in the rear-rear dual-mirror mode shown in (b) in FIG. 2D .
实施例三、滤镜功能。 Embodiment 3, filter function.
本申请实施例提供的一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。其中,在多镜录像模式中,录像前的取景界面中,手机100可以响应于用户对取景界面中滤镜图标的操作(如点击操作)而显示多个滤镜选项,供用户选择滤镜。多个滤镜选项与多种滤镜一一对应。而后,手机100响应于用户对滤镜选项的选择操作,则可以设置相应的滤镜。从而可以在多镜录像模式的录像前,完成滤镜设置。A video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . Wherein, in the multi-mirror recording mode, in the viewfinder interface before recording, the mobile phone 100 may display multiple filter options for the user to select a filter in response to the user's operation (such as clicking) on the filter icon in the viewfinder interface. Multiple filter options correspond to various filters one by one. Then, the mobile phone 100 may set a corresponding filter in response to the user's selection operation on the filter option. In this way, the filter setting can be completed before recording in the multi-mirror recording mode.
示例性的,滤镜图标是图2C中的(a)示出的取景界面201c中的图标233。手机100响应于用户对图2C中的(a)示出的取景界面201c中的图标233的点击操作,可以显示图7A中的(a)示出的取景界面201c。图7A中的(a)示出的取景界面201c中包括4种滤镜的滤镜选项(如虚线框701中所示),每个滤镜选项中显示有滤镜效果。而后,手机 100可接收用户对滤镜的选择操作。手机100响应于用户对图7A中的(a)示出的取景界面201c中滤镜选项702的选择操作,可显示图7A中的(b)示出的取景界面201c。图7A中的(b)示出的取景界面201c中预览图像添加有如滤镜选项702显示的滤镜效果的滤镜。Exemplarily, the filter icon is the icon 233 in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 2C . The mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 7A in response to the user's click operation on the icon 233 in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 2C . The viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 7A includes four kinds of filter options (as shown in the dotted box 701 ), and each filter option displays a filter effect. Then, the mobile phone 100 can receive the user's selection operation on the filter. The mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (b) in FIG. 7A in response to the user's selection operation on the filter option 702 in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 7A . In (b) of FIG. 7A , the preview image in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in FIG.
在一些实施例中,多种滤镜选项中包括无滤镜的选项。例如,图7A中的(a)示出的取景界面201c中的滤镜选项703为无滤镜的选项。手机100响应于用户对无滤镜的选项的选择操作,可以关闭滤镜。In some embodiments, the plurality of filter options includes a no-filter option. For example, the filter option 703 in the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) of FIG. 7A is an option of no filter. The mobile phone 100 may turn off the filter in response to the user's selection operation on the option without filter.
实际中,当采用两个以上的摄像头采集预览图像时,难以使用统一的滤镜来匹配两个以上的摄像头采集的预览图像。例如,在前后双镜模式中,前置摄像头采集人像,后置摄像头采集风景。通常情况下,对人像和对风景添加滤镜的需求是不同的。因此,难以通过一个滤镜来同时对人像和风景进行处理。In practice, when more than two cameras are used to collect preview images, it is difficult to use a unified filter to match the preview images collected by more than two cameras. For example, in the front and rear dual-lens mode, the front camera captures portraits, and the rear camera captures landscapes. Typically, the need for adding filters to portraits is different than to adding filters to landscapes. Therefore, it is difficult to process portraits and landscapes at the same time with one filter.
基于此,在一些实施例中,仅有单前置模式和单后置模式支持添加滤镜,而前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式均不支持滤镜。相应的,手机100可以在单前置模式和单后置模式录像前的取景界面中,显示可用状态的滤镜图标。例如,图2C中的(a)示出的取景界面201c是单前置模式录像前的取景界面,则滤镜图标是置黑的,即是可用的。手机100可以在前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式录像前的取景界面中,不显示滤镜图标,或者显示不可用状态(如置灰)的滤镜图标。例如,图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a是前后双镜模式录像前的取景界面,则滤镜图标217是置灰的,即不可用的。Based on this, in some embodiments, only the single front mode and the single rear mode support adding filters, while the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode and the picture-in-picture mode do not support filters. Correspondingly, the mobile phone 100 may display available filter icons in the viewfinder interface before recording in the single front mode and the single rear mode. For example, the viewfinder interface 201c shown in (a) in FIG. 2C is the viewfinder interface before recording in the single front mode, and the filter icon is blacked out, that is, available. The mobile phone 100 may not display the filter icon, or display the filter icon in an unavailable state (such as greyed out) in the viewfinder interface before recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode. For example, the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A is the viewfinder interface before recording in the front-rear dual-mirror mode, and the filter icon 217 is grayed out, that is, unavailable.
在另一些实施例中,前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式也可以支持滤镜。示例性的,手机100中包括部分适用于前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式的滤镜。相应的,手机100也可以在前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式录制中的取景界面中显示滤镜图标。应注意,适用于前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式的滤镜,通常全部适用于单前置模式和单后置模式。但在一些具体的实现方式中,适用于前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式的滤镜,也可能部分适用于单前置模式和单后置模式,或者全部不适用于单前置模式和单后置模式,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。In other embodiments, the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode and the picture-in-picture mode can also support filters. Exemplarily, the mobile phone 100 includes some filters suitable for the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode and the picture-in-picture mode. Correspondingly, the mobile phone 100 may also display a filter icon in the viewfinder interface during recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode. It should be noted that the filters applicable to the front-to-back dual-mirror mode, the rear-to-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode are generally all applicable to the single front mode and single rear mode. However, in some specific implementations, the filters applicable to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode may also be partially applicable to the single front mode and single rear mode, or not applicable at all. The single pre-mode and the single post-mode are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
也就是说,单前置模式、单后置模式,与前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式支持滤镜的情况,包括如下表1所示的若干可能。That is to say, the single front mode, single rear mode, front and rear dual mirror mode, rear rear dual mirror mode, and picture-in-picture mode support filters, including several possibilities as shown in Table 1 below.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2022091026-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022091026-appb-000001
基于上表1所示的若干可能,本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,可以应用手机100。 在本实施例中,手机100可以根据切换前采用的滤镜来自动设置切换后的多镜子模式的滤镜。如图7B所示,本申请实施例的视频拍摄方法可以包括:Based on the several possibilities shown in Table 1 above, this embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . In this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can automatically set the filter of the multi-mirror mode after the switch according to the filter used before the switch. As shown in Figure 7B, the video shooting method of the embodiment of the present application may include:
S711、手机100显示界面a,界面a是子模式1录制中的取景界面。该界面a中包括添加滤镜a的预览图像。S711. The mobile phone 100 displays an interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface during sub-mode 1 recording. The interface a includes a preview image of the added filter a.
示例性的,以子模式1是单后置模式为例,则界面a可以是图7C示出的取景界面721,该取景界面721中包括后置摄像头(如后置主摄像头)采集的预览图像722。并且,预览图像722上添加有滤镜a,即,右上向左下的直线表示滤镜a的效果。Exemplarily, taking sub-mode 1 as a single rear mode as an example, interface a may be the viewfinder interface 721 shown in FIG. 722. In addition, a filter a is added to the preview image 722 , that is, the straight line from the upper right to the lower left indicates the effect of the filter a.
其中,滤镜a可以是在录像前,手机100响应于用户在子模式1下选择滤镜a对应的滤镜选项而添加的。关于添加滤镜的过程,前文中已有相关说明,此处不再赘述。在添加滤镜a后,手机100响应于用户开始录制视频的操作(如点击开始录制控件的操作),可进入子模式1录制中的取景界面,即界面a。Wherein, the filter a may be added by the mobile phone 100 in response to the user selecting a filter option corresponding to the filter a in the sub-mode 1 before video recording. The process of adding a filter has been explained in the previous article, so I won’t go into details here. After the filter a is added, the mobile phone 100 can enter the viewfinder interface in sub-mode 1 recording, ie, interface a, in response to the user's operation of starting video recording (such as clicking the start recording control).
或者,滤镜a是在已经执行过至少一次图7B所示的方案的过程中添加的,如在S714或者S715中添加的,具体可参见下文的说明,此处暂不做详细说明。Alternatively, the filter a is added during at least one execution of the scheme shown in FIG. 7B , such as added in S714 or S715 , for details, please refer to the description below, and no detailed description will be given here.
S712、手机100响应于用户界面a的操作1,在界面a中显示多个模式选项。其中,多个模式选项与多个多镜子模式一一对应。S712. The mobile phone 100 responds to operation 1 on the user interface a, and displays multiple mode options on the interface a. Wherein, a plurality of mode options corresponds to a plurality of multi-mirror modes one by one.
其中,关于从子模式1到子模式2的切换过程,可参见前文实施例一中的相关说明,此处不再赘述。For the switching process from sub-mode 1 to sub-mode 2, reference may be made to the relevant description in the first embodiment above, and details will not be repeated here.
S713、手机100响应于用户对模式选项1的选择操作,显示界面b。模式选项1对应子模式2,界面b是子模式2录制中的取景界面。其中,若子模式2不支持滤镜,则界面b中包括未添加滤镜的预览图像。S713. The mobile phone 100 displays interface b in response to the user's selection operation on mode option 1. Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2, and interface b is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 2 recording. Wherein, if the sub-mode 2 does not support filters, interface b includes preview images without added filters.
也就是说,子模式1支持滤镜,子模式2不支持滤镜。该情况下,手机100在切换到子模式2后,则自动取消滤镜a。That is, submode 1 supports filters and submode 2 does not. In this case, after the mobile phone 100 switches to sub-mode 2, filter a is automatically canceled.
示例性的,以子模式1是单后置模式,子模式2是前后双镜为例。其中,单后置模式支持滤镜,前后双镜模式不支持滤镜,则如上述表1中的第一种可能所示。在切换为前后双镜模式后,手机100可显示图7D中的(a)示出的取景界面731,即取景界面731是界面b。该取景界面731中的预览图像732和预览图像733中未添加滤镜。简言之,单前置模式采用的滤镜a,在切换为前后双镜模式后,则不再使用。As an example, take sub-mode 1 as a single rear mode and sub-mode 2 as an example with front and rear dual mirrors. Among them, the single rear mode supports filters, and the front and rear dual mirror mode does not support filters, as shown in the first possibility in Table 1 above. After switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 731 shown in (a) of FIG. 7D , that is, the viewfinder interface 731 is interface b. No filter is added to the preview image 732 and the preview image 733 in the viewfinder interface 731 . In short, the filter a used in the single front mode will no longer be used after switching to the front and rear dual mirror mode.
在一些实施例中,手机100在取消滤镜a的同时,还可以在界面b中显示提示1,该提示1用于提示已取消滤镜。例如,界面b可以是图7D中的(b)示出的取景界面731,图7D中的(b)示出的取景界面731中还包括提示734,“双镜录像不支持滤镜,已自动为您切换为无滤镜效果”,从而提示已取消滤镜。即,提示734是提示1。In some embodiments, when the filter a is canceled, the mobile phone 100 may also display a prompt 1 on the interface b, where the prompt 1 is used to prompt that the filter has been cancelled. For example, interface b may be the viewfinder interface 731 shown in (b) in FIG. 7D, and the viewfinder interface 731 shown in (b) in FIG. Switch to No Filter Effect for you" to indicate that the filter has been cancelled. That is, prompt 734 is prompt 1 .
S714、手机100响应于用户对模式选项1的选择操作,显示界面b。模式选项1对应子模式2,界面b是子模式2录制中的取景界面。其中,若子模式2支持滤镜,但不支持滤镜a,则界面b中包括未添加滤镜的预览图像;或者,界面b中包括添加滤镜b的预览图像。滤镜b是用户在子模式2下偏好的滤镜。S714. The mobile phone 100 displays interface b in response to the user's selection operation on mode option 1. Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2, and interface b is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 2 recording. Wherein, if the sub-mode 2 supports the filter but does not support the filter a, the interface b includes a preview image without a filter; or, the interface b includes a preview image with a filter b added. Filter b is the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2.
其中,在子模式1和子模式2均支持滤镜的场景下,若子模式1支持的滤镜和子模式2支持的滤镜存在不同,则可能出现子模式1支持滤镜a,但子模式2不支持滤镜a的情况。Among them, in the scene where both sub-mode 1 and sub-mode 2 support filters, if the filters supported by sub-mode 1 and sub-mode 2 are different, it may appear that sub-mode 1 supports filter a, but sub-mode 2 does not. The case of filter a is supported.
示例性的,以子模式1是单后置模式,子模式2是前后双镜为例。若单后置模式支持滤镜的情况和前后双镜模式支持滤镜的情况如上表1中的第二至第四种可能所示,都可能 出现子模式1支持滤镜a,但子模式2不支持滤镜a的情况。As an example, take sub-mode 1 as a single rear mode and sub-mode 2 as an example with front and rear dual mirrors. If the single rear mode supports filters and the front and rear dual-lens mode supports filters as shown in the second to fourth possibilities in Table 1 above, it is possible that sub-mode 1 supports filter a, but sub-mode 2 The case of filter a is not supported.
在该情况下,手机100在切换到子模式2后,可以采用如下两种方式来设置滤镜。In this case, after the mobile phone 100 switches to the sub-mode 2, the filter can be set in the following two ways.
方式一,自动取消滤镜。该方式一与S713中的处理相同,具体可参见S713中的说明,此处不再赘述。One way is to automatically cancel the filter. The first method is the same as the processing in S713, for details, please refer to the description in S713, which will not be repeated here.
方式二,自动添加滤镜b,滤镜b是子模式2支持的滤镜,同时也是用户在子模式2下偏好的滤镜。Method 2: Add filter b automatically. Filter b is a filter supported by sub-mode 2, and it is also a filter preferred by users in sub-mode 2.
其中,滤镜b具体是指用户上一次在子模式2下手动添加而后用于子模式2的录制,并且此后在子模式2下未被用户手动关闭的滤镜。其中,用户手动添加滤镜是指手机100响应于用户对滤镜选项的选择操作而添加滤镜的方式。例如,如图7A中的(a)所示的方式。Wherein, filter b specifically refers to a filter that was manually added by the user in sub-mode 2 last time and then used for recording in sub-mode 2, and has not been manually closed by the user in sub-mode 2 since then. Wherein, the user manually adding a filter refers to a manner in which the mobile phone 100 adds a filter in response to a user's selection operation on a filter option. For example, the manner shown in (a) in FIG. 7A.
在说明方式二之前,先结合附图7E来说明手机100确定滤镜b的过程。Before describing the second method, the process of determining the filter b by the mobile phone 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 7E.
具体的,在用户每次手动针对子模式2(如前后双镜模式)添加滤镜,而后触发手机100以子模式2开始录制后,手机100可以将此次添加的滤镜记为用户在子模式2(如前后双镜模式)下偏好的滤镜。Specifically, after the user manually adds a filter for sub-mode 2 (such as the front and rear dual-mirror mode) each time, and then triggers the mobile phone 100 to start recording in sub-mode 2, the mobile phone 100 can record the added filter as the user's sub-mode The preferred filter in mode 2 (such as front and rear dual mirror mode).
示例性的,以子模式2是前后双镜模式为例,在某次录像前,手机100可显示图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a。而后,手机100响应于用户对滤镜b的滤镜选项的选择操作,可以显示图7E中的(a)示出的取景界面741,该取景界面741中的预览图像上添加有滤镜b。再后,手机100响应于开始录制的操作,可以显示图7E中的(b)示出的取景界面742。取景界面742的预览图像上同样添加有滤镜b,即将滤镜b用于前后双镜模式的视频。此时,则可将滤镜b记录为用户在前后双镜模式下偏好的滤镜。Exemplarily, taking the sub-mode 2 as an example of the front and rear dual-lens mode, before a certain video recording, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A . Then, in response to the user's selection operation of the filter option of filter b, the mobile phone 100 may display a viewfinder interface 741 shown in (a) in FIG. Afterwards, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 742 shown in (b) of FIG. 7E in response to the operation of starting recording. A filter b is also added to the preview image of the viewfinder interface 742 , that is, the filter b is used for the video in the front and rear dual-lens mode. At this time, the filter b can be recorded as the filter preferred by the user in the front and rear dual-lens mode.
手机100在记录下用户在子模式2下偏好的滤镜后,若用户在子模式2下,将记录的滤镜关闭,手机100则将用户在子模式2下偏好的滤镜更新为无。After the mobile phone 100 records the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2, if the user turns off the recorded filter in sub-mode 2, the mobile phone 100 will update the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2 to none.
示例性的,仍以子模式2是前后双镜模式为例,手机100在记录下用户在前后双镜模式下偏好的滤镜后,若在以子模式2录像前的取景界面中,手机100响应于用户对无滤镜的选项的选择操作,关闭掉滤镜。手机100则将用户在子模式2下偏好的滤镜更新为无。Exemplarily, still taking sub-mode 2 as the front and rear dual-mirror mode as an example, after the mobile phone 100 records the user's preferred filter in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, if in the viewfinder interface before recording in sub-mode 2, the mobile phone 100 In response to the user's selection operation on the option without filter, the filter is turned off. The mobile phone 100 updates the filter preferred by the user in sub-mode 2 to none.
或者,手机100在记录下用户在子模式2下偏好的滤镜后,若用户在子模式2下,重新选择滤镜(如滤镜c),而后触发手机100以子模式2开始录制后,手机100可以用户在子模式2(如前后双镜模式)下偏好的滤镜更新为最近一次添加的滤镜(如滤镜c)。Or, after the mobile phone 100 records the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2, if the user reselects a filter (such as filter c) in sub-mode 2, and then triggers the mobile phone 100 to start recording in sub-mode 2, The mobile phone 100 may update the user's preferred filter in sub-mode 2 (eg, front and rear dual-mirror mode) to the latest added filter (eg, filter c).
通过上述方式,手机100中可以维护有各个多镜子模式以及用户在该多镜子模式下偏好的滤镜的对应关系。示例性的,手机100中维护有如下表2所示的对应关系表:Through the above method, the mobile phone 100 can maintain the corresponding relationship between each multi-mirror mode and the filter preferred by the user in the multi-mirror mode. Exemplarily, the mobile phone 100 maintains a correspondence table as shown in Table 2 below:
表2Table 2
多镜子模式multi-mirror mode 用户偏好的滤镜user-preferred filters
单前置模式single front mode 滤镜afilter a
单后置模式single rear mode none
前后双镜模式Front and rear dual mirror mode 滤镜bfilter b
后后双镜模式rear dual mirror mode none
画中画模式picture-in-picture mode 滤镜dfilter d
应理解,随着不断的使用多镜录像模式,用户对滤镜的选择随之变化,相应的,用户在各个多镜子模式下偏好的滤镜也会随之变化。即,表1会不断更新变化。It should be understood that with continuous use of the multi-mirror recording mode, the user's selection of filters will change accordingly, and correspondingly, the user's preferred filter in each multi-mirror mode will also change accordingly. That is, Table 1 will be constantly updated and changed.
在方式二中,手机100可以将用户在子模式2下偏好的滤镜自动添加为子模式2的滤镜。如此,则可以依据用户偏好来自动添加滤镜,提高录制中添加滤镜的合理性。应注意,若用户在子模式2下偏好的滤镜为无,则在切换为子模式2后,手机100取消滤镜即可。In the second manner, the mobile phone 100 can automatically add the filter preferred by the user in the sub-mode 2 as the filter of the sub-mode 2. In this way, filters can be automatically added according to user preferences, improving the rationality of adding filters during recording. It should be noted that if the user prefers no filter in sub-mode 2, after switching to sub-mode 2, the mobile phone 100 only needs to cancel the filter.
S715、手机100响应于用户对模式选项1的选择操作,显示界面b。模式选项1对应子模式2,界面b是子模式2录制中的取景界面。其中,若子模式2支持滤镜,且支持滤镜a,则界面b中包括滤镜a的预览图像。S715. The mobile phone 100 responds to the user's selection operation on mode option 1, and displays interface b. Mode option 1 corresponds to sub-mode 2, and interface b is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 2 recording. Wherein, if sub-mode 2 supports filters and supports filter a, interface b includes a preview image of filter a.
其中,在子模式1和子模式2均支持滤镜的场景下,若子模式1支持的滤镜和子模式2支持的滤镜存在相同的滤镜,则可能出现子模式1和子模式2都支持滤镜a的情况。Among them, in the scene where both sub-mode 1 and sub-mode 2 support filters, if the filters supported by sub-mode 1 and the filters supported by sub-mode 2 have the same filter, it may appear that both sub-mode 1 and sub-mode 2 support filters a situation.
示例性的,以子模式1是单后置模式,子模式2是前后双镜为例。若单后置模式支持滤镜的情况和前后双镜模式支持滤镜的情况如上表1中的第二种、第三种以及第五种可能所示,都可能出现子模式1和子模式2均支持滤镜a的情况。As an example, take sub-mode 1 as a single rear mode and sub-mode 2 as an example with front and rear dual mirrors. If the single rear mode supports filters and the front and rear dual mirror mode supports filters as shown in the second, third and fifth possibilities in Table 1 above, both sub-mode 1 and sub-mode 2 may appear. The case of filter a is supported.
在该情况下,手机100在切换为子模式2后,可以沿用滤镜a。In this case, after the mobile phone 100 switches to the sub-mode 2, the filter a can be used.
示例性的,以子模式1是单后置模式,子模式2是前后双镜模式为例。若滤镜a的效果如图7C中的取景界面721所示,即为从右上到左下的直线,手机100在切换到前后双镜模式后,可显示图7F示出的取景界面751。该取景界面751中的预览图像上同样添加有滤镜a。Exemplarily, sub-mode 1 is a single rear mode, and sub-mode 2 is a front-rear dual-mirror mode as an example. If the effect of filter a is as shown in the viewfinder interface 721 in FIG. 7C , which is a straight line from upper right to lower left, the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface 751 shown in FIG. 7F after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode. A filter a is also added to the preview image in the viewfinder interface 751 .
上述图7B所示的实施例中,仅以录制中的一次切换过程,来说明手机100在切换多镜子模式的过程中,自动设置滤镜的具体实现。应理解,实际实施时,多次切换过程中的每次切换,手机100都可以使用图7B所示的实施例来设置滤镜。In the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 7B , only one switching process during recording is used to illustrate the specific implementation of automatically setting filters in the process of switching the multi-mirror mode of the mobile phone 100 . It should be understood that, in actual implementation, the mobile phone 100 may use the embodiment shown in FIG. 7B to set a filter for each switching in the multiple switching processes.
在一些实施例中,在S713或者S714取消滤镜后,当再次切换回子模式1后,可以恢复使用滤镜a。如图7B所示,该方法还可以包括:In some embodiments, after canceling the filter in S713 or S714, after switching back to sub-mode 1 again, the filter a can be resumed. As shown in Figure 7B, the method may also include:
S716、手机100响应于用户界面b的操作1,在界面b中显示多个模式选项。S716. The mobile phone 100 displays multiple mode options on the interface b in response to operation 1 on the user interface b.
S717、手机100响应于用户对模式选项2的选择操作,显示界面c。模式选项2对应子模式1,界面c是子模式1录制中的取景界面。其中,该界面c中包括添加滤镜a的预览图像。S717. The mobile phone 100 displays an interface c in response to the user's selection operation on mode option 2. Mode option 2 corresponds to sub-mode 1, and interface c is the viewfinder interface during sub-mode 1 recording. Wherein, the interface c includes a preview image with the filter a added.
综上所述,采用本实施例的方法,一方面,在录制中,手机100可以在切换多镜子模式后,自动设置滤镜,从而可以弥补录制中用户无法选择滤镜的不足。另一方面,手机100可以根据切换前后的多镜子模式支持滤镜的情况,或者进一步结合用户在切换后的多镜子模式下偏好的滤镜,来自动设置滤镜,可以提升设置滤镜的合理性。To sum up, with the method of this embodiment, on the one hand, during the recording, the mobile phone 100 can automatically set the filter after switching the multi-mirror mode, so as to make up for the deficiency that the user cannot select the filter during the recording. On the other hand, the mobile phone 100 can automatically set the filter according to whether the multi-mirror mode supports filters before and after switching, or further combine the user's preferred filter in the multi-mirror mode after switching, which can improve the rationality of setting the filter. sex.
另外,由于录制中无法通过用户手动来选择滤镜,从而可以通过图7B所示的实施例,来实现录制过程中自动设置滤镜。但是,实际实施时,并不以录制中为限,录像前的切换过程中,也可以自动设置滤镜,其实现原理与录制中的实现原理类似。此处将不再赘述。In addition, since the user cannot manually select a filter during recording, the embodiment shown in FIG. 7B can be used to automatically set the filter during the recording process. However, in actual implementation, it is not limited to recording, and filters can also be automatically set during the switching process before recording, and its implementation principle is similar to that during recording. It will not be repeated here.
实施例四、高帧率录制和/或高分辨率录制。 Embodiment 4, high frame rate recording and/or high resolution recording.
本申请实施例提供的一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。其中,在多镜录像模式中,录像前的取景界面中,手机100响应于用户对设置图标的操作(如点击操作),可以显示多个设置项,供用户设置相机参数。其中,该多个设置项中包括视频分辨率(简称分辨率)和/或视频帧率(简称帧率)的设置项。另外,为方便说明,可以将帧率和/或分辨率统称为摄像头的采集参数。而后,手机100响应于用户对分辨率的设置项中分辨率的选择,则可以设置分辨率;手机100响应于用户对帧率的设置项中帧率的选择,则可以设置 帧率。从而可以在多镜录像模式的录像前,完成分辨率和帧率的设置。A video shooting method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . Wherein, in the multi-camera recording mode, in the viewfinder interface before recording, the mobile phone 100 may display multiple setting items for the user to set camera parameters in response to the user's operation (such as clicking) on the setting icon. Wherein, the plurality of setting items include setting items of video resolution (referred to as resolution) and/or video frame rate (referred to as frame rate). In addition, for the convenience of description, the frame rate and/or resolution may be collectively referred to as the acquisition parameters of the camera. Then, the mobile phone 100 can set the resolution in response to the user's selection of the resolution in the resolution setting item; the mobile phone 100 can set the frame rate in response to the user's selection of the frame rate in the frame rate setting item. Therefore, the setting of resolution and frame rate can be completed before recording in multi-lens recording mode.
示例性的,设置图标是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的图标218。手机100响应于用户对图标218的点击操作,可显示图8A中的(a)示出的设置界面801。该设置界面801中包括分辨率的设置项802和帧率的设置项803。而后,手机100响应于用户对分辨率的设置项802的点击操作,可在设置界面801上显示分辨率设置面板,该分辨率设置面板可以是图8A中的(b)中的面板804。该面板804中包括多个分辨率选项,手机100响应于用户对任一分辨率选项的选择操作,可设置分辨率。或者,手机100响应于用户对帧率的设置项803的点击操作,可在设置界面801上显示帧率设置面板,该帧率设置面板可以是图8A中的(c)中的面板805。该面板805中包括多个帧率选项,手机100响应于用户对任一帧率选项的选择操作,可设置帧率。Exemplarily, the setting icon is the icon 218 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) of FIG. 2A. The mobile phone 100 may display the setting interface 801 shown in (a) of FIG. 8A in response to the user's click operation on the icon 218 . The setting interface 801 includes a resolution setting item 802 and a frame rate setting item 803 . Then, in response to the user's click operation on the resolution setting item 802, the mobile phone 100 may display a resolution setting panel on the setting interface 801, and the resolution setting panel may be the panel 804 in (b) in FIG. 8A . The panel 804 includes multiple resolution options, and the mobile phone 100 can set the resolution in response to the user's selection operation on any resolution option. Alternatively, the mobile phone 100 may display a frame rate setting panel on the setting interface 801 in response to the user's click operation on the frame rate setting item 803, and the frame rate setting panel may be the panel 805 in (c) in FIG. 8A. The panel 805 includes multiple frame rate options, and the mobile phone 100 can set the frame rate in response to the user's selection operation on any frame rate option.
另外,高分辨率(如横向4000像素的分辨率(即4K))和/或高帧率(如每秒60帧(即60fps))下录制视频,产生的文件都会较大。例如,采用单个摄像头,以4K、60fps录制视频5分钟,大概会产生1G左右的文件。很显然,如果是采用两个及以上摄像头,以同样的分辨率、帧率,拍摄同样时长的视频,则会产生更大的文件。In addition, recording video at a high resolution (such as a horizontal resolution of 4000 pixels (ie 4K)) and/or a high frame rate (such as 60 frames per second (ie 60fps)) will result in a larger file size. For example, if a single camera is used to record video at 4K and 60fps for 5 minutes, a file of about 1G will be generated. Obviously, if two or more cameras are used to shoot videos of the same duration with the same resolution and frame rate, larger files will be generated.
基于此,在一些实施例中,在多镜录像模式中,手机100仅在单前置模式和单后置模式下支持超过预设分辨率阈值的录制(即高分辨率录制)和/或支持超过预设帧率阈值的录制(即高帧率录制)。而在采用两个及以上摄像头的多镜子模式,如前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式下,手机100仅支持未超过预设分辨率阈值的录制和支持未超过预设帧率阈值的录制。通常情况下,超过1080p(横向1080像素的分辨率)则可以称为高分辨率,因此,预设分辨率阈值可以是1080p。以及,超过30fps则可以称为高帧率,因此,预设帧率阈值可以是30帧。但是,实际实施,并与以此为限。Based on this, in some embodiments, in the multi-mirror recording mode, the mobile phone 100 only supports recording exceeding the preset resolution threshold (ie, high-resolution recording) and/or supports Recordings that exceed a preset frame rate threshold (i.e. high frame rate recording). However, in the multi-mirror mode using two or more cameras, such as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and the picture-in-picture mode, the mobile phone 100 only supports recordings that do not exceed the preset resolution threshold and supports video recordings that do not exceed the preset resolution threshold. Recording with frame rate threshold. Usually, a resolution exceeding 1080p (horizontal resolution of 1080 pixels) can be called high resolution, therefore, the preset resolution threshold can be 1080p. And, if it exceeds 30fps, it can be called a high frame rate. Therefore, the preset frame rate threshold can be 30 frames. However, the actual implementation is limited to this.
进一步的,手机100在多镜子模式为前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式的情况下,响应于用户对分辨率的设置项的点击操作,不会显示可选择的、超过预设分辨率阈值的分辨率选项。例如,多镜子模式为前后双镜模式的情况下,手机100响应于用户对分辨率的设置项的点击操作,可显示图8A中的(b)所示的面板804,即面板811是分辨率设置面板。该面板804中的分辨率选项4K是置灰的,或者,面板804中也可以不包括分辨率选项4K,即不可选择分辨率4K。以及,手机100在多镜子模式为前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式的情况下,响应于用户对帧率的设置项的点击操作,不会显示可选择的、超过预设帧率阈值的帧率选项。例如,多镜子模式为前后双镜模式的情况下,手机100响应于用户对帧率的设置项的点击操作,可显示图8A中的(c)所示的面板805,即面板805是帧率设置面板。该面板805中的帧率选项60fps是置灰的,或者面板805也可以不包括帧率选项60fps,即不可选择帧率60fps。Further, when the multi-mirror mode of the mobile phone 100 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode, in response to the user's click operation on the setting item of the resolution, it will not display selectable, more than Resolution options for preset resolution thresholds. For example, when the multi-mirror mode is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the panel 804 shown in (b) in FIG. Settings panel. The resolution option 4K in the panel 804 is grayed out, or the panel 804 may not include the resolution option 4K, that is, the resolution 4K cannot be selected. And, when the multi-mirror mode of the mobile phone 100 is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode, in response to the user's click operation on the setting item of the frame rate, it will not display selectable, exceeding the preset Frame rate option to set the frame rate threshold. For example, when the multi-mirror mode is the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the panel 805 shown in (c) in FIG. Settings panel. The frame rate option 60fps in the panel 805 is grayed out, or the panel 805 may not include the frame rate option 60fps, that is, the frame rate 60fps cannot be selected.
与之相反的,手机100在多镜子模式为单前置模式或者单后置模式的情况下,响应于用户对分辨率的设置项的点击操作,可显示可选择的、超过预设分辨率阈值的分辨率选项。例如,多镜子模式为单后置模式的情况下,手机100响应于用户对分辨率的设置项的点击操作,可显示图8B中的(a)所示的面板811,即面板811是分辨率设置面板。该面板811中的分辨率选项4K是可选的。以及,手机100在多镜子模式为单前置模式或者单后置模式的情况下,响应于用户对帧率的设置项的点击操作,可显示可选择的、超过预设帧率阈值的帧率选项。例如,多镜子模式为单后置模式的情况下,手机100响应于用户对帧率的 设置项的点击操作,可显示图8B中的(b)所示的面板812,即面板812是帧率设置面板。该面板812中的帧率选项60fps也是可选的。On the contrary, when the multi-mirror mode is the single front mode or the single rear mode, the mobile phone 100 may display selectable images that exceed the preset resolution threshold in response to the user's click operation on the resolution setting item. resolution options. For example, when the multi-mirror mode is the single rear mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the panel 811 shown in (a) in FIG. Settings panel. The resolution option 4K in this panel 811 is optional. And, when the multi-mirror mode is the single front mode or the single rear mode, the mobile phone 100 can display selectable frame rate exceeding the preset frame rate threshold in response to the user's click operation on the setting item of the frame rate. option. For example, when the multi-mirror mode is the single rear mode, the mobile phone 100 may display the panel 812 shown in (b) in FIG. Settings panel. The frame rate option 60fps in this panel 812 is also selectable.
另外,为方便说明,可以将触发手机100显示分辨率选项和/或帧率选项的操作统称为第三操作。通过显示分辨率选项和/或帧率选项,则可为用户提供供选择的采集参数的参数选项,从而可以设置采集参数。也就是说,第三操作可以用于触发手机100设置采集参数。以及,可以将预设分辨率阈值和/或预设帧率阈值统称为预设参数阈值,可以将超过预设分辨率阈值的分辨率选项和/或超过预设帧率阈值的帧率选项统称为第一选项。并且,第一选项对应大于预设参数阈值的采集参数(可以称为第三采集参数)。在显示第一选项后,手机100可接收用户对第一选项的选择操作;手机100响应于该选择操作,可设置采集参数为第三采集参数。In addition, for the convenience of description, the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to display the resolution option and/or the frame rate option may be collectively referred to as a third operation. By displaying the resolution option and/or the frame rate option, the user can be provided with parameter options of the acquisition parameters to be selected, so that the acquisition parameters can be set. That is to say, the third operation may be used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to set collection parameters. And, the preset resolution threshold and/or the preset frame rate threshold may be collectively referred to as the preset parameter threshold, and the resolution options exceeding the preset resolution threshold and/or the frame rate options exceeding the preset frame rate threshold may be collectively referred to as as the first option. Moreover, the first option corresponds to a collection parameter (may be referred to as a third collection parameter) greater than a preset parameter threshold. After the first option is displayed, the mobile phone 100 may receive a user's selection operation on the first option; in response to the selection operation, the mobile phone 100 may set the collection parameter as the third collection parameter.
基于上述手机100在不同多镜子模式下,对分辨率和帧率的支持情况,本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。其中,手机100可以在录像前或者正在录像的过程中,随着多镜子模式的切换,自动调整分辨率和帧率。下文中实施例中,主要以录像前的场景为例来说明自动调整分辨率和帧率的具体实现。Based on the resolution and frame rate supported by the mobile phone 100 in different multi-mirror modes, the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . Wherein, the mobile phone 100 can automatically adjust the resolution and frame rate as the multi-mirror mode is switched before or during the video recording. In the following embodiments, the specific realization of automatically adjusting the resolution and frame rate is mainly described by taking the scene before recording as an example.
在一些实施例中,切换前显示第一界面,第一界面是以单前置模式或者单后置模式录像的取景界面,第一界面中包括单个摄像头以分辨率1(也可以称为第一分辨率)采集的预览图像。其中,切换前采用的单个摄像头可以称为第一摄像头,第一摄像头以分辨率1采集的预览图像也可以称为第一预览图像。在单前置模式或者单后置模式下,第一预览图像应全屏显示在第一界面中。而后,手机100可接收触发手机100切换到采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式的操作(也可以成为第一操作)。手机100响应于该操作,可切换到前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式等采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。同时,若分辨率1大于预设分辨率阈值,手机100可将分辨率调整为分辨率2(也可以称为第二分辨率)。其中,分辨率2小于或等于预设分辨率阈值,分辨率2为多镜录像模式下的默认分辨率,如1080p。也就是说,在分辨率1大于预设分辨率阈值的情况下,在切换为前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式后,手机100可显示第二界面,第二界面是以前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式录像的取景界面,第二界面中包括两个摄像头分别以分辨率2采集的预览图像。其中,切换后采用的两个摄像头可以称为第二摄像头和第三摄像头,第二摄像头以分辨率2采集的预览图像可以称为第二预览图像,第三摄像头以分辨率2采集的预览图像也可以称为第三预览图像。In some embodiments, the first interface is displayed before switching, the first interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording in single front mode or single rear mode, and the first interface includes a single camera with a resolution of 1 (also referred to as the first resolution) captured preview image. Wherein, the single camera used before switching may be called the first camera, and the preview image collected by the first camera with a resolution of 1 may also be called the first preview image. In single front mode or single rear mode, the first preview image should be displayed in the first interface in full screen. Then, the mobile phone 100 may receive an operation that triggers the mobile phone 100 to switch to a mode that uses two cameras to collect images (also may be called the first operation). In response to this operation, the mobile phone 100 may switch to a mode that uses two cameras to collect images, such as a front and rear dual-mirror mode, a rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or a picture-in-picture mode. Meanwhile, if the resolution 1 is greater than the preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 may adjust the resolution to resolution 2 (also called the second resolution). Wherein, the resolution 2 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold, and the resolution 2 is a default resolution in the multi-lens recording mode, such as 1080p. That is to say, when the resolution 1 is greater than the preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 can display the second interface after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode. The second interface is The viewfinder interface for video recording in front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or picture-in-picture mode, and the second interface includes preview images captured by the two cameras at a resolution of 2, respectively. Wherein, the two cameras adopted after switching may be referred to as the second camera and the third camera, the preview image collected by the second camera with a resolution of 2 may be referred to as the second preview image, and the preview image collected by the third camera with a resolution of 2 It can also be called the third preview image.
反之,若分辨率1小于或等于预设分辨率阈值,手机100可保持分辨率不变。也就是说,在分辨率1小于或等于预设分辨率阈值的情况下,在切换为前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式后,手机100可显示第三界面,第三界面是以前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式录像的取景界面,第三界面中包括两个摄像头分别以分辨率1采集的预览图像。其中,第二摄像头以分辨率1采集的预览图像可以称为第四预览图像,第三摄像头以分辨率1采集的预览图像也可以称为第五预览图像。On the contrary, if the resolution 1 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 can keep the resolution unchanged. That is to say, when the resolution 1 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 can display the third interface after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode. The interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording in front and rear dual mirror mode, rear and rear dual mirror mode, or picture-in-picture mode. The third interface includes preview images collected by the two cameras at a resolution of 1 respectively. Wherein, the preview image captured by the second camera with resolution 1 may be called the fourth preview image, and the preview image captured by the third camera with resolution 1 may also be called the fifth preview image.
在一些实施例中,切换前显示第一界面,第一界面中包括单个摄像头以帧率1(也可以称为第一帧率)采集的预览图像。而后,在切换到前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式等采用两个摄像头采集图像的模式后,若帧率1大于预设帧率阈值,手机100可将帧率调整为帧率2(也可以称为第二分辨率)。其中,帧率2小于或等于预设帧率阈值, 帧率2为多镜录像模式下的默认帧率,如30fps。也就是说,在帧率1大于预设帧率阈值的情况下,在切换为前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式后,手机100可显示第二界面,第二界面中包括两个摄像头分别以帧率2采集的预览图像。同样的,第二摄像头以帧率2采集的预览图像可以称为第二预览图像,第三摄像头以帧率2采集的预览图像也可以称为第三预览图像。In some embodiments, the first interface is displayed before switching, and the first interface includes preview images captured by a single camera at a frame rate of 1 (also referred to as the first frame rate). Then, after switching to a mode that uses two cameras to collect images, such as the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode, if the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, the mobile phone 100 can adjust the frame rate to Frame rate 2 (also called second resolution). Wherein, the frame rate 2 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold, and the frame rate 2 is a default frame rate in the multi-lens recording mode, such as 30fps. That is to say, when the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, the mobile phone 100 can display the second interface after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear-rear dual-mirror mode or the picture-in-picture mode. Includes preview images captured by both cameras at frame rate 2. Similarly, the preview image captured by the second camera at a frame rate of 2 may be called a second preview image, and the preview image captured by the third camera at a frame rate of 2 may also be called a third preview image.
反之,若帧率1小于或等于预设分辨率阈值,手机100可保持帧率不变。也就是说,在帧率1小于或等于预设帧率阈值的情况下,在切换为前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式后,手机100可显示第三界面,第三界面中包括两个摄像头分别以帧率1采集的预览图像。其中,第二摄像头以帧率1采集的预览图像可以称为第四预览图像,第三摄像头以帧率1采集的预览图像也可以称为第五预览图像。On the contrary, if the frame rate 1 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 can keep the frame rate unchanged. That is to say, when the frame rate 1 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold, the mobile phone 100 can display the third interface after switching to the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the rear and rear dual-mirror mode, or the picture-in-picture mode. The interface includes preview images captured by the two cameras at frame rate 1 respectively. Wherein, the preview image captured by the second camera at a frame rate of 1 may be called a fourth preview image, and the preview image captured by the third camera at a frame rate of 1 may also be called a fifth preview image.
另外,为便于说明,可以将分辨率1和/或帧率1统称为第一采集参数,将分辨率2和/或帧率2统称为第二采集参数。In addition, for ease of description, resolution 1 and/or frame rate 1 may be collectively referred to as a first acquisition parameter, and resolution 2 and/or frame rate 2 may be collectively referred to as a second acquisition parameter.
在前述实施例中,主要以单独采用分辨率和单独采用帧率来说明自动调整采集参数的具体实现。在另一些实施例中,在切换前,可同时采用分辨率1和帧率1来采集图像。在切换为前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式后,若分辨率1大于预设分辨率阈值,则可将分辨率调整为分辨率2。相应的,第二界面中包括两个摄像头都以分辨率2和帧率1采集的预览图像,其中,第二摄像头以分辨率2和帧率1采集的预览图像可以称为第二预览图像,第三摄像头以分辨率2和帧率1采集的预览图像可以称为第三预览图像。若帧率1大于预设帧率阈值,则可将帧率调整为帧率2。相应的,第二界面中包括两个摄像头都以分辨率1和帧率2采集的预览图像,其中,第二摄像头以分辨率1和帧率2采集的预览图像可以称为第二预览图像,第三摄像头以分辨率1和帧率2采集的预览图像可以称为第三预览图像。若分辨率1大于预设分辨率阈值,且帧率1大于预设帧率阈值,则可将帧率调整为帧率2,将分辨率调整为分辨率2。相应的,第二界面中包括两个摄像头都以分辨率2和帧率2采集的预览图像,其中,第二摄像头以分辨率2和帧率2采集的预览图像可以称为第二预览图像,第三摄像头以分辨率2和帧率2采集的预览图像可以称为第三预览图像。In the foregoing embodiments, the specific implementation of automatically adjusting acquisition parameters is mainly described by using only the resolution and the frame rate alone. In some other embodiments, before switching, the resolution 1 and the frame rate 1 can be used to capture images simultaneously. After switching to front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode or picture-in-picture mode, if the resolution 1 is greater than the preset resolution threshold, the resolution can be adjusted to resolution 2. Correspondingly, the second interface includes preview images captured by both cameras at a resolution of 2 and a frame rate of 1, wherein the preview image captured by the second camera at a resolution of 2 and a frame rate of 1 may be referred to as a second preview image, The preview image captured by the third camera with resolution 2 and frame rate 1 may be referred to as a third preview image. If the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, the frame rate may be adjusted to frame rate 2. Correspondingly, the second interface includes preview images captured by both cameras at a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 2, wherein the preview image captured by the second camera at a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 2 may be referred to as a second preview image, The preview image captured by the third camera with resolution 1 and frame rate 2 may be referred to as a third preview image. If the resolution 1 is greater than the preset resolution threshold and the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, the frame rate can be adjusted to frame rate 2, and the resolution can be adjusted to resolution 2. Correspondingly, the second interface includes preview images captured by both cameras at a resolution of 2 and a frame rate of 2, wherein the preview image captured by the second camera at a resolution of 2 and a frame rate of 2 may be referred to as a second preview image, The preview image captured by the third camera with resolution 2 and frame rate 2 may be referred to as a third preview image.
若分辨率1小于或等于预设分辨率阈值,且帧率1小于或等于预设帧率阈值,手机100可保持帧率和分辨率不变。相应的,在切换后,手机100可显示第三界面,第三界面中包括两个摄像头都以分辨率1和帧率1采集的预览图像,其中,第二摄像头以分辨率1和帧率1采集的预览图像可以称为第四预览图像,第三摄像头以分辨率1和帧率1采集的预览图像可以称为第五预览图像。If the resolution 1 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold, and the frame rate 1 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold, the mobile phone 100 can keep the frame rate and resolution unchanged. Correspondingly, after switching, the mobile phone 100 can display a third interface, the third interface includes preview images captured by both cameras at a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 1, wherein the second camera uses a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 1 The preview image collected by the third camera may be called a fourth preview image, and the preview image collected by the third camera with a resolution of 1 and a frame rate of 1 may be called a fifth preview image.
示例性的,在单后置模式下,手机100可显示图8C中的(a)示出的取景界面821,此时用户可以设置以高分辨率(如4K)和高帧率(如60fps)采集预览图像,即分辨率1为4K,帧率1为60fps。应理解,取景界面821中的文字“以4K、60fps采集预览图像”仅为示意性的,实际实施,可根据需求确定是否显示。而后,在从单后置模式切换为前后双镜模式后,手机10可显示图8C中的(b)示出的取景界面822,此时手机100可将分辨率自动降为1080p,将帧率自动降为30帧,即分辨率2为1080p,帧率2为30帧。同样的,取景界面822中的文字“前后双镜模式不支持4K,60fps,已自动为您切换为1080p、30帧”也是示意性的,实际实施,也可根据实际需求确定是否显示。Exemplarily, in the single rear mode, the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface 821 shown in (a) in FIG. Capture the preview image, that is, the resolution 1 is 4K, and the frame rate 1 is 60fps. It should be understood that the text "acquire preview images at 4K, 60 fps" in the viewfinder interface 821 is only illustrative, and whether to display it can be determined according to requirements in actual implementation. Then, after switching from the single rear mode to the front and rear dual mirror mode, the mobile phone 10 can display the viewfinder interface 822 shown in (b) in FIG. Automatically reduce to 30 frames, that is, the resolution 2 is 1080p, and the frame rate 2 is 30 frames. Similarly, the text in the viewfinder interface 822 "The front and rear dual-lens mode does not support 4K, 60fps, it has been automatically switched to 1080p, 30fps for you" is also schematic, and the actual implementation can also be determined according to actual needs.
在一些实施例中,在将分辨率由分辨率1调整为分辨率2,和/或将帧率由帧率1调整为帧率2后,手机100可以在第二界面中显示提示1(也可以称为第一提示信息)。该提示1用于提示已切换分辨率和/或帧率。例如,该提示1是图8C中的(b)示出的取景界面822中的文字“前后双镜模式不支持4K,60fps,已自动为您切换为1080p、30帧”。In some embodiments, after adjusting the resolution from resolution 1 to resolution 2, and/or adjusting the frame rate from frame rate 1 to frame rate 2, the mobile phone 100 may display prompt 1 on the second interface (also may be referred to as the first prompt message). This prompt 1 is used to indicate that the resolution and/or frame rate have been switched. For example, the prompt 1 is the text in the viewfinder interface 822 shown in (b) of FIG. 8C "The front and rear dual-lens mode does not support 4K, 60fps, it has been automatically switched to 1080p, 30fps for you".
综上所述,采用本申请实施例的方法,手机100可以在切换前为高帧率和/或高分辨率的情况下,在切换为不支持高帧率和高分辨率的多镜子模式后,自动将高分辨率降低为默认分辨率,将高帧率降低为默认帧率。从而可以自适应调整分辨率和帧率,使得最终可以以合理的分辨率和/或帧率开始视频录制。如此,手机100可以合理控制视频文件的大小。To sum up, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone 100 can switch to a multi-mirror mode that does not support high frame rate and high resolution after switching to a high frame rate and/or high resolution before switching , automatically downgrade high resolutions to default resolutions and high framerates to default framerates. Therefore, the resolution and frame rate can be adaptively adjusted, so that video recording can finally start at a reasonable resolution and/or frame rate. In this way, the mobile phone 100 can reasonably control the size of the video file.
进一步的,手机100在将分辨率降低为分辨率2,若此后再次使用单前置模式或者单后置模式,则可以恢复分辨率为分辨率1。和/或,手机100在将帧率降低为帧率2后,若此后再次使用单前置模式或者单后置模式,则可以恢复帧率为帧率1。也就是说,手机100会记录用户在单前置模式下或者单后置模式下设置的分辨率,当再次使用单前置模式或者单后置模式时,则可以采用上一次设置的分辨率。同样的,手机100会记录用户在单前置模式下或者单后置模式下设置的帧率,当再次使用单前置模式或者单后置模式时,则可以采用上一次设置的帧率。也就是说,手机100在显示第二界面之后,可接收触发手机100切换到单前置模式或者单后置模式的操作(也可以称为第二操作)。手机100响应于该操作,可显示第四界面。第四界面是以单前置模式或者单后置模式录像的取景界面,该第四界面包括单个摄像头(也可以称为第四摄像头)以分辨率1和/或帧率1采集的预览图像(也可以称为第六预览图像)。Further, the resolution of the mobile phone 100 is reduced to resolution 2, and if the single front mode or the single rear mode is used again afterwards, the resolution can be restored to resolution 1. And/or, after the mobile phone 100 reduces the frame rate to frame rate 2, if the single front mode or the single rear mode is used again thereafter, the frame rate can be restored to frame rate 1. That is to say, the mobile phone 100 will record the resolution set by the user in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and when the single front mode or the single rear mode is used again, the resolution set last time can be used. Similarly, the mobile phone 100 will record the frame rate set by the user in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and when the single front mode or the single rear mode is used again, the frame rate set last time can be used. That is to say, after displaying the second interface, the mobile phone 100 may receive an operation (also referred to as a second operation) that triggers the mobile phone 100 to switch to the single front mode or the single rear mode. In response to this operation, the mobile phone 100 can display the fourth interface. The fourth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording in a single front mode or a single rear mode, and the fourth interface includes a preview image ( may also be referred to as a sixth preview image).
应注意,单前置模式可支持的分辨率和帧率,与单后置模式可支持的分辨率和帧率是一致的,因此,在调整分辨率和帧率的方案中,可以不区分单前置模式和单后置模式。例如,初始是在单前置模式下设置分辨率1的,而后因切换而自动降低为分辨率2后,再次切换为单前置模式或者单后置模式均可以恢复为分辨率1。It should be noted that the resolution and frame rate supported by the single front mode are the same as those supported by the single rear mode. Therefore, in the resolution and frame rate adjustment scheme, the single Front mode and single rear mode. For example, resolution 1 is initially set in single front mode, and then automatically reduced to resolution 2 due to switching, and can be restored to resolution 1 by switching to single front mode or single rear mode again.
前述自动调整分辨率和帧率的具体实现,是以录像前的切换过程为例来说明的,实际实施时,正在录像的过程中,切换多镜子模式时,也可以采用上述方式来实现,其具体实现可参见录像前的相关说明,此处不再赘述。唯一需要注意的是,通常只有在录像前才支持用户设置分辨率和帧率,因此,在录像中,切换前采用的分辨率1和/或帧率1是在开始录像前就设置好的,而不是在录像中设置的。The specific implementation of the aforementioned automatic adjustment of resolution and frame rate is illustrated by taking the switching process before recording as an example. In actual implementation, when switching between multi-mirror modes during the recording process, the above-mentioned method can also be used. For specific implementation, please refer to the relevant description before recording, and will not repeat them here. The only thing to note is that the resolution and frame rate can only be set by the user before recording, so in recording, the resolution 1 and/or frame rate 1 used before switching is set before starting recording, rather than set in the recording.
但是,在录像中,若采用上述自动调整分辨率和帧率的方式,则切换前后不同的分辨率或者帧率会最终体现在形成的视频文件中,从而可能影响视频的品质。However, in video recording, if the above-mentioned automatic resolution and frame rate adjustment method is adopted, different resolutions or frame rates before and after switching will be finally reflected in the formed video file, which may affect the quality of the video.
示例性的,如图8D所示,在录像中,00:00:00-00:04:59的共5秒内,手机100以单后置模式,并且采用帧率60帧(fps)来录像视频。在第5秒,手机100切换为前后双镜模式,并将帧率自动降低为30帧(fps),而后以30fps在00:05:00-00:14:59共10秒内录像视频。相应的,在最终形成视频文件后,若在配置较高的设备上播放该视频文件,由于前5秒的帧率是后10秒的帧率的2倍,则在不考虑网络质量等外界因素的前提下,前5秒视频的流畅度会比后10秒视频的流畅度高。从而导致视频的观感不一致。Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 8D, in the video recording, within 5 seconds from 00:00:00 to 00:04:59, the mobile phone 100 uses a single rear mode and uses a frame rate of 60 frames (fps) to record video. In the 5th second, the mobile phone 100 switches to the front and rear dual-lens mode, and automatically reduces the frame rate to 30 frames (fps), and then records a video at 30 fps within 10 seconds from 00:05:00 to 00:14:59. Correspondingly, after the video file is finally formed, if the video file is played on a device with a higher configuration, since the frame rate in the first 5 seconds is twice the frame rate in the last 10 seconds, external factors such as network quality will not be considered. Under the premise, the fluency of the first 5 seconds of video will be higher than that of the last 10 seconds of video. This leads to inconsistencies in the perception of the video.
基于此,在本申请实施例中,还提供一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。在本实施例中,手机100可根据采集参数(如帧率和/或分辨率)来控制多镜子模式的切换。其中,在正在录像的过程中,在以单前置模式或者单后置模式录像的情况下,若此时的采集参数 (也可以称为第一采集参数)小于或等于预设参数阈值,手机100则允许切换使用两个摄像头来采集图像。若此时的采集参数大于预设参数阈值,手机100则禁止切换使用两个摄像头采集图像。从而可以在控制视频文件大小的同时,提升录像效果,避免前后两段视频的观感不一致。Based on this, in the embodiment of the present application, a video shooting method is also provided, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . In this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can control the switching of the multi-mirror mode according to acquisition parameters (such as frame rate and/or resolution). Wherein, in the process of video recording, in the case of video recording in single front mode or single rear mode, if the acquisition parameter (also referred to as the first acquisition parameter) at this time is less than or equal to the preset parameter threshold, the mobile phone 100 allows switching to use two cameras to capture images. If the acquisition parameter at this time is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the mobile phone 100 is prohibited from switching to use the two cameras to acquire images. In this way, while controlling the size of the video file, the video effect can be improved, and the inconsistency between the two videos before and after can be avoided.
在一些实施例中,在手机100以单前置模式或者单后置模式,并且采用分辨率3和/或帧率3开始录像视频的情况下,手机100可以在单前置模式的取景界面或者单后置模式的取景界面中显示可操作的模式图标,以及显示面板展示控件。其中,分辨率3小于或等于预设分辨率阈值,帧率3小于或等于预设帧率阈值。In some embodiments, when the mobile phone 100 is in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and adopts a resolution of 3 and/or a frame rate of 3 to start recording video, the mobile phone 100 can be in the viewfinder interface of the single front mode or The viewfinder interface of the single rear mode displays operable mode icons and display controls on the display panel. Wherein, the resolution 3 is less than or equal to the preset resolution threshold, and the frame rate 3 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold.
示例性的,以预设分辨率阈值是1080p,预设帧率阈值是30帧为例,在手机100以单后置模式,并且采用720p(小于预设分辨率阈值)和30帧(等于预设帧率阈值)开始录像视频的情况下,手机100可以显示图8E中的(a)示出的取景界面831。取景界面831中包括模式图标832,该模式图标832是正常显示的,即模式图标832是可操作的。并且,取景界面831包括面板展示控件833。应理解,取景界面831中的文字“采用720p,30帧录像”仅为示意性的,实际录像过程中,通常不会显示。Exemplarily, taking the preset resolution threshold as 1080p and the preset frame rate threshold as 30 frames as an example, the mobile phone 100 uses a single rear mode, and adopts 720p (less than the preset resolution threshold) and 30 frames (equal to the preset In the case of starting to record a video, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 831 shown in (a) of FIG. 8E . The viewfinder interface 831 includes a mode icon 832, which is normally displayed, that is, the mode icon 832 is operable. Moreover, the viewfinder interface 831 includes a panel display control 833 . It should be understood that the text "720p, 30 frames of video recording" in the viewfinder interface 831 is only illustrative, and it is usually not displayed during the actual video recording process.
而后,手机100响应于用户对可操作的模式图标或者面板展示控件的点击操作,可显示选择面板,选择面板中包括多个模式选项,以供用户从中选择并触发手机100切换多镜子模式。并且,在切换多镜子模式后,手机100仍可以采用分辨率3和/或帧率3来录像视频。也就是说,在手机100以单前置模式或者单后置模式,并且采用分辨率3和/或帧率3开始录像视频的情况下,手机100可允许用户切换多镜子模式,并且切换前后可采用相同的分辨率和帧率来录像视频。如此,可以保证录像的视频的分辨率和帧率前后一致。Then, the mobile phone 100 can display a selection panel in response to the user's click operation on the operable mode icon or panel display control, which includes multiple mode options for the user to choose from and trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch to the multi-mirror mode. Moreover, after the multi-mirror mode is switched, the mobile phone 100 can still use resolution 3 and/or frame rate 3 to record video. That is to say, when the mobile phone 100 is in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and adopts the resolution 3 and/or frame rate 3 to start recording video, the mobile phone 100 can allow the user to switch the multi-mirror mode, and before and after the switch can be Record video at the same resolution and frame rate. In this way, the resolution and frame rate of the recorded video can be guaranteed to be consistent.
延用前述图8E中的(a)的示例,在切换为前后双镜模式后,如图8E中的(b)示出的取景界面834中的文字所示,手机100仍可采用720p,30帧来录像视频。同样的,取景界面834中的文字“采用720p,30帧录像”也仅为示意性的。Continuing the example of (a) in FIG. 8E , after switching to the front and rear dual-lens mode, as shown in the text in the viewfinder interface 834 shown in (b) in FIG. 8E , the mobile phone 100 can still use 720p, 30 frame to record video. Similarly, the words "use 720p, 30-frame video recording" in the viewfinder interface 834 are only illustrative.
在另一些实施例中,在手机100以单前置模式或者单后置模式,并且采用分辨率1和/或帧率1开始录像视频的情况下,手机100可以在单前置模式的取景界面或者单后置模式的取景界面中显示不可操作的(如置灰的)模式图标,并且,单前置模式的取景界面或者单后置模式的取景界面中不包括面板展示控件。也就是说,在手机100以单前置模式或者单后置模式,并且采用高分辨率和/或高帧率开始录像视频的情况下,手机100禁止用户切换至前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式和画中画模式。如此,可以保证录像的视频不会存在分辨率或者帧率不一致的情况。In other embodiments, when the mobile phone 100 starts to record video in the single front mode or the single rear mode, and adopts resolution 1 and/or frame rate 1, the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface in the single front mode Or an inoperable (eg, grayed out) mode icon is displayed on the viewfinder interface of the single rear mode, and the viewfinder interface of the single front mode or the viewfinder interface of the single rear mode does not include a panel display control. That is to say, when the mobile phone 100 starts to record video in single front mode or single rear mode, and adopts high resolution and/or high frame rate, the mobile phone 100 prohibits the user from switching to the front and rear dual mirror mode, rear dual mirror mode, and rear dual mirror mode. mirror mode and picture-in-picture mode. In this way, it can be guaranteed that the recorded video will not have inconsistent resolution or frame rate.
示例性的,以预设分辨率阈值是1080p,预设帧率阈值是30帧为例,在手机100以单后置模式,并且采用4K(大于预设分辨率阈值)和60帧(大于预设帧率阈值)开始录像视频的情况下,手机100可以显示图8F中的(a)示出的取景界面841。取景界面841中包括模式图标842,该模式图标842是置灰显示的,即模式图标842是不可操作的。并且,取景界面841中不包括面板展示控件。模式图标842不可操作,并且不包括面板展示控件,则用户无法触发手机100切换多镜子模式。应理解,取景界面841中的文字“采用4K,60帧录像”仅为示意性的,实际录像过程中,通常不会显示。Exemplarily, taking the preset resolution threshold as 1080p and the preset frame rate threshold as 30 frames as an example, the mobile phone 100 uses a single rear mode, and adopts 4K (greater than the preset resolution threshold) and 60 frames (greater than the preset In the case of starting to record a video, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 841 shown in (a) in FIG. 8F . The viewfinder interface 841 includes a mode icon 842, which is grayed out, that is, the mode icon 842 is inoperable. Moreover, the viewfinder interface 841 does not include a panel display control. If the mode icon 842 is inoperable and does not include panel display controls, the user cannot trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch to the multi-mirror mode. It should be understood that the text "use 4K, 60 frames of video recording" in the viewfinder interface 841 is only illustrative, and it is usually not displayed during the actual video recording process.
应注意,在手机100以单前置模式或者单后置模式,并且采用分辨率1和/或帧率1开始录像视频的情况下,取景界面中仍然可显示前后摄像头切换控件。例如,前后摄像头切 换控件是图8F中的(a)示出的取景界面831中的控件843。也就是说,手机100依然可响应于用户对前后摄像头切换控件的操作,在单前置模式和单后置模式之间切换。该情况下,也无需调整分辨率和帧率,从而可以保证录像的视频不会存在分辨率或者帧率不一致的情况。It should be noted that when the mobile phone 100 is in single front mode or single rear mode, and starts to record video with resolution 1 and/or frame rate 1, the front and rear camera switching controls can still be displayed on the viewfinder interface. For example, the front and rear camera switching control is the control 843 in the viewfinder interface 831 shown in (a) of Figure 8F. That is to say, the mobile phone 100 can still switch between the single front mode and the single rear mode in response to the user's operation on the front and rear camera switching controls. In this case, there is no need to adjust the resolution and frame rate, so that it can be ensured that the recorded video will not have inconsistent resolution or frame rate.
也就是说,在本实施例中,在开始录像前,手机100可显示第一界面。第一界面是以单前置模式或者单后置模式录像前的取景界面,第一界面中包括单个摄像头(也可以称为第一摄像头)以第一采集参数(如帧率1和/或分辨率1,帧率3和/或分辨率3)采集的预览图像(也饿可以称为第一预览图像)。并且,第一预览图像全屏显示在第一界面中。而后,手机100可接收触发手机100开始录像的操作(也可以称为第一操作)。That is to say, in this embodiment, before video recording starts, the mobile phone 100 may display the first interface. The first interface is a viewfinder interface before recording in a single front mode or a single rear mode. rate 1, frame rate 3 and/or resolution 3) the preview image (also referred to as the first preview image) collected. And, the first preview image is displayed in full screen on the first interface. Then, the mobile phone 100 may receive an operation (also referred to as a first operation) that triggers the mobile phone 100 to start video recording.
一种情况下,手机100响应于该触发手机100开始录像的操作,若第一采集参数小于或等于预设参数阈值,如帧率3小于或等于预设帧率阈值,分辨率3小于或等于预设分辨率阈值的情况,手机100可显示第二界面。第二界面是手机100正在录像的取景界面,第二界面中包括单个摄像头(如第一摄像头)以第一采集参数采集的预览图像(也可以称为第二预览图像)和处于可操作状态的第一控件(如模式图标和/或面板展示控件)。In one case, the mobile phone 100 responds to the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to start recording, if the first collection parameter is less than or equal to the preset parameter threshold, such as the frame rate 3 is less than or equal to the preset frame rate threshold, and the resolution 3 is less than or equal to In the case of a preset resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 may display the second interface. The second interface is the viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording. The second interface includes a preview image (also called a second preview image) collected by a single camera (such as the first camera) with the first acquisition parameters and an operable image. A first control (such as a modal icon and/or a panel presentation control).
应理解,第一控件处于可操作的状态,则可以通过该第一控件切换使用两个摄像头采集图像。即,第一采集参数小于或等于预设参数阈值,手机100允许切换使用两个摄像头来采集图像。It should be understood that, if the first control is in an operable state, the first control can be used to switch between the two cameras to capture images. That is, the first collection parameter is less than or equal to the preset parameter threshold, and the mobile phone 100 allows switching to use two cameras to collect images.
具体的,在显示第二界面后,手机100可接收用户对处于可操作状态的第一控件的操作(也可以称为第二操作),以触发手机100切换拍摄模式。手机100响应于该操作,则可在第二界面中显示多个模式选项,以供用户选择拍摄模式。该多个模式选项中包括第一选项,第一选项对应使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式(如前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式或者画中画模式的选项)。手机100可接收用户对该第一选项的选择操作。手机100响应于该选择操作,可显示第四界面。该第四界面是手机100正在录像的取景界面,第四界面中包括两个摄像头(也可以称为第二摄像头和第二摄像头)分别以第一采集参数(如分辨率3、帧率3)采集的预览图像。如第二摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第三预览图像,第三摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第四预览图像。Specifically, after the second interface is displayed, the mobile phone 100 may receive a user's operation (also referred to as a second operation) on the first control in an operable state, so as to trigger the mobile phone 100 to switch the shooting mode. In response to this operation, the mobile phone 100 may display multiple mode options on the second interface for the user to select a shooting mode. The multiple mode options include a first option, and the first option corresponds to a mode in which two cameras are used to capture images (such as front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, or picture-in-picture mode). The mobile phone 100 may receive the user's selection operation of the first option. The mobile phone 100 may display the fourth interface in response to the selection operation. The fourth interface is the viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording video, and the fourth interface includes two cameras (also referred to as the second camera and the second camera) respectively with the first acquisition parameters (such as resolution 3, frame rate 3) Captured preview image. For example, the third preview image collected by the second camera with the first collection parameters, and the fourth preview image collected by the third camera with the first collection parameters.
另一种情况下,手机100响应于该触发手机100开始录像的操作,若第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,如帧率1大于预设帧率阈值,和/或分辨率1大于预设分辨率阈值的情况,手机100可显示第三界面。第三界面是手机100正在录像的取景界面,第三界面中同样包括单个摄像头(如第一摄像头)以第一采集参数采集的预览图像(如第二预览图像)。但是,第三界面中不包括处于可操作状态的第一控件(如模式图标和/或面板展示控件)。其中,不包括处于可操作状态的第一控件可以有如下两种可能:第一种,包括不可操作的第一控件,例如,包括不可操作的模式图标。第二种,不包括第一控件,例如,不包括面板展示控件。应理解,实际实施时,第三界面中可能包括不可操作的模式图标,且不包括面板展示控件。In another case, the mobile phone 100 responds to the operation of triggering the mobile phone 100 to start recording, if the first collection parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, such as the frame rate 1 is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or the resolution 1 is greater than the preset In the case of the resolution threshold, the mobile phone 100 may display a third interface. The third interface is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording. The third interface also includes a preview image (such as a second preview image) collected by a single camera (such as the first camera) with the first acquisition parameters. However, the third interface does not include the first controls (such as mode icons and/or panel display controls) in an operable state. There are two possibilities for not including the first control in the operable state: first, including the inoperable first control, for example, including the inoperable mode icon. The second type does not include the first control, for example, does not include a panel display control. It should be understood that in actual implementation, the third interface may include inoperable mode icons and does not include panel display controls.
应理解,第三界面中不包括处于可操作状态的第一控件,则无法通过第一控件切换使用两个摄像头采集图像。即,第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,手机100则禁止切换使用两个摄像头来采集图像。It should be understood that if the third interface does not include the first control in an operable state, then the first control cannot be used to switch and use the two cameras to capture images. That is, if the first collection parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, the mobile phone 100 is prohibited from switching to use two cameras to collect images.
具体的,以第三界面中包括处于不可操作状态的第一控件为例。手机100在显示第三 界面之后,若接收到用户对该第一控件的第二操作,手机100并不会显示多个模式选项,而是会显示提示2(也可以称为第一提示信息),该提示2用于提示不可切换使用两个摄像头采集图像。Specifically, take the third interface including the first control in an inoperable state as an example. After the mobile phone 100 displays the third interface, if the user's second operation on the first control is received, the mobile phone 100 will not display multiple mode options, but will display prompt 2 (also called the first prompt message) , the prompt 2 is used to prompt that two cameras cannot be switched to collect images.
示例性的,延用前述图8F中的(a)的示例,手机100响应于用户对图8F中的(a)示出的取景界面841中模式图标842的点击操作,可在取景界面841上显示如图8F中的(b)示出的提示844,该提示844具体为“多镜录像可在720p或者1080p,30帧使用”。从而可提示4K和60帧的情况下不可切换多镜子模式。即,提示844是提示2。Exemplarily, continuing the aforementioned example of (a) in FIG. 8F , the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's click operation on the mode icon 842 in the viewfinder interface 841 shown in (a) in FIG. A prompt 844 as shown in (b) in FIG. 8F is displayed, and the prompt 844 is specifically "Multi-camera video can be used in 720p or 1080p, 30 frames". In this way, it can be prompted that the multi-mirror mode cannot be switched under the conditions of 4K and 60 frames. That is, prompt 844 is prompt 2.
实施例五、倍速功能。Embodiment five, double speed function.
本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。在本实施例中,手机100可以实现倍速功能,倍速功能是指手机100以倍速播放录制的视频帧的功能。如图9A所示,本实施例的视频拍摄方法可以包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . In this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can implement a double speed function, which refers to the function of the mobile phone 100 playing recorded video frames at double speed. As shown in Figure 9A, the video shooting method of this embodiment may include:
S901、手机100显示第一界面;其中,该第一界面是手机100正在录像的取景界面,该第一界面包括第一标识和摄像头采集的第一预览图像,该第一标识用于指示该手机100将以第一速度播放录制的视频,第一速度大于0。S901. The mobile phone 100 displays a first interface; wherein, the first interface is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording video, and the first interface includes a first logo and a first preview image collected by the camera, and the first logo is used to indicate that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at the first speed which is greater than 0.
本申请实施例中,正在录像即录制中,标识(如第一标识、第二标识)即倍速标识。In the embodiment of the present application, the recording is being recorded, and the identification (such as the first identification and the second identification) is the double speed identification.
示例性的,第一界面是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d。该取景界面201d是手机100以前后双镜模式正在录像的取景界面。第一预览图像包括后置摄像头(如后置主摄像头)采集的预览图像202d和前置摄像头采集的预览图像203d。第一标识是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中的标识226(即倍速标识),该标识226用于指示手机100将以1倍速播放此时录制的视频,即第一速度是1倍速。Exemplarily, the first interface is the viewing interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D . The viewfinder interface 201d is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording in front and rear dual-lens mode. The first preview image includes a preview image 202d collected by a rear camera (such as a rear main camera) and a preview image 203d collected by a front camera. The first logo is the logo 226 (i.e. double speed logo) in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) in FIG. It is 1x speed.
又示例性的,第一界面是图2E中的(b)示出的取景界面203e。该取景界面203e是手机100以单后置模式正在录像的取景界面。第一预览图像是后置摄像头(如后置主摄像头)采集的预览图像204e。第一标识是图2E中的(b)示出的取景界面203e中的标识250(即倍速标识),该标识250用于指示手机100将以1倍速播放此时录制的视频,即第一速度是1倍速。Also exemplary, the first interface is the viewfinder interface 203e shown in (b) of FIG. 2E. The viewfinder interface 203e is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording in single rear mode. The first preview image is a preview image 204e captured by a rear camera (such as a rear main camera). The first logo is the logo 250 (i.e. the double speed logo) in the viewfinder interface 203e shown in (b) of FIG. It is 1x speed.
也就是说,不同的多镜子模式中,采集预览图像的摄像头的数量可能不同,从而同一时刻采集到的预览图像的数量也不同。即,第一预览图像可以是一个摄像头采集的预览图像,也可以是两个及以上的摄像头采集的预览图像。在下文关于倍速功能的说明中,将主要以两个摄像头的情况(如前后双镜模式)来说明,相应的,第一预览图像就是该两个摄像头采集的预览图像。That is to say, in different multi-mirror modes, the number of cameras collecting preview images may be different, so the number of preview images collected at the same time is also different. That is, the first preview image may be a preview image collected by one camera, or may be a preview image collected by two or more cameras. In the following description about the double-speed function, the case of two cameras (such as the front and rear dual-lens mode) will be used for illustration. Correspondingly, the first preview image is the preview image captured by the two cameras.
默认情况下,播放速度是1倍速。例如,上述图2D中的(a)和图2E中的(b)的举例中,第一标识指示的都是以1倍速播放录制的视频。应注意,在调整过一次播放速度后,播放速度则可能发生变化。即,第一速度也可能是其他播放速度,如,2倍速、4倍速等。By default, the playback speed is 1x speed. For example, in the above examples of (a) in FIG. 2D and (b) in FIG. 2E , the first mark indicates that the recorded video is played at 1x speed. It should be noted that after adjusting the playback speed once, the playback speed may change. That is, the first speed may also be other playback speeds, such as 2x speed, 4x speed and so on.
S902、手机100接收用户对第一界面的第一操作。其中,该第一操作用于触发手机100调整该手机100以第二速度播放录制的视频,第二速度大于0,第二速度与第一速度不同。S902. The mobile phone 100 receives the user's first operation on the first interface. Wherein, the first operation is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to adjust the mobile phone 100 to play the recorded video at a second speed, the second speed is greater than 0, and the second speed is different from the first speed.
应理解,本文中的速度(如第一速度、第二速度等)都是大于0的值。It should be understood that the speeds (such as the first speed, the second speed, etc.) herein are all values greater than 0.
在本申请实施例中,调整前后相邻的播放速度是不同的。例如,第二速度与第一速度不同。同样的,第二速度大于1倍速时,则是加快的播放速度;第二速度大于0且小于1倍速时,则是减慢的播放速度;第二速度等于1倍速时,则是正常播放速度。In the embodiment of the present application, the adjacent playback speeds before and after the adjustment are different. For example, the second speed is different from the first speed. Similarly, when the second speed is greater than 1x speed, it is an accelerated playback speed; when the second speed is greater than 0 and less than 1x speed, it is a slowed down playback speed; when the second speed is equal to 1x speed, it is a normal playback speed .
在一些实施例中,第一操作可以是第一预设手势、或者是对第一界面中未显示控件或者图标的区域的长按操作。In some embodiments, the first operation may be a first preset gesture, or a long press operation on an area of the first interface where no controls or icons are displayed.
在另一些实施例中,第一界面中包括速度调节控件,第一操作可以是触发该速度调节控件的操作(如点击操作、滑动操作)。In some other embodiments, the first interface includes a speed adjustment control, and the first operation may be an operation (such as a click operation, a slide operation) that triggers the speed adjustment control.
在另一些实施例中,第一界面可以包括第一预设控件(如标识),该第一预设控件用于触发手机100显示多个速度选项,每个速度选项对应一种视频的播放速度。手机100可接收用户对该第一预设控件的点击操作。手机100响应于用户对该第一预设控件的点击操作,才可以显示多个速度选项。如此,则可以仅在存在调整速度的需求的情况下,才触发显示多个速度选项,供用户选择调整后的速度。从而可以在不存在调整速度的需求的情况下,减少第一界面显示的元素内容,同时可以有针对性的引导用户选择速度。In some other embodiments, the first interface may include a first preset control (such as a logo), and the first preset control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display multiple speed options, and each speed option corresponds to a playback speed of a video . The mobile phone 100 may receive a user's click operation on the first preset control. The mobile phone 100 can only display multiple speed options in response to the user's click operation on the first preset control. In this way, only when there is a need to adjust the speed, the display of multiple speed options may be triggered for the user to select the adjusted speed. Therefore, the content of the elements displayed on the first interface can be reduced without the need to adjust the speed, and at the same time, the user can be guided to select the speed in a targeted manner.
在本实施例中,第一操作是用户从多个速度选项中选择第二速度对应的速度选项的选择操作。具体地,在S902之前,方法还包括:手机100接收用户对第一界面中第一预设控件的点击操作。手机100响应于用户对第一预设控件的点击操作,在第一界面显示多个速度选项。In this embodiment, the first operation is a selection operation for the user to select a speed option corresponding to the second speed from a plurality of speed options. Specifically, before S902, the method further includes: the mobile phone 100 receiving a user's click operation on the first preset control in the first interface. The mobile phone 100 displays multiple speed options on the first interface in response to the user's click operation on the first preset control.
示例性的,第一界面是图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d,第一预设控件是取景界面201d中的倍速标识,即标识226。也就是说,倍速标识既是第一标识,也是第一预设控件。手机100可接收用户对图2D中的(a)示出的取景界面201d中标识226的点击操作。手机100响应于用户对该标识226的点击操作,显示图9B中的(a)示出的第一界面911。该第一界面911中包括如下多个速度选项:速度选项912、速度选项913以及速度选项914。其中,速度选项912对应的播放速度是1倍速,速度选项913对应的播放速度是2倍速以及速度选项914对应的播放速度是4倍速。应注意,在显示多个速度选项时,则隐藏该多个速度选项周围的功能图标。例如,隐藏闪光灯图标。如此,可以简化界面元素,便于用户选择播放速度。Exemplarily, the first interface is the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D , and the first preset control is the double-speed sign in the viewfinder interface 201d, that is, the sign 226 . That is to say, the double-speed logo is not only the first logo, but also the first preset control. The mobile phone 100 may receive the user's click operation on the logo 226 in the viewfinder interface 201d shown in (a) of FIG. 2D . The mobile phone 100 displays the first interface 911 shown in (a) in FIG. 9B in response to the user's click operation on the logo 226 . The first interface 911 includes a plurality of speed options as follows: a speed option 912 , a speed option 913 and a speed option 914 . Wherein, the playback speed corresponding to the speed option 912 is 1x speed, the playback speed corresponding to the speed option 913 is 2x speed, and the playback speed corresponding to the speed option 914 is 4x speed. It should be noted that when multiple speed options are displayed, the function icons around the multiple speed options are hidden. For example, hide the flash light icon. In this way, the interface elements can be simplified to facilitate the user to select the playback speed.
S902中,手机100接收用户对第一界面的第一操作,包括:手机100接收用户对多个速度选项中第一速度选项的选择操作,该第一速度选项对应播放速度是第二速度,第二速度与第一速度不同。In S902, the mobile phone 100 receives the user's first operation on the first interface, including: the mobile phone 100 receives the user's selection operation on the first speed option among the multiple speed options, and the corresponding playback speed of the first speed option is the second speed. The second speed is different from the first speed.
其中,该选择操作可以是点击操作,长按操作等。Wherein, the selection operation may be a click operation, a long press operation, and the like.
示例性的,第一速度选项是图9B中的(a)所示的速度选项914。手机100可接收用户对图9B中的(a)示出的多个速度选项(如速度选项912、速度选项913以及速度选项914)中的速度选项914的点击操作,该速度选项913对应的播放速度是4倍速,即第二速度等于4倍速。Exemplarily, the first speed option is the speed option 914 shown in (a) of FIG. 9B . The mobile phone 100 can receive the user's click operation on the speed option 914 among the multiple speed options (such as the speed option 912, the speed option 913 and the speed option 914) shown in (a) in Figure 9B, and the playback speed option 913 corresponds to The speed is 4x speed, that is, the second speed is equal to 4x speed.
在下文实施例中,将主要以第一操作是用户从多个速度选项中选择第二速度对应的速度选项的选择操作为例,介绍本申请实施例的方法。In the following embodiments, the method in the embodiments of the present application will be introduced mainly by taking as an example that the first operation is a selection operation in which the user selects a speed option corresponding to the second speed from multiple speed options.
S903、手机100响应于该第一操作,显示第二界面,该第二界面是手机100正在录像的取景界面,该第二界面包括第二标识和该摄像头采集的第二预览图像,该第二标识用于指示手机100将以第二速度播放录制的视频。S903. The mobile phone 100 displays a second interface in response to the first operation. The second interface is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording video. The second interface includes a second logo and a second preview image collected by the camera. The second interface The identifier is used to indicate that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at the second speed.
示例性的,第一速度选项图9B中的(a)所示的速度选项914。手机100响应于用户对图9B中的(a)中的速度选项914的点击操作,可显示图9B中的(b)示出的前后双镜模式正在录像的取景界面915,即取景界面915是第二界面。该取景界面915是手机100 正在录像的取景界面,该取景界面915包括第二标识916,该第二标识916用于指示手机100将以4速度播放录制的视频,即第二速度等于4倍速。第二预览图像包括后置摄像头(如后置主摄像头)采集的预览图像917和前置摄像头采集的预览图像918。Exemplarily, the first speed option is the speed option 914 shown in (a) of FIG. 9B . In response to the user's click operation on the speed option 914 in (a) in FIG. 9B , the mobile phone 100 can display the viewfinder interface 915 shown in (b) of FIG. Second interface. The viewfinder interface 915 is the viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording, and the viewfinder interface 915 includes a second mark 916, which is used to indicate that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at 4 speeds, that is, the second speed is equal to 4 times speed. The second preview image includes a preview image 917 collected by a rear camera (such as a rear main camera) and a preview image 918 collected by a front camera.
至此,需要说明的是,该第二界面与前述第一界面并不存在本质上的区别,两者都是手机100正在录像的取景界面。不同的是,第二界面中显示的第二标识指示的播放速度是第二速度,而第一界面中显示的第一标识指示的播放速度是第一速度。也就是说,第一界面是播放速度为第一速度时对应的取景界面。第二界面是播放速度为第二速度时对应的取景界面。So far, it should be noted that there is no essential difference between the second interface and the aforementioned first interface, and both are viewfinder interfaces where the mobile phone 100 is recording video. The difference is that the playback speed indicated by the second logo displayed on the second interface is the second speed, while the playback speed indicated by the first logo displayed on the first interface is the first speed. That is to say, the first interface is a viewfinder interface corresponding to when the playback speed is the first speed. The second interface is a viewfinder interface corresponding to when the playback speed is the second speed.
应注意,该第二预览图像和前文中的第一预览图像都是摄像头实时采集的预览图像。具体的,第二预览图像是播放速度为第二速度时摄像头实时采集的预览图像,第一预览图像是播放速度为第一速度时摄像头实时采集的预览图像。It should be noted that both the second preview image and the first preview image above are preview images collected by the camera in real time. Specifically, the second preview image is a preview image collected by the camera in real time when the playback speed is the second speed, and the first preview image is a preview image collected by the camera in real time when the playback speed is the first speed.
在一些实施例中,为了方便恢复至默认的播放速度(如1倍速),在速度标识(如第一标识和第二标识)指示的播放速度不等于默认的播放速度的情况下,手机100正在录像的取景界面(如第一界面和第二界面)中还包括第二预设控件。该第二预设控件用于触发手机100将以默认的播放倍速播放录制的视频。也就是说,用户操作该第二预设控件可触发手机100将播放速度恢复至默认的播放速度。如此,可以提高恢复至默认的播放速度的便捷性。In some embodiments, in order to restore to the default playback speed (such as 1x speed) conveniently, when the playback speed indicated by the speed identifier (such as the first identifier and the second identifier) is not equal to the default playback speed, the mobile phone 100 is The video viewfinder interface (such as the first interface and the second interface) also includes a second preset control. The second preset control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to play the recorded video at the default playback speed. That is to say, the user's operation of the second preset control can trigger the mobile phone 100 to restore the playback speed to the default playback speed. In this way, the convenience of returning to the default playback speed can be improved.
示例性的,以默认的播放速度是1倍速为例,图9B中的(b)示出的取景界面915包括第二标识916,该第二标识916指示手机100将以4倍速播放录制的视频,很显然播放速度是4倍速,而不是1倍速。此时,手机100可以在取景界面915中显示第二预设控件919。手机100响应于用户对该第二预设控件919的点击操作,可调整为以1倍速播放录制的视频。Exemplarily, taking the default playback speed of 1X as an example, the viewfinder interface 915 shown in (b) of FIG. 9B includes a second logo 916, which indicates that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at 4X speed. , it is obvious that the playback speed is 4x speed, not 1x speed. At this time, the mobile phone 100 may display a second preset control 919 in the viewfinder interface 915 . In response to the user's click operation on the second preset control 919, the mobile phone 100 can be adjusted to play the recorded video at 1x speed.
需要在此说明的是,播放倍速是指在视频录制完成后,当用户触发视频播放后,播放该录制的视频的速度,而不是在取景界面中的预览速度。也就是说,在取景界面中,第一预览图像或者第二预览图像都是按照正常的1倍速显示预览的。What needs to be explained here is that the playback speed refers to the speed at which the recorded video is played after the video recording is completed and the user triggers the video playback, not the preview speed in the viewfinder interface. That is to say, in the viewfinder interface, the first preview image or the second preview image is previewed at a normal 1x speed.
在将播放速度调整为非默认的播放速度下时,用户主要是需要录制倍速播放的视频,该情况下,通常不存在切换多镜子模式的需求。基于此,在另一些实施例中,为了避免用户错误操作,在倍速标识(如第一标识和第二标识)指示的播放速度不等于默认的播放速度的情况下,手机100将隐藏正在录像的取景界面(如第一界面和第二界面)中的模式图标、面板展示控件和前后摄像头切换控件,从而可以在非默认的播放速度下禁止切换多镜子模式。示例性的,以默认的播放速度是1倍速为例,图9B中的(b)示出的取景界面915包括第二标识916,该第二标识916指示手机100将以4倍速播放录制的视频,很显然播放速度是4倍速,而不是1倍速。此时,取景界面915中不包括模式图标、面板展示控件和前后摄像头切换控件。When the playback speed is adjusted to a non-default playback speed, the user mainly needs to record a video played at double speed. In this case, there is usually no need to switch the multi-mirror mode. Based on this, in some other embodiments, in order to avoid user misoperation, when the playback speed indicated by the double-speed logo (such as the first logo and the second logo) is not equal to the default playback speed, the mobile phone 100 will hide the video being recorded. Mode icons, panel display controls, and front and rear camera switching controls in the viewfinder interface (such as the first interface and the second interface), so that switching of the multi-mirror mode can be prohibited at non-default playback speeds. Exemplarily, taking the default playback speed of 1X as an example, the viewfinder interface 915 shown in (b) of FIG. 9B includes a second logo 916, which indicates that the mobile phone 100 will play the recorded video at 4X speed. , it is obvious that the playback speed is 4x speed, not 1x speed. At this time, the viewfinder interface 915 does not include mode icons, panel display controls, and front and rear camera switching controls.
S904、手机100接收用户对该第二界面的第二操作,该第二操作用于触发该手机100结束录像。S904. The mobile phone 100 receives a second operation of the user on the second interface, where the second operation is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to end video recording.
在本申请实施例中,不限定第二操作的具体形式。示例性的,第二界面包括结束录制控件,第二操作可以是对该结束录制控件的触发操作(如点击操作、长按操作)。In this embodiment of the present application, a specific form of the second operation is not limited. Exemplarily, the second interface includes an end recording control, and the second operation may be a trigger operation (such as a click operation, a long press operation) on the end recording control.
另外,在一些实施例中,在第二标识指示的播放速度不等于第二预设速度(即第二速 度不等于第二预设速度)的情况下,第二界面还包括第三预设控件。该第三控件用于触发手机100结束录像。手机100响应于用户对该第三预设控件的点击操作,可结束录像。也就是说,通过该第三控件,可以在非第二预设速度下,直接结束录制。或者,第二操作也可以是第二预设手势。例如,第二操作是用户由第二界面底部向上滑动的上滑手势。In addition, in some embodiments, when the playback speed indicated by the second logo is not equal to the second preset speed (that is, the second speed is not equal to the second preset speed), the second interface further includes a third preset control . The third control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to end the recording. The mobile phone 100 may end the video recording in response to the user's click operation on the third preset control. That is to say, through the third control, the recording can be ended directly at a speed other than the second preset speed. Alternatively, the second operation may also be a second preset gesture. For example, the second operation is an upward swipe gesture for the user to swipe upward from the bottom of the second interface.
S905、手机100响应于该第二操作,生成第一视频文件,该第一视频文件包括第一视频流和第二视频流,该第一视频流包括多帧该第一预览图像,该第二视频流包括多帧该第二预览图像。S905. The mobile phone 100 generates a first video file in response to the second operation, the first video file includes a first video stream and a second video stream, the first video stream includes multiple frames of the first preview image, and the second The video stream includes multiple frames of the second preview image.
在结束录制后,手机100生成第一视频文件。该第一视频文件是待播放的视频文件。例如,在用户点击结束录制后,手机100生成第一视频文件存储在相册应用中。而后,用户可进入相册应用中触发播放该第一视频文件。After the recording is finished, the mobile phone 100 generates the first video file. The first video file is a video file to be played. For example, after the user clicks to end the recording, the mobile phone 100 generates a first video file and stores it in the photo album application. Then, the user can enter the photo album application to trigger playing the first video file.
示例性的,以前后双镜模式为例,则同一时刻采集预览图像的摄像头包括一个后置摄像头和一个前置摄像头。如图9C所示,从00:00:00(第0秒开始)到00:09:59(第9秒结束)的前10秒钟内,播放速度是第一速度。在00:09:59(或00:10:00),手机100响应于用户的第一操作,将播放速度调整为第二速度。而后,从00:10:00(第10秒开始)到00:14:59(第14秒结束)的5秒钟内,播放速度是第二速度。在00:14:59,手机100响应于用户的第二操作,生成第一视频文件,该第一视频文件1001包括视频流a1和视频流a2,视频流a1包括后置摄像头在00:00:00-00:09:59之间采集并显示在第一界面的多帧预览图像921,视频流a2包括前置摄像头在00:00:00-00:09:59之间采集并显示在第一界面的多帧预览图像922。也就是说,第一视频流由视频流a1和视频流a2构成。该第一视频文件还包括视频流b1和视频流b2,视频流b1包括后置摄像头在00:10:00-00:14:59之间采集并显示在第一界面的多帧预览图像923,视频流b2包括前置摄像头在00:10:00-00:14:59之间采集并显示在第一界面的多帧预览图像924。也就是说,第二视频流由视频流b1和视频流b2构成。Exemplarily, taking the front and rear dual-lens mode as an example, the cameras that capture preview images at the same time include a rear camera and a front camera. As shown in FIG. 9C , within the first 10 seconds from 00:00:00 (starting at the 0th second) to 00:09:59 (ending at the 9th second), the playback speed is the first speed. At 00:09:59 (or 00:10:00), the mobile phone 100 adjusts the playback speed to the second speed in response to the user's first operation. Then, within 5 seconds from 00:10:00 (start of the 10th second) to 00:14:59 (end of the 14th second), the playback speed is the second speed. At 00:14:59, the mobile phone 100 generates a first video file in response to the user's second operation, the first video file 1001 includes a video stream a1 and a video stream a2, and the video stream a1 includes the rear camera at 00:00: The multi-frame preview image 921 collected and displayed on the first interface between 00-00:09:59, the video stream a2 including the front camera is collected and displayed on the first interface between 00:00:00-00:09:59 A multi-frame preview image 922 of the interface. That is, the first video stream is composed of video stream a1 and video stream a2. The first video file also includes a video stream b1 and a video stream b2, the video stream b1 includes a multi-frame preview image 923 collected by the rear camera between 00:10:00-00:14:59 and displayed on the first interface, The video stream b2 includes a multi-frame preview image 924 collected by the front camera between 00:10:00-00:14:59 and displayed on the first interface. That is, the second video stream is composed of video stream b1 and video stream b2.
在一些实施例中,为了实现倍速播放,可以通过抽帧处理或者插帧处理来得到视频流,而后生成视频文件。采用这种方式,在播放时无需任何处理,直接播放即可实现倍速播放。具体的,在第一速度不等于默认的播放速度(如1倍速)的情况下,第一视频流包括多帧第一预览图像,该多帧第一预览图像是对摄像头采集的所有第一预览图像进行抽帧处理或插帧处理后得到的。在第二速度不等于第一预设速度(如1倍速)的情况下,第二视频流包括多帧第二预览图像,该多帧第二预览图像是对摄像头采集的所有第二预览图像进行抽帧处理或插帧处理后得到的。其中,对于加快的播放速度(如2倍速),则通过抽帧处理得到。例如,每第一预设帧抽若干帧预览图像,其中,第一预设帧的数量可以与播放倍速的值相同,若干帧可以与播放倍速的值减1相等。对于减慢的播放速度(如0.5倍速),则通过插帧处理得到。例如,每一帧后插入播放倍速的倒数减1的帧数的重复预览图像、纯色图像或者空白帧图像等。关于抽帧处理和插帧处理的具体实现,可参见本领域的现有技术,此处将不再赘述。In some embodiments, in order to realize double-speed playback, the video stream may be obtained through frame extraction or frame insertion, and then a video file may be generated. In this way, there is no need for any processing during playback, and double-speed playback can be achieved by direct playback. Specifically, when the first speed is not equal to the default playback speed (such as 1x speed), the first video stream includes multiple frames of the first preview image, and the multiple frames of the first preview image are all the first preview images collected by the camera. The image is obtained after frame extraction processing or frame interpolation processing. In the case that the second speed is not equal to the first preset speed (such as 1x speed), the second video stream includes multiple frames of second preview images, and the multiple frames of second preview images are all second preview images collected by the camera. Obtained after frame extraction or frame interpolation. Wherein, for the accelerated playback speed (such as 2x speed), it is obtained by frame extraction. For example, a number of preview images are selected for each first preset frame, wherein the number of first preset frames may be the same as the value of the playback speed, and the number of frames may be equal to the value of the playback speed minus 1. For the slowed down playback speed (such as 0.5 times speed), it is obtained through frame interpolation processing. For example, a repeated preview image, a solid color image, or a blank frame image, etc., are inserted after each frame with the number of frames minus 1 from the reciprocal of the playback double speed. For the specific implementation of frame extraction processing and frame insertion processing, reference may be made to the prior art in this field, which will not be repeated here.
在另一些实施例中,手机100在得到视频流(如第一视频流或者第二视频流)的过程中,不会对预览图像进行抽帧处理或者插帧处理。相应的,第一视频流包括所有的第一预览图像,第二视频流包括所有的第二预览图像。并且,对第一视频流标记第一速度属性为第一速度,对第二视频流标记第一速度属性为第二速度,以便后续播放时,可以根据速度 属性来实现倍速播放。In some other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 does not perform frame extraction or frame insertion processing on the preview image during the process of obtaining the video stream (such as the first video stream or the second video stream). Correspondingly, the first video stream includes all first preview images, and the second video stream includes all second preview images. In addition, the first speed attribute is marked as the first speed for the first video stream, and the first speed attribute is marked as the second speed for the second video stream, so that during subsequent playback, double-speed playback can be realized according to the speed attribute.
S906、该手机100接收用户的第三操作,该第三操作用于触发该手机100播放该第一视频文件。S906. The mobile phone 100 receives a third operation of the user, and the third operation is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to play the first video file.
示例性的,第三操作是用户对相册(或图库)应用中该第一视频文件的播放按钮的点击操作。或者,第三操作是用户对文件管理应用中该第一视频文件的打开方式的选择操作。例如,在手机100的文件管理应用中,手机100响应于用户触发显示该第一视频文件的打开方式的操作,可以显示多种打开文件的选项(如视频应用a,视频应用b,视频应用c)。第三操作可以是用户对该其中任一打开方式的点击操作。Exemplarily, the third operation is the user's click operation on the play button of the first video file in the photo album (or gallery) application. Alternatively, the third operation is the user's selection operation of the opening mode of the first video file in the file management application. For example, in the file management application of the mobile phone 100, the mobile phone 100 can display multiple options for opening the file (such as video application a, video application b, video application c) in response to the user triggering the operation of displaying the opening mode of the first video file. ). The third operation may be a user's click operation on any one of the opening methods.
S907、手机100响应于该第三操作,以第一速度播放该第一视频流,以第二速度播放该第二视频流。S907. In response to the third operation, the mobile phone 100 plays the first video stream at a first speed, and plays the second video stream at a second speed.
手机100播放第一视频文件的过程中,以不同的播放速度播放调整前后录制的视频。如此,则可以基于用户在视频录制过程中的第一操作,而使视频的不同片段可以以不同的速度播放。During the process of playing the first video file, the mobile phone 100 plays the videos recorded before and after adjustment at different playback speeds. In this way, different segments of the video can be played at different speeds based on the user's first operation during the video recording process.
其中,在第一速度小于默认的播放速度的情况下,播放第一视频流的播放时长大于摄像头采集所有的第一预览图像的采集时长。理想情况下,该播放时长是采集时长的m倍。在第一速度等于默认的播放速度的情况下,播放所述第一视频流的播放时长等于摄像头采集所有的第一预览图像的采集时长。在第一速度大于默认的播放速度的情况下,播放第一视频流的播放时长小于摄像头采集所有的第一预览图像的采集时长。理想情况下,该采集时长是播放时长的m倍。Wherein, when the first speed is lower than the default playback speed, the playing time for playing the first video stream is longer than the collection time for the camera to collect all the first preview images. Ideally, the playback duration is m times the acquisition duration. In the case that the first speed is equal to the default playback speed, the playback duration of playing the first video stream is equal to the acquisition duration of all first preview images collected by the camera. In the case that the first speed is greater than the default playback speed, the playback duration of playing the first video stream is shorter than the acquisition duration of capturing all the first preview images by the camera. Ideally, the acquisition time is m times the playback time.
例如,以第一预设速度等于1倍速为例。在图9C中,第10秒切换播放速度,则前10秒摄像头都在采集第一预览图像。假设第一速度等于1,则以第一速度播放第一视频流的结果应该是:第一视频流的播放时长等于10秒钟。假设第一速度等于2,则以第一速度播放第一视频流的结果应该是:第一视频流的播放时长等于5秒钟。假设第一速度等于0.5,则以第一速度播放第一视频流的结果应该是:第一视频流的播放时长等于20秒钟。For example, take the first preset speed equal to 1x speed as an example. In FIG. 9C , the playback speed is switched in the 10th second, and the camera is collecting the first preview image in the first 10 seconds. Assuming that the first speed is equal to 1, the result of playing the first video stream at the first speed should be: the playing duration of the first video stream is equal to 10 seconds. Assuming that the first speed is equal to 2, the result of playing the first video stream at the first speed should be: the playing duration of the first video stream is equal to 5 seconds. Assuming that the first speed is equal to 0.5, the result of playing the first video stream at the first speed should be: the playing duration of the first video stream is equal to 20 seconds.
同样的,第二速度也同理,此处将不再赘述。Similarly, the same is true for the second speed, which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,对应通过插帧处理或者抽帧处理来得到第一视频流和第二视频流的方式,正常播放第一视频流即可实现以第一速度播放该第一视频流。正常播放第二视频流即可实现以第二速度播放该第二视频流。如此,通过预先进行插帧处理或者抽帧处理得到第一视频流和第二视频流,使得在视频播放过程中,无需进行视频处理,即可实现倍速播放。从而可以提高倍速播放的流畅性。In some embodiments, corresponding to the method of obtaining the first video stream and the second video stream through frame insertion processing or frame extraction processing, the first video stream can be played at the first speed by playing the first video stream normally. Playing the second video stream normally can realize playing the second video stream at the second speed. In this way, the first video stream and the second video stream are obtained by performing frame insertion processing or frame extraction processing in advance, so that double-speed playback can be realized without video processing during video playback. Thereby, the fluency of double-speed playback can be improved.
在另一些实施例中,对应将所有第一预览图像构建得到第一视频流,将所有第二预览图像构建得到第二视频流,并添加速度属性的方式,则在播放过程中按照速度属性来实现倍速播放。In some other embodiments, corresponding to constructing all the first preview images to obtain the first video stream, constructing all the second preview images to obtain the second video stream, and adding a speed attribute, during the playback process according to the speed attribute Achieve double-speed playback.
在一种具体的实现方式中,可以按照速度属性跳帧播放或者插帧播放,从而实现倍速播放。In a specific implementation manner, frame skipping playback or frame insertion playback may be performed according to the speed attribute, thereby realizing double-speed playback.
示例性的,以插帧播放为例,若第一速度属性指示的第一速度满足第一速度大于1,则按照速度属性实现倍速播放可以是:每m帧第一预览图像中仅播放1帧第一预览图像(即跳播方式);若第一速度属性指示的第一速度满足第一速度大于0且小于1,则按照速度属性实现倍速播放可以是:每1帧第一预览图像之前或之后,插播1/m-1帧空白图像(如纯 黑图像)或者插播1/m-1帧重复的第一预览图像(即插播播放)。其中,m为第一速度。Exemplarily, taking frame interpolation playback as an example, if the first speed indicated by the first speed attribute satisfies that the first speed is greater than 1, then realizing double-speed playback according to the speed attribute may be: only one frame is played in every m frames of the first preview image The first preview image (i.e. skip mode); if the first speed indicated by the first speed attribute satisfies that the first speed is greater than 0 and less than 1, then the double-speed playback can be realized according to the speed attribute: before every frame of the first preview image or Afterwards, 1/m-1 frames of blank images (such as pure black images) or 1/m-1 frames of repeated first preview images are inserted (ie, interrupted playback). Wherein, m is the first speed.
在另一种具体的实现方式中,可以按照速度属性缩时播放或者延时播放,从而实现倍速播放。In another specific implementation manner, time-lapse or delayed playback may be performed according to the speed attribute, thereby realizing double-speed playback.
示例性的,若第一速度属性指示的第一速度满足第一速度大于1,则按照速度属性实现倍速播放可以是缩减每帧第一预览图像的播放时长,使缩减后的播放时长是正常的播放时长的1/m倍(即缩时播放);若第一速度属性指示的第一速度满足第一速度大于0且小于1,则按照速度属性实现倍速播放可以是延长每帧第一预览图像的播放时长,使延长后的播放时长是正常的播放时长的m倍(即延时播放)。其中,m为第一速度。Exemplarily, if the first speed indicated by the first speed attribute satisfies that the first speed is greater than 1, then realizing double-speed playback according to the speed attribute may be to reduce the playback duration of each frame of the first preview image, so that the reduced playback duration is normal 1/m times of the playback duration (i.e. time-lapse playback); if the first speed indicated by the first speed attribute satisfies that the first speed is greater than 0 and less than 1, then realizing double-speed playback according to the speed attribute can be to prolong the first preview image of each frame The playback duration of the extended playback is m times the normal playback duration (i.e. delayed playback). Wherein, m is the first speed.
由此可见,在本实施例中,可以在播放过程中实时的实现倍速播放,并且可以保留原始采集的所有图像帧。It can be seen that, in this embodiment, double-speed playback can be realized in real time during the playback process, and all originally collected image frames can be retained.
综上所述,采用本申请实施例提供的视频的处理方法,在录像的过程中,手机100响应于用户在第一界面中的第一操作,可以将播放速度由第一速度调整为第二速度。也就是说,在录像中,可以调整播放速度,提供了一种全新的调整播放速度的方式。从而提高了播放速度调整的灵活性。To sum up, using the video processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application, during the video recording process, the mobile phone 100 can adjust the playback speed from the first speed to the second speed in response to the user's first operation on the first interface. speed. That is to say, in the recording, the playback speed can be adjusted, providing a new way to adjust the playback speed. Thereby, the flexibility of playing speed adjustment is improved.
并且,手机100将调整播放速度前采集的第一预览图像构成第一视频流,将调整播放速度后采集的第二预览图像构成第二视频流。而后,在播放视频时,则以第一速度播放第一视频流,以第二速度播放第二视频流。如此,在录制完成后,无需用户执行任何操作,则可以以不同的速度播放不同的视频流,使得播放速度与录制过程中用户执行第一操作的时机相一致。从而可以提高倍速播放的智能性。In addition, the mobile phone 100 forms the first video stream with the first preview image collected before the playback speed is adjusted, and forms the second video stream with the second preview image collected after the playback speed is adjusted. Then, when playing the video, the first video stream is played at the first speed, and the second video stream is played at the second speed. In this way, after the recording is completed, different video streams can be played at different speeds without the user performing any operation, so that the playback speed is consistent with the timing when the user performs the first operation during the recording process. Thereby, the intelligence of double-speed playback can be improved.
应注意,上述图9A所示的实施例中,仅以一次调整播放速度的过程来说明倍速播放的具体实现。实际中,一次录制视频的过程中,也可能会调整两次及以上的播放速度,其中每次调整的过程均可参照S901-S903。并且,每加一次调整,生成的第一视频文件中会多一段视频流。具体的实现过程,可参见图9A的实施例所述,此处将不再赘述。It should be noted that in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9A , only one process of adjusting the playback speed is used to illustrate the specific implementation of double-speed playback. In practice, during a video recording process, the playback speed may be adjusted twice or more, and each adjustment process can refer to S901-S903. Moreover, every time an adjustment is added, there will be an additional segment of video stream in the generated first video file. For the specific implementation process, refer to the embodiment in FIG. 9A , which will not be repeated here.
另外,上述图9A所示的实施例中,主要以采用两个摄像头的多镜子模式来说明倍速播放的具体实现。实际中,采用单个摄像头的场景中,倍速播放的实现原理相同,而只是第一视频流和第二视频流中都仅包括一个摄像头采集的预览图像构成的视频流。In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 9A , the specific implementation of double-speed playback is mainly described in the multi-mirror mode using two cameras. In practice, in the scenario where a single camera is used, the realization principle of double-speed playback is the same, except that both the first video stream and the second video stream only include video streams composed of preview images captured by one camera.
实施例六、微电影功能。Embodiment 6, micro-movie function.
本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。在本实施例中,手机100可以实现微电影功能,微电影功能是指手机100录制得到由多种动效构成的微电影的功能。如图10A所示,本实施例的视频拍摄方法可以包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . In this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can implement a micro-movie function, and the micro-movie function refers to the function that the mobile phone 100 can record a micro-movie composed of various motion effects. As shown in Figure 10A, the video shooting method of this embodiment may include:
S1001、手机100显示界面a,该界面a是手机100开始录像前的取景界面,界面a包括摄像头a和摄像头b采集的实时图像。S1001. The mobile phone 100 displays interface a, where the interface a is a viewfinder interface before the mobile phone 100 starts video recording, and the interface a includes real-time images collected by cameras a and b.
S1002、手机100响应于用户对该界面a的操作a,在界面a中显示多个模板选项。该操作a用于触发手机100录制微电影,每个模板选项对应一种图像处理的动效模板。该动效模板用于处理多个摄像头中至少两个摄像头采集的预览图像并得到相应的动画效果。S1002. The mobile phone 100 displays multiple template options on the interface a in response to the user's operation a on the interface a. The operation a is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to record a micro movie, and each template option corresponds to a motion template for image processing. The dynamic effect template is used to process preview images collected by at least two cameras among the plurality of cameras and obtain corresponding animation effects.
其中,操作a可以是用户在界面a中执行的预设手势a(如滑动手势、长按手势)。或者,界面a中包括微电影控件,微电影控件用于触发手机100显示多个模板选项。操作a是用户对微电影控件的点击或者长按等操作。下文实施例中,将主要以操作a是用户对微电影控件的点击操作来说明本申请方案。Wherein, the operation a may be a preset gesture a (such as a sliding gesture, a long press gesture) performed by the user in the interface a. Alternatively, the interface a includes a microfilm control, and the microfilm control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display multiple template options. Operation a is an operation such as clicking or long-pressing the micro-movie control by the user. In the following embodiments, the solution of this application will be described mainly by taking operation a as a user's click operation on the microfilm control.
示例性的,微电影控件是图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件214,操作a可以是用户对图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件214的点击操作。Exemplary, the microfilm control is the control 214 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. Click Actions.
在S502中,手机100响应于用户对图2A中的(b)示出的取景界面203a中的控件214的点击操作,可以在取景界面203a中进一步显示如图10B中的(a)所示的模板选项1011,模板选项1012,模板选项1013和模板选项1014。其中,模板选项1011对应“好友欢聚”的动效模板,模板选项1012对应“温馨一刻”的动效模板,模板选项1013对应“亲密时光”的动效模板,模板选项1014对应“悦己时刻”的动效模板。In S502, in response to the user's click operation on the control 214 in the viewfinder interface 203a shown in (b) in FIG. 2A, the mobile phone 100 may further display the Template option 1011 , template option 1012 , template option 1013 and template option 1014 . Among them, template option 1011 corresponds to the dynamic effect template of "Friends Gathering", template option 1012 corresponds to the dynamic effect template of "Warm Moment", template option 1013 corresponds to the dynamic effect template of "Intimate Time", and template option 1014 corresponds to the dynamic effect template of "Pleasant Moment". Motion template.
其中,动效模板是模拟摄像头在各种运动状态下拍摄的视频的动感效果的模板。其中,运动状态包括推、拉、摇、移、跟和/或甩等状态。每个动效模板中至少包括一种运动状态下的动感效果。Wherein, the dynamic effect template is a template for simulating the dynamic effect of the video captured by the camera in various motion states. Wherein, the motion state includes states such as pushing, pulling, shaking, moving, heeling and/or throwing. Each dynamic effect template includes at least one dynamic effect in a motion state.
应注意,在前后双镜模式、后后双镜模式、画中画模式等采用两个摄像头的多镜子模式中,多个模板选项通常是适用于两个摄像头的多镜子模式的动效模板的模板选项。在单前置模式或者单后置模式等采用一个摄像头的多镜子模式中,多个模式选项通常是适用于单个摄像头的多镜子模式的动效模板的模板选项。也就是说,手机响应于用户对微电影控件的点击操作,显示的多个模板选项是当前的多镜子模式下,可用的动效模板的模板选项。It should be noted that in multi-mirror modes that use two cameras, such as front and rear dual-mirror mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, and picture-in-picture mode, multiple template options are usually applicable to the animation templates of the multi-mirror mode of two cameras. Template options. In a single-camera multi-mirror mode such as a single-front mode or a single-rear mode, multiple mode options are usually template options for motion templates in the multi-mirror mode of a single camera. That is to say, the multiple template options displayed by the mobile phone in response to the user's click operation on the microfilm control are the template options of the available dynamic templates in the current multi-mirror mode.
在另一些实施例中,手机100响应于操作a,在界面a中显示多个模板选项。与此同时,还会隐藏界面a中的多个功能图标和控件,以简化界面中的元素,有利于模板选项的选择。例如,相较于图2A中的(b):图10B中的(a)中,隐藏了美颜控件、前后摄像头切换控件和相机的子菜单。In some other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 displays multiple template options in the interface a in response to the operation a. At the same time, multiple function icons and controls in interface a will be hidden to simplify the elements in the interface and facilitate the selection of template options. For example, compared to (b) in FIG. 2A : in (a) in FIG. 10B , the beautification control, front and rear camera switch control, and camera submenu are hidden.
S1003、手机100响应于用户对多个模板选项中模板选项c的操作b,显示界面b。该操作b用于触发手机100播放动画效果。界面b用于播放模板选项c对应的动效模板a的动画效果。S1003. The mobile phone 100 displays an interface b in response to the user's operation b on the template option c among the multiple template options. The operation b is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to play animation effects. Interface b is used to play the animation effect of animation template a corresponding to template option c.
在一些实施例中,操作b可以是用户对模板选项c的选择操作(如点击操作、长按操作等)。例如,模板选项c是图10B中的(a)所示的模板选项1011,操作b可以是用户对图10B中的(a)所示的模板选项1011的点击操作。In some embodiments, operation b may be a user's selection operation on template option c (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.). For example, template option c is the template option 1011 shown in (a) in FIG. 10B , and operation b may be a user's click operation on the template option 1011 shown in (a) in FIG. 10B .
在另一些实施例中,用户对模板选项c的选择操作,只能触发手机100选择动效模板a。而后,手机100响应于用户对界面a的预设操作a,才能显示界面b。例如,该预设操作a可以是对界面a的预设手势b(如滑动手势)。或者,预设操作a是对界面a中未显示控件或图标的区域的长按操作。或者,界面a中包括控件d,控件d用于触发手机100播放动画效果,预设操作a是用户对控件d的触发操作(如点击操作、长按操作等)。In some other embodiments, the user's selection operation on the template option c can only trigger the mobile phone 100 to select the dynamic effect template a. Then, the mobile phone 100 can only display the interface b in response to the user's preset operation a on the interface a. For example, the preset operation a may be a preset gesture b (such as a sliding gesture) on the interface a. Alternatively, the preset operation a is a long press operation on an area in the interface a where no controls or icons are displayed. Alternatively, the interface a includes a control d, which is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to play an animation effect, and the preset operation a is a user's trigger operation on the control d (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.).
示例性的,以模板选项c是模板选项1011,控件d是控件1015为例,操作b包括用户对模板选项1011的选择操作和对控件1015的点击操作。Exemplarily, taking template option c as template option 1011 and control d as control 1015 as an example, operation b includes the user selecting the template option 1011 and clicking the control 1015 .
在S1003中,手机100响应于用户对模板选项c的操作b,可显示图10B中的(b)示出的界面1015。该界面1015中包括窗口1017。该窗口1017用于播放动效模板a。即,界面1015是界面b。In S1003, the mobile phone 100 may display the interface 1015 shown in (b) in FIG. 10B in response to the user's operation b on the template option c. The interface 1015 includes a window 1017 . The window 1017 is used to play the dynamic template a. That is, interface 1015 is interface b.
应理解,图10B中的(b)示出的界面b仅为示例性的。该界面b是在界面a中的实时预览图像之上添加蒙层(如灰色蒙层),在蒙层之上显示多个模板选项、控件d等界面元素,并且在蒙层之上显示窗口a而得到的。但是实际实施,并不以此为限。It should be understood that the interface b shown in (b) in FIG. 10B is only exemplary. The interface b is to add a mask layer (such as a gray mask layer) on top of the real-time preview image in the interface a, display multiple template options, control d and other interface elements on the mask layer, and display window a on the mask layer And get. However, actual implementation is not limited to this.
在一些实施例中,该界面b中还包括多个模板选项,以便用户在界面b中重新选择动 效模板a。如此,则无需返回至界面a,而在界面b中即可继续切换动效模板。In some embodiments, the interface b also includes a plurality of template options, so that the user can reselect the dynamic effect template a in the interface b. In this way, there is no need to return to interface a, and the dynamic effect template can be continuously switched in interface b.
S1004、手机100响应于用户对界面b的操作c,采用动效模板a处理摄像头c采集的实时图像a和摄像头d采集的实时图像b,以录制微电影。其中,摄像头c是多个摄像头中的一个摄像头,摄像头d是所述多个摄像头中除摄像头c之外的一个摄像头。S1004. In response to the user's operation c on the interface b, the mobile phone 100 uses the dynamic effect template a to process the real-time image a collected by the camera c and the real-time image b collected by the camera d to record a micro movie. Wherein, the camera c is a camera among the plurality of cameras, and the camera d is a camera except the camera c among the plurality of cameras.
其中,操作c可以是用户在界面b中的预设手势c。例如,预设手势c是在界面b中从右向左的滑动手势。或者,界面b中包括控件e,该控件e用于触发手机100开始微电影录制。操作c可以是对控件e的触发操作(如点击操作、长按操作等)。例如,控件e是图10B中的(b)所示的控件1018,操作c是用户对控件1018的点击操作。Wherein, the operation c may be a preset gesture c of the user in the interface b. For example, the preset gesture c is a sliding gesture from right to left in the interface b. Alternatively, the interface b includes a control e, and the control e is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start micro-movie recording. Operation c may be a trigger operation (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.) on the control e. For example, the control e is the control 1018 shown in (b) in FIG. 10B , and the operation c is the user's click operation on the control 1018 .
手机100响应于用户对界面b的操作c,则可以采用动效模板a来进行动效处理,完成微电影的录制。例如,为摄像头c采集的实时图像a和摄像头d采集的实时图像b进行动效处理,以达到动效模板a的动画效果。In response to the user's operation c on the interface b, the mobile phone 100 can use the motion effect template a to perform motion effect processing to complete the recording of the micro movie. For example, dynamic effect processing is performed on the real-time image a collected by the camera c and the real-time image b collected by the camera d, so as to achieve the animation effect of the dynamic template a.
在一些实施例中,不同的动效模板适用于对不同的摄像头采集的预览图像进行动效处理。简言之,不同动效模板适用的摄像头是不同的。摄像头c和摄像头d是动效模板a适用的两个摄像头。In some embodiments, different motion effect templates are suitable for performing motion effect processing on preview images captured by different cameras. In short, different animation templates are suitable for different cameras. Camera c and camera d are two cameras applicable to animation template a.
综上所述,采用本申请实施例提供的视频拍摄方法,可以将在双镜头录像的场景下,依据用户选择的动效模板,来对两个摄像头采集的实时图像进行动效处理,得到具有动画效果的微电影。如此,则可实现双镜头录像场景下的微电影录制,从而可以录制得到丰富的双镜头视频内容。并且,无需用户控制取景等复杂的操作,可以降低录制微电影的难度。In summary, using the video shooting method provided by the embodiment of the present application, in the scene of dual-lens video recording, according to the motion template selected by the user, the real-time images collected by the two cameras can be dynamically processed to obtain a dynamic effect. Animated microfilm. In this way, micro-movie recording in a dual-lens recording scene can be realized, so that rich dual-lens video content can be recorded. Moreover, there is no need for the user to control complex operations such as framing, which can reduce the difficulty of recording micro movies.
进一步的,通常情况下,微电影中包括多个电影片段。相应的,动效模板a包括多个动效子模板,多个电影片段与多个动效子模板一一对应。每个动效子模板用于相应电影片段中采集到的实时图像的动效处理。从而可以处理得到动画效果更为丰富的微电影。Furthermore, usually, a micro movie includes multiple movie clips. Correspondingly, the dynamic effect template a includes a plurality of dynamic effect sub-templates, and a plurality of movie clips corresponds to a plurality of dynamic effect sub-templates one by one. Each animation sub-template is used for animation processing of the real-time images collected in the corresponding movie segment. Thus, micro-movies with richer animation effects can be processed.
在一些实施例中,为了有针对性性的对不同摄像头采集的实时图像进行动效处理,每个动效子模板进一步包括子模板a和子模板b。子模板a用于手机100对实时图像a进行动效处理,子模板b用于手机100对实时图像b进行动效处理。如此,则可以针对不同摄像头采用相应的子模板进行处理。从而针对同一时刻的预览图像处理得到不同的动画效果,可以进一步提高处理的效果。In some embodiments, in order to specifically perform animation processing on real-time images captured by different cameras, each animation sub-template further includes sub-template a and sub-template b. The sub-template a is used for the mobile phone 100 to perform dynamic effect processing on the real-time image a, and the sub-template b is used for the mobile phone 100 to perform dynamic effect processing on the real-time image b. In this way, corresponding sub-templates can be used for processing for different cameras. Therefore, different animation effects can be obtained by processing the preview image at the same time, which can further improve the processing effect.
在此前提下,如图10C所示,前述实施例的S1004进一步包括S1021-S1022,在S1004后,还包括S1023:On this premise, as shown in Figure 10C, S1004 of the foregoing embodiment further includes S1021-S1022, and after S1004, S1023 is also included:
S1021、手机100响应于事件a,显示界面c。该界面c是开始双摄像头录像前的取景界面。该界面c中包括摄像头c采集的实时图像c和摄像头d采集的实时图像d。该界面c中还包括多个电影片段的片段选项。S1021. The mobile phone 100 displays an interface c in response to the event a. The interface c is the viewfinder interface before starting the dual-camera video recording. The interface c includes the real-time image c collected by the camera c and the real-time image d collected by the camera d. The interface c also includes fragment options for multiple movie fragments.
应注意,实时图像c和实时图像a并不存在本质上的区别,该两者都是摄像头c采集的实时图像,只不过是摄像头在不同的时段下采集的实时图像。实时图像a是在电影片段的录制过程中采集的实时图像,实时图像c是在电影片段的录制准备过程中(即显示界面c时)采集的实时图像。同样的,实时图像d和实时图像b也并不存在本质上的区别,理由同上。It should be noted that there is no essential difference between the real-time image c and the real-time image a, both of which are real-time images collected by the camera c, but real-time images collected by the camera at different time periods. The real-time image a is a real-time image collected during the recording process of the movie segment, and the real-time image c is a real-time image collected during the recording preparation process of the movie segment (that is, when the interface c is displayed). Similarly, there is no essential difference between the real-time image d and the real-time image b, and the reason is the same as above.
其中,界面c都是开始双摄像头录像前的取景界面。也就是说,在显示界面c时,并未真正开始录制。从而在显示该界面c的过程中,手机100可根据用户对手机100的移动来调整取景。并且调整过程中的取景变化不会被录制到视频中。在本实施例中,将该调整 取景的过程称为录制准备。Wherein, the interface c is the viewfinder interface before starting the dual-camera video recording. That is to say, when the interface c is displayed, the recording does not actually start. Therefore, in the process of displaying the interface c, the mobile phone 100 can adjust the viewing angle according to the user's movement of the mobile phone 100 . And the framing changes during the adjustment process will not be recorded in the video. In this embodiment, the process of adjusting the framing is called recording preparation.
在此,需要说明的是,显示界面c的情况有两种。第一种,手机100响应于用户对界面b的操作c,从界面b跳转到界面c。也就是说,在第一种情况中,事件a是用户对界面b的操作c。Here, it should be noted that there are two situations in which the interface c is displayed. In the first type, the mobile phone 100 jumps from interface b to interface c in response to user operation c on interface b. That is, in the first case, event a is user's operation c on interface b.
示例性的,控件e是图10B中的(b)所示的控件1018,操作c是用户对控件1018的点击操作。手机100响应于用户对图10B中的(b)所示的控件1018的点击操作,可显示图10D示出的界面1031。该界面1031是开始双摄像头录像前的取景界面。该界面1031中包括两个摄像头采集的预览图像,该界面1031中还包括5个2.5秒(s)电影片段的片段选项(虚线框1032中的5个选项)。即,界面1031是界面c。Exemplarily, the control e is the control 1018 shown in (b) in FIG. 10B , and the operation c is the user's click operation on the control 1018 . The mobile phone 100 may display the interface 1031 shown in FIG. 10D in response to the user's click operation on the control 1018 shown in (b) in FIG. 10B . The interface 1031 is a viewfinder interface before starting the dual-camera video recording. The interface 1031 includes preview images captured by two cameras, and the interface 1031 also includes five fragment options of 2.5 second (s) movie fragments (the five options in the dotted line box 1032). That is, interface 1031 is interface c.
第二种,手机100响应于第k个电影片段录制完成的事件,跳回界面c。其中,1≤k≤n,n是动效模板a包括的动效子模板的数量。k和n都是正整数。也就是说,在第二种情况下,事件a是第k个电影片段录制完成的事件。例如,第k个电影片段的录制倒计时(如2.5s)结束时,触发事件a。其中,每次录制的第k个电影片段也可以称为第一电影片段。In the second type, the mobile phone 100 jumps back to interface c in response to the event that the recording of the kth movie segment is completed. Wherein, 1≤k≤n, n is the number of dynamic sub-templates included in the dynamic template a. Both k and n are positive integers. That is to say, in the second case, event a is the event that the recording of the k-th movie segment is completed. For example, when the recording countdown (such as 2.5s) of the kth movie segment ends, event a is triggered. Wherein, the kth movie segment recorded each time may also be referred to as the first movie segment.
示例性的,第1个电影片段录制完成后,即k=1。手机100则可显示界面c。该界面c可以是图10E中的(a)示出的界面1041。该界面1041中指向第1个电影片段的片段选项1042显示有封面,表示第1个电影片段已录制完成。Exemplarily, after the first movie segment is recorded, k=1. The mobile phone 100 can display interface c. The interface c may be the interface 1041 shown in (a) of FIG. 10E . The segment option 1042 pointing to the first movie segment in the interface 1041 displays a cover, indicating that the first movie segment has been recorded.
又示例性的,第2个电影片段录制完成后,即k=2。手机100则可显示界面c。该界面c可以是图10E中的(b)示出的界面1043。该界面1043中指向第1个电影片段的片段选项1042和指向第2个电影片段的片段选项1044显示有封面,表示第1个电影片段和第2个电影片段均已录制完成。In another example, after the recording of the second movie segment is completed, k=2. The mobile phone 100 can display interface c. The interface c may be the interface 1043 shown in (b) of FIG. 10E . The fragment option 1042 pointing to the first movie fragment and the fragment option 1044 pointing to the second movie fragment in the interface 1043 display cover art, indicating that both the first movie fragment and the second movie fragment have been recorded.
应注意,上述两种情况先后出现在微电影录制的过程中,其中,第一种情况对应微电影录制过程中首次进入界面c的情况,第二种情况对应微电影录制过程中,每完成1个电影片段的录制后,再次进入界面c的情况。It should be noted that the above two situations occurred successively in the process of micro-movie recording, among which, the first case corresponds to the situation of entering the interface c for the first time during the micro-movie recording process, and the second case corresponds to the micro-movie recording process. After the recording of a movie clip, enter the situation of interface c again.
在上述两种情况的一些实施例中,界面c中还包括窗口b,窗口b用于播放动效模板a中各个动效子模板的动效。具体的,窗口b中播放的是即将要录制的电影片段对应的动效子模板(如第一动效子模板)的动画效果。如此,有利于在录制准备阶段中,参照窗口b中播放的动画效果来调整即将来录制的电影片段的取景。In some embodiments of the above two cases, the interface c further includes a window b, and the window b is used to play the animation effects of each animation sub-template in the animation template a. Specifically, what is played in window b is the animation effect of the motion effect sub-template (such as the first motion effect sub-template) corresponding to the movie segment to be recorded. In this way, it is beneficial to adjust the framing of the movie segment to be recorded with reference to the animation effect played in the window b during the recording preparation stage.
示例性的,界面c是图10D示出的界面1031,窗口b是界面1031中的窗口1034。界面1031中突出显示的是模板选项1033,即,即将录制的是第1个电影片段,则窗口1034中播放的是第1个电影片段对应的动效子模板。Exemplarily, the interface c is the interface 1031 shown in FIG. 10D , and the window b is the window 1034 in the interface 1031 . What is highlighted in the interface 1031 is the template option 1033 , that is, the first movie segment to be recorded is to be recorded, and the animation sub-template corresponding to the first movie segment is played in the window 1034 .
应注意,在所有电影片段都已录制完成的情况下,则不存在调整取景的需求,进而界面c中不再显示窗口b。It should be noted that when all the movie clips have been recorded, there is no need to adjust the framing, and thus the window b is no longer displayed in the interface c.
并且,在本实施例中,手机100响应于用户对该窗口b的关闭操作,可隐藏窗口b。从而可以简化界面元素,更有利于预览。Moreover, in this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 may hide the window b in response to the user's closing operation on the window b. This simplifies interface elements and is more conducive to previewing.
在手机100显示界面c后,可以在该界面c中进行录制准备。在准备完成后,则可触发进入录制。依次进行多个电影片段的录制,同时需要利用各个动效子模板依次对各个电影片段中采集到的实时图像进行动效处理。具体的,针对第k个电影片段,录制过程如下述S1022所示:After the mobile phone 100 displays the interface c, recording preparations can be performed in the interface c. After the preparation is completed, it can be triggered to enter the recording. Record multiple movie clips in sequence, and at the same time need to use each animation sub-template to sequentially perform animation processing on the real-time images collected in each movie clip. Specifically, for the kth movie segment, the recording process is as shown in S1022 below:
S1022、手机100响应于用户对界面c的操作e,显示界面d。该操作e用于触发手机100开始录制第k个电影片段。第k个电影片段是多个电影片段中的任一电影片段。第k个电影片段对应第一动效子模板。该界面d是手机100正在录像的取景界面,界面d中包括预览图像a和预览图像b。预览图像a是手机100采用第一动效子模板对摄像头c采集的实时图像a进行动效处理得到的,预览图像b是手机100采用第一动效子模板对摄像头d采集的实时图像b进行动效处理得到的。S1022. The mobile phone 100 displays the interface d in response to the user's operation e on the interface c. The operation e is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start recording the kth movie segment. The k-th movie segment is any one of the plurality of movie segments. The kth movie segment corresponds to the first motion effect sub-template. The interface d is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording video, and the interface d includes a preview image a and a preview image b. The preview image a is obtained by the mobile phone 100 using the first dynamic effect sub-template to perform dynamic effect processing on the real-time image a collected by the camera c, and the preview image b is obtained by the mobile phone 100 using the first dynamic effect sub-template to process the real-time image b collected by the camera d. Motion effect processing obtained.
其中,第k个电影片段的片段选项可以是手机100顺序自动选中的,也可以是用户手动选择的。Wherein, the segment option of the kth movie segment may be automatically selected by the mobile phone 100 in sequence, or may be manually selected by the user.
在手机100顺序自动选中第k个电影片段的片段选项的场景中,操作e可以是用户对界面c的预设手势d。如,从下向上的滑动手势。或者,该界面c中包括控件f(如图10D所示的控件1035),控件f用于触发手机100开始双摄像头录制。操作e是对控件f的触发操作(如点击操作、长按操作等)。In the scene where the mobile phone 100 sequentially and automatically selects the segment option of the kth movie segment, the operation e may be the user's preset gesture d on the interface c. For example, a swipe gesture from bottom to top. Alternatively, the interface c includes a control f (control 1035 shown in FIG. 10D ), and the control f is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start dual-camera recording. The operation e is a trigger operation (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.) on the control f.
在用户手动选择第k个电影片段的片段选项的场景中,操作e可以包括用户对第k个电影片段的片段选项的选择操作,和用户对界面c的预设手势d。例如,该预设手势c是从下向上的滑动手势。或者,该界面c中包括控件f,控件f用于触发手机100开始录制。操作e可以包括用户对第k个电影片段的片段选项的选择操作,和用户对控件f的点击或者长按等操作。In the scenario where the user manually selects the segment option of the k-th movie segment, the operation e may include the user's selection operation on the segment option of the k-th movie segment, and the user's preset gesture d on the interface c. For example, the preset gesture c is a sliding gesture from bottom to top. Alternatively, the interface c includes a control f, and the control f is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start recording. The operation e may include the user's selection operation of the segment option of the kth movie segment, and the user's operation of clicking or long pressing the control f.
示例性的,以操作e是用户对图10D中的界面1031中的片段选项1033的点击操作为例。手机100响应于用户对图10D中的界面1031中的片段选项1033的点击操作,可显示图10F示出的界面1051。该界面1051是手机100正在录像的取景界面,界面1051中包括手机100采用第一动效子模板对摄像头c(如后置摄像头)采集的实时图像a进行动效处理得到的预览图像1053,和手机100采用第一动效子模板对摄像头d(如前置摄像头)采集的实时图像b进行动效处理得到的预览图像1054。即,界面1051是界面d。As an example, take operation e as an example where the user clicks on the segment option 1033 in the interface 1031 in FIG. 10D . The mobile phone 100 may display the interface 1051 shown in FIG. 10F in response to the user's click operation on the segment option 1033 in the interface 1031 in FIG. 10D . The interface 1051 is a viewfinder interface where the mobile phone 100 is recording, and the interface 1051 includes a preview image 1053 obtained by performing dynamic processing on the real-time image a collected by the camera c (such as a rear camera) by the mobile phone 100 using the first dynamic sub-template, and The mobile phone 100 uses the first dynamic effect sub-template to perform dynamic effect processing on the real-time image b captured by the camera d (such as the front camera) to obtain a preview image 1054 . That is, interface 1051 is interface d.
其中,界面d中显示的预览图像a和预览图像b都是经过动效处理后的预览图像。如此,则可以在录制过程中,从界面d中实时查看到动效处理后的效果。Wherein, the preview image a and the preview image b displayed on the interface d are both preview images after dynamic effect processing. In this way, the effect after the motion effect processing can be viewed in real time from the interface d during the recording process.
在一些实施例中,界面d中还包括提示信息a,该提示信息a用于提示录制动感视频的技巧。例如,界面d是图10F示出的界面1051,该界面1051中包括提示1052,具体内容为:无需用户移动手机100,自动拍出动感视频。从而可以提示录制动感视频的技巧。即,提示1052是提示信息a。In some embodiments, the interface d further includes prompt information a, and the prompt information a is used to prompt the skill of recording dynamic video. For example, the interface d is the interface 1051 shown in FIG. 10F , and the interface 1051 includes a prompt 1052 , and the specific content is: automatically shoot a dynamic video without the user moving the mobile phone 100 . This can prompt the skill of recording dynamic video. That is, the presentation 1052 is presentation information a.
在一些实施例中,界面d中还包括第k个电影片段的录制倒计时。如此,则可以明确提示第k个电影片段的剩余录制时长。In some embodiments, the interface d also includes a recording countdown of the kth movie segment. In this way, the remaining recording duration of the kth movie segment can be clearly prompted.
常规情况下,在双镜头录像过程中,手机100可以响应于用户的操作f,对调取景界面中两个摄像头的取景框,以实现实时图像的灵活对调。其中,操作f也可以称为第六操作。Normally, during the dual-lens video recording process, the mobile phone 100 can switch the viewfinder frames of the two cameras in the viewfinder interface in response to the user's operation f, so as to realize the flexible adjustment of real-time images. Wherein, operation f may also be referred to as a sixth operation.
然而,在本申请的一些实施例中,为了使界面d中的预览与第k个电影片段对应的动效子模板的动画效果完全一致,手机100屏蔽用户对界面d的操作f。该操作f用于触发手机100互换界面d中摄像头c的取景框和摄像头d的取景框。换言之,手机100不响应用户对界面d的操作f。如此,则可以避免在动效处理过程中,因对调而导致得到的预览与第k个电影片段对应的动效子模板的动画效果不一致。从而提高前后预览的一致性。However, in some embodiments of the present application, in order to make the preview in the interface d completely consistent with the animation effect of the animation sub-template corresponding to the kth movie segment, the mobile phone 100 shields the user from operating f on the interface d. The operation f is used to trigger the viewfinder frame of the camera c and the viewfinder frame of the camera d in the interchange interface d of the mobile phone 100 . In other words, the mobile phone 100 does not respond to the user's operation f on the interface d. In this way, inconsistency between the obtained preview and the animation effect of the animation sub-template corresponding to the k-th movie segment due to swapping during the animation processing process can be avoided. This improves the consistency of before and after previews.
其中,操作f可以是对预览图像a或者预览图像b的双击操作,或者是对预览图像a或者预览图像b的拖拽操作。Wherein, the operation f may be a double-click operation on the preview image a or the preview image b, or a drag operation on the preview image a or the preview image b.
在第k个电影片段的录制倒计时结束时,则会触发事件a,进而返回S1021中,显示界面c。而后手机100响应于用户对界面c的操作e,显示界面d,进入下一个电影片段的录制。如此循环往复,直至最终n个电影片段全部录制完成,则循环结束。When the recording countdown of the kth movie segment ends, event a will be triggered, and then return to S1021, and interface c will be displayed. Then the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's operation e on the interface c, displays the interface d, and enters the recording of the next movie segment. This cycle goes on and on until all n movie clips are finally recorded, and the cycle ends.
S1023、手机100响应于事件c,生成视频文件a。该事件c用于触发手机100保存具有动感效果的视频。该视频文件a包括n段第一视频流和n段第二视频流,其中,第k段第一视频流包括第k个电影片段中处理得到的多帧预览图像a,第k段第二视频流包括第k个电影片段中处理得到的多帧预览图像b。S1023. The mobile phone 100 generates a video file a in response to the event c. The event c is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to save a video with a dynamic effect. The video file a includes n sections of the first video stream and n sections of the second video stream, wherein the kth section of the first video stream includes the multi-frame preview image a processed in the kth movie segment, and the kth section of the second video stream The stream includes the multi-frame preview image b processed in the kth movie segment.
其中,该事件c可以是手机100自动触发的事件。例如,在n个电影片段全部录制完成后,则触发事件a。或者,该事件c也可以是用户触发的事件。例如,在n个电影片段全部录制完成后,手机100显示的界面c中包括控件g,该控件g用于触发手机100保存具有动感效果的视频。事件c可以是用户对该控件g的触发操作(如点击操作、长按操作等)。又如,在n个电影片段全部录制完成后,手机100显示的界面c中包括控件h,该控件h用于触发手机100在界面c中显示控件i和控件j。其中,控件i用于触发手机100保存具有动感效果的视频,控件j用于触发手机100删除该具有动感效果的视频。事件c是对控件i的触发操作(如点击操作、长按操作等)。Wherein, the event c may be an event automatically triggered by the mobile phone 100 . For example, after n movie clips are all recorded, event a is triggered. Alternatively, the event c may also be an event triggered by a user. For example, after all n movie clips are recorded, the interface c displayed by the mobile phone 100 includes a control g, and the control g is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to save a video with a dynamic effect. The event c may be a user's trigger operation on the control g (such as a click operation, a long press operation, etc.). For another example, after all n movie clips are recorded, the interface c displayed by the mobile phone 100 includes a control h, and the control h is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the control i and the control j in the interface c. Wherein, the control i is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to save the video with the dynamic effect, and the control j is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to delete the video with the dynamic effect. Event c is a trigger operation (such as click operation, long press operation, etc.) on control i.
示例性的,以n=5为例,则5个电影片段全部录制完成后,手机100可显示图10G中的(a)示出的界面1061。该界面1061中包括控件1062。该控件1062可用于触发手机100在显示控件i和控件j,即控件1062是控件h。手机100响应于用户对该控件1062的点击操作,可在界面1061中进一步显示如图10G中的(b)所示的控件1063和控件1064。其中,控件1063用于触发手机100删除具有动感效果的视频,即控件1063是控件j。控件1064用于触发手机100保存具有动感效果的视频,即控件1064是控件i。Exemplarily, taking n=5 as an example, after all five movie clips are recorded, the mobile phone 100 may display the interface 1061 shown in (a) in FIG. 10G . The interface 1061 includes a control 1062 . The control 1062 can be used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to display the control i and the control j, that is, the control 1062 is the control h. In response to the user's click operation on the control 1062, the mobile phone 100 may further display a control 1063 and a control 1064 on the interface 1061 as shown in (b) of FIG. 10G . Wherein, the control 1063 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to delete the video with a dynamic effect, that is, the control 1063 is the control j. The control 1064 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to save a video with a dynamic effect, that is, the control 1064 is control i.
而后,手机100响应于事件c,生成视频文件a。在一些实施例中,手机100响应于事件c,可在界面c中显示提示信息b,该提示信息b用于提示生成视频文件的进度。如此,则可以直观的显示保存进度。Then, the mobile phone 100 generates video file a in response to event c. In some embodiments, in response to the event c, the mobile phone 100 may display prompt information b on the interface c, where the prompt information b is used to prompt the progress of generating the video file. In this way, the saving progress can be intuitively displayed.
示例性的,事件c是用户对图10G中的(b)示出的界面1061中的控件1064的点击操作,手机100响应于用户对图10G中的(b)所示的控件1064的点击操作,可在界面1061上进一步显示如图10G中的(c)所示的提示1065,该提示1065提示生成视频文件的进度为25%。级,提示1065是提示信息b。Exemplarily, the event c is the user's click operation on the control 1064 in the interface 1061 shown in (b) in FIG. 10G, and the mobile phone 100 responds to the user's click operation on the control 1064 shown in (b) in FIG. , a prompt 1065 as shown in (c) in FIG. 10G may be further displayed on the interface 1061, and the prompt 1065 prompts that the progress of generating the video file is 25%. level, prompt 1065 is prompt information b.
示例性的,如图10H所示,视频文件a包括n段第一视频流,即:第1段第一视频流、第2段第一视频流……第n段第一视频流。其中,将第1个电影片段中(如第1个2.5s)的所有预览图像a按时序拼接则可得到第1段第一视频流,将第2个电影片段中(如第2个2.5s)的所有预览图像a按时序拼接则可得到第2段第一视频流……将第n个电影片段中(如第n个2.5s)的所有预览图像a按时序拼接则可得到第n段第一视频流。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 10H , the video file a includes n segments of the first video stream, namely: the first segment of the first video stream, the second segment of the first video stream...the nth segment of the first video stream. Among them, splicing all the preview images a in the first movie segment (such as the first 2.5s) in time sequence can obtain the first segment of the first video stream, and the second movie segment (such as the second 2.5s ) splicing all preview images a in time sequence to obtain the second segment of the first video stream... splicing all preview images a in the nth movie segment (such as the nth 2.5s) in time sequence to obtain the nth segment First video stream.
并且,视频文件a还包括n段第二视频流,即:第1段第一视频流、第2段第一视频流……第n段第一视频流。其中,将第1个电影片段中(如第1个2.5s)的所有预览图像b按时序拼接则可得到第1段第二视频流,将第2个电影片段中(如第2个2.5s)的所有预览图像b按时序拼接则可得到第2段第二视频流……将第n个电影片段中(如第n个2.5s) 的所有预览图像b按时序拼接则可得到第n段第二视频流。Moreover, the video file a further includes n sections of second video streams, namely: the first section of the first video stream, the second section of the first video stream...the nth section of the first video stream. Among them, splicing all the preview images b in the first movie segment (such as the first 2.5s) in time sequence can obtain the first segment of the second video stream, and the second movie segment (such as the second 2.5s ) all the preview images b of ) can be spliced in time sequence to get the second segment of the second video stream... All the preview images b in the nth movie segment (such as the nth 2.5s) can be spliced in time sequence to get the nth segment Second video stream.
最后,手机100生成包括n段第一视频流和n段第二视频流。如此,则得到了具有动感效果的视频文件。Finally, the mobile phone 100 generates n segments of the first video stream and n segments of the second video stream. In this way, a video file with a dynamic effect is obtained.
综上所述,采用本申请实施例的方法,在双镜头录像视频的过程中,手机100可以根据用户选择的动效模板实时对两个摄像头采集的实时图像进行动效处理,并将处理得到的预览图像显示在录制中的取景界面中。如此,可以降低录制得到具有动感效果的视频的难度。而且可以实时向用户呈现动效处理后的结果,有利于实时预览录制的结果。To sum up, using the method of the embodiment of the present application, during the process of dual-lens video recording, the mobile phone 100 can perform dynamic processing on the real-time images collected by the two cameras in real time according to the dynamic template selected by the user, and obtain A preview image of is displayed in the viewfinder interface during recording. In this way, the difficulty of recording a video with a dynamic effect can be reduced. Moreover, the result after the dynamic effect processing can be presented to the user in real time, which is conducive to previewing the recorded result in real time.
在录制结束后,手机100生成具有动感效果的视频文件a。如此,可以智能得到具有动感效果的视频。After the recording is finished, the mobile phone 100 generates a video file a with a dynamic effect. In this way, videos with dynamic effects can be obtained intelligently.
实施例七Embodiment seven
另外,在用户首次进入多镜录像模式后,或者在用户首次使用前述实施例中的各种功能之前或者之时,手机100可以引导用户使用。从而可以提升人机交互的效率。In addition, after the user enters the multi-camera recording mode for the first time, or before or when the user uses various functions in the aforementioned embodiments for the first time, the mobile phone 100 can guide the user to use them. Thus, the efficiency of human-computer interaction can be improved.
以首次进入多镜录像模式为例,为引导用户触发切换多镜子模式,在用户首次选择多镜录像模式后,手机可使用弹窗、气泡等形式提示引导信息,以提示切换多镜子模式。其中,主要提示关键的切换操作。如此,可以提高人机交互的体验。Taking entering the multi-mirror recording mode for the first time as an example, in order to guide the user to switch the multi-mirror mode, after the user selects the multi-mirror recording mode for the first time, the mobile phone can use pop-up windows, bubbles, etc. to prompt guidance information to prompt switching to the multi-mirror mode. Among them, the key switching operation is mainly prompted. In this way, the experience of human-computer interaction can be improved.
示例性的,手机响应于用户首次对多镜录像模式的选择操作,显示图11A中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面1101。应注意,在首次使用的引导过程中,会通过在取景界面上添加蒙层,并在蒙层之上显示提示信息来实现强提醒。该取景界面1101中包括提示信息1102,该提示信息1101用于提示切换多镜子模式(也可以称为录制模式)。该提示信息1102中包括效果视频、文字提示以及操作选项。其中,效果视频用于指示通过切换多镜子模式录制得到的视频的效果。文字提示用于提示切换多镜子模式的入口。例如,文字提示信息可以是图11A中的(a)所示的“点击(模式图标)可切换录制模式”。操作选项进一步包括第一选项和第二选项,第一选项用于触发退出引导,第二选项用于触发继续引导。例如,第一选项可以是图11A中的(a)所示的“稍后再试”按钮,第二选项可以是图11A中的(a)所示的“录一段”按钮,即第二选项。Exemplarily, in response to the user's first selection operation of the multi-mirror recording mode, the mobile phone displays the viewfinder interface 1101 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (a) of FIG. 11A . It should be noted that during the first-time booting process, a mask layer will be added to the viewfinder interface, and a prompt message will be displayed on the mask layer to achieve a strong reminder. The viewing interface 1101 includes prompt information 1102, and the prompt information 1101 is used to prompt to switch the multi-mirror mode (also called the recording mode). The prompt information 1102 includes effect video, text prompt and operation options. Wherein, the effect video is used to indicate the effect of the video recorded by switching the multi-mirror mode. The text prompt is used to prompt the entrance to switch the multi-mirror mode. For example, the text prompt information may be "click (the mode icon) to switch the recording mode" shown in (a) in FIG. 11A . The operation options further include a first option and a second option, the first option is used to trigger the exit of the boot, and the second option is used to trigger the continuation of the boot. For example, the first option can be the "try again later" button shown in (a) in Figure 11A, and the second option can be the "record a section" button shown in (a) in Figure 11A, that is, the second option .
手机响应于用户对图11A中的(a)示出的第一选项的点击操作,可取消蒙版效果。手机响应于用户对图11A中的(a)示出的第二选项的点击操作,可显示图11A中的(b)示出的取景界面1103。该取景界面1103中包括提示信息1104,该提示信息1104用于提示选择多镜子模式的操作。例如,提示信息1104的内容具体可以是“点击此处切换为后后双镜”。并且,在取景界面1103中,仅提示信息1104指向的模式选项,即模式选项1105处于可操作状态,可以响应用户的选择操作。The mobile phone can cancel the mask effect in response to the user's click operation on the first option shown in (a) in FIG. 11A . In response to the user's click operation on the second option shown in (a) in FIG. 11A , the mobile phone may display the viewfinder interface 1103 shown in (b) in FIG. 11A . The viewfinder interface 1103 includes prompt information 1104, and the prompt information 1104 is used to prompt the operation of selecting the multi-mirror mode. For example, the specific content of the prompt information 1104 may be "click here to switch to rear and rear mirrors". Moreover, in the viewfinder interface 1103, only the mode option pointed to by the prompt information 1104, that is, the mode option 1105 is in an operable state and can respond to the user's selection operation.
手机响应于用户对图11A中的(b)示出的模式选项1105的选择操作,可显示图11A中的(c)示出的后后双镜模式的取景界面1106。该取景界面1106中包括提示信息1107。该提示信息1107用于提示开始录制视频。例如,提示信息1107的内容具体可以是“点击此处切换为开始录制”。并且,在取景界面1106中,仅提示信息1107指向的开始录制控件1108处于可操作状态,可以响应用户的点击操作。In response to the user's selection operation on the mode option 1105 shown in (b) in FIG. 11A , the mobile phone may display a viewfinder interface 1106 in the rear and rear dual-mirror mode shown in (c) in FIG. 11A . The viewfinder interface 1106 includes prompt information 1107 . The prompt information 1107 is used to prompt to start recording video. For example, the specific content of the prompt information 1107 may be "click here to switch to start recording". Moreover, in the viewfinder interface 1106, only the recording start control 1108 pointed to by the prompt information 1107 is in an operable state, and can respond to the user's click operation.
而后,手机响应于用户对开始录像控件1108的点击操作,可开始录制视频。Then, the mobile phone can start recording video in response to the user's click operation on the start recording control 1108 .
后续录制过程中,也可对关键的切换操作进行提示。例如,面板展示控件为具有动态效果的箭头,通过动态效果可引导用户上滑调起选择面板,从而切换多镜子模式。录制过 程中的提示,与录像前的提示类似,此处将不再一一举例。In the subsequent recording process, the key switching operation can also be prompted. For example, the panel display control is an arrow with a dynamic effect, and the dynamic effect can guide the user to slide up to select the panel, thereby switching the multi-mirror mode. The prompts during the recording process are similar to the prompts before the recording, so there will be no more examples here.
下面以一个完整的示例来说明首次使用多镜录像模式的引导过程:首次使用多镜录像模式,手机在取景界面中添加蒙版,并通过弹窗介绍多镜录像的效果,在没有接收到用户任何操作的情况下,弹窗不消失。应注意,在蒙版效果下,用户仅能操作引导信息指向的界面元素(如图标或者控件等),而其它界面元素均为不可操作的,从而可以实现准确引导。手机响应于用户对弹窗中第一选项的点击操作,取消蒙版效果。手机响应于用户对弹窗中第二选项的点击操作,可通过教程式引导来引导用户使用多镜录像模式。具体的,教程式引导的过程如下:蒙版效果下引导用户点击模式图标来切换多镜子模式。手机响应于用户对模式图标的点击操作,可弹出选择面板,同样在蒙版效果下引导用户切换为单镜模式(如单前置模式或者单后置模式)。手机响应于用户对单后置模式的选择,可在蒙版效果下引导用户点击开始录制按钮。手机响应于用户点击开始录制按钮的操作,可开始录制,并继续通过蒙版效果引导用户通过上滑调起选择面板,从而切换多镜子模式。手机响应于用户的上滑操作,可显示选择面板,选择面板中包括多种多镜子模式的选项,并通过蒙版引导用户切换为前后双镜模式。手机响应于用户对前后双镜模式的选择操作,显示以前后双镜正在录像的取景界面,并通过蒙版引导用户通过下滑收起选择面板。手机响应于用户的下滑操作,收起选择面板,并通过蒙版引导用户点击停止录制按钮。手机响应于用户点击停止录制按钮的操作,可结束录制。结束录制后,手机显示前后双镜模式录像前的取景界面,并将视频自动保存至相册,同时气泡提示用户已存至相册。应注意,在上述教程式引导的过程中,蒙版上始终提供有退出控件,该退出控件用于触发手机退出引导。手机响应于用户对退出控件的点击操作,则不再显示引导信息。即,退出引导。The following is a complete example to illustrate the guidance process of using the multi-camera recording mode for the first time: when using the multi-camera recording mode for the first time, the mobile phone adds a mask in the viewfinder interface, and introduces the effect of the multi-camera recording through a pop-up window. The pop-up window does not disappear under any operation. It should be noted that under the mask effect, the user can only operate the interface elements pointed to by the guidance information (such as icons or controls, etc.), while other interface elements are inoperable, so that accurate guidance can be realized. The mobile phone cancels the mask effect in response to the user's click operation on the first option in the pop-up window. In response to the user's click operation on the second option in the pop-up window, the mobile phone can guide the user to use the multi-camera video recording mode through tutorial guidance. Specifically, the tutorial-style guidance process is as follows: under the mask effect, the user is guided to click the mode icon to switch the multi-mirror mode. In response to the user's click operation on the mode icon, the mobile phone can pop up a selection panel, which also guides the user to switch to a single-lens mode (such as a single front mode or a single rear mode) under the mask effect. In response to the user's selection of the single rear mode, the mobile phone may guide the user to click the start recording button under the mask effect. The mobile phone can start recording in response to the user's operation of clicking the start recording button, and continue to guide the user to switch the multi-mirror mode by sliding up the selection panel through the mask effect. In response to the user's upward swipe operation, the mobile phone can display a selection panel, which includes a variety of multi-mirror mode options, and guides the user to switch to the front and rear dual-mirror mode through a mask. In response to the user's selection operation of the front and rear dual-mirror mode, the mobile phone displays the viewfinder interface where the front and rear dual-mirror are recording, and guides the user to slide down to close the selection panel through the mask. In response to the user's swipe operation, the mobile phone retracts the selection panel, and guides the user to click the stop recording button through the mask. The mobile phone may end the recording in response to the user's operation of clicking the stop recording button. After the recording is finished, the mobile phone displays the viewfinder interface before recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode, and the video is automatically saved to the album, and a bubble prompts the user that it has been saved to the album. It should be noted that during the above-mentioned tutorial-style booting process, an exit control is always provided on the mask, and the exit control is used to trigger the mobile phone to exit the booting process. In response to the user's click operation on the exit control, the mobile phone no longer displays the guidance information. That is, exit boot.
应注意,在非首次选择多镜录像模式后,例如,长时间未使用切换多镜子模式的功能的情况下,手机也可提示用户切换多镜子模式。但与首次提示不同的是,非首次过程中仅通过气泡来方式来进行弱提示。从而可以避免对用户造成强干扰。It should be noted that after the multi-mirror recording mode is not selected for the first time, for example, if the function of switching the multi-mirror mode has not been used for a long time, the mobile phone may also prompt the user to switch the multi-mirror mode. But different from the first hint, the weak hint is only given by bubbles in the non-first-time process. Therefore, strong interference to the user can be avoided.
示例性的,仍以多镜子模式的切换为例,在用户长时间未使用切换多镜子模式的功能的情况下,手机响应于用户对多镜录像模式的选择操作,可显示图11B示出的前后双镜模式的取景界面1111,该取景界面1111中包括气泡形式的提示信息1112。该提示信息1112的具体内容是“点击可切换录制模式”。从而可以提示切换多镜子模式。Exemplarily, still taking the switching of the multi-mirror mode as an example, in the case that the user has not used the function of switching the multi-mirror mode for a long time, the mobile phone responds to the user's selection operation of the multi-mirror recording mode, and may display the The viewfinder interface 1111 of the front and rear dual-mirror mode, and the viewfinder interface 1111 includes prompt information 1112 in the form of bubbles. The specific content of the prompt message 1112 is "click to switch recording mode". This prompts to switch the multi-mirror mode.
实施例八Embodiment eight
实际拍摄视频时,用户极有可能在横屏下进行拍摄。然而,在横屏拍摄场景中,若取景界面中的元素均按照竖屏场景下的布局来显示,则在录制视频的过程中,若用户使用一只手持握手机,另一只手输入切换多镜子模式、调节播放倍速、变焦等操作,该另一只手极有可能会入镜。从而会影响视频效果。When actually shooting videos, users are very likely to shoot in landscape mode. However, in the horizontal screen shooting scene, if the elements in the viewfinder interface are displayed according to the layout in the vertical screen scene, during the video recording process, if the user uses one hand to hold the phone, the other hand will input more switches. Mirror mode, adjusting playback speed, zooming and other operations, the other hand is very likely to be in the mirror. This will affect the video effect.
在详细说明上述技术问题和本申请实施例的解决方案之前,先结合图12A中的(a)和图12A中的(b)对横屏状态下手机100的屏幕的方位说明如下。Before describing the above technical problems and the solutions of the embodiments of the present application in detail, the orientation of the screen of the mobile phone 100 in the landscape state is explained as follows in conjunction with (a) in FIG. 12A and (b) in FIG. 12A .
如图12A中的(a)所示,手机100以顶部在上、底部在下的姿态放置,该情况下,手机100逆时针旋转预设角度,如90°,则可旋转到如图12A中的(b)所示的横屏状态。如图12A中的(b)所示,在手机100所在平面上,手机100的顶部可以称为屏幕的左边缘,手机100的底部可以称为屏幕的右边缘,位于手机100的顶部或者底部的中垂线上方的边缘为手机100的屏幕的上边缘,位于手机100的顶部或者底部的中垂线下方的边缘为 手机100的屏幕的下边缘。同样的,在图12A中的(a)所示的情况下,手机100顺时针旋转预设角度,如90°,则可旋转到如图12A中的(c)所示的横屏状态。如图12A中的(c)所示,在手机100所在平面上,手机100的顶部可以称为屏幕的右边缘,手机100的底部可以称为屏幕的左边缘,位于手机100的顶部或者底部的中垂线上方的边缘为手机100的屏幕的上边缘,位于手机100的顶部或者底部的中垂线下方的边缘为手机100的屏幕的下边缘。As shown in (a) in Figure 12A, the mobile phone 100 is placed with the top up and the bottom down. (b) shows the landscape state. As shown in (b) in Figure 12A, on the plane where the mobile phone 100 is located, the top of the mobile phone 100 can be called the left edge of the screen, and the bottom of the mobile phone 100 can be called the right edge of the screen. The edge above the vertical line is the upper edge of the screen of the mobile phone 100 , and the edge below the vertical line at the top or bottom of the mobile phone 100 is the lower edge of the screen of the mobile phone 100 . Similarly, in the case shown in (a) in FIG. 12A , the mobile phone 100 can be rotated to a landscape orientation as shown in (c) in FIG. 12A when the mobile phone 100 is rotated clockwise by a preset angle, such as 90°. As shown in (c) in Figure 12A, on the plane where the mobile phone 100 is located, the top of the mobile phone 100 can be called the right edge of the screen, and the bottom of the mobile phone 100 can be called the left edge of the screen. The edge above the vertical line is the upper edge of the screen of the mobile phone 100 , and the edge below the vertical line at the top or bottom of the mobile phone 100 is the lower edge of the screen of the mobile phone 100 .
应理解,图12A中的(b)和图12A中的(c)示出的手机100处于横屏状态的姿态均为示例性的,实际实施时,横屏状态可能并不是图12A中的(b)和图12A中的(c)示出的理想状态。例如,在图12A中的(a)所示的情况下,手机100顺时针旋转的角度大于45°且小于135°时,均会处于横屏状态。It should be understood that the postures of the mobile phone 100 in the landscape state shown in (b) in FIG. 12A and (c) in FIG. 12A are exemplary, and in actual implementation, the landscape state may not be the ( b) and (c) in Figure 12A show the ideal state. For example, in the case shown in (a) in FIG. 12A , when the clockwise rotation angle of the mobile phone 100 is greater than 45° and less than 135°, the mobile phone 100 will be in the landscape state.
在此基础上,下面结合一种具体的场景,来说明在横屏拍摄场景中,取景界面中的元素均按照竖屏场景下的布局来显示,会带来的问题:On this basis, the following will combine a specific scene to illustrate the problems that will be caused when the elements in the viewfinder interface are displayed according to the layout in the vertical screen scene in the horizontal screen shooting scene:
示例性的,在录制视频的过程中,如图12B中的(a)所示,用户右手持握手机100的底部。在此前提下,由于模式图标位于手机100的顶部附近,若要操作模式图标,则如图12B中的(b)所示,用户通常需要左手持握住手机100的顶部,才能方便的对手机100的顶部附近的模式图标进行操作。而此时,左手的手指则可能入镜。如手指1201为入镜部分。并且,入镜的手指1201会遮挡对建筑物的取景,导致取景缺失。Exemplarily, during the video recording process, as shown in (a) of FIG. 12B , the user holds the bottom of the mobile phone 100 with his right hand. Under this premise, since the mode icon is located near the top of the mobile phone 100, if the mode icon is to be operated, as shown in (b) in FIG. 100 mode icons near the top to operate. At this time, the fingers of the left hand may be in the mirror. For example, the finger 1201 is the part entering the mirror. Moreover, the finger 1201 in the mirror will block the viewfinder of the building, resulting in loss of viewfinder.
基于此,本申请实施例提供一种视频拍摄方法,可应用于手机100。在本实施例中,手机100可以在横屏场景下,针对左手持握或者右手持握的情况适应性的调整界面元素的显示布局。从而避免录制过程中手指出镜的情况出现。Based on this, the embodiment of the present application provides a video shooting method, which can be applied to the mobile phone 100 . In this embodiment, the mobile phone 100 can adaptively adjust the display layout of the interface elements according to whether the mobile phone 100 is held by the left hand or the right hand in the horizontal screen scene. In this way, the situation of finger pointing to the mirror during recording can be avoided.
下面分别针对左手持握和右手持握的两种情况来说明:The following describes the two situations of left-hand holding and right-hand holding respectively:
第一种,右手持握的情况。The first one is the case where the right hand is held.
手机100检测手机100是否处于第一姿态。其中,第一姿态是指横屏状态下,手机100处于被用户右手持握的姿态。例如,图12C中的(a)所示的就是一种第一姿态的形式。在第一姿态下,屏幕的底部与用户右手的距离,小于屏幕的顶部与用户右手的距离。也就是说,第一姿态下,屏幕的底部更靠近右手。其中,手机100可通过重力传感器的检测结果、天线的反射系数等数据来确定手机100的姿态。在一种具体的实现方式中,可通过重力传感器来检测手机100的偏角,从而确定手机100的姿态。在另一种具体的实现方式中,可根据天线的反射系数确定手机100的姿态。The mobile phone 100 detects whether the mobile phone 100 is in the first posture. Wherein, the first posture refers to a posture in which the mobile phone 100 is held by the user's right hand in a horizontal screen state. For example, what is shown in (a) in FIG. 12C is a form of the first posture. In the first gesture, the distance between the bottom of the screen and the user's right hand is smaller than the distance between the top of the screen and the user's right hand. That is to say, in the first posture, the bottom of the screen is closer to the right hand. Wherein, the mobile phone 100 can determine the attitude of the mobile phone 100 through data such as the detection result of the gravity sensor and the reflection coefficient of the antenna. In a specific implementation manner, the deflection angle of the mobile phone 100 may be detected by a gravity sensor, so as to determine the attitude of the mobile phone 100 . In another specific implementation manner, the attitude of the mobile phone 100 may be determined according to the reflection coefficient of the antenna.
由于摄像头通常是设置在手机100顶部附近的位置,也就是说,为了避免手指出镜,用户在单手持握时,会单手持握手机100的底部,而不会单手持握手机100的顶部。因此,当手机100处于第一姿态时,若采用单手持握手机100,则通常会以右手持握手机100。基于此,第一姿态也可以被称为第一持握状态,第一持握状态用于指示为右手持握手机。Since the camera is usually set near the top of the mobile phone 100, that is to say, in order to avoid finger pointing, the user will hold the bottom of the mobile phone 100 with one hand instead of the top of the mobile phone 100 when holding it with one hand. Therefore, when the mobile phone 100 is in the first posture, if the mobile phone 100 is held with one hand, the mobile phone 100 is usually held with the right hand. Based on this, the first gesture may also be referred to as a first holding state, which is used to indicate that the right hand is holding the mobile phone.
该情况下,在多镜录像模式录制中的取景界面中,手机100可将界面元素主要集中显示手机100的底部附近的位置,方便右手操作。从而不会因左手持握而导致手指出镜。In this case, in the viewfinder interface during recording in the multi-camera recording mode, the mobile phone 100 can mainly display the interface elements near the bottom of the mobile phone 100 to facilitate right-hand operation. In this way, the fingers will not be pointed out by the mirror due to the left-hand grip.
在一些实施例中,手机100可将前后摄像头切换控件、暂停录制控件、结束录制控件、拍照控件和/或面板展示控件显示在靠近屏幕的右边缘的位置,方便右手操作。In some embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may display front and rear camera switching controls, pause recording controls, end recording controls, camera controls and/or panel display controls near the right edge of the screen for right-hand operation.
示例性的,在手机100处于第一姿态的情况下,手机100可显示图12C中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式下录制中的取景界面1211。在取景界面1211中,前后摄像头切换控件 1212、暂停录制控件1213、结束录制控件1214、拍照控件1215和面板展示控件1216均显示在靠近手机100底部的位置。Exemplarily, when the mobile phone 100 is in the first posture, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 1211 shown in (a) of FIG. 12C during recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode. In the viewfinder interface 1211, the front and rear camera switch control 1212, the pause recording control 1213, the end recording control 1214, the camera control 1215 and the panel display control 1216 are all displayed near the bottom of the mobile phone 100.
在另一些实施例中,手机100可将模式图标(也可以称为第一控件)、倍速标识(也可以称为第三控件)和/或闪光灯图标(也可以称为第四控件)显示在屏幕的上边缘、靠近屏幕的右边缘的区域,方便右手操作。其中,为方便说明,屏幕的上边缘、靠近屏幕的右边缘的区域可以被称为第一区域。In some other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may display a mode icon (also referred to as the first control), a double speed logo (also referred to as the third control) and/or a flashlight icon (also referred to as the fourth control) on the The upper edge of the screen, the area near the right edge of the screen, is convenient for right-handed operation. Wherein, for convenience of description, the upper edge of the screen and the area close to the right edge of the screen may be referred to as the first area.
示例性的,延用前述图12C中的(a)的举例,在取景界面1211中,模式图标1217、倍速标识1218和闪光灯图标1219均显示在屏幕的上边缘、靠近屏幕的右边缘的区域,方便右手操作。Exemplarily, continuing the example of (a) in FIG. 12C , in the viewfinder interface 1211, the mode icon 1217, the double speed logo 1218 and the flashlight icon 1219 are all displayed on the upper edge of the screen, near the right edge of the screen, Convenient for right-handed operation.
在另一些实施例中,手机100可将变焦控件(也可以称为第二控件)显示在屏幕的下边缘、靠近屏幕的左边缘的区域,方便左手在不持握手机100的顶部的情况下,方便的进行变焦调节。其中,可以将屏幕的下边缘、靠近屏幕的左边缘的区域称为第二区域。In other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 can display the zoom control (also referred to as the second control) on the lower edge of the screen, near the left edge of the screen, so that the left hand can easily zoom in without holding the top of the mobile phone 100. , convenient for zoom adjustment. Wherein, the lower edge of the screen and the area close to the left edge of the screen may be referred to as the second area.
示例性的,延用前述图12C中的(a)的举例,变焦控件1210显示在屏幕的下边缘、靠近屏幕的顶部的位置。如图12C中的(b),用户在右手持握手机100的情况下,左手食指操作变焦控件即可完成变焦调节,大概率下用户不会通过左手持握手机100的顶部来完成变焦调节。Exemplarily, using the aforementioned example of (a) in FIG. 12C , the zoom control 1210 is displayed at the lower edge of the screen, near the top of the screen. As shown in (b) of FIG. 12C , when the user is holding the mobile phone 100 in the right hand, the user can complete the zoom adjustment by operating the zoom control with the index finger of the left hand. In a high probability, the user will not complete the zoom adjustment by holding the top of the mobile phone 100 with the left hand.
在另一些实施例中,手机100可将录制计时显示在屏幕的左边缘和屏幕的上边缘的连接处附近。从而方便查看计时。其中,为方便说明,可将屏幕的左边缘和屏幕的上边缘的连接处附近的区域称为第五区域。In some other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may display the recording timing near the junction of the left edge of the screen and the upper edge of the screen. This makes it easy to check the timing. Wherein, for the convenience of description, the area near the junction of the left edge of the screen and the upper edge of the screen may be referred to as the fifth area.
示例性的,延用前述图12C中的(a)的举例,录制计时,如“00:00”显示在屏幕的左边缘和上边缘的连接处附近。Exemplarily, following the example of (a) in FIG. 12C , the recording timing, such as "00:00", is displayed near the junction of the left edge and the upper edge of the screen.
在另一些实施例中,在画中画模式中,小窗(也可以称为第二窗口)显示在录制计时的下方。如此,可以在将录制计时显示在屏幕的左边缘和上边缘的连接处附近的同时,避免小窗对计时的遮挡。另外,为方便说明,可以将大窗称为第一窗口,第一窗口为全屏窗口。In some other embodiments, in the picture-in-picture mode, a small window (also referred to as a second window) is displayed below the recording timing. In this way, while the recording timing can be displayed near the junction of the left edge and the upper edge of the screen, the blocking of the timing by the small window can be avoided. In addition, for convenience of description, the large window may be referred to as the first window, and the first window is a full-screen window.
示例性的,在手机100处于第一姿态的情况下,手机100可显示图12C中的(c)示出的画中画模式下录制中的取景界面1221。在取景界面1221中,录制计时,如“00:00”显示在屏幕的左边缘和上边缘的连接处附近,小窗1222显示在录制计时的下方。Exemplarily, when the mobile phone 100 is in the first posture, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 1221 shown in (c) of FIG. 12C during recording in the picture-in-picture mode. In the viewfinder interface 1221, the recording timing, such as "00:00", is displayed near the junction of the left edge and the upper edge of the screen, and the small window 1222 is displayed below the recording timing.
第二种,左手持握的情况。The second is the case of holding in the left hand.
手机100检测手机100是否处于第二姿态。其中,第二姿态是指横屏状态下,手机100处于左手持握的姿态。例如,图12D中的(a)所示的就是第二姿态的一种形式。在第二姿态下,屏幕的底部与用户左手的距离,小于屏幕的顶部与用户左手的距离。也就是说,第一姿态下,屏幕的底部更靠近左手。其中,手机100可通过重力传感器的检测结果、天线的反射系数等数据来确定手机100的姿态。在一种具体的实现方式中,可通过重力传感器来检测手机100的偏角,从而确定手机100的姿态。在另一种具体的实现方式中,可根据天线的反射系数确定手机100的姿态。The mobile phone 100 detects whether the mobile phone 100 is in the second posture. Wherein, the second posture refers to a posture in which the mobile phone 100 is held by the left hand in a horizontal screen state. For example, what is shown in (a) in FIG. 12D is a form of the second gesture. In the second gesture, the distance between the bottom of the screen and the user's left hand is smaller than the distance between the top of the screen and the user's left hand. That is to say, in the first posture, the bottom of the screen is closer to the left hand. Wherein, the mobile phone 100 can determine the attitude of the mobile phone 100 through data such as the detection result of the gravity sensor and the reflection coefficient of the antenna. In a specific implementation manner, the deflection angle of the mobile phone 100 may be detected by a gravity sensor, so as to determine the attitude of the mobile phone 100 . In another specific implementation manner, the attitude of the mobile phone 100 may be determined according to the reflection coefficient of the antenna.
由于摄像头通常是设置在手机100顶部附近的位置,也就是说,为了避免手指出镜,用户在单手持握时,会单手持握手机100的底部,而不会单手持握手机100的顶部。因此,当手机100处于第二姿态时,若采用单手持握手机100,则通常会以左手持握手机100, 以避免手指出镜。基于此,第二姿态也可以被称为第二持握状态,第二持握状态用于指示为左手持握手机。Since the camera is usually set near the top of the mobile phone 100, that is to say, in order to avoid finger pointing, the user will hold the bottom of the mobile phone 100 with one hand instead of the top of the mobile phone 100 when holding it with one hand. Therefore, when the mobile phone 100 is in the second posture, if the mobile phone 100 is held with one hand, the mobile phone 100 is usually held with the left hand to avoid pointing fingers at the mirror. Based on this, the second posture may also be referred to as a second holding state, which is used to indicate that the left hand holds the mobile phone.
该情况下,在多镜录像模式录制中的取景界面中,手机100可将界面元素主要集中显示手机100的底部附近的位置,方便左手操作。从而不会因右手持握而导致手指出镜。In this case, in the viewfinder interface during recording in the multi-camera recording mode, the mobile phone 100 can mainly display the interface elements near the bottom of the mobile phone 100 to facilitate operation by the left hand. In this way, the fingers will not be pointed out by the right hand.
在一些实施例中,手机100可将前后摄像头切换控件、暂停录制控件、结束录制控件、拍照控件和/或面板展示控件显示在靠近屏幕的左边缘的位置,方便左手操作。In some embodiments, the mobile phone 100 can display front and rear camera switching controls, pause recording controls, end recording controls, camera controls and/or panel display controls near the left edge of the screen for easy operation by the left hand.
示例性的,在手机100处于第二姿态的情况下,手机100可显示图12D中的(a)示出的前后双镜模式下录制中的取景界面1231。在取景界面1231中,前后摄像头切换控件1232、暂停录制控件1234、结束录制控件1233、拍照控件1235和面板展示控件1236均显示在靠近屏幕的左边缘的位置。Exemplarily, when the mobile phone 100 is in the second posture, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 1231 shown in (a) of FIG. 12D during recording in the front and rear dual-mirror mode. In the viewfinder interface 1231 , front and rear camera switch control 1232 , pause recording control 1234 , end recording control 1233 , camera control 1235 and panel display control 1236 are all displayed near the left edge of the screen.
在另一些实施例中,手机100可将模式图标(也可以称为第一控件)、倍速标识(也可以称为第三控件)和/或闪光灯图标(也可以称为第四控件)显示在屏幕的上边缘、靠近屏幕的左边缘的区域,方便左手操作。其中,为方便说明,可以将屏幕的上边缘、靠近屏幕的左边缘的区域称为第三区域。In some other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may display a mode icon (also referred to as the first control), a double speed logo (also referred to as the third control) and/or a flashlight icon (also referred to as the fourth control) on the The upper edge of the screen and the area near the left edge of the screen are convenient for left-handed operation. Wherein, for convenience of description, the upper edge of the screen and the area close to the left edge of the screen may be referred to as the third area.
示例性的,延用前述图12D中的(a)的举例,在取景界面1231中,模式图标1237、倍速标识1238和闪光灯图标1239均显示在屏幕的上边缘、靠近屏幕的左边缘的区域,方便左手操作。Exemplarily, continuing the example of (a) in FIG. 12D , in the viewfinder interface 1231, the mode icon 1237, the double speed logo 1238 and the flashlight icon 1239 are all displayed on the upper edge of the screen, near the left edge of the screen, Convenient for left-handed operation.
在另一些实施例中,手机100可将变焦控件(也可以称为第二控件)显示在屏幕的下边缘、靠近屏幕的右边缘的区域,方便右手在不持握手机100的顶部的情况下,方便的进行变焦调节。其中,为方便说明,可以将屏幕的下边缘、靠近屏幕的右边缘的区域称为第四区域。In some other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may display the zoom control (also referred to as the second control) on the lower edge of the screen, near the right edge of the screen, so that the right hand can easily zoom in without holding the top of the mobile phone 100. , convenient for zoom adjustment. Wherein, for the convenience of description, the lower edge of the screen and the area close to the right edge of the screen may be referred to as the fourth area.
示例性的,延用前述图12D中的(a)的举例,变焦控件1230显示在屏幕的下边缘、靠近屏幕的右边缘的区域,则用户在左手持握手机100的情况下,右手食指操作变焦控件即可完成变焦调节,大概率下用户不会通过右手持握手机100的顶部来完成变焦调节。Exemplarily, following the example of (a) in FIG. 12D , the zoom control 1230 is displayed on the lower edge of the screen, near the right edge of the screen, and when the user holds the mobile phone 100 in the left hand, the right index finger operates The zoom control can be used to complete the zoom adjustment, and the user will not complete the zoom adjustment by holding the top of the mobile phone 100 with the right hand in a high probability.
在另一些实施例中,手机100可将录制计时显示在屏幕的上边缘和右边缘的连接处附近。从而方便查看计时。其中,为方便说明,可以将屏幕的上边缘和右边缘的连接处附近的区域称为第六区域。In some other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may display the recording timing near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen. This makes it easy to check the timing. Wherein, for the convenience of description, the area near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen may be referred to as the sixth area.
示例性的,延用前述图12D中的(a)的举例,录制计时,如“00:00”显示在屏幕的上边缘和右边缘的连接处附近。Exemplarily, following the example of (a) in FIG. 12D , the recording timing, such as "00:00", is displayed near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen.
在另一些实施例中,在画中画模式中,小窗(也可以称为第二窗口)显示在录制计时的下方。如此,可以在将录制计时显示在屏幕的上边缘和右边缘的连接处附近的同时,避免小窗对计时的遮挡。In some other embodiments, in the picture-in-picture mode, a small window (also referred to as a second window) is displayed below the recording timing. In this way, while the recording timing can be displayed near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen, the blocking of the timing by the small window can be avoided.
示例性的,在手机100处于第一姿态的情况下,手机100可显示图12D中的(b)示出的画中画模式下录制中的取景界面1241。在取景界面1241中,录制计时,如“00:00”显示在屏幕的上边缘和右边缘的连接处附近,小窗1242显示在录制计时的下方。Exemplarily, when the mobile phone 100 is in the first posture, the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface 1241 shown in (b) of FIG. 12D which is being recorded in the picture-in-picture mode. In the viewfinder interface 1241, the recording timing, such as "00:00", is displayed near the junction of the upper edge and the right edge of the screen, and the small window 1242 is displayed below the recording timing.
需要说明的是,前述横屏状态下,左右手持握时,界面元素的布局会随之变化的实现方案,可以应用于多镜录像的各种多镜子模式下。也就是说,该方案可以应用于本文实施例中涉及的各个取景界面。例如,前后双镜模式、画中画模式、后后双镜模式、单前置模式、单后置模式的取景界面。It should be noted that, in the horizontal screen state, the implementation scheme that the layout of the interface elements will change accordingly when the left and right hands are held, can be applied to various multi-mirror modes of multi-mirror video recording. That is to say, this solution can be applied to each viewing interface involved in the embodiments herein. For example, the viewfinder interface of front and rear dual-mirror mode, picture-in-picture mode, rear-rear dual-mirror mode, single front mode, and single rear mode.
进一步的,与竖屏状态不同的是:在横屏状态下,触发手机100展示选择面板后,选择面板的显示区域可能与面板展示控件、模式图标、倍速图标和/或闪光灯图标的显示区域存在重叠。Further, the difference from the vertical screen state is: in the horizontal screen state, after the mobile phone 100 is triggered to display the selection panel, the display area of the selection panel may exist with the display area of the panel display controls, mode icons, double-speed icons and/or flashlight icons. overlapping.
示例性的,以前后双镜模式为例,手机100响应于用户对图12C中的(a)示出的取景界面1211中模式图标1217或者面板展示控件1216的点击操作,可显示图12E中的(a)示出的取景界面1251。该取景界面1251中包括选择面板1252,该选择面板1252的显示区域覆盖了面板展示控件的显示区域、倍速图标1253的显示区域和闪光灯图标1254的显示区域。Exemplarily, taking the front and rear dual-mirror mode as an example, the mobile phone 100 may display the mode icon 1217 in the viewfinder interface 1211 shown in (a) of FIG. (a) shows the finder interface 1251. The viewfinder interface 1251 includes a selection panel 1252 , and the display area of the selection panel 1252 covers the display area of the panel display control, the display area of the double speed icon 1253 and the display area of the flash icon 1254 .
在一些实施例中,在显示选择面板后,可以将选择面板的背景设置有具有透明度的背景,从而避免对预览造成干扰。与此同时,透明的背景则可能使得被遮挡的模式图标1253和闪光灯图标1254是部分可见的。例如,图12E中的(a)示出的取景界面1251中,选择面板1252的背景是具有透明度的。从而使得被选择面板1252覆盖的模式图标1253和闪光灯图标1254是部分可见的。In some embodiments, after the selection panel is displayed, the background of the selection panel may be set to have a transparent background, so as to avoid interference with the preview. At the same time, the transparent background may make the mode icon 1253 and the flash icon 1254 partially visible which are obscured. For example, in the viewfinder interface 1251 shown in (a) of FIG. 12E , the background of the selection panel 1252 is transparent. Thus making the mode icon 1253 and the flash icon 1254 covered by the selection panel 1252 partially visible.
应理解,被遮挡的面板展示控件、模式图标、倍速图标和/或闪光灯图标部分可见,可能会干扰用户的使用。例如,用户无法准确的识别部分显示的是哪个图标。It should be understood that partially visible controls, mode icons, double-speed icons and/or flashlight icons on the covered panel may interfere with the use of the user. For example, the user cannot identify exactly which icon is partially displayed.
基于此,在一些实施例中,手机100在显示选择面板的同时,可依据选择面板在取景界面中的显示区域和取景界面中各个界面元素的显示区域,确定出与选择面板的显示区域存在重叠的目标元素。例如,面板展示控件、模式图标、倍速图标和/或闪光灯图标。而后,隐藏目标元素的显示。其中,可通过将目标元素的透明度值设置为最大值,即设置为完全透明,而实现隐藏目标元素。从而可以避免对用户造成干扰。Based on this, in some embodiments, while displaying the selection panel, the mobile phone 100 can determine that there is overlap with the display area of the selection panel according to the display area of the selection panel in the viewfinder interface and the display area of each interface element in the viewfinder interface. target element. For example, panels display controls, mode icons, double speed icons, and/or flash light icons. Then, hide the display of the target element. Wherein, the target element can be hidden by setting the transparency value of the target element to the maximum value, that is, setting it to be completely transparent. Disturbance to the user can thus be avoided.
示例性的,仍以前后双镜模式为例,手机100响应于用户对图12C中的(a)示出的取景界面1211中模式图标1217或者面板展示控件1216的点击操作,可显示图12E中的(b)示出的取景界面1255。该取景界面1255中包括选择面板1256,该选择面板1256覆盖的显示区域中的图标、控件都已被隐藏。例如,在取景界面1225中,被选择面板1256覆盖的模式图标和闪光灯图标并未部分或者全部可见。Exemplarily, still using the front and rear dual-mirror mode as an example, the mobile phone 100 may display the screen shown in FIG. (b) shows the viewfinder interface 1255 . The viewfinder interface 1255 includes a selection panel 1256, and the icons and controls in the display area covered by the selection panel 1256 have been hidden. For example, in the viewfinder interface 1225, the mode icon and the flash light icon covered by the selection panel 1256 are not partially or fully visible.
应注意,在隐藏目标元素后,手机100响应于用户的操作收起选择面板,可以再次显示目标元素。It should be noted that after the target element is hidden, the mobile phone 100 can display the target element again by retracting the selection panel in response to the user's operation.
示例性的,在手机100显示图12E中的(b)示出的取景界面1255后,手机100响应于用户对取景界面1255中模式图标的点击操作,可显示图12E中的(c)示出的取景界面1257。与取景界面1255不同的是:其一,取景界面1257中不再显示选择面板;其二,取景界面1257中显示有倍速图标、闪光灯图标和面板展示控件,而不再隐藏。Exemplarily, after the mobile phone 100 displays the viewfinder interface 1255 shown in (b) in FIG. 12E , the mobile phone 100 may display the viewfinder interface shown in (c) in FIG. 12E in response to the user's click operation on the mode icon in the viewfinder interface 1255 . Viewfinder interface 1257. The difference from the viewfinder interface 1255 is that: firstly, the selection panel is no longer displayed in the viewfinder interface 1257; secondly, the double-speed icon, the flashlight icon and panel display controls are displayed in the viewfinder interface 1257, and are no longer hidden.
本申请另一些实施例提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括:上述显示屏(如触摸屏)、存储器和一个或多个处理器。该显示屏、存储器和处理器耦合。该存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,该计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当处理器执行计算机指令时,电子设备可执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。该电子设备的结构可以参考图1所示的手机100的结构。Some other embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, which may include: the above-mentioned display screen (such as a touch screen), a memory, and one or more processors. The display screen, memory and processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device can execute various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the foregoing method embodiments. For the structure of the electronic device, reference may be made to the structure of the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1 .
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统,如图13所示,该芯片系统1300包括至少一个处理器1301和至少一个接口电路1302。处理器1301和接口电路1302可通过线路互联。例如,接口电路1302可用于从其它装置(例如电子设备的存储器)接收信号。又例如,接 口电路1302可用于向其它装置(例如处理器1301)发送信号。示例性的,接口电路1302可读取存储器中存储的指令,并将该指令发送给处理器1301。当所述指令被处理器1301执行时,可使得电子设备执行上述实施例中的各个步骤。当然,该芯片系统还可以包含其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, as shown in FIG. 13 , the chip system 1300 includes at least one processor 1301 and at least one interface circuit 1302 . The processor 1301 and the interface circuit 1302 may be interconnected through wires. For example, interface circuit 1302 may be used to receive signals from other devices, such as memory of an electronic device. As another example, the interface circuit 1302 may be used to send signals to other devices (such as the processor 1301). Exemplarily, the interface circuit 1302 can read instructions stored in the memory, and send the instructions to the processor 1301 . When the instructions are executed by the processor 1301, the electronic device may be made to execute various steps in the foregoing embodiments. Of course, the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在上述电子设备上运行时,使得该电子设备执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on the above-mentioned electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform the various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above-mentioned method embodiment .
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the method embodiment above.
通过以上实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above functional modules is used as an example for illustration. In practical applications, the above functions can be assigned by Completion of different functional modules means that the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed devices and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components can be Incorporation or may be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented. In another point, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The unit described as a separate component may or may not be physically separated, and the component displayed as a unit may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, it may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places . Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机,芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the software product is stored in a storage medium Among them, several instructions are included to make a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes such as U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk.
以上内容,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above content is only the specific implementation of the application, but the protection scope of the application is not limited thereto, and any changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in the application shall be covered within the protection scope of the application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be determined by the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (25)

  1. 一种视频拍摄方法,其特征在于,应用于电子设备,包括:A video shooting method, characterized in that it is applied to electronic equipment, comprising:
    所述电子设备显示第一界面,所述第一界面是所述电子设备录像的取景界面,所述第一界面中包括第一摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第一预览图像;所述第一预览图像全屏显示在所述第一界面中;所述电子设备的摄像头的采集参数包括帧率和/或分辨率;The electronic device displays a first interface, the first interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording of the electronic device, and the first interface includes a first preview image collected by a first camera with a first collection parameter; the first The preview image is displayed in the first interface in full screen; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution;
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一界面的第一操作,所述第一操作用于触发所述电子设备切换使用第二摄像头和第三摄像头采集图像;The electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the second camera and the third camera to capture images;
    所述电子设备响应于所述第一操作,若所述第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,所述电子设备显示第二界面;所述第二界面是所述电子设备录像的取景界面,所述第二界面包括所述第二摄像头以第二采集参数采集的第二预览图像和所述第三摄像头以第二采集参数采集的第三预览图像;所述第二采集参数小于所述第一采集参数。In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays a second interface if the first acquisition parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold; the second interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, so The second interface includes the second preview image collected by the second camera with the second collection parameters and the third preview image collected by the third camera with the second collection parameters; the second collection parameter is smaller than the first Collect parameters.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising:
    所述电子设备响应于所述第一操作,若所述第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,所述电子设备显示第三界面;所述第三界面是所述电子设备录像的取景界面,所述第三界面包括所述第二摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第四预览图像和所述第三摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第五预览图像。In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays a third interface if the first collection parameter is less than a preset parameter threshold; the third interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, so The third interface includes a fourth preview image collected by the second camera with the first collection parameters and a fifth preview image collected by the third camera with the first collection parameters.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一采集参数包括第一帧率,所述第二采集参数包括第二帧率,所述第二帧率小于所述第一帧率;The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first acquisition parameter includes a first frame rate, the second acquisition parameter includes a second frame rate, and the second frame rate is lower than the first frame rate;
    其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值。Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold includes: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold.
  4. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一采集参数包括第一分辨率,所述第二采集参数包括第二分辨率,所述第二分辨率小于所述第一分辨率;The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first acquisition parameter includes a first resolution, the second acquisition parameter includes a second resolution, and the second resolution is smaller than the first resolution. resolution;
    其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值。Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold includes: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold.
  5. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一采集参数包括第一帧率和第一分辨率,所述第二采集参数包括第二帧率和第二分辨率;所述第二帧率小于所述第一帧率,和/或,所述第二分辨率小于所述第一分辨率;The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first acquisition parameters include a first frame rate and a first resolution, and the second acquisition parameters include a second frame rate and a second resolution; The second frame rate is less than the first frame rate, and/or, the second resolution is less than the first resolution;
    其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值,和/或,所述第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值。Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or, the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备显示第二界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein after the electronic device displays the second interface, the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述第二界面的第二操作,所述第二操作用于触发所述电子设备切换使用第四摄像头采集图像;The electronic device receives a user's second operation on the second interface, and the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch to use the fourth camera to capture images;
    所述电子设备响应于所述第二操作,显示第四界面,所述第四界面是所述电子设备录像的取景界面,所述第四界面中包括第四摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第六预览图像;所述第六预览图像全屏显示在所述第四界面中。In response to the second operation, the electronic device displays a fourth interface, the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface for video recording by the electronic device, and the fourth interface includes a fourth camera that uses the first acquisition parameters to collect The sixth preview image; the sixth preview image is displayed in the fourth interface in full screen.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面中还包括第一提示信息,所述第一提示信息用于提示已切换分辨率和/或帧率。The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the second interface further includes first prompt information, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the resolution and/or frame rate have been switched .
  8. 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一界面是所述电子设 备录像前的取景界面,所述第二界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面;或者,The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein the first interface is a viewfinder interface before recording of the electronic device, and the second interface is a viewfinder interface before recording of the electronic device ;or,
    所述第一界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第二界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面。The first interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面;The method according to claim 8, characterized in that, the first interface is a viewfinder interface before recording of the electronic device;
    其中,在所述电子设备显示第一界面之后,所述方法还包括:Wherein, after the electronic device displays the first interface, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一界面的第三操作,所述第三操作用于触发所述电子设备设置所述采集参数;The electronic device receives a third operation performed by the user on the first interface, and the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set the collection parameter;
    所述电子设备响应于用户对所述第一界面的所述第三操作,显示参数选项,所述参数选项中包括第一选项,所述第一选项对应第三采集参数,所述第三采集参数大于预设参数阈值;The electronic device displays parameter options in response to the third operation performed by the user on the first interface, the parameter options include a first option, the first option corresponds to a third collection parameter, and the third collection parameter The parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold;
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一选项的选择操作;The electronic device receives a user's selection operation on the first option;
    所述电子设备响应于所述选择操作,设置所述采集参数为第三采集参数。The electronic device sets the collection parameter as a third collection parameter in response to the selection operation.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面;The method according to claim 9, characterized in that, the second interface is a viewfinder interface before recording of the electronic device;
    其中,在所述电子设备显示第二界面之后,所述方法还包括:Wherein, after the electronic device displays the second interface, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述第二界面的第三操作,所述第三操作用于触发所述电子设备设置所述采集参数;The electronic device receives a third operation performed by the user on the second interface, and the third operation is used to trigger the electronic device to set the collection parameter;
    所述电子设备响应于用户对所述第二界面的所述第三操作,显示参数选项,所述参数选项中不包括所述第一选项,或者,所述第一选项处于不可选择的状态。The electronic device displays parameter options in response to the third operation performed by the user on the second interface, and the parameter options do not include the first option, or the first option is in an unselectable state.
  11. 根据权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第二界面中包括第一控件和第二控件,所述第一控件用于指示所述电子设备当前采用的录制模式,以及用于触发所述电子设备切换录制模式;所述第二控件用于触发所述电子设备切换后置摄像头;The method according to any one of claims 1-10, wherein the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the second interface includes a first control and a second control, The first control is used to indicate the recording mode currently adopted by the electronic device, and is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode; the second control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the rear camera;
    其中,所述电子设备显示第二界面,包括:Wherein, the electronic device displays a second interface, including:
    在横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述电子设备的屏幕的第一区域显示所述第一控件,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第二区域显示所述第二控件;所述第一持握状态用于指示用户右手持握所述电子设备;所述第一区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的上边缘、靠近所述屏幕的右边缘的区域;所述第二区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的下边缘、靠近所述屏幕的左边缘的区域;In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the first control in the first area of the screen of the electronic device, and the electronic device The second control is displayed in the second area of the screen; the first holding state is used to indicate that the user is holding the electronic device with his right hand; the first area is in the horizontal screen state, located in the The upper edge of the screen, an area close to the right edge of the screen; the second area is an area located at the lower edge of the screen and close to the left edge of the screen in the landscape orientation;
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二持握状态,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第三区域显示所述第一控件,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第四区域显示所述第二控件;所述第二持握状态用于指示用户左手持握所述电子设备;所述第三区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的上边缘、靠近所述屏幕的左边缘的区域;所述第四区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的下边缘、靠近所述屏幕的右边缘的区域。In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the first control in the third area of the screen, and the electronic device displays the first control in the third area of the screen. The fourth area of the screen displays the second control; the second holding state is used to indicate that the user holds the electronic device with his left hand; the third area is in the horizontal screen state and is located on the screen The upper edge of the screen is an area close to the left edge of the screen; the fourth area is an area located at the lower edge of the screen and close to the right edge of the screen in the horizontal screen state.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面中还包括第三控件,所述第三控件用于触发所述电子设备切换播放录制的视频的速度;The method according to claim 11, wherein the second interface further includes a third control, the third control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the speed of playing the recorded video;
    其中,所述电子设备显示第二界面,包括:Wherein, the electronic device displays a second interface, including:
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电 子设备在所述第一区域显示所述第三控件;In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the third control in the first area;
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二持握状态,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示所述第三控件。In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the third control in the third area.
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面中还包括第四控件,所述第四控件用于触发所述电子设备设置闪光灯;The method according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the second interface further includes a fourth control, the fourth control is used to trigger the electronic device to set a flash;
    其中,所述电子设备显示第二界面,包括:Wherein, the electronic device displays a second interface, including:
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述第一区域显示所述第四控件;In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the fourth control in the first area;
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二持握状态,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示所述第四控件。In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the fourth control in the third area.
  14. 根据权利要求11-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面中包括录制计时;The method according to any one of claims 11-13, wherein the second interface includes recording timing;
    其中,所述电子设备显示第二界面,包括:Wherein, the electronic device displays a second interface, including:
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第五区域显示所述录制计时;所述第五区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的上边缘和所述屏幕的左边缘的相交位置附近的区域;In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the recording timing in the fifth area of the screen; the fifth area is In the horizontal screen state, an area located near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the left edge of the screen;
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二持握状态,所述电子设备在所述屏幕的第六区域显示所述录制计时;所述第六区域是所述横屏状态下,位于所述屏幕的上边缘和所述屏幕的右边缘的相交位置附近的区域。In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the recording timing in the sixth area of the screen; the sixth area is In the horizontal screen state, an area near the intersection of the upper edge of the screen and the right edge of the screen.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二预览图像显示在所述第二界面的第一窗口中,所述第三预览图像显示在所述第二界面的第二窗口中,所述第一窗口为全屏窗口,所述第二窗口位于所述第一窗口内;The method according to claim 14, wherein the second preview image is displayed in the first window of the second interface, and the third preview image is displayed in the second window of the second interface , the first window is a full-screen window, and the second window is located in the first window;
    其中,所述电子设备显示第二界面,包括:Wherein, the electronic device displays a second interface, including:
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第一握持状态,所述电子设备在所述第五区域的下方显示所述第二窗口;In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the first holding state, the electronic device displays the second window below the fifth area;
    在所述横屏状态下,若所述电子设备检测到所述电子设备处于第二握持状态,所述电子设备在所述第六区域的下方显示所述第二窗口。In the horizontal screen state, if the electronic device detects that the electronic device is in the second holding state, the electronic device displays the second window below the sixth area.
  16. 根据权利要求11-15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备根据所述电子设备的天线的反射系数确定所述电子设备所处的持握状态。The method according to any one of claims 11-15, characterized in that the method further comprises: the electronic device determines the holding state of the electronic device according to the reflection coefficient of the antenna of the electronic device .
  17. 一种视频拍摄方法,其特征在于,应用于电子设备,包括:A video shooting method, characterized in that it is applied to electronic equipment, comprising:
    所述电子设备显示第一界面,所述第一界面是所述电子设备录像前的取景界面,所述第一界面中包括第一摄像头以第一采集参数采集的第一预览图像,所述第一预览图像全屏显示在所述第一界面中;所述电子设备的摄像头的采集参数包括帧率和/或分辨率;The electronic device displays a first interface, the first interface is a viewfinder interface before video recording by the electronic device, the first interface includes a first preview image collected by the first camera with the first collection parameters, and the first interface A preview image is displayed in full screen on the first interface; the acquisition parameters of the camera of the electronic device include frame rate and/or resolution;
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一界面的第一操作,所述第一操作用于触发所述电子设备开始录像;The electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first interface, and the first operation is used to trigger the electronic device to start video recording;
    所述电子设备响应于所述第一操作,若所述第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,所述电子设备显示第二界面;所述第二界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第二界面中包括所述第一摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第二预览图像和处于可操作状态的第一控件;The electronic device responds to the first operation, and if the first acquisition parameter is less than a preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a second interface; the second interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, The second interface includes a second preview image collected by the first camera with the first collection parameters and a first control in an operable state;
    所述电子设备响应于所述第一操作,若所述第一采集参数大于预设参数阈值,所述电子设备显示第三界面;所述第三界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第三界面中包括所述第二预览图像,所述第三界面中不包括所述处于可操作状态的第一控件;The electronic device responds to the first operation, and if the first collection parameter is greater than a preset parameter threshold, the electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, The third interface includes the second preview image, and the third interface does not include the first control in an operable state;
    其中,所述第一控件用于触发所述电子设备切换录制模式,所述录制模式包括使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式。Wherein, the first control is used to trigger the electronic device to switch the recording mode, and the recording mode includes a mode of using two cameras to collect images.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一采集参数包括第一帧率;The method according to claim 17, wherein the first collection parameters include a first frame rate;
    其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值;所述第一采集参数小于预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率小于所述预设帧率阈值。Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold; the first acquisition parameter is less than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold.
  19. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一采集参数包括第一分辨率;The method according to claim 17, wherein the first acquisition parameters include a first resolution;
    其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值;所述所述第一采集参数小于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一分辨率小于所述预设分辨率阈值。Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold; the first acquisition parameter is smaller than the preset parameter threshold, including: the The first resolution is smaller than the preset resolution threshold.
  20. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一采集参数包括第一帧率和第一分辨率;The method according to claim 17, wherein the first acquisition parameters include a first frame rate and a first resolution;
    其中,所述第一采集参数大于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率大于预设帧率阈值,和/或,所述第一分辨率大于预设分辨率阈值;所述第一采集参数小于所述预设参数阈值,包括:所述第一帧率小于所述预设帧率阈值,和,所述第一分辨率小于所述预设分辨率阈值。Wherein, the first acquisition parameter is greater than the preset parameter threshold, including: the first frame rate is greater than the preset frame rate threshold, and/or, the first resolution is greater than the preset resolution threshold; the The first acquisition parameter being less than the preset parameter threshold includes: the first frame rate is less than the preset frame rate threshold, and the first resolution is less than the preset resolution threshold.
  21. 根据权利要求17-20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备显示第二界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 17-20, wherein after the electronic device displays the second interface, the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述处于可操作状态的第一控件的第二操作,所述第二操作用于触发所述电子设备切换录制模式;The electronic device receives a user's second operation on the first control in an operable state, and the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch recording modes;
    所述电子设备响应于用户对所述处于可操作状态的第一控件的所述第二操作,在所述第二界面显示模式选项,所述模式选项中包括第一选项,所述第一选项对应使用两个摄像头采集图像的模式;In response to the user's second operation on the first control in the operable state, the electronic device displays mode options on the second interface, the mode options include a first option, and the first option Corresponds to the mode of using two cameras to capture images;
    所述电子设备响应于用户对所述第一选项的选择操作,显示第四界面;所述第四界面是所述电子设备正在录像的取景界面,所述第四界面中包括第二摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第三预览图像和第三摄像头以所述第一采集参数采集的第四预览图像。The electronic device displays a fourth interface in response to the user's selection operation on the first option; the fourth interface is a viewfinder interface where the electronic device is recording, and the fourth interface includes a second camera to The third preview image acquired by the first acquisition parameters and the fourth preview image acquired by the third camera by the first acquisition parameters.
  22. 根据权利要求17-21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三界面中包括处于不可操作状态的第一控件;The method according to any one of claims 17-21, wherein the third interface includes a first control in an inoperable state;
    在所述电子设备显示第三界面之后,所述方法还包括:After the electronic device displays the third interface, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述处于不可操作状态的第一控件的第二操作,所述第二操作用于触发所述电子设备切换录制模式;The electronic device receives a user's second operation on the first control that is in an inoperable state, and the second operation is used to trigger the electronic device to switch recording modes;
    所述电子设备响应于用户对所述处于不可操作状态的第一控件的所述第二操作,在所述第三界面中显示第一提示信息,所述第一提示信息用于提示不可切换使用两个摄像头采集图像。In response to the user's second operation on the first control in the inoperable state, the electronic device displays first prompt information on the third interface, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that it cannot be switched to use Two cameras capture images.
  23. 根据权利要求17-22中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三界面中不包括所述第一控件。The method according to any one of claims 17-22, wherein the first control is not included in the third interface.
  24. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括显示屏、存储器和一个或多个处 理器;所述显示屏、所述存储器和所述处理器耦合;所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-23中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes a display screen, a memory and one or more processors; the display screen, the memory and the processor are coupled; the memory is used to store computer program codes , the computer program code includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is made to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-23.
  25. 一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,其特征在于,当所述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-23中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, wherein when the instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute any one of claims 1-23. method described in the item.
PCT/CN2022/091026 2021-06-16 2022-05-05 Video photographing method and electronic device WO2022262451A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110669410.5 2021-06-16
CN202110669410 2021-06-16
CN202111178136.8A CN115484385B (en) 2021-06-16 2021-10-09 Video shooting method and electronic equipment
CN202111178136.8 2021-10-09

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022262451A1 true WO2022262451A1 (en) 2022-12-22

Family

ID=84420619

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/091026 WO2022262451A1 (en) 2021-06-16 2022-05-05 Video photographing method and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115484385B (en)
WO (1) WO2022262451A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016172619A1 (en) * 2015-04-23 2016-10-27 Apple Inc. Digital viewfinder user interface for multiple cameras
CN106412412A (en) * 2015-07-28 2017-02-15 Lg电子株式会社 Mobile terminal and method for controlling same
CN108683852A (en) * 2018-05-23 2018-10-19 努比亚技术有限公司 A kind of video recording method, terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN110072070A (en) * 2019-03-18 2019-07-30 华为技术有限公司 A kind of multichannel kinescope method and equipment
CN112492209A (en) * 2020-11-30 2021-03-12 维沃移动通信有限公司 Shooting method, shooting device and electronic equipment

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106713743A (en) * 2016-11-24 2017-05-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 Camera temperature control method and mobile terminal
US10674072B1 (en) * 2019-05-06 2020-06-02 Apple Inc. User interfaces for capturing and managing visual media
WO2020073172A1 (en) * 2018-10-08 2020-04-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Methods and devices for capturing high-speed and high-definition videos
CN111050062B (en) * 2018-10-15 2022-01-14 华为技术有限公司 Shooting method and electronic equipment
KR20200101207A (en) * 2019-02-19 2020-08-27 삼성전자주식회사 Electronic device and method for modifying magnification of image using multiple cameras
CN110049245A (en) * 2019-04-22 2019-07-23 联想(北京)有限公司 Information processing method and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016172619A1 (en) * 2015-04-23 2016-10-27 Apple Inc. Digital viewfinder user interface for multiple cameras
CN106412412A (en) * 2015-07-28 2017-02-15 Lg电子株式会社 Mobile terminal and method for controlling same
CN108683852A (en) * 2018-05-23 2018-10-19 努比亚技术有限公司 A kind of video recording method, terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN110072070A (en) * 2019-03-18 2019-07-30 华为技术有限公司 A kind of multichannel kinescope method and equipment
CN112492209A (en) * 2020-11-30 2021-03-12 维沃移动通信有限公司 Shooting method, shooting device and electronic equipment

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ANONYMOUS: "The iPhone's multi-camera feature, now available", 15 February 2020 (2020-02-15), XP093015775, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://www.sohu.com/a/373285804_239259> [retrieved on 20230119] *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115484385A (en) 2022-12-16
CN115484385B (en) 2023-12-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021213477A1 (en) Viewfinding method for multichannel video recording, graphic user interface, and electronic device
CN103999446B (en) The user interface of electronic equipment
WO2022252660A1 (en) Video capturing method and electronic device
US11539888B2 (en) Method and apparatus for processing video data
WO2021219141A1 (en) Photographing method, graphic user interface, and electronic device
WO2023134583A1 (en) Video recording method and apparatus, and electronic device
WO2024051578A1 (en) Image capturing method and apparatus, device, and storage medium
CN115706850B (en) Image shooting method, device and storage medium
CN117609547A (en) Video thumbnail display method, apparatus and storage medium
WO2022262451A1 (en) Video photographing method and electronic device
WO2022257655A1 (en) Video photographing method and electronic device
CN117692552A (en) Wallpaper display method, electronic equipment and storage medium
WO2022262452A1 (en) Video shooting method and electronic device
CN111835977B (en) Image sensor, image generation method and device, electronic device, and storage medium
CN115484390B (en) Video shooting method and electronic equipment
EP4258130A1 (en) Method and apparatus for viewing multimedia content
CN115484392B (en) Video shooting method and electronic equipment
RU2809660C1 (en) Frame method for recording multichannel video, graphic user interface and electronic device
CN114520874B (en) Video processing method and device and electronic equipment
WO2023226699A1 (en) Video recording method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2023231696A1 (en) Photographing method and related device
CN114071009B (en) Shooting method and equipment
WO2023226694A1 (en) Video recording method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2023226695A1 (en) Video recording method and apparatus, and storage medium
CN114943791A (en) Animation playing method, device, equipment and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22823934

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE